2021 Audi A5 14

Owner's Manual
2021 AS
Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Foreword
Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us.
Your new Audi will allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technology and premium quality
equipment that a vehicle has to offer. Audi recommends that you read your Owner's Manual thoroughly
so that you quickly become acquainted with your Audi and make use of all of its features.
In addition to explaining how the different features work, there are many useful tips and information
concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle, and how to maintain your vehicle's value. Audi also
gives you useful tips and information on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently and in an environ-
mentally-friendly manner.
Audi hopes you enjoy driving your vehicle and wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.
ZA\ warNiNc
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or
off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals includ-
ing engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize expo-
sure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.
ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
8W7012721BB
Table of contents
About this Owner's Manual...... Valetiparking = s ssse «x cscs ov crue a ¥ oe 47

Garage door opener..........--.00 eee 48
SUMIMAry: < = exe : eens:
Seen cs sens
QutckeaeCe ssh: «i esis se ois a eaves @ POWOEPRtOP lies. 5 6 sisi. ae sic ao oie & wae 51
Cockpit. ...... 0... eee eee eee eee Automatic power top................. 51
Indicator lights overview...........4.. Wind deflect6r « cccs ss pees sv eeea sv ees 54
Power top emergency operation........ 55
Display and operation........... 12
Instrument cluster............... 12 Lights and Vision................. 58
Instrument cluster overview........... 12 Exteriorlighting « css < «sees < ¢ caew soars 58
Operating. ecccuse w+ were oo wens oo ayes 9 ¥ 13 Interior lightinGpenis « « sen 0 mew © 2 amore 62
Adjusting the display................. 13 VISION. 2... eee ee eee eee 63
Coolant temperature display........... 14 Windshield wipers..................- 65
Tachometer’ series i ewe so snes ¥ & ome 14 Digital. compass’. « . ceria ss caw s cei es 67
Odometer.............. cee eee eee ee 15
Outside temperature display........... 15 Sitting correctly and safely...... 69
Engine oil temperature indicator....... 15 Correct passenger seating position...... 69
Boost indicator...............0--000. 16 Front seats .......
0c eee 69
Shift light indicator.................. 16 Steering Wheel sows » s wou sg wane x x see 73
Sportidisplaystens « scwne x » eum os vomew «02 16 Head restraintsti:. «ose a a nase ao oan ae 73
Vehicle functions ..............00000. 16 Safety belts. .............0...00000. 75
Memory function..............ee sees 78
TOUCH AISPLAY ' sevece: 3 seisas 6 sessen 6 6 ws 18 ‘Airbag SYSteM eviscie co soaae es werae oo eee 79
General touch display operation........ 18 Child safety seats... ...... 00... eee eee 84
Multi Media Interface................ 20
Storage and convenience........ 91
Head-up display.................. 26 POWEPISQUIGES vases + arouse « 6 eomaime « + eects 91
Description............0..
ee cee eee 26 Cup holders.............
eee eee eee 91
Storage and compartments............ 92
Voice recognition system........ 27 Luggage compartment............... 92
General information..............00. 27 Roof rack... 2.0.2...
2c eee eee eee 96
DESGriptiOns « = seen ¢ = seme xs eee st eee 27
External voice operation.............. 28 Warmandicoled ioc. es isco & 6 anes 9 5 ae 98
Climate control system............... 98
Global functions................. 30 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control. 99
Additional function buttons........... 30 Steering wheel heating............... 102
Fluids in the A/C system.............. 102
Starting and driving............. 311.
Personalization.................. Bi DYPIVITVE: « eens ¢ & cars ¢ & seme 4 2 HasEE Ee 103
3, Starting the vehicle.................. 103
When driving.............00eeee eens 104
Opening and closing............. 34 Drive SYStEMisses ¢ = sawe + « mee se eee sb 110
Central locking) sani x x swasien © x sponae 2 aaaonor 34 Start/Stopisystei « sso so aceon 4 @ suena a 111
Keys... eee 38 Brakes... . 2.2.2.0...
2c eee ee eee eee 112
Luggage compartment lid............. Al Electromechanical parking brake....... 114
Childisafety lock seis 2 « sere ¥ © were 3 ¢ overs 45 Special driving situations.............. 116
Power windows............000eeeeee 45
Panorartiic glass roof 0... ieee s ieee es 47
Table of contents
Brivirigy cy mieirles. cies i 6 scious 6 6 esses 6 118 Using the telephone.................. 175
Audi drive select............00
eee eee 118 SettingS 00... . cece cee eee eee eee 178
SUSPENSION: + yews a x mem a e Bees se CeRRE L19 MOSSAGES cours « s eauu § 2 eueeS Fo EGE FE BS 179
StOOKIING cms a v ves 8 ceawem ¥ sen ¥ erzaees LIS. Troubleshooting sic ss wes oe ween es owe 181
All wheel drive (quattro) .............. 120
Electronic Stabilization Control......... 121 Audi CONNECE : «6: = i e665 st ees so 182
General information................. 182
Trailer towing.................0-. 124 Audi connect Infotainment............ 182
Driving with atrailer................. 124 Using a Wi-Fi hotspot 183
Audi connect Infotainment services..... 183
Assist systems................... 126 Functions on demand................ 184
Assist systems................00. 126 Audi connect vehicle control services.... 184
General information................. 126 SOttingS sews + 9 cae ¥ eee ¥ perms we pee 185
Surrounding area detection............ 127 Troubleshooting..............--.0005 186
Driving information.............. 130 Emergency call................... 187

Speed warning system..............-. 130 OVERVIEW. secs. 6 x sxcvers 6 emutes @ a eavaens vw ame
Camera-based traffic sign recognition... 130 Emergency call
Traffic light information.............. 132 Online roadside assistance............ 188
Lap etimeris « & esuass « 6 mesns « o uve & & meee 133
Acceleration measurement............ 134 Navigation.....................05. 190
Integrated Toll Module............... 135 Opening navigation.................. 190
myAudi navigation................00. 190
Driver assistance................. 136 Entering adestination..............0- 191
Cruise control system................ 136 Stopping route guidance.............. 194
Efficiency assist .«<s +s saws ss eeu te ees 137 Mapes & 5 saves © 2 saws yo sme @ & Hew 2 2 Be 194
Audi adaptive cruise control........... 139 Alternative routes................04. 196
Traffic jam assist............00.-000- 147 Additional functions...............0-- 196
Distance Warning « « sais + s ewe 2 o eee & s 149 Satellite Map’s + 6 gare = cama a e weep os oe 197
Audi active lane assist/lane departure Mapreipdates » cmos + x sre: «2 anes aw onnens 198
warning............ 20. ce eee eee 150 Traffic incidents.............. 000 eee 199
AUGi PrESGNSe « esis sx cows < e cams & eaew 152 SOtuiNGS wows ¢ « eeen ¢ nae 2 Bees doe 200
Sidevassist vccssv: «x ceavous ov aseuase ao cerns © 8 ane 156
Exit warning ...............-e eee eee 157 Radio....... cece eee 202
Generalinformation................. 202
Parking and maneuvering....... 59: Radio functions sss < eins 2 + wen 3 6 eacern 203
Introduction. ............ 2. eee eee ee 159 Online radio... .... eee eee eee 206
Parkitig:aid plUS = ssa < 2 esos ¢ ¥ Sana 4 x 159 Options and settings................. 207
Rearview camera and peripheral cameras. 161 Troubleshooting wisi « s wen» 6 eae o + wae 208
Rear cross-traffic assist............... 165
Assisted parking.........-...0---
eee 166 Media.................
0c cece eee 210
ParkeaSsiSt’s cass a = sane s x pany s & eens 3 5 168 General information................. 210
Bluetooth audio player............... 210
Infotainment system............ 171 Amazon Alexa ..........0.00
eee eee 211
Telephone..............cece eee U7. Multimedia connections.............. 211
TMEROGUCTION « & cess wo wcinase we a oraeni ow awenaie 171 Playing medias... crocs s 0 samen 4 o snmeie «0 one 212
8W7012721BB
Setup... 2.2... cee eee

eee eee 171 Options and settings................- 216
Using the Audi phone box............. 173
Table of contents
Supported media and file formats...... 216 JUIMIPFSTANEING 5 x exces 6 w erates @ a cawcens vw ae 280
Troubleshooting..............000eeee 218 TOWING... cece ete 282
Audi smartphone interface...... 219 Fuses and bulbs.................. 285

Setup... .. 0... eee eee eee 219 Fuses... 0... eee ee eee eee 285
Troubleshooting «cx «sess
se eee s 3 ves 220 BUILDS: sss s = wavs & & ees 5 2 ctetDs sb eG ee 289
Additional settings.............. 221 Customer information........... 290

System settingS..............e ee eee 221 Data privacy................000 eee 290
Software update: « ccs ss e054 een ee ve 222 Privacy NOLICE « naw, 2 w aay ¥ Kaew + Meee © 290
Connected devices............00.000s 223 Timage reGOrding). « « canew + sect ws caver a os 290
Legalinformation................... 224 Data memories............00.00e eee 290
Transmitted information.............. 291
Additional information.......... 225
Brands and licenses..........-...0-5- 225 Accessories and technical
CINERGSS:. « » sem: : x ews ce ee be ee ee 294
Maintenance and Care........... 226 Warranty’ « = eon x 2 manors 6 o ois wv ee 6 294
Checking and Filling............. 226 Audi Literature Shop.............000- 294
FilClae « ¢ agisu @ & maven 2 e SINS BE SePeE YE ee 226 Driving in other countries............. 294
RePUCLINGiecs + 2 mein oo een eae ¥ wer 227 Maintenance, repairs, and technical
Emissions control system............. 229 modifications..................00008 294
Engine compartment................. 230 Accessories and parts..............-. 296
EMGine Oils: seas 2 = wave = ¢ eoume 5 y couse 6 2g 233 Reporting Safety Defects.............. 296
Cooling systeM...........00 0-2 ee eee 236 Declaration of compliance for
Brake fllid. 0.2...
eee eee eee ee 238 telecommunications equipment and
ElectricalsysteM esa. ecw + y pews se ee 239 electroniesystems's « «cows
se mean 2 news 297
Battenyis « o masse © o cxasane «a sincere « a averse © ere 239
Windshield washer system...........- 242 Technical data.................... 299
Service interval display............... 242 Identification data................... 299
Vehicle datatics ss saves o srewa sv awe 0 ve 299
Wheels .......... 66. cece eee eee eee 244
Whieelsiaind Tires « caus « « cara sv eee eo 9 244 TAAGK es = see « = wee « = owe Be nee eg oe 301
Tire pressure monitoring system....... 262
Tire pressure monitoring system....... 263
Care and cleaning................ 267

General information 0... ..c.6 eee 267
Car washes....................0000. 267
Cleaning and care information......... 268
Taking your vehicle out of service....... 273
DO Tt VOUrSEUF ics « sce g + pass ss pews 274

Emergency assistance........... 274
Generalinformation................. 274
EQUIPITIONE sce + & wswu + wowe xe eee a ee 274
Tire MODILitY KE eccsins se sonceoe a x oneivens a ares 274
Changingatire............... 2. eee 277
Space-saving spare tire............... 280
About this Owner's Manual
In this manual, Audi provides important informa- => A\ Cross reference to a “WARNING” within a
tion, tips, suggestions, and warnings for using section. Ifa page number is indicated, the
your vehicle. “Audi” refers to AUDI AG, the re- WARNING is located outside of the section.
spective importer in a country, as well as joint
ventures. IN WARNING
It has always been Audi's policy to continuously Text with this symbol contains information
improve its products. Audi reserves the right to about safety and how to reduce the risk of se-
make changes in design and specifications, and rious personal injury or death.
to make additions or improvements in its prod-
ucts without incurring any obligation to install C) Note
them on products previously manufactured. This Text with this symbol contains information
owner's manual is based on the current data about reducing the risk of damage to your ve-
available when it was printed. Text, illustrations, hicle.
and specifications in this owner's manual are
based on the most current information available (@) For the sake of the environment
at the time of printing, and shall not constitute a Text with this symbol contains information on
basis for liability claims. protecting the environment.
KEEP THIS GUIDE
G) Tips
Keep this manual and any other applicable docu-
Text with this symbol contains additional use-
ments in your vehicle at all times. This is espe-
ful information.
cially important if you loan your vehicle to others
or sell it.
This owner's manual describes the equipment

range for all model versions of this vehicle at the
time of printing. Individual equipment options
described may only be available at a later date or
may only be offered in certain countries.
Some sections in this manual do not apply to all

vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of
the section indicates the validity, for example
“Applies to: vehicles with speed warning sys-
tem”. Optional or vehicle-specific equipment is
also identified with an asterisk ugn “*”.
The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

Some of the details in your vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

“rear”, are based on the vehicle's direction of
travel.
* — Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equip-

ment
b> The section continues on the next page.
8W7012721BB
Quick access
Quick access
Cockpit
[RAZ-0894)
Fig. 1 Cockpit
@ Door handle ® Lockable glove compartment with:

@ Central locking switch 36 — Valet Parking function 47
@ Memory function buttons 78 Front passenger's airbag 79
OOO®
@ Vent Knee airbag 79

© Lever for: Climate control system .......... 98
—Turn signals and high beams .... 59 Depending on equipment, buttons
— High beam assistant .......... 59 for:
— Audi active lane assist ......... 150 drive SELCCE cassis «6 sossan © 4 esr © 6s 118
— Traffic jam assist ............. 147 — Start/Stop system Tit
Multifunction steering wheel with: — Electronic Stabilization Control
©
— Horn he (ESC) 122

— Driver's airbag 79 — Parkassist os 5 & enies so acs x ¢ ee 168
— Operating buttons 13,30 — Parking system 159
—Shift paddles ................ 107 —Center display ................
Instrument cluster ............. 12
©OO®
OO©eCS9
Reset trip odometer ............ 15 Cup holder ...............0000.

Windshield washer system lever .. 65 MMI On/Off button
Emergency flashers ............. 61 Opening and closing the power top .
Center display ................. 20
Quick access
@) Center armrest with storage com- turn on when you switch the ignition on and must
partment. Depending on vehicle turn off when the drive system is switched on or
equipment, it may have: while driving.
— Audi music interface .......... 211 With some indicator lights, messages may ap-
—Audi phone box ............... 173 pear and warning signals may sound. The indica-
— Starting the engine if there is a tor lights and messages may be covered by other
MALFUMERION since oo sxosoue x 2 seems ss 103 displays. To show them again, select the second
@) Electromechanical parking brake tab for messages with the multifunction steering
BUGGOT sieves so cman « 2 ewes 2s men 2 114 wheel > page 13.
@) Selector lever (automatic transmis-
Some indicator lights in the display can display in
SIOM) seo so neon & v Howe & eRe Fa 105
several colors.
@4 Storage compartment .......... 92
@) [START ENGINE STOP]button .... 103
OMe ere ella Uf
@6 Audi music interface ............ 211
@) Steering wheel adjustment ...... 73 If the wA or AN] indicator light turns on, check
the message in the instrument cluster.
Lever for:
— Cruise control system ......... 136
(oTT\ i
— Audi adaptive cruise control .... 139
@9) Button for switching the head-up The following indicator lights may be available,
display on and off, adjusting the depending on the vehicle equipment:
height ........ 2... cee eee eee 26
Red indicator lights
60 Instrument illumination ......... 63
@) Connection port for the On Board Central indicator light
Diagnostic System (OBD) ........ 290 => page 7,
Instrument cluster
@2 Headlight control switch ........ 58
=>page 12
@3) Hood release .............-.0-% 231
Cooling system
@4 All-weather lights button ........ 58
=> page 14,
@5) Luggage compartment lid button . 41
=> page 236,
G8 Exterior mirror adjustment ...... 63 => page 236
6 Buttons for: Safety belt
— Power windows ...........00. 45 => page 77
— Central power window switch ... 45
Transmission
—Child safety lock .............. 45
=> page 109
G@) Tips Drive system

> page 111,
Some the equipment listed here is only instal-
Electrical system
led in certain models or is available as an op-
=> page 239
tion.
Brake system
= page 113,
Indicator lights overview
> page 238,
Electromechanical parking brake
=>page 115 >
8W7012721BB
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster

blink or turn on. They indicate functions or mal-
functions. Some warning and indicator lights
Quick access
Brake system Engine speed limitation

> page 113, > page 14,
> page 238, Drive system
Electromechanical parking brake >page 111
>page 115 Central locking
Electromechanical parking brake => page 36
=>page 114 Power top
Electromechanical parking brake => page 53
>page 114 Bulb failure indicator
Steering => page 62
=>page 119 Adaptive light
Steering lock => page 62
>page 119 Headlight range control system
Adaptive cruise control => page 62
=> page 140, Light/rain sensor
Safe start monitor => page 62,
=>page 145, => page 67
Driver intervention request
Windshield wipers
=>page 146
=> page 67
Traffic jam assist
Safety systems
=>page 147
=> page 80
Steering intervention request
Engine start system
=>page 148
=> page 104
Distance warning
Convenience key
=>page 149
=> page 104
Active lane assist
Transmission
=> page 150
=> page 109
Pre sense
Brake system
> page 153
=> page 113
Hood
Electromechanical parking brake
> page 231
=>page 115
Engine oil pressure
Suspension control
=> page 233
=>page 119
Engine oil level (MIN)
Steering
=> page 233
>page 119
Electrical system
Steering lock
> page 239
>page 119
Yellow indicator lights All wheel drive
Central indicator light > page 121,
=> page 7 Sport differential
=> page 121
Engine speed limitation
=>page 14
Quick access
Electronic Stabilization Control Engine oil level (MIN)

(ESC) => page 233
=> page 122 Engine oil level (MAX)
Electronic Stabilization Control => page 233
(ESC)
Engine oil sensor
=> page 122
=> page 233
Electronic Stabilization Control
Engine warm-up request
(ESC)
=> page 233
=> page 122
Electrical system
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
> page 239
=>page 122
Washer fluid level
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
=> page 242
=> page 122
Tire pressure
Adaptive cruise control
=> page 262,
> page 147,
=> page 263,
Traffic jam assist
=> page 265,
=> page 148
=> page 265,
=> page 266
=> page 148,
Tire pressure
=>page 151
=> page 263,
Distance warning
=> page 266
=> page 149
Active lane assist Other indicator lights
=> page 150, Low beam headlights
=> page 152 => page 58
Pre sense Parking lights
> page 152 =>page 58
Side assist, exit warning Turn signals
>page 157 => page 59,
Parking systems => page 61
=>page 161 Turn signals
Rear cross-traffic assist =>page 59,
>page 165 => page 61
Start/Stop system
Park assist
=> page 111
=>page 170
Cruise control system
Emergency call function
=> page 136
> page 188
Tank system
=> page 136
=> page 227
Efficiency assist
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
=> page 138,
=> page 227,
> page 138
8W7012721BB
> page 229

Efficiency assist
=> page 138
Quick access
Efficiency assist High beam assistant

=> page 138 => page 59,
Efficiency assist => page 60,
=> page 138 => page 62
Efficiency assist Convenience key

=> page 138 => page 104
Efficiency assist Transmission

=> page 138 => page 109
Efficiency assist Start/Stop system

> page 138 > page 112
Adaptive cruise control Electromechanical parking brake

=> page 140 >page 115
Adaptive cruise control Electromechanical parking brake

=> page 140 =>page 115
Adaptive cruise control Hold assist

=> page 140 =>page 115
Adaptive cruise control Steering

=> page 140 =>page 119
Adaptive cruise control Speed warning system

=> page 145 => page 130
Traffic jam assist Speed warning system

=> page 147 = page 130
Traffic jam assist Camera-based traffic sign recog-

=> page 147 nition
> page 131
Active lane assist
=> page 150
=> page 136,
High beam headlights CRUISE => page 137,
=> page 59,
=> page 137
=>page 59
High beam assistant => page 136,
=> page 59,
=> page 137,
=> page 60
=> page 137
Laser lights
Efficiency assist
=> page 60
=> page 138,
Child safety lock Predictive control
=>page 45 > page 143,
Child safety lock Adaptive cruise control
=> page 45 => page 147,
Traffic jam assist
Child safety lock
=>page 148
=>page 45
Power top
=> page 143
=> page 53
10
Quick access

=> page 147,
Traffic jam assist
=> page 147,
> page 148
Distance warning
=> page 149
Active lane assist
= page 150,
=> page 152
Pre sense
=>page 152
Pre sense
=> page 153
Side assist, exit warning
=>page 157
Parking systems
=> page 161
A) Rear cross-traffic assist
a7] =>page 165
Are Park assist
ig) => page 170
Park assist
=> page 170
8W7012721BB
11
Instrument cluster
trument clu
Instrument cluster overview
Belo
6/24/2019
6/24/2019
C100T
Fig. 3 Instrument cluster overview (analog)
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- @) Right additional display with speed-
ing items may appear in the instrument cluster: ometer
Left dial @® Left additional display with:
—Tachometer .........00..
000s 14 SIG OOM wice es eosenes 2 a were 2 8 wate @ oe 105
Tab af@a « < sees se oes x eee gee 13 — Audi drive select mode ......... 118
Centralarea .............0.000. 13 Display
Status line (one or two lines) — Engine coolant temperature ~E .. 14
Right dial i
— Convenience display ZX WARNING
— Speedometer Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
Display If there is a severe ECD in the instru-

—FuellevelfD .....-..e0eeec
ee. 227 ment cluster, the display may turn off. The
indicator light may also turn on. Stop the >
12
Instrument cluster
vehicle safely. See an authorized Audi dealer Selecting a tab

or authorized Audi Service Facility for assis- > Press the <J/ > button @) repeatedly until the
tance. desired tab is selected.
G) Tips Returning to functions at higher levels
— The following pages primarily show illustra- > Press the D button ©).
tions of the Audi virtual cockpit*. The dis-
Opening and closing the menu
play or location of the items that are shown
may vary on the different versions of the in- » Press the [=] button ©).
strument cluster.
Selecting and confirming a function
— You can select the units used for tempera-
ture, speed, and other measurements Requirement: a menu or list must be displayed.
=> page 221. > To select a function, turn the left thumbwheel
— Speeds are displayed in mph (miles per @ to the desired function.
hour) or km/h (kilometers per hour). > To confirm a selection, press the left thumb-
— Certain instrument cluster content can also wheel (7).
be displayed in the head-up display*
=> page 26. Switching the view
> Press the VIEW button @) > page 13.
Operating
The following tabs may be available, depending
on vehicle equipment:
RAZ-0377
First tab Vehicle functions > page 16

Second tab | Driver messages (this is only dis-
played if at least one indicator
light/message is being displayed)
Third tab Radio > page 202
Media > page 212
Fourth tab | Telephone > page 175
Fifth tab Navigation > page 190
Adjusting the display

RAZ-0673
Fig. 5 Left side of multifunction steering wheel
Information is organized within various tabs @) Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit
in the instrument cluster. The tab contents are Fig. 6 Center display: adjusting the display
displayed in the central area (2).
Switching the view
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
8W7012721BB
Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit
> Press the VIEW button to switch between the

default view @ and the enhanced view (2).
13
Instrument cluster
Adjusting the layout To reduce the risk of engine damage, please ob-
Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit serve the following notes about the temperature
Depending on the vehicle equipment, various lay- ranges.
outs may be available.
Cold range
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: If only the LEDs at the bottom of the gauge turn
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtu- on, the engine has not reached operating tem-
al cockpit. perature yet. Avoid high engine speeds, full accel-
> To adjust the desired layout, press @). eration, and heavy engine loads.
Setting the automatic layout change Normal range
Applies to: RS model with Audi virtual cockpit
The engine has reached its operating tempera-
Requirement: depending on vehicle equipment,
ture once the LEDs up to the center of the gauge
the RS Performance or RS Runway layout must
turn on. If the BB indicator light in the instru-
be set.
ment cluster display turns on, the coolant tem-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: perature is too high > page 236.
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtu-
al cockpit > Configure > Automatic activation C) Note
of RS layout. — Auxiliary headlights and other accessories in
Depending on vehicle equipment, the RS Per- front of the air intake impair the cooling ef-
formance or RS Runway layout will be automati- fect of the coolant. This increases the risk of
cally set when switching into the RS modes the engine overheating during high outside
=>page 118. temperatures and heavy engine load.
— The front spoiler also helps to distribute
Adjusting the additional display cooling air correctly while driving. If the
Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit
spoiler is damaged, the cooling effect will
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the addi- be impaired and the risk of the engine over-
tional displays that can be selected may vary. heating will increase. See an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
cility for assistance.
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtu-
al cockpit > Configure.
> Select the desired additional display. Tachometer
Reducing the display The tachometer (@) 9 page 12 displays the engine
speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). The be-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
ginning of the red zone in the tachometer indi-
hide the central area in the instrument cluster.
cates the maximum permissible engine speed for
> Select on the instrument cluster: vehicle func- all gears once the engine has been broken in. Be-
tions tab > [I] button > Reduced display, or fore reaching the red zone, you should shift into
> Press the VIEW button on the multifunction the next higher gear, select the "D" or "S" selec-
steering wheel. tor lever position, or remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
Coolant temperature Engine speed limitation
display If the tA indicator light turns on, the engine will
Applies to: vehicles with a coolant temperature indicator
be automatically limited to the RPM displayed in >
The coolant temperature display @) > page 12
only functions when the ignition is switched on.
14
Instrument cluster
the instrument cluster. This will protect the en-

iG) Tips
gine components, for example during a cold start
or from overheating. Distances are displayed in mi (miles) or km
(kilometers).
The engine speed limitation is deactivated if you
release the accelerator pedal while the engine is
Outside temperature
at normal operating temperature.
display
If the engine speed limitation was activated by
an engine control malfunction, the B indicator The outside temperature is displayed in the sta-
light also turns on. Make sure the engine speed tus bar@) > page 12.
does not go above the speed displayed, for exam-
If your vehicle is stationary or if you are driving at
ple when downshifting. Drive to an authorized
very low speeds, the temperature displayed in
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
the instrument cluster may be slightly higher
mediately to have the malfunction corrected.
than the actual temperature outside due to heat
radiating from the engine.
@) Note
At temperatures below 41 °F (+5 °C), a snowflake
The needle in the tachometer may only be in
symbol appears in front of the temperature dis-
the red area of the gauge for a short period of
time before there is a risk of damaging the play > A.
engine. The location where the red zone be-
gins varies depending on the engine.
Z\ WARNING
Do not assume the roads are free of ice based
on the outside temperature display. Be aware
Odometer
that there may be ice on roads even when the
outside temperature is around 41 °F (+5 °C)
and that ice can increase the risk of accidents.
Engine oil temperature

indicator
Applies to: vehicles with engine oil temperature indicator
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the engine

oil temperature %7 may be indicated by a bar in
Fig. 7 Instrument cluster: reset button the instrument cluster.
> Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:

The trip odometer and odometer are displayed in
Open the vehicle functions tab and switch to
the status bar@) > page 12.
the enhanced view > page 13.
The trip odometer shows the distance driven > Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument
since it was last reset. It can be used to measure cluster: Open the lap timer > page 133.
short distances. The odometer shows the total
distance that the vehicle has been driven.
When engine oil temperatures are low, the dis-
play --- °F (--- °C) appears in the instrument clus-
Resetting the trip odometer ter. The engine has reached its operating temper-
> To reset the trip odometer to zero, press the re- ature when the engine oil temperature is be-
set button @. tween 176 °F (80 °C) and 248 °F (120 °C) under
normal driving conditions. The engine oil temper-
8W7012721BB
ature may be higher if there is heavy engine load

and high temperatures outside. This is not a
15
Instrument cluster
cause for concern as long as the B or 3 indica- Opening sport displays in the MMI
tor lights do not turn on. > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > RS monitor.
Boost indicator > Browse to the desired display if necessary.
Applies to: vehicles with boost indicator
G meter
Depending on vehicle equipment, the current en- Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
gine load (meaning the current boost pressure)
The G meter displays the longitudinal and lateral
may be indicated by a bar in the instrument clus-
acceleration. The current values are displayed in
ter.
the instrument cluster while driving. The maxi-
> Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit: mum values that are reached are stored and dis-
Open the vehicle functions tab and switch to played when the vehicle is stationary. Only the
the enhanced view > page 13. maximum values that are reached are displayed
> Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument in the MMI.
cluster: Open the lap timer > page 133.
> To reset the stored values, press and hold the
left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering
Shift light indicator wheel for one second.
Applies to: RS models
Tire pressure
The shift light indicator informs the driver when
the RPM limit is reached. The tire pressure monitoring system displays the
current tire pressures and temperatures. Also see
» Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit: => page 263, Tire pressure monitoring system.
Set the RS Performance or RS Runway layout if
necessary > page 13. Engine data
» Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
cluster: Open the lap timer > page 133. The engine data in the instrument cluster shows
which percentage of the maximum output or
The shift light indicator is displayed with green,
yellow and red ranges in the upper areas of the maximum torque is currently being used.
tachometer. The shift light indicator will blink red Temperature
when approaching the engine speed limit. Shift
to the next highest gear at the right time. The temperature display in the MMI shows the
temperature of various fluids and vehicle compo-
nents, such as the engine oil or sport differential.
Sport displays
Vehicle functions
Various sport displays, such as a G meter or tire
pressure indicator, may be available depending (OTe TWN]
on vehicle equipment. The trip computer is displayed in the first tab of
Opening sport displays in the instrument the driver information system. Additional vehicle
cluster functions can be accessed depending on the vehi-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit cle equipment.
> Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle func- > Press the =] button on the multifunction steer-
tions tab > EE] button > Sport displays. ing wheel.
> Turn the left thumbwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel until the desired sport display — On-board computer > page 17
appears in the instrument cluster. — Sport displays > page 16
— Lap times > page 133
16
Instrument cluster
— Lap statistics > page 133 bar is green, your vehicle is saving fuel (for exam-
— Acceleration measurement > page 134 ple, using recuperation).
— Reduced display > page 14
Energy consumers
On-board computer The Energy consumers view lists other equip-

ment that is currently affecting fuel consump-
Resetting values to zero tion. The display shows up to three equipment
Requirement: the Consumption, Short-term items. The equipment using the most power is
memory, or Long-term memory display must be listed first. If more than three items using power
selected. are switched on, the equipment that is currently
using the most power is displayed. A gauge also
> To reset the values in the respective memory to shows the current total consumption of all other
zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on equipment.
the multifunction steering wheel for one sec-
ond. G) Tips
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can call The date, time of day, and time and date for-
up the following displays in the on-board com- mat can be set > page 221.
puter one at a time by turning the left thumb-
wheel on the multifunction steering wheel:
—Time and date > page 221

— Level
— Digital speedometer
— Average consumption > page 17
— Range
— Short-term memory overview
— Long-term memory overview
— Energy consumers > page 17
— Driver assistance
— Traffic sign recognition and traffic light infor-
mation
Short-term memory and long-term memory

The short-term memory collects driving informa-
tion from the time the ignition is switched on un-
til it is switched off. If you continue driving within
two hours after switching the ignition off, the
new values will be included when calculating the
current trip information.
Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term

memory is not erased automatically. You can se-
lect the time period for evaluating trip informa-
tion yourself.
Average consumption
8W7012721BB
The current consumption can be shown using a

bar graph. The average consumption stored in
the short-term memory is also displayed. If the
17
Touch display
Touch displa > Press and hold an item until the associated op-
tions are displayed.
General touch display
operation Teen LCR ite
Applies to: touch display
The center display is a touchscreen. Operation is

very similar to operating a smartphone.
@) Tips
Certain gestures are not available in every
menu.
Fig. 10 Touch display: pressing and pulling

>)
Applies to: touch display : Moving an item
You can position some items at any location on

the screen.
>» Press and hold an item, and then use your fin-
ger to pull it to the desired location.
inching fingers together and ling a

Fig. 8 Touch display: pressing
Selecting a function or button

> Press the desired function or button.
Applies to: touch dis play
Fig. 11 Touch display: pinching fingers together and pull-

ing them apart
Zooming in and out on an item

> To increase the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers apart.
> To decrease the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers together.
Fig. 9 Touch display: pressing and holding
Accessing options
For some items, you can access additional op-
tions that are not directly visible.
18
Touch display
tating Dragging away from/toward the edge of

Applies to: touch display the screen
Fig. 12 Touch display: rotating

Fig. 14 Touch display: dragging away from the edge of the
Rotating the view or perspective screen
> Rotate the item using two fingers. Opening hidden menus
The E=] symbol indicates that there is a hidden

eli menu.
> Use your finger to drag inward from the upper
or lower edge of the screen, or
> Press the E=] button.
Closing hidden menus

> Press within the menu and drag it toward the
upper or lower edge of the screen.
nformation about menu paths

Fig. 13 Touch display: @ dragging with one finger, @
dragging with two fingers This guide shows you at a glance the paths for
opening a desired menu and its settings and
Scrolling or browsing through menus/lists functions.
> To scroll through menus and lists, swipe up-
ward or downward with one finger. Examipls at's path
> To browse through menus and lists, swipe to > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
the right or left with one finger. SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
Tilting 3D displays Following the path

> Drag upward or downward with two fingers. > First, determine in which display the path
should be entered. In this example, it is the
MMI display.
> To open the home screen, press (Y.
> If the SETTINGS button is not displayed, use
your finger to swipe to the left or right until it
appears.
> Press the SETTINGS button.
> If the General button is not displayed, swipe
8W7012721BB
toward the left or right with one finger until it

appears. >
19
Touch display
> Press the General button. > To switch the MMI on, press the On/Off knob.
> If the Date & time button is not displayed,
Restarting the MMI
swipe upward or downward with one finger un-
tilit appears. > Press and hold the On/Off knob for at least 10
> Press the Date & time button. seconds.
G) Tips Switching the center display on or off

> To switch the center display on or off, press the
If a menu or symbol is in parentheses in the
fo] button in the center console above the se-
path, for example, (General) or ({23), then it is
lector lever, or
an optional menu item that does not need to
> To switch the center display off, press LJin the
be used in every system.
notification center > page 23.
> To switch the center display on, touch the dis-
play or press lwJagain.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Display & Brightness > MMI. Introduction
Possible settings: You can display and operate Infotainment system

and vehicle functions using the touch display in
— Brightness
the Multi Media Interface, abbreviated MMI.
— Touchscreen feedback
Configuration wizard
Multi Media Interface After starting for the first time, the configuration
wizard helps you to set up the vehicle, for exam-
emule)
ple to set the desired system language and con-
Audi recommends performing certain Infotain- nect a telephone.
ment system functions, such as entering a desti-
> Follow the instructions in the center display.
nation, only when the vehicle is stationary. Al-
>» Applies to: MMI: To access the configuration
ways be prepared to stop operating the Infotain-
wizard at a later time, select on the home
ment system in the interest of your safety and
screen: HELP > Configuration wizard.
the safety of other road users.
Tool tips
Z\ WARNING You can have tool tips displayed if necessary.
Only use the Infotainment system when road, They introduce various MMI functions to you.
traffic, weather, and visibility conditions per-
mit and always in a way that allows you to > Applies to: MMI: To open the tool tips, select on
maintain complete control over your vehicle. the home screen: HELP > Tool tips > Basic in-
formation or Expert information.
@) Tips > Follow the instructions in the display.
Certain functions are not available while driv-

ing.
Sica memes
Switching the MMI on or off

> To switch the MMI off, press and hold the
On/Off knob > page 30, fig. 22 until all Info-
tainment functions are switched off.
20
Touch display
Menus and symbols
RAX-0176
[cae O)
Cer
ea Ec
ce
ae oO ane
Co coy aren PL)
eh aed CW Pa ss) eau)
Fig. 15 MMI: center display
Label Description
Displays selected information tiles and provides quick access to
Overview screen
certain functions > page 21
© | ©
©|@|
Return to the home screen or the overview page, open menus

Quick access bar
quickly > page 22
Display area Select a menu, apply settings, display content > page 22
Favorites Use or manage favorites > page 22
Operate functions and apply quick settings > page 23, display
®©®-@ Status bar of available notifications © > page 23, status indicator @)
=> page 23, time
Description of common symbols Symbol Description

You can operate the default functions using the Open additional actions
symbols that follow. The symbols may be found Open additional information for
in any menu, depending on the context. the selected menu
Description
Go back one level Overview screen
Close the menu The overview screen is the first menu page in the
Search for content MMI. Information about certain vehicle functions
Open explanations for a menu such as media, time, and phone is displayed in
tiles. The available information tiles can be rear-
Open settings for the selected
ranged on the overview screen or replaced with
menu
others. Depending on the system context, you
Open the submenu may be able to operate certain functions directly,
Adjust the settings such as muting the sound.
Set as favorite
Switching between the overview screen and
Switch functions on or off the home screen
8W7012721BB
Switch functions on or off

> Press ( repeatedly until the desired view ap-
Switch functions on or off pears.
21
Touch display
Configuring the overview screen Switching between menu pages

> Press and hold an information tile on the over- Ifa menu contains multiple menu pages, Bas is
view screen. displayed in the display area. The white bar
> To change the position of an information tile, shows the location of the current menu page.
press and hold it and then slide it to the desired
> To switch between menu pages, swipe your fin-
position.
ger to the right or left.
> To replace an information tile, press Z and se-
lect the desired information tile.
> Press Done to complete the configuration. Wedgiesty
By creating favorites, you can have quick access

Quick access to various items, such as radio stations, frequent-
ly-used contacts, or vehicle settings. In the FA-
With quick access, you can return to the home
VORITES menu, the stored favorites are sorted
screen and quickly switch between four menus
by topic into information tiles.
that can be individually configured.
Adding a favorite
Returning to the home screen or opening a
menu quickly A YY button indicates if you can add a favorite,
such as a selected radio station. Depending on
> Press ( or one of the four buttons.
the context, you may also be able to add items
Configuring quick access without the yy button to the favorites, such as
entries ina list.
> Press and hold a button on the home screen
display area or in the quick access bar. > Press YY, or
> To move a button to the quick access bar, pull it > Press and hold an item ina list.
from the display area to the quick access bar. > Press Store as favorite. The selected item will
> To adjust the placement of the buttons in the be added as a favorite.
quick access bar, pull them to the desired posi-
tion in the bar. Using favorites
> Press Done to complete the configuration. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
FAVORITES. The stored favorites will be dis-
G) Tips played.
> To access a stored favorite, press that favorite.
The position of © cannot be adjusted.
Stored favorites can only be deleted or config-
Display area ured in the corresponding menu (such as RADIO).
You can freely change the location of the buttons Arranging information tiles
on the home screen display area. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
FAVORITES.
Configuring the display area
>» Press and hold the desired information tile.
> Press and hold a button on the home screen > Pull the information tile into the desired posi-
display area. tion.
> To adjust the placement of the buttons, pull > Press Done to confirm the configuration.
them to the desired locations.
> Press Done to complete the configuration.
22
Touch display
Of OB OB
[RAZ-1078
Oo OB OB om Ce ay
OM OB OB 2a
eA eee pe tceri or
PCr cog esa Cuneo
Fig. 16 Center display: frequently used symbols in the sta- Fig. 17 Center display: notification center
tus bar
Notifications can be displayed in the center dis-
The symbols in the status bar show you informa- play. After a specified time, they will be hidden
tion at a glance, such as ifa mobile device is con- and a corresponding symbol will appear in the
nected or if there is a data connection. The most status bar©) > page 21, fig. 15. In the notifica-
common symbols are listed in the table. tion center, you can view these notifications @)
Description > fig. 17, apply quick settings @), and operate
functions @).
There is a data connection. The bar indi-
@ | cates the signal strength of the data con- Using the notification center
nection. Data:is being transmitted now: > To open the notification center, pull the status
There is a data connection. The bar indi- bar downward, or
@ | cates the signal strength of the data con- > Press the E=] button on the status bar.
nection. No data is being transmitted now. > To turn quick settings on or off, press the re-
A mobile device is connected. The bar indi- spective symbol @).
cates the signal strength of the cell phone > To apply quick settings, press the respective
©
connection. symbol (2).

There is no data connection. > To obtain additional information about a notifi-
®©®e;)© |@|®|
cation, press it.

An error occurred with the mobile device
> To delete a notification, pull it toward the right
connection to the MMI.
edge of the screen.
A user is selected. Ifa question mark ap- > If there are more than four notifications in the
pears in the symbol ;y, the guest user is ac- notification center, the older notifications will
tive. be hidden. To display the older notifications,
A Bluetooth device is connected. drag your finger upward on the screen.
Bluetooth is switched on, but no Bluetooth
Setting which content is displayed
device is connected.
You can set whether some notifications should be
Audio playback was interrupted.
©|©
displayed.
The audio source is muted.
Privacy settings are enabled. The additional > To set the displayed content, press ©&, or
symbol indicates which privacy settings are > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
©
currently activated > page 291. SETTINGS > Notifications.

> Select and confirm which notifications should
The Integrated Toll Module is switched on.
be displayed.
The numbers 1 - 3+ indicate how many pas-
®
sengers are selected in the MMI.

8W7012721BB
23
Touch display
Possible functions characters that have been entered @) and results

may be shown @).
Description
Opening text input
Press: switches the center display
on or off (this can also be done us- > Tap inside the input field @.
ing the button in the center con-
Switching input languages
sole)
Press and hold: switches the Requirement: multiple input languages must be
screen clearing mode on or off defined in the MMI > page 25.
(can also be done using the but- > To switch between the defined input languages,
ton in the center console) press the button (2).
Opens the garage door opener
Switching the input methods
function
> To switch between handwriting input or the on-
Possible quick settings
screen keyboard, press the button @).
Symbol Description
Entering text
Apply sound settings
Manage connected devices > Applies to: the on-screen keyboard: To enter
text, press the buttons on the keyboard. De-
Manage users
pending on the usage context, you may also be
= Set displayed content in the noti- able to swipe over the letters )).
fication center > Applies to handwriting input: To enter text,
YP OWES Set date and time simply write in the input area using one finger
©. You can write the separate characters next
a catilltia to each other or one on top of the other with-
out having to move your finger over after writ-
ing a character. When you end the entry, the
RAZ-0955,
writing is interpreted by the system.

> Applies to: the on-screen keyboard with an in-
ce
put language that uses accented characters: To
Prac
enter accented characters (such as 4, ¢, fi, 6),
cH
Prac press and hold a character that has accented
Los Angeles,
Dandy versions available and select the desired ac-
cented character.
> Applies to: handwriting input: To enter a space,
drag a line from left to right in the input sec-
Fig. 18 Center display: text input
tion©.
Overview > To select a location in the text input, press on
the desired location in the input field. You can
In the input fields of various menus, you can en- control the location more accurately using the
ter letters, numbers and characters, for example slider on the screen 6)”.
to find an address in navigation”. > To delete individual characters, press <I (4), or
The text that is currently entered is displayed in > Applies to: handwriting input: Drag a line from
the center display @). Depending on the context, right to left in the input section ©.
word suggestions may be given based on the > To delete multiple characters, press and hold
a@.
2) Depending on the country or equipment
24
Touch display
> To delete all characters at a specific location,

press and hold <]@) and drag up to the desired
location ), When released, the highlighted
characters are deleted.
Accepting suggested words or selecting

entries from the results list
> To accept a suggested word (2) or select an en-
try from the results list @), press on it.
> To display more content in the results list, drag
your finger upward or downward on the screen.
> To enlarge the results list, press the @) button
or pull it inward.
Setting the input language or keyboard

layout
>» Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Lan-
guage & keyboard > Keyboard.
> To define additional input languages, press the
© button.
> To change the keyboard layout for an input lan-
guage, press >. For example, you can select be-
tween QWERTZ and QWERTY.
8W7012721BB
2) Depending on the country or equipment
25
Head-up display
Head-up display @) Note

Description To reduce the risk of scratches on the glass
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display covering the head-up display, do not place any
objects in the projection opening.
RAZ-0847
@ Tips
— Sunglasses with polarization filters and un-
favorable lighting conditions can impair visi-
bility of the display.
— An optimal display depends on the seat po-
sition and the height adjustment of the
head-up display.
— A special windshield is needed for the head-
up display function.
The head-up display projects certain warnings or — For information on cleaning, see > table In-
selected information from the assist systems on terior cleaning on page 270.
the windshield. The display appears within the
driver's field of vision.
Switching on and off

> To switch the head-up display on, press the 67
knob @).
> To switch the head-up display off, press the S7
knob.
Adjusting the height

The height of the display can be adjusted to the
individual driver.
> Make sure you are seated correctly > page 69.
> Turn the knob &? to the right or left.
Settings in the Infotainment system

SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Head-up
display.
Possible settings:
— Display rotation
— Brightness
— Display contents: you can set which informa-
tion should be displayed. The display of certain
information and some of the red indicator
lights cannot be hidden.
26
Voice recognition system
Voice recognition system Description

General information eye aU mame ees eR
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
You can operate many functions in the vehicle Se

easily using voice commands. Drive me to
Where is a a
Using the voice recognition system optimally Connect
Pre)
Play
> Speak clearly and distinctly at a normal volume. Eg
Maes
Speak louder when driving faster. coy
» Emphasize the words in the commands evenly
and do not leave long pauses. Fig. 20 Center display: voice recognition system
> Close the doors, the windows, and the sunroof*

to reduce background noise. Make sure that Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be
passengers are not speaking when you are giv- switched on. A system language supported by
ing a voice command. the voice recognition system must be set. There
> Do not direct the vents toward the hands-free must be no phone calls in progress and the park-
microphone, which is in the roof headliner near ing aid must not be active.
the front interior lights. Operating by button «£
> Only the driver should speak to the system, be-
cause the handsfree microphone is aimed to- > Briefly press the «€ button on the multifunction
ward this seating position. steering wheel, or depending on the context,
press we in the center display.
ZA\ WARNING > Say the desired command after the signal tone.
> To switch the voice recognition system off,
— Direct your full attention to driving. As the press and hold the «€ button on the multifunc-
driver, you have complete responsibility for tion steering wheel, or say or press Cancel (@)
safety in traffic. Only use the functions in > fig. 20.
such a way that you always maintain com-
plete control over your vehicle in all traffic Operating with voice commands
situations. > Applies to: MMI: To operate the voice recogni-
— Do not use the voice recognition system in tion system using voice commands, select on
emergencies because your voice may change the home screen: SETTINGS > General >
in stressful situations. The system may take (Speech dialog system) > Activate the speech
longer to dial the number or may not be dialog system with "Hey Audi".
able to dial it at all. Dial the emergency > Say the activation phrase Hey Audi together
number manually. with the desired command.
> To switch the voice recognition system off, say
G) Tips Cancel or press and hold the «£ button on the
There are no voice guidance* prompts when a multifunction steering wheel, or press @)
dialog is active. > fig. 20.
Commands and assistance

In the voice recognition system menu, possible
commands or help settings are displayed for the
current dialog @).
8W7012721BB
> To receive additional help for the current dia-

log, say or press Help (2).
27
> To pause voice recognition, say or press Pause screen: SETTINGS > General > (Speech dialog
@. To reactivate voice recognition, press @) system) > Activate the speech dialog system
again or briefly press the «€ button on the mul- with "Hey Audi".
tifunction steering wheel. >» Say the activation phrase “Alexa” together with
the desired command.
Additional functions
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system () Note
Command during voice output Read the information about Audi connect, and
be sure to note the connectivity costs section
If the function is switched on, you can simply say =@ in General information on page 182.
a new command during a prompt.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Gi) Tips
SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system > Audi provides access to services from third
Allow commands during voice output. party providers. Permanent availability cannot
be guaranteed, because that depends on the
Online recognizer
third party provider.
Applies to: vehicles with online recognizer
You can activate the online recognizer for addi-

External voice operation
tional functions and to improve the results of
Applies to: vehicles with external speech dialog system
voice recognition. A supported menu language
must be selected. When there is an active Inter- You can access and control the voice operation on
net connection, the spoken command is evaluat- a connected mobile device through your vehicle.
ed in the vehicle and online.
Switching external voice operation on or off
> When you switch on the voice recognition sys-
Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be
tem for the first time, a menu for the online
switched on. A cell phone must be connected to
recognizer will open, or
the MMI with the Handsfree profile > page 171.
The mobile device being connected must have
SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system >
voice control that can be controlled externally.
Consent to online speech recognizer.
There must be no phone calls in progress and the
> Read the licensing agreements and accept
parking aid must not be active.
them.
> To switch on the external voice operation, press
Amazon Alexa and hold the «€ button longer on the multifunc-
Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration
tion steering wheel.
You can activate Amazon Alexa to access certain > To switch off the external voice operation, press
functions. A reduced number of commands for and hold the «€ button longer on the multifunc-
Amazon Alexa are available during this. tion steering wheel or press Cancel.
Requirement: you must be logged in to your Using external voice operation
myAudi account in the vehicle. The online recog-
nizer must be activated. A system language that >» Say the desired command after the signal tone.
> To reactivate voice recognition when it is
is supported by both the voice recognition system
paused, press the w€ button briefly on the mul-
and Amazon Alexa must be selected.
tifunction steering wheel or press Resume.
USER > Connect to Amazon Alexa. G) Tips
> Follow the instructions in the display.
Audi simply provides access to control your
> Applies to: MMI: To operate Amazon Alexa us-
cell phone with voice operation and does not >
ing voice commands, select on the home
28
take any responsibility for the contents and

commands within the external voice control.
8W7012721BB
29
Global functions
Global functions Quick access steering wheel button

Depending on vehicle equipment, the button ©)
Additional function
may provide quick access to various functions.
buttons
> @ button, see > page 102.
> fae button, see > page 118.
You can program the >K button with various func-

tions.
> To bring up the function that is currently set,
press the >K button.
> To perform the function that is currently set,
press and hold the >K button, or:
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Steering wheel
button assignment.
> Select and confirm the desired function.
Switching voice operation on or off

w& button @), see > page 27.
Using the telephone functions
button @), see > page 177.
Adjust the volume of the audio system so that

signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
Adjusting the volume
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a times.
system message (for example, from the voice
recognition system) when the sound is playing.
> To increase or decrease the volume, turn the

right thumbwheel @) © fig. 21 upward or
downward, or turn the On/Off knob > fig. 22 to
the right or left.
> To mute, push the right thumbwheel or the
On/Off knob.
Selecting the previous/next track or station

> Press the d<J/ DP button @ or briefly press
the On/Off knob to the left/right.
Fast forward/rewind
> Press and hold the <j / DDI button @, or
press the On/Off knob to the left or right until
the desired playback position is reached.
30
Personalization
Personalization @) Tips
Users — Certain Infotainment and vehicle settings
(such as mirrors, last radio stations) may be
General information stored, depending on vehicle equipment.
Applies to: vehicles with personalized user settings
You can find additional information in the
Depending on vehicle equipment and your coun- MMI. Select on the home screen: SETTINGS
try, your vehicle may be able to manage various > General > Legal notes > About Audi con-
users in the MMI. Each user will be assigned the nect.
settings that they last used. — Applies to: myAudi users: The stored set-
tings can only be transferred to vehicles
Before you begin driving, you can select a user in
that are capable of receiving the transmit-
the MMI and load personalized Infotainment and
ted information. There may be restrictions
vehicle settings.
that prevent this, particularly in other coun-
Possible users in the MMI: tries.
— myAudi user: as a myAudi user, you can use — Applies to: myAudi users: The settings can
Audi connect services that require a myAudi ac- only be transferred and loaded when there
count. Certain settings are transferred online to is coverage from the applicable mobile
your myAudi account. If you log into your phone service provider.
myAudi account in another vehicle, you can — Applies to: myAudi users with PIN protec-
load your settings in the other vehicle. tion switched on: If the MMI displays a de-
— Local user: as a local user, you can only store tected user but you simply start driving or
settings in the current vehicle. Your settings wait without entering the 4-digit PIN, then
cannot be transferred to other vehicles. Audi the guest user will be selected. Some set-
connect services that can only be used with a tings for the detected myAudi user will be
myAudi account will not be available. transferred to the guest user.
— Guest: as a guest, you can store settings in the
vehicle without changing the settings for other OTe e le (ta 4
users. Audi recommends only using the guest Applies to: vehicles with user management
user temporarily, because settings can be over-

Opening user management
written by other users.
Applies to: MMI
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following > Press USER on the home screen.
options may be used to detect the active user so
that the user settings can be loaded automatical- Selecting a user
Applies to: MMI
ly before you start driving.
— Vehicle key > Press on the desired user.
> Enter the 4-digit myAudi PIN, if necessary.
Requirement: the driver's door has been opened.
Adding myAudi users
The detected user must be shown in the MMI.
Applies to MMI and Audi connect
Confirm the user shown, select another user
= page 31, or add another user > page 31. Requirement: you must have successfully regis-
tered at my.audi.com and have created a 4-digit
ZA WARNING myAudi PIN.
It may not be possible to load Infotainment > Press Add user.
and vehicle settings, or they may only load > Press Log in now to log in with your myAudi
8W7012721BB
partially. The driver is always responsible for credentials.

the Infotainment and vehicle settings in order > Follow the system instructions.
to reduce the risk of an accident.
31
Personalization
To transfer existing destinations from the MMI to

your myAudi account one time, confirm the sys- Applies to: vehicles with key user management
tem prompts with Yes.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the vehicle
You can set a profile pictured for your myAudi owner must be set as the key user for certain
user at my.audi.com. Audi connect vehicle control services and possibly
for functions on demand.
Adding a local user
Applies to: MMI The key user automatically has remote access au-
> Press Add user. thorization that allows control of certain func-
> Press Initiate setup. tions such as Audi connect vehicle control serv-
> Press Local user. ices through the myAudi app.
> Follow the system instructions.
Setting the key user
Editing users Requirement: a key user must not be set yet.
Applies to: MMI
> To set a key user for the vehicle, you will need a
Requirement: the user must be selected and that
myAudi account. Register at my.audi.com.
user’s settings must be loaded. > Add your vehicle at my.audi.com and then veri-
> Press on the user. fy your myAudi account using the verification
process that is provided.
Depending on the user type, available options
may include the following.
USER > (¥ > Set key user.
PIN protection: when this function is switched > Follow the system instructions and enter the
on, the 4-digit myAudi PIN must be entered be- 10-digit vehicle code > page 38. The key user
fore any settings for this user can be loaded. is set. You have the rights to use the Audi con-
nect vehicle control services > page 184 that
Remove the user from the vehicle: the user will
depend on vehicle equipment as well as the
only be deleted in the vehicle from the list in the
ability to manage other vehicle functions and
MMI.
any other users.
Change name: you can change the name of the
local user. Managing additional users
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
Removing users
grant authorization for additional users to use
Applies to: MMI
Audi connect vehicle control services at my.audi.
> Select on the home screen: Users > > one or com.
more entries > Delete. The user will only be de-
leted from the list in the MMI. The authoriza- Removing the key user
tions for the user in the vehicle (such as key If you remove the key user, all other users that
user) will not be removed. were stored by the key user at my.audi.com and
their authorizations will be deleted. It will no
@ Tips longer be possible to use the Audi connect vehi-
— The guest user cannot be renamed. cle control services, depending on the vehicle
— When changing users, the new user settings equipment.
are loaded in the vehicle. Requirement: a key user must be set.
— Ifa user has the & symbol, PIN protection is
active. To switch off PIN protection, you can > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
edit the user. USER > @} > Remove key user.
— Depending on the country, you may be able
to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
32
Personalization
@) Tips
to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
— You do not need to log into the vehicle with
a myAudi user in order to use Audi connect
vehicle control services, which depend on
the vehicle equipment.
— If you sell your vehicle, reset all settings to
the factory default settings.
— Store the vehicle code in a secure place. It
may be necessary to re-enter the vehicle
code.
— When entering the vehicle code, please note
that the code is case-sensitive.
— If you do not have the 10-digit vehicle code,
contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility.
8W7012721BB
33
Opening and closing
Opening and closing Automatic locking

If you unlock the vehicle but then do not open
Central locking any of the doors, the luggage compartment, or
(eT e e eeu) the hood within a short period time, the vehicle
locks again automatically. This feature prevents
ZA WARNING the vehicle from being accidentally left unlocked
for a long period of time.
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
off and take the key with you. This applies Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
particularly when children remain in the ve-
The Auto Lock function locks all doors and the
hicle. Otherwise, children could start the ve-
luggage compartment lid once the speed has ex-
hicle or operate electrical equipment (such
ceeded approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). The ve-
as power windows), which increases the risk
hicle will unlock again if the unlock function in
of an accident.
the central locking switch is pressed, the “P” gear
— Applies to vehicles with anti-theft alarm sys-
is engaged, or the ignition is switched off.
tem: When the vehicle is locked from the
outside, no one - especially children - should You can open the doors individually from the in-
remain in the vehicle, because the windows side by pulling the door handle one time. To open
can no longer open from the inside the rear doors individually, you must pull the
= page 37, Anti-theft alarm system. door handle twice.
Locked doors make it more difficult for In the event ofa crash with airbag deployment,
emergency workers to enter the vehicle,
the doors will also automatically unlock to allow
which puts lives at risk.
access to the vehicle.
Unintentionally locking yourself out

Only lock your vehicle when all of the doors and
All doors and the luggage compartment lid can
the luggage compartment lid are closed and
be centrally unlocked and locked at once. You can
there is no key in the vehicle. This reduces the
select in the MMI if the entire vehicle or only the
risk of locking yourself out accidentally.
driver's door should unlock when unlocking the
vehicle > page 35. The turn signals flash twice The following features help to reduce the risk of
when you unlock the vehicle and flash once when locking your vehicle key in the vehicle:
you lock the vehicle. If they do not flash when —If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot
locking, check if all doors and lids are closed. be locked by pressing the & button on the re-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may mote control key or by touching the locking
have different options for centrally unlocking and sensor* on a door.
locking your vehicle. — If the vehicle key that was used most recently is
inside the luggage compartment, the luggage
— Vehicle key > page 39
compartment lid will automatically open again
— Sensors in the door handles > page 39
after it closes >@.
— Lock cylinder in the driver's door > page 37
— If the vehicle key that was last used is detected
— Interior central locking switch > page 36 inside the vehicle, then the vehicle cannot be
Vehicle key locked from the outside > ©.
The term “vehicle key” refers to the remote con- Z\ WARNING

trol key or convenience key*. The convenience
Observe the safety precautions > page 34. >
key* is a remote control key with special func-
tions > page 39 and > page 103.
34
Opening and closing
@) Note Setting the central locking system
The following applies when locking the vehi- You can adjust the central locking system to your
cle: preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle
— If the vehicle key that was last used is de- equipment.
tected inside the passenger compartment,
then the vehicle cannot be locked from the
HICLE > Settings & Service > Central locking.
outside using the sensor. Take the vehicle
key with you and lock the vehicle again. Oth- Door unlocking
erwise, the vehicle will not be protected
—If you select All, all doors and the luggage
against unauthorized access.
compartment lid will be unlocked when unlock-
— If you try to lock the vehicle using the but- ing the vehicle.
ton on the vehicle key while the front pas-
— If you select Driver's door, only the driver's
senger's or rear door is open, and you acci-
door will be unlocked. To unlock all doors and
dentally place the vehicle key inside the pas-
the luggage compartment lid, press the (9 but-
senger compartment and close the door,
ton on the vehicle key twice. In vehicles with a
the vehicle will lock at first. But if the key-
convenience key”, only the driver's door will un-
less system detects a vehicle key inside the
lock when you pull the driver's door handle. If
vehicle after it locks, then the vehicle will
you pull another door handle, the entire vehicle
unlock again. The turn signals will flash sev-
will be unlocked.
eral times to indicate this. If you do not
open the vehicle to remove the vehicle key The entire vehicle will always be locked f you
within a brief period, then the vehicle will press the &@ button.
lock automatically. This prevents the vehicle
Long press to open windows
from being left unlocked for long periods of
time. The vehicle key will then be locked in- You can select if all windows and the panoramic
side the vehicle. glass roof* should open using the vehicle key
— If the luggage compartment lid closes and = page 46, Convenience opening and closing. If
the system detects that the last vehicle key you press and hold the f button on the vehicle
that was used is inside the luggage com- key, all of the windows and the panoramic glass
partment, then the luggage compartment roof* will close.
lid will open again. The turn signals will
Disable rear lid handle
flash several times to indicate this. The
doors will lock. Always take the vehicle key You can select if the luggage compartment lid
with you, or unauthorized persons may be can open with the handle. If you activate this
able to enter the vehicle. function, the luggage compartment lid can only
be opened with the <¥ or 4s button on the vehi-
@ Tips cle key or in the driver's door. In vehicles with a
convenience key*, you can still open the luggage
— Do not leave valuables unattended in the ve-
compartment lid using the handle if an author-
hicle. A locked vehicle is not a safe!
ized convenience key is detected > page 41.
—The LED in the driver's door rail blinks when
you lock the vehicle. If the LED turns on for Fold mirrors
approximately 30 seconds after locking,
You can select if the exterior mirrors automatical-
there is a malfunction in the central locking
ly fold in when locking.
system. Have the problem corrected by an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
8W7012721BB
Service Facility.
35
Opening and closing
Tone when locking!) — The central locking switch is inoperative

You can select if an audio signal sounds when when the vehicle is locked from the outside.
locking the vehicle.
Open with convenience key

Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
2 Driver's door: malfunction! Shift to P before
You can deactivate the feature for unlocking us- leaving vehicle. See owner's manual
ing the sensor > page 39.
There is a malfunction in the driver's door. Secure
the vehicle before exiting by selecting the “P” se-
(etna mele den) in] lector lever position. Drive immediately to an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
8
3
o Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
2we
a
2B Central locking: malfunction! See owner's
manual
There is a central locking malfunction. If the

doors cannot lock, you can emergency lock the
doors > page 37. Drive to an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immedi-
ately to have the malfunction corrected.
Fig. 23 Driver's door: central locking switch
> To lock or unlock the vehicle, press the or B

button > A\.
When locking the vehicle with the central locking

switch, the following applies:
— The doors and the luggage compartment lid

cannot be opened from the outside for security
reasons, for example, to reduce the risk of un-
authorized entry while stopped at a light.
— The LED in the central locking switch turns on
when all doors are closed and locked.
— You can open the doors individually from the in-
side by pulling the door handle one time. To
open the rear doors individually, you must pull
the door handle twice.
— In the event of a crash with airbag deployment,
the doors unlock automatically to allow access
to the vehicle.
ZX WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions > page 34.
— The central locking button works when the
ignition is switched off.
D_ This function is not available in all countries.
36
Opening and closing
Mechanically unlocking and locking the Locking the front passenger's door and rear
doors doors* using the mechanical key
If the central locking fails, you must unlock or The mechanical lock is located on the edge of the
lock the doors separately. doors
(@) or in the latch opening @) > fig. 25. It is
only visible when the door is open.
> Remove the mechanical key > page 38.

> If necessary, remove the cap from the opening
> fig. 25.
> Insert the mechanical key into the slot on the
inside and turn it all the way to the right (right
door) or left (left door).
> If necessary, install the cap in the opening and
close the door.
Fig. 24 Driver's door: door lock cylinder Once the front passenger’s door or rear doors*
[RAz-1149| close, it will no longer be possible to open them
from the outside. The front doors can be opened
from the inside by pulling the door handle one
time. The rear doors* can be unlocked from the
inside by pulling the door handle one time and
then opened by pulling the door handle again. If
the child safety lock in one of the rear doors is ac-
tivated, you must first pull the door handle from
the inside. Then you can open the door from the
outside.
Z\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 34.
OMe aa)
Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm system
If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle

break-in, audio and visual warning signals are
Fig. 25 Door: mechanically locking
triggered. The anti-theft alarm system is switch-
ed on or off when locking or unlocking your vehi-
Unlocking or locking the driver's door with cle. If the alarm is triggered, it will shut off auto-
the mechanical key matically after a certain amount of time.
> Remove the mechanical key > page 38. Switching the alarm off manually
> To unlock the driver's door, turn the mechanical
> To switch the alarm off, press the G button on
key to the unlock position in the direction of ar-
the vehicle key or switch the ignition on.
row @) ° fig. 24.
> Pull the door handle to open the driver's door. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the anti-
> To lock the driver's door, select the "P" position theft alarm system may have the following fea-
and turn the mechanical key once to the close tures: >
8W7012721BB
position @=> A\.
37
Opening and closing
Break-in security feature

The alarm will sound if there is a break-in at the
doors, hood, and/or luggage compartment lid.
RAZ-0720,
Interior/towing protection monitor
The alarm will be triggered if there are move-
ments detected in the vehicle interior (for exam-
ple, by animals) or if there is a change in the vehi-
cle angle (for example, when the vehicle is being
towed).
You can prevent the alarm from being triggered

by deactivating the interior/towing protection
monitor. Fig. 26 Your vehicle key set
Deactivating the interior/towing protection @ Vehicle key

monitor
You can unlock and lock your vehicle with the ve-
There are the following options for deactivating hicle key.
the interior/towing protection monitor:
@ Mechanical key and release buttons for
> Press the & button on the vehicle key a second the mechanical key
time within two seconds. Or
A mechanical key is integrated in the vehicle key.
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key:
To remove it, press the release button and re-
Touch the sensor on the door handle a second
move the mechanical key.
time within two seconds. Or
> Turn the mechanical key in the door lock to the Using the mechanical key, you can:
close position a second time within two sec-
— Applies to: vehicles with lockable glove com-
onds.
partment: locking/unlocking the glove com-
> Applies to: vehicles with MMI: Select on the
partment.
home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service >
— Manually unlock and lock the doors > page 37.
Interior monitoring.
— Applies to: sedan with locking backrests: Lock-
If you lock the vehicle, then the interior/towing ing and unlocking the backrest > page 94.
protection monitor will stay off until the next — Unlock the luggage compartment lid using the
time the vehicle is unlocked. emergency release > page 44.
@® Key fob with vehicle code

ZA WARNING Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
No one, especially children, should stay in the
Open the key tag and scratch to reveal the vehicle
vehicle when it is locked from the outside, be-
code. You can unlock the Audi connect vehicle
cause the windows can no longer be opened
control services* for your vehicle with this vehicle
from the inside. Locked doors make it more
code. For additional information, see
difficult for emergency workers to enter the
=> page 184. If a key fob is lost, contact an au-
vehicle, which puts lives at risk.
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility.
@) Tips
The interior/towing protection monitoring on-
ly functions correctly when the windows and
the roof* are closed.
38
Opening and closing
@ PANIC button
@) Tips
In an emergency, you can press the PANIC button
— The vehicle key function can be temporarily
to trigger the alarm for the anti-theft alarm sys-
disrupted by interference from transmitters
tem. The vehicle horn and emergency flashers
near the vehicle working in the same fre-
will turn on if you trigger the alarm.
quency range (such as a mobile device or ra-
—To trigger the alarm, press the [PANIC] but- dio equipment). Always check if your vehicle
ton @)° fig. 26. is locked.
—To turn the alarm off, press the [PANIC] button — Applies to MMI: You can view the number of
again. keys programmed to the vehicle by selecting
on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
Lost key/replacing a key Service > Vehicle information.
If a vehicle key is lost, contact an authorized Audi — The system complies with United States FCC
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have regulations and ISED regulations
this vehicle key deactivated. It is important to => page 297.
bring all keys with you.
If a key is lost, you should report it to your insur- Unlocking and locking the vehicle
ance company.
B8W-0148
Electronic immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized use of
the vehicle.
In some cases, it may not be possible to start the

vehicle if there is a vehicle key from a different
vehicle manufacturer on the key chain.
Data in the vehicle key

Fig. 27 Door handle: sensor for locking
When driving, service and maintenance-relevant
data is continuously stored in your vehicle key. An Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service have various options for unlocking and locking
Facility can read out this data and tell you about your vehicle. The settings in the MMI specify
the work your vehicle needs. which doors will unlock > page 35.
Z\ WARNING Unlocking or locking using the vehicle key

buttons
> To unlock the vehicle, press the @ button
=> page 38, fig. 26.
@) Note
> To lock the vehicle, press the ff button once.
Protect the key against high temperatures
and direct sunlight. Unlocking or locking using the sensors
() For the sake of the environment > To unlock a door or the luggage compartment
XE Do not dispose of vehicle keys in household lid, grasp the door handle or luggage compart-
trash. They contain materials that can be re- ment lid handle.
cycled. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or > To lock the vehicle, close the door and touch
8W7012721BB
authorized Audi Service Facility for more in- the sensor on the door handle once >fig. 27.
formation. Do not grasp the door handle while locking the
vehicle, or else the vehicle will not lock. The >
39
Opening and closing
door cannot be opened for a brief period direct- the vehicle key
ly after locking it. This way you have the oppor-
tunity to check if the doors locked correctly.
RAZ-0722
Unlocking and locking with the Audi connect
vehicle control service!)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
Requirement: Audi connect vehicle control serv-

ices must be activated > page 184. The vehicle
must be parking and the ignition must be switch-
ed off.
Z\ WARNING
BFV-0277
G) Tips
— Only use the vehicle key when you can see
the vehicle.
— The vehicle can only be locked when the "P”
selector lever position is engaged.
— Do not use the vehicle key to lock and un-
lock when you are inside the vehicle. Other- Fig. 29 Vehicle key (rear side): removing the battery holder
wise, you could trigger the anti-theft
alarm*. If this happens, press the @ unlock LED in the vehicle key
button. The LED (@) indicates the vehicle key function.
> If you press a button briefly, the LED blinks
@) Tips
once.
> If you press and hold a button (convenience
— When unlocking or locking the vehicle, the opening/closing), the LED blinks several times.
convenience key cannot be more than ap- > If the LED does not blink, the vehicle key bat-
proximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the tery is drained. Replace the battery in the vehi-
door handle or luggage compartment. cle key.
— Unlocking with the convenience key (keyless
access) can be deactivated in the MMI sys- Replacing the vehicle key battery
tem > page 35. > Press the release buttons (2) > fig. 28 and re-
— To prevent the vehicle battery from dis- move the mechanical key.
charging, the energy management gradual- » Press the release buttons @) > fig. 29 while
ly switches off convenience functions that pulling the battery holder out of the vehicle key
are not needed. You then may no longer be in the direction of the arrow.
able to unlock your vehicle with the sensors. > Replace the battery and insert the new battery
with the “+” symbol facing down.
> Slide the battery holder carefully into the vehi-
cle key.
> Insert the mechanical key.
D_Incertain countries
40
Opening and closing
ZA WARNING inside it. To reduce the risk of injury, do not

allow children to play in or around the vehi-
If batteries or coin cell batteries are swal-
ley
lowed or enter the body in any other way, they
—To reduce the risk of injuries by pinching,
can cause serious or fatal injuries within a
make sure that no one is in the operating
short period of time. There is a risk of chemi-
area of the luggage compartment lid, in-
cal burns.
cluding the hinge areas and the upper and
— Keep vehicle keys and key fobs with batter-
lower edge of the luggage compartment lid.
ies out of the reach of children.
— After closing the luggage compartment lid,
— Keep new or used batteries away from chil-
make sure that it is latched. The luggage
dren.
compartment lid could open suddenly while
— If the battery compartment on a vehicle key
driving, which would increase the risk of an
does not close securely, stop using the key
accident.
and keep it away from children.
— Never drive with the luggage compartment
— Seek medical attention immediately if you
lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases
suspect that a battery was swallowed or has
from the surrounding area can enter the ve-
entered the body in any other way.
hicle interior and increase the risk of asphyx-
iation.
@ For the sake of the environment
— If there is a luggage rack (such as a bicycle
Discharged batteries must be disposed of us- rack) on the luggage compartment lid, the
ing methods that will not harm the environ- luggage compartment lid may not open
ment. Do not dispose of them in household completely under certain circumstances or it
trash. could close by itself if open due to the extra
weight. Therefore, the open luggage com-
G) Tips partment lid must be given additional sup-
Replacement batteries for the vehicle key port or the cargo must first be removed
must meet the same specifications as the from the luggage rack.
original battery. — Applies to vehicles with power-operated or
sensor-controlled luggage compartment lid:
Luggage compartment Pay careful attention when closing the lug-
gage compartment lid. Otherwise, you could
lid
cause serious injury to yourself or others de-
General information spite the pinch protection.
ZA\ WARNING @) Note

— Applies to vehicles with anti-theft alarm sys- The luggage compartment lid can bump into
tem: When the vehicle is locked from the objects such as the garage ceiling when open-
outside, no one - especially children - should ing and become damaged.
remain in the vehicle, because the windows
can no longer open from the inside @) Tips
= page 37. Locked doors make it more diffi- — When the vehicle is locked, the luggage
cult for emergency workers to enter the ve- compartment lid can be unlocked separately
hicle, which puts lives at risk. by pressing the “S button twice on the vehi-
— Always close and lock the luggage compart- cle key. The luggage compartment lid locks
ment lid and the doors when the vehicle is automatically when it is closed again.
8W7012721BB
not in use. Otherwise someone such as a — The ability to open the luggage compart-
child could enter the vehicle through the ment lid using the handle can be deactivat-
luggage compartment and become locked ed or activated in the MMI > page 35. >
41
Opening and closing
— Applies to: vehicles with fixed rear backr- omatic luggage compar nt lid
ests: The luggage compartment lid can be Applies to: vehicles with automatic luggage compartment lid
unlocked from the inside in an emergency.
Opening and closing the luggage

compartment lid
Fig. 31 Luggage compartment lid: @ closing button*, @)

lock button* (vehicles with convenience key*)
The luggage compartment lid can be opened and

closed automatically > A\ in General informa-
Fig. 30 Driver's door: opening the luggage compartment
lid tion on page 41.
Opening the luggage compartment lid

Opening the luggage compartment lid
> When the ignition is switched off, press and
» Applies to: vehicles without convenience key:
hold the 4s button on the vehicle key twice. Or
Unlock the vehicle or the luggage compartment
» Engage the "P" selector lever position and pull
lid using the @/ Zs button on the vehicle key
the << button* in the driver's door. Or
and press the handle in the luggage compart-
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press
ment lid. Or
the handle in the luggage compartment lid.
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press
The vehicle key cannot be more than approxi-
the handle in the luggage compartment lid.
mately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage
The vehicle key cannot be more than approxi-
compartment.
mately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage
compartment. Or Closing the luggage compartment lid
> When the ignition is switched off, press and
> Press the < button in the luggage compart-
hold the 4s button on the vehicle key twice. Or
ment lid. Or
> Engage the "P" selector lever position and pull
> Press the handle in the luggage compartment
the <3 button* in the driver's door.
lid. Or
Closing the luggage compartment lid > Press the luggage compartment lid downward
slightly. Or
> Applies to vehicles without automatic luggage
> When the ignition is switched on, pull the <
compartment lid: Use the inside grip to pull the
switch in the driver's door > page 42, fig. 30
luggage compartment lid down and allow it to
until the luggage compartment lid is closed. Or
drop gently to close it. Or
» Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press
» Applies to vehicles with automatic luggage
and hold the 4s button on the vehicle key while
compartment lid: Note > page 42.
the ignition is switched off until the luggage
compartment lid closes. Make sure there is
ZA WARNING enough distance (maximum of approximately 9
Observe the safety precautions > page 41. feet (3 m)) between you and the luggage com-
partment lid. Or
> Applies to vehicles with convenience key: When
the ignition is switched off, press the < / fi* >
42
Opening and closing
button in the luggage compartment lid. The ve- necessary to use more force when doing this.
hicle key must not be more than approximately Move the lid slowly to reduce the amount of
4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage compart- force needed.
ment and it must not be inside the vehicle. If
you press the &* button, then the vehicle will Opening and closing the luggage
lock. compartment lid with foot motion (kicking
movement)
Storing the luggage compartment lid Applies to: vehicles with sensor-controlled luggage compart-
opening position ment lid
Applies to: Sportback
.
Ssq
The position must be at a certain height or higher 9
<=
to store. go
a
> Bring the luggage compartment lid into the de-

sired open position. If you want to move the
luggage compartment lid to a lower position,
move it slowly in small increments; otherwise,
the luggage compartment lid will close auto-
matically.
> Press and hold the <3 button in the luggage Fig. 32 Vehicle rear: foot motion (example)
compartment lid for at least four seconds to
store the new opening position. A visual and The luggage compartment lid can be opened and
audio signal will follow. closed automatically ) > A\ in General informa-
> To set a higher open position, wait at least five tion on page 41.
seconds and then carefully press the luggage
Requirements: you must be carrying your conven-
compartment lid upward.
ience key* with you. The ignition must be switch-
> Press and hold the <3 button again for at least
ed off. You must be standing at the center behind
four seconds to store the desired opening posi-
the luggage compartment lid.
tion.
> Move your foot back and forth under the bump-
The automatic opening or closing will stop if: er one time > fig. 32. Do not touch the bumper.
— You press the < button or press the handle in Make sure you have firm footing. The luggage
the luggage compartment lid again Or compartment lid will open or close ) once the
— If something blocks the luggage compartment system detects the movement. The automatic
lid or makes it difficult for the lid to move. opening or closing will be canceled if you re-
peat one of the movements described.
If you press the <s button or press the handle in
the luggage compartment lid again, the luggage
Z\ WARNING
compartment lid will open again.
A\ WARNING
iG) Tips
The luggage compartment lid will only open
@ Tips or close ») if you perform the movement as
described. This prevents the luggage com-
The luggage compartment lid can be operat-
partment lid from opening or closing due to
ed manually if the vehicle battery is low. It is
similar movements )), such as when you walk >
8W7012721BB
D_ The closing function applies to vehicles that also have au-

tomatic luggage compartment lid operation.
43
Opening and closing
between the rear of the vehicle and your ga-
B8W-0267
rage door. In some situations, the function
may be limited or temporarily unavailable.
This may happen if:
— You are standing too close to the bumper or
too far away from it
— The luggage compartment lid was closed or
opened immediately beforehand
— You park close to a hedge and the branches
move back and forth under the vehicle for a Applies to: vehicles with power top
Fig. 34 Luggage compartment lid: mechanical key in lock
long period of time
cylinder
— You clean your vehicle, for example with a
pressure washer or in a car wash » Fold the backrest on the rear bench seat for-
— There is heavy rain ward > page 94.
—The bumper is very dirty, for example after > Remove the mechanical key > page 38.
driving on salt-covered roads > Using the mechanical key, pry the cover off the
— There is interference to the vehicle key's ra- luggage compartment lid trim panel.
dio signal, such as from mobile devices or > To unlock the luggage compartment lid, press
remote controls the lever in the direction of the arrow using a
suitable object (such as a screwdriver) or using
Mechanically unlocking luggage the mechanical key if necessary.
compartment lid > Fold the backrest backward until it locks into
place.
Applies to: vehicles with power top

>» Remove the integrated mechanical key
=> page 38.
> Insert the mechanical key in the luggage com-
partment lid lock cylinder.
> Turn the key counterclockwise. The luggage
compartment lid opens.
If you have folded the backrests into the up-

right position, always check if the lock is cor-
rectly engaged by pulling forward on the
backrest.
Fig. 33 Inner luggage compartment lid: access to the

emergency release. (2) Coupe, @) Sportback
44
Opening and closing
Child safety lock > To activate or deactivate the manual child safe-
Applies to: vehicles with child safety locks ty lock for the rear door handle, open the re-
spective rear door and turn the key switch with
The child safety lock prevents the rear doors
the mechanical key in the direction of the arrow
from being opened from the inside and the rear
or opposite the direction of the arrow > fig. 36.
power windows from being operated.
This will disable the function of the rear door
handle.
RAZ-0826
> Make sure the child safety lock is working by
checking the function on the rear power win-
dow switch and door handle.
Applies to: vehicles with power child safety locks:

It is not possible to operate the rear climate con-
trol system* when the child safety lock is activat-
ed. The SET REAR function allows you to adjust
all settings in the rear using the climate control
system controls in the cockpit.
B8W-0085
Message in the instrument cluster display

@/ Child safety lock: malfunction! Please
contact Service
There is a malfunction in the child safety lock.

Press the @/ G4 button again.
If the message stays on, drive immediately to an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Applies to: vehicles with manual child safety locks Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Fig. 36 Rear door: manual child safety lock
Z\ WARNING
Vehicles with button
— Observe the safety precautions > page 34.
Applies to: vehicles with power child safety locks
—A malfunction in the child safety lock could
> To activate and deactivate the child safety lock allow the rear doors to be opened from the
(door handle and power window switch) for the inside, which increases the risk of an acci-
a rear door, press the left or right @ button in dent.
the driver's door @) that corresponds to that
rear door > fig. 35. The indicator light in the
button turns on/blinks.
Power windows
> Make sure the child safety lock is working by Opening and closing the windows
checking the function on the rear power win-
re
dow switch and door handle. q2.
2
2
r}
Vehicles with 4 button a
Applies to: vehicles with manual child safety lock
> To activate or deactivate the child safety lock

for the power window switch in the rear doors,
press the 4 button in the driver's door @)
8W7012721BB
> fig. 35. The indicator light in the button turns

on/blinks.
Fig. 37 Driver's door: power window switch*
4s
Opening and closing
Power window switches: until the driver's door or front passenger's

Left front door door has been opened.
Right front door — The power windows are equipped with pinch
OOOO
protection. The automatic window may stop

Left rear door*
closing and will open all the way again even
Right rear door*
if no obstacle is detected. Pull the power
Central switch* for opening or closing all side window switch up until the window is com-
windows at the same time
pletely raised.
Opening and closing the windows
Convenience opening and closing
The driver can control all power windows. All
power window switches are equipped with a two-
stage function: For power top* convenience opening/closing, re-
fer to the information in > page 52.
> To open or close the window completely, press
the switch down or pull the switch up briefly to Convenience opening and closing the
the second level. The operation will stop if the windows and roof*
switch is pressed or pulled again.
You can set in the MMI if all windows or the roof*
> To select a position in between opened and
should open or close all at once > page 35, Set-
closed, press or pull the switch to the first level
ting the central locking system.
until the desired window position is reached.
> Press and hold the & or & button on the vehicle
Correcting a malfunction in the one-touch key until all windows and the roof* have
up/down function
reached the desired position > /A\.
You can reactivate the one-touch up/down func- > Touch the sensor* on the door handle until all
tion if it malfunctions. of the windows and the roof* are closed. Do not
place your hand in the door handle when doing
> Pull the power window switch up until the win-
this.
dow is completely raised.
> Release the switch and pull it up again for at When all of the windows and the roof* are
least one second. closed, the turn signals will flash once.
ZA WARNING ZA WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions > page 34. — Never close the windows or the roof* care-
— Never close the windows carelessly or in an lessly or in an uncontrolled manner, because
uncontrolled manner, because this increases this increases the risk of injury.
the risk of injury. — For security reasons, the windows and the
roof* can only be opened and closed with
G) Tips the vehicle key at a maximum distance of
— The windows will automatically open slight- approximately 6.5 feet (2 m) away from the
ly when you open the doors. vehicle. Always pay attention when using
— If the window in the driver's or front pas- the f& button to close the windows and the
senger's door is completely open, it will roof* so that no one is pinched. The closing
raise slightly when the door is opened. The process will stop immediately when the f&
window will lower again when you close the button is released.
door.
— You can still open and close the windows for
several minutes after turning the ignition
off. The power windows do not switch off
46
Opening and closing
Panoramic glass roof Roof emergency closing

If an object is detected when closing, the roof
Operating the panoramic glass roof and
“Si au seGe will open again automatically. In this case, you
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof and roof sun- can then close it with the power emergency clos-
shade ing function.
> Within five seconds after the sunroof opens au-

tomatically, pull the applicable button until the
roof is closed.
Z\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury, always pay atten-
tion when closing the roof. Always switch the
ignition off and take the key with you when
leaving the vehicle.
Fig. 38 Headliner: panoramic glass roof and sunshade*
buttons CG) Note
The control buttons are equipped with a two- Always close the roof when you leave the vehi-
stage function. cle and when there is precipitation to reduce
the risk of damage to the interior equipment,
Operating the roof sunshade particularly the electronic equipment.
> Opening and closing the sunshade: push the )
switch in the headliner @ briefly toward the @ Tips
rear or forward to the second level. — Interior airflow: wind inside the vehicle can
> Partially opening the sunshade: press the be reduced by the roof sunshade when the
switch to the first level until the sunshade panoramic glass roof is all the way open.
reaches the desired position. When the sunshade is all the way open,
close it approximately 4 inches (10 cm) until
Opersting the‘reur the wind inside the vehicle subsides.
» Tilting the roof: press the A> switch in the — After switching off the ignition, the roof and
headliner briefly up to the second level (@). sunshades can still be operated for several
> Closing the tilted roof: pull the 2> switch down minutes as long as neither of the front
briefly to the second level. doors have been opened.
> Opening the roof: slide the > switch back — It is not possible to open the roof when
briefly twice in a row to the second level @). temperatures are too low.
> Closing the opened roof: push the 2S switch
forward briefly to the second level. Valet pa rki ng
> Opening or closing partially: slide the A> Applies to: vehicles with valet parking function
switch to the first level and hold it there until
the roof reaches the desired position. The valet parking function can protect the lug-
gage compartment from unauthorized access.
Quick opening
The [VALET] button for valet parking is in the
You can also open the roof and roof sunshade in glove compartment.
one movement.
> Push the 4S switch back briefly to the second

8W7012721BB
level ) twice in a row.
47
Opening and closing
You can switch the valet parking function on, for tems or house lights from inside your vehicle.
example when someone else is parking your vehi- These functions are operated in the MMI. Multi-
cle ). The vehicle can be driven, locked, and un- ple receivers can be programmed, which can con-
locked using the vehicle key, but access to the trol the functions of up to eight2) hand-held
luggage compartment is blocked. transmitters.

> Press the [VALET] button in the glove compart-
ZA WARNING
ment. The LED in the button turns on if the — When operating or programming the garage
function is switched on. door opener, make sure that no people or
> Lock the glove compartment with the mechani- objects are in the area immediately sur-
cal key. rounding the equipment. People can be in-
>» Applies to: vehicles with lockable pass-through jured or property can be damaged if struck
and lockable rear seat backrests: To secure the when closing.
luggage compartment from the vehicle interior, — Do not allow yourself to be distracted from
lock the pass-through and the rear seat backr- traffic by the viewing and operating the dis-
ests using the mechanical key > page 95, plays.
=> page 94.
> Give your vehicle key to the service personnel Gi) Tips
who are parking your vehicle and keep the me- — Ifyou sell your vehicle, reset all settings to
chanical key. the factory default settings > page 222.
— The system complies with United States FCC
The following buttons are deactivated when the
regulations and ISED regulations
valet parking function is switched on:
=> page 297.
— <3 Button in the driver's door
— &s Button on the vehicle key (i) Tips
— Handle in the luggage compartment lid Before you program your system to the ga-
If the valet parking function is switched on, a rage door opener, first check the compatibili-
ty:
message will appear every time the ignition is
switched on. — Ask an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility or check at www.
@ Tips homelink.com. You can also find more infor-
mation about HomeLink there.
Please note that the luggage compartment
— You can display information about Home-
can still be accessed from the vehicle interior
Link (compatibility level/status/country
in vehicles with fixed rear seat backrests or
code/HomeLink generation) in the MMI:
ones that cannot be locked, even when the
— Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Set-
valet parking function is switched on.
tings & Service > Garage door opener > @.
Garage door opener

Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
Requirements: the remote control transmitter
With the garage door opener, you can activate must be programmed > page 49, the vehicle >
systems such as the garage doors, security sys-
D_ This function is not available in all countries.

2) The possible number of hand-held transmitters depends
on the equipment.
48
Opening and closing
must be within range of the system, and the igni- sired button: @). Follow the instructions in the
tion must be switched on. MMI.
> If you would like to reprogram systems that are
There are multiple options to open or close the
already programmed, select on the home
system (such as the garage door).
screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage
> If you have only programmed one remote con- door opener. Press the Z button and select 7
trol transmitter, press the rs button on the for the system to be reprogrammed. Select:
display. Or Program. Follow the instructions in the MMI.
> If you have programmed multiple remote con-
With some systems, the garage door opener will
trol transmitters, press the 2 button on the
be immediately available after programming.
display and then press the respective system
With other systems, the garage door opener
button. Or
must also be synchronized.
> Applies to: vehicles with programmable steer-
ing wheel button: If you have configured the Synchronizing!)
programmable steering wheel button, press
Requirement: the hand transmitter must already
the *K button > page 30 and then press the re-
be programmed and the vehicle must be within
spective button for the system. Or
range of the system (such as the garage door).
> Applies to: vehicles with location pairing: If you
have programmed Location pairing, press the If the system synchronization is performed di-
button for this in the display (notification cen- rectly after the programming procedure, follow
ter > page 23). As you approach the system, the instructions on the MMI.
the button is displayed on the MMI.
If you would like to sync at a later time:
If transmission was successful, the message:
Send to: XXX will appear.
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
opener.
> Press the button for the system that you would
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener like to synchronize.
You can program both fixed code and rolling code > Follow the instructions in the MMI.
systems in the MMI using the procedure that is Renaming programmed systems
described.
You can rename the programmed systems indi-
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. vidually (names may have a maximum of 10 char-
Programming the system acters).
Applies to: MMI >» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Requirement: the hand transmitter must be VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
present and the vehicle must be within range of opener.
the system (such as the garage door) that you > Press the Z button.
would like to program. > Press the 7 button for the system that you
would like to rename.
> If you are programming the garage door opener
> Select: Rename. If necessary, delete the preset
for the first time, press the - button on the
name, such as Garage door opener 1.
display. Follow the instructions in the MMI. Or
> Follow the instructions in the MMI.
> If you would like to program other systems, se-
lect on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
Service > Garage door opener. Select the de-
8W7012721BB
2) Only applies to rolling code systems
49
Opening and closing
Location pairing
G) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with location pairing
In some cases, the system may need to be
For easier operation, you can program your sys-
programmed in a different mode (“D mode”).
tem's location.
— Switch the ignition on.
Requirements: the respective hand transmitter — Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
must be programmed > page 49 and the vehicle VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage
must be located in front of the system. door opener.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — Press and hold the desired button @).
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door — Select Yes, in D mode and follow the in-
opener. structions on the MMI.
> Press the Z button.
> Press the 7 button for the system your vehicle
is facing.
> Select: Location pairing.
> Follow the instructions in the MMI.
Only a maximum of three systems can be dis-

played in the notification center > page 23. If
you would like to have all systems displayed,
press aa.
Deleting programmed systems
The programmed systems can be deleted individ-
ually or all at once.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
opener.
> Press the Z button.
> To delete an individual system, press the L]
button for the desired system. If the checkmark
¥ is set, select: Delete.
> To delete all systems, select: All > Delete.
@ Tips
— Make sure the batteries in the hand trans-
mitter are charged before starting the pro-
gramming process.
— The programming process may take up to
30 seconds. It may be necessary for the
hand transmitter to be pressed again in the
meantime.
— The garage door opener may need to be
synchronized with the system after pro-
gramming. Follow the manufacturer's in-
structions for doing this.
sO
Power top
Power top Opening and closing the power top

Automatic power top e8
a
eT e e eeu) 2
=e
Applies to: vehicles with power top a
The power top opens and closes automatically.

When open, the power top is stored completely
in the power top compartment. The power top
can be opened or closed at speeds up to 30 mph
(50 km/h). The power top will not open when the
temperature is below -5 °F (-15 °C).
Fig. 39 Center console: power top switch
Under normal conditions, the power top is wind-
and waterproof. In rare cases, small droplets of Requirement: the luggage compartment lid must
water may form under extreme weather condi- be closed.
tions, such as torrential or prolonged rain. That is
normal and no cause for concern. Opening and closing the power top
Follow the care instructions to keep the power > Switch the ignition on.
top free of leaks and to maintain its appearance > To open the power top, pull and hold the switch
=> page 267, Care and cleaning. Also observe the @ during the entire process.
following: > To close the power top, pull and hold the switch
@ during the entire process.
— Open and stow the power top only when it is
clean and dry. Stowing the power top when it is Opening and closing the power top
damp can create imprints in it, and mildew and (automatic operation)
other damage can result if it is left stowed It is not necessary to hold the switch.
while damp for long periods of time.
Requirement: the speed must be between 4 mph
— To prevent scratching or damaging the power
(6 km/h) and 30 mph (50 km/h). There must be
top, do not use any sharp-edged objects to re-
no passengers or objects on the rear bench seat.
move ice and snow. The rear window may be
cleared of ice with a standard ice scraper. > Switch the ignition on.
— Do not leave the power top open for several > To open the power top completely, pull the
weeks or the creases in it may become discol- switch @ briefly.
ored. > To close the power top completely, pull the
— Do not open the power top when the tempera- switch @) briefly.
ture is below 32 °F (0 °C). The fabric in the
The status of the power top is shown in the in-
power top loses elasticity in sub-zero tempera-
strument cluster display when operating the
tures.
power top switch.
You can close the power top when the wind de-
flector is installed > page 54.
A message will appear in the instrument cluster

if the power top cannot be opened or closed.
ZX WARNING
8W7012721BB
—When operating the power top, make sure

the function is not affected by wind or other
51
Power top
factors and that it does not interfere with Power top convenience opening and closing
other drivers. Applies to: vehicles with power top
— Visibility to the rear is limited when operat-
“Ss paw-0149
ing the power top. Avoid operating the top
while driving in reverse.
— Never drive with the power top unlocked.
The wind from driving could cause the pow-
er top to open. This can result in injuries and
damage to the vehicle.
— Make sure no one will be injured by the pow-
er top supports or other moving compo-
nents when opening and closing the top.
Fig. 40 Driver's door: turning the key to open and close
— The headroom in the rear is reduced when
opening and closing the power top. Make Convenience opening with the driver door
sure the rear passengers keep enough dis- lock
tance from the power top to reduce the risk
> To unlock the vehicle, press the & button on the
of injury.
vehicle control key.
@) Note
> Turn the mechanical key in the driver door lock
To prevent damage to the power top: to the opening position one time @).
— do not store any objects in the power top > Turn the mechanical key to the opening posi-
storage compartment. tion a second time within two seconds and
— make sure there is enough space above the hold it there until the power top opens com-
vehicle when opening or closing the power pletely.
top.
Convenience closing with the driver door lock
@) Tips > Remove the mechanical key > page 38.
— To avoid draining the vehicle battery unnec- > Turn the mechanical key in the driver door lock
essarily, do not open and close the power to the closing position one time ®).
top repeatedly when the engine is switched > Turn the mechanical key to the closing position
off. a second time within two seconds and hold it
— The power top can also be operated manual- there until the power top is completely closed.
ly temporarily if there is a malfunction
Convenience opening with the convenience
=> page 55, Power top emergency opera- key*
tion. Have the problem corrected as soon as
possible by an authorized Audi dealer or au- > Press and hold the & button on the vehicle key
until the power top is completely open.
thorized Audi Service Facility.
— If the vehicle is parked with the power top Convenience closing with the convenience
open, the vehicle interior is not protected key*
from damaging weather or unauthorized ac-
> Press the f& button on the vehicle key to lock
cess. Lock any items you leave behind in the
the vehicle.
luggage compartment. Close the power top
> Press the f button a second time within two
before leaving the vehicle.
seconds and hold it until the power top is com-
— The side windows automatically lower
pletely closed, or
slightly when opening or closing the power
> Touch the sensor* > page 39, fig. 27 on the
top.
door handle long enough until the power top is >
52
Power top
completely closed. Do not place your hand in

® Note
the door handle when doing this.
To reduce the risk of damage, make sure there
The opening or closing process will stop immedi- are no sensitive objects in the power top stor-
ately if you release the key or stop touching the age compartment's range of motion.
button or sensor*. Opening and closing with the
convenience key* is possible from up to 13 feet Messages
(4 m) away. Applies to: vehicles with power top
ZX WARNING B Power top: malfunction! You may continue

driving (limited functionality). See owner's
Read and follow the important safety precau-
manual
tions > A\ in Opening and closing the power
top on page 51. This message appears if there is a malfunction in
the system. Try to open/close the power top
Power top storage compartment again. If the message still appears, have an au-
Applies to: vehicles with power top thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility correct the malfunction. Do not drive
faster than 30 mph (50 km/h) until it is correct-
B8W-0251
ed.
Power top: rear seats occupied. Cannot run

automatically. See owner's manual
This message appears if passengers or objects

are detected on the rear seat while the power top
is operating. Make sure that passengers or ob-
jects on the rear seat have enough distance be-
Fig. 41 Luggage compartment: power top storage com- tween them and the power top.
partment and button
Power top: operation currently not possible
Raising/lowering the power top storage
If the power top is operated continually for a
compartment
long period of time, the overload protection acti-
> To raise/lower the power top storage compart- vates for approximately 15 to 30 minutes. You
ment, pull the button in the luggage compart- can open or close the power top again after that.
ment.
Power top: malfunction! Unable to operate
The power top storage compartment can be
This message appears when there is a malfunc-
raised when the power top is closed. This pro- tion. The power top can be operated manually
vides more cargo space in the luggage compart- => page 55.
ment.
The open power top is stored and protected in Z\ WARNING

the power top storage compartment. The power Never drive with the power top unlocked. The
top storage compartment cannot be raised when wind from driving could cause the power top
the power top is open. Because of this, the cargo to open. This can result in injuries and dam-
area in the luggage compartment is smaller age to the vehicle.
when the power top is open than when it is
closed.
8W7012721BB
53
Power top
Wind deflector Removing the wind deflector

Applies to: vehicles with wind deflector > Fold the handle (2) upward and lift the center of
°© the wind deflector slightly @).
a
Kd> > Remove the wind deflector from the mounts in
&
oO the side trim on the passenger's side.
> Pull the wind deflector out of the mounts on
the driver side and lift it out.
> Fold the wind deflector together and store it
securely in the luggage compartment.
A WARNING
Fig. 42 Rear of the vehicle: inserting the wind deflector (1) — Do not use the wind deflector to secure car-
go.
B8V-0281
— Be careful when installing so you do not
pinch your fingers.
— Pay attention to the traffic when installing
the wind deflector. Install the wind deflec-
tor from the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
C) Note
Fig. 43 Rear of the vehicle: inserting the wind deflector (2) Do not lean against the vehicle when instal-
ling the wind deflector. Hard objects and dec-
The wind deflector reduces air movement in the orations on clothing such as belt buckles can
passenger compartment in order to make driving scratch the paint.
more comfortable.
@ Tips
The wind deflector is located in the luggage com-
partment inside the storage bag* or under the — The wind deflector works best when all of
cargo floor. the windows are rolled up while driving.
— Only store the wind deflector in the storage
Inserting and positioning the wind deflector bag* or under the cargo floor when it is dry.
> Open the rear window on the passenger's side.
> Remove the wind deflector from the luggage
compartment and fold it apart once. The wind
deflector is installed in the correct position
when the long side is toward the front and the
wind deflector frame is at the top.
> Insert both pins on the wind deflector (@) into
the mounts in the side trim panel on the driv-
er's side.
> Fold the handle @) upward and Lift the center of
the wind deflector slightly @).
> Now guide the wind deflector into the mounts
on the passenger's side @) and press lightly in
the middle of the wind deflector ©) until the
handle locks in place.
> Raise the wind deflector so that it is upright.
54
Power top
Power top emergency — Make sure all windows are lowered during
operation emergency operation.
— Do not reach into the power top supports
or other moving components.
— Never drive with the power top unlocked.
The wind from driving could cause the pow-
B8W-0258
er top to open. This can result in injuries and
damage to the vehicle.
Step 1: Release the power top storage

compartment lid
B8W-0259
Fig. 44 Luggage compartment: vehicle tool kit; release lev-
er
Only close the power top manually in an emer-

gency. Have a second person assist.
> Switch the ignition on if necessary.

> Move the selector lever to the "P" position (au-
tomatic transmission).
Fig. 45 Rear bench seat: releasing the power top storage
> Set the parking brake.
compartment lid with the emergency release handle
> If possible, open all of the windows.
> Open the luggage compartment lid and remove > Remove the cover behind the rear seats by pull-
the emergency release handle (d) from the left ing in the direction of the arrow. If necessary,
side trim panel. the cover can also be removed with the screw-
> Lift the cargo floor cover using the plastic han- driver.
dle and hook the handle above the power top > Put the emergency release handle and the hex
storage compartment. socket round blade together.
> Remove the hex socket round blade and the > To unlock the power top storage compartment
flat-head screwdriver blade from the vehicle lid, insert the emergency release handle into
tool kit @). the opening on the rear panel of the power top
>» Release the cargo floor cover again. storage compartment lid.
> Fold the backrests forward so that you can pull > Turn the emergency release handle in the direc-
the release lever in the side trim panel @). tion of the arrow until it locks into place.
> Close the luggage compartment lid.
> Switch the ignition off.
> To reduce the pressure in the power top hy-
draulics, pull the switch to open the power top
and hold for approximately 10 to 15 seconds
=> page 51.
Z\ WARNING
— The risk of pinching your hands or other peo-
8W7012721BB
ple increases during all of the power top

emergency operation steps.
55
Power top
> Stand next to the vehicle when the door is

compartment lid open.
Applies to: vehicles with power top > Hold the power top by its front edge and pull it
completely out of the power top storage com-
partment > A\ in Preparation on page 55.
B8W-0260
> Press the power top onto the windshield frame
> fig. 47.
> Remove the cap from the inside of the power
top.
> Insert the emergency release handle into the
opening and turn it clockwise until it stops
> fig. 48.
> Check to make sure the power top is latched by
Fig. 46 Rear of the vehicle: lifting the power top storage lifting at the front edge of the power top. If
compartment lid out and securing
locked correctly, the power top will not lift any
farther.
> Place the power top storage compartment lid in
the storage compartment ().
> Secure the raised power top storage compart- Step 4: Close the power to
ment lid by inserting the screwdriver into the
hinge @). Make sure to insert the screwdriver
B8W-0262
through both holes in the hinge.
> Allow the power top storage compartment lid
to lower slowly until it remains stationary.
Step 3: Lock the power top

B8F-0223
Fig. 49 Rear of the vehicle: closing the power top storage

compartment lid and power top
B8W-0263
oSq
g|
aa
Fig. 50 Rear bench seat: locking the power top storage
compartment lid with the emergency release handle
> Lift the rear edge of the power top and remove
the inserted screwdriver from the hinge.
> Close the power top storage compartment
lid @ and let the rear edge of the power top
Fig. 48 Inside of the power top: locking the power top with lower @>@.
the emergency release handle
56
Power top
> Insert the emergency release handle into the

opening in the rear panel and turn it in the di-
rection of the arrow until it locks into place
> fig. 50.
> Mount the cover again > page 55, fig. 45.
> Put the removed vehicle tool kit back in place.
— Drive a maximum of 44 mph (70 km/h) and

have the malfunction corrected immediately
by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility.
— Avoid touching the support rods and other
moving parts when opening or closing the
power top storage compartment lid. If you
do make contact, your hands could be
pinched.
— After the power top has been lowered, it

must not be pressed down entirely on the
molding or it could result in damage.
— Drive immediately to an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
have the malfunction repaired.
Make sure the locking mechanisms are locked

securely.
8W7012721BB
57
Lights and Vision
Lights and Vision traffic if the vehicle load changes. The headlight
range adjusts automatically.
Exterior lighting
Audi adaptive light
Switching the lights on and off Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive light
Audi adaptive light provides better visibility when

driving in the dark. The lights are adapted to the
road conditions based on speed, such as when
driving on expressways, rural roads, at intersec-
tions, and around curves. The adaptive lights only
function when the light switch is in the AUTO po-
sition and the all-weather lights are switched off.
ZA WARNING
Fig. 51 Instrument panel: light switch with button — Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
@ Light switch & cameras > page 126.
Turn the light switch @ to the corresponding po- — Automatic headlights are only intended to
sition when the ignition is switched on. The 2 assist the driver. The driver is still responsi-
symbol and the selected position will turn on (ex- ble for controlling the headlights and may
cept position 0). need to switch them on and off manually
depending on light and visibility conditions.
O - The daytime running lights* will automatical- For example, fog cannot be detected by the
ly turn on. In vehicles for some markets, you can light sensors. So always switch on the low
switch the automatic daytime running lights on beams ZO under these weather conditions
and off in the MMI. and when driving in the dark.
AUTO - The headlights will automatically adapt to
the surrounding brightness. (i) Tips
— If the vehicle battery has been discharging
300: — Parking lights
for a while, the parking light may switch off
2D - Low beam headlights automatically. Avoid using the parking
When the low beam headlights or parking lights lights for several hours.
are switched on, the corresponding BB or 200 in- — When using lighting equipment, the driver
dicator light will turn on depending on vehicle is responsible for adhering to any local ap-
equipment. plicable regulations while driving and when
parking the vehicle.
@ All-weather lights Zo — Only the front headlights turn on when the
Requirement: the light switch must be in the AU- daytime running lights are switched on*. In
TO or ZO position. vehicles in certain markets, the tail lights
will also turn on.
The headlights automatically adjust so that there
—Incool or damp weather, the inside of the
will be less glare, for example when the road sur-
headlights, turn signals, and tail lights can
face is wet.
fog over due to the temperature difference
Automatic headlight range control between the inside and outside. They will
clear shortly after switching them on. This
Your vehicle is equipped with automatic head-
does not affect the service life of the light-
light range control. It reduces glare for oncoming
ing.
58
Lights and Vision
Turn signal and high beam lever thames

Applies to: vehicles with high beam assistant
BFV-0012
The high beam assistant automatically turns the
high beams on or off depending on the surround-
ing conditions.
A camera on the rearview mirror mount can de-

tect light sources from other road users. The high
beams switch on or off automatically depending
on the position of vehicles driving ahead and on-
coming vehicles, the vehicle speed as well as oth-
Fig. 52 Lever: switching on the turn signal and high beams er environmental factors and traffic conditions.
The lever operates the turn signals, the high Activating high beam assistant
beams and the headlight flasher. Requirement: the light switch must be in the AU-
Turn signals 15> TO position and the high beam assistant must be
switched on in the MMI > page 61.
The turn signal will activate when you move the
lever into a turn signal position while the ignition > To activate the high beam assistant, tap the
is switched on. The respective Kl or By indicator lever forward @) > page 59, fig. 52. The fa&4 in-
light will flash. dicator light will appear in the instrument clus-
ter display and the high beams will be switched
@ Right turn signal on or off automatically. The Ea indicator light
@® Left turn signal will turn on if the high beams are switched on.
The turn signal blinks three times if you tap the Activating and deactivating the high beam
lever (convenience turn signal). head lights manually
If an indicator light blinks twice as fast as usual, If the high beams did not switch on or off as ex-
a turn signal bulb has failed. Carefully drive to an pected, you may switch them on or off manually
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service instead:
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor- > To activate the high beams manually, tap the
rected. lever forward @) > page 59, fig. 52. The & in-
High beams =O and headlight flasher dicator light will turn on.
> To deactivate the high beams manually, pull
> Move the Lever to the corresponding position: the lever back @) > page 59, fig. 52. The high
@) High beams on (vehicles with high beam assis- beam assistant is deactivated.
tant*) > page 59
Operating the headlight flasher
@ High beams off or headlight flasher
> To operate the headlight flashers, pull the lever
The =o) indicator light in the instrument cluster back @) > page 59, fig. 52. If the high beam
will turn on. headlights are not switched on, the high beam
assistant will remain activated.
Z\ WARNING
High beams can cause glare for other drivers,
Z\ WARNING
which increases the risk of an accident. For — Observe the safety precautions and note the
this reason, only use the high beams or the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
8W7012721BB
headlight flasher when they will not create cameras > page 126.
glare for other drivers.
59
Lights and Vision
— High beam assistant is only intended to as- light into a white light using a luminescent mate-
sist the driver. The driver is responsible for rial.
controlling the high beam headlights and
Activating or deactivating laser lights
adjusting them to match the lighting and
visibility conditions. Requirement: the light switch must be in the AU-
— High beams can cause glare for other driv- TO position and the high beam assistant and the
ers, which increases the risk of an accident. laser lights must be switched on in the MMI
For this reason, only use the high beams or => page 61.
the headlight flasher when they will not cre- The high beam is controlled by the high beam as-
ate glare for other drivers. sistant. The laser high beams switch on shortly
after the LED high beams are switched on.
@ Tips
> To activate the high beam assistant, tap the
Adhere to any local applicable regulations lever forward @) > page 59, fig. 52. The Fa in-
when using the lighting equipment, for exam-
dicator light will appear in the instrument clus-
ple in regard to reducing glare for other driv-
ter display and the high beams will be switched
ers. The driver is always responsible for adher-
on or off automatically.
ing to the regulations applicable in the coun-
try where the vehicle is being operated. The laser high beams are switched on at speeds
above approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) when
the high beams are switched on. The Ed indicator
Laser lighting
Applies to: vehicles with laser lighting
light will turn on if the high beams are switched
on. The B indicator light turns on if the laser
lights are switched on.
RAZ-0948
The laser beam is switched off when the speed

decreases below approximately 30 mph (50
km/h) or when the high beam assistant switches
the LED headlights off.
ZA\ WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions and note the
cameras > page 126.
— All repair procedures on the headlights must
be performed by an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility that will
perform the work according to Audi factory
specifications. Incorrect repairs could result
in eye injury, impair the function, and may
void the vehicle's operating license.
— Opening the laser module is not permitted
Fig. 53 Headlights: label and could cause permanent injuries to the
eyes.
The laser high beams increase the range of the — Dangerous exposure to laser beams may oc-
headlights. cur if the covers are removed or if the head-
Technical changes to the headlights have signifi- lamp module housing is opened.
cantly increased the range. An additional module
integrated in the headlight converts a blue laser
60
Lights and Vision
unlocked regardless of how bright it is outside

@) Tips
the vehicle.
— The headlight contains a class 2 laser. The
technical design converts the laser beam so Daytime running lights
that there is no danger when it is used for USA models: The daytime running lights can be
its intended purpose. switched on and off.
— The laser beam emission from the head-
Canada models: This function cannot be switched
lamp has been classified in accordance with
IEC 60825-1:2007. off. They activate automatically each time the ig-
nition is switched on.
— The possible emission is below the thresh-
old for laser class 2.
— Maximum laser beam output: 5W (continu- Emergency flashers
ous emission), wavelength range A= 400 nm i2alEY
-700 nm. so S|
||
—The headlamp light functions are rated in
accordance with IEC 62471-5:2015.
— The beam emitted from the headlamp was
classified as risk group 2.
Adjusting the exterior lighting
You can adjust the exterior lighting separately.

Fig. 54 Center console: emergency flashers
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: The emergency flashers help to make other driv-
VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Exterior light- ers aware of your vehicle in dangerous situations.
ing.
> Press the A @ button to switch the emergency
Automatic headlights flashers on or off.
You can adjust the following settings in the Auto- When the emergency flashers are turned on, the
matic headlights menu: a and By indicator lights will flash at the same
time.
Activation time - You can adjust if the headlights
switch on Early, Medium, or Late based on the You can indicate a lane change or a turn when the
sensitivity of the light sensor. emergency flashers are switched on by using the
turn signal lever. The emergency flashers stop
High beam assistant - You can switch the high
beam assistant on and off.
temporarily.
The emergency flashers also work when the igni-

Laser lights - You can switch the laser lights on
and off. tion is turned off.
Entry/exit lighting @) Tips
The Entry/exit lighting illuminates the area You should switch the emergency flashers on
around the vehicle when the vehicle is unlocked ite
or when the driver’s door is opened while the ig- — you are the last car in a traffic jam so that
nition is off. The entry/exit lighting works when it all other vehicles approaching from behind
is dark and the light switch is in the AUTO posi- can see your vehicle
8W7012721BB
tion. The front and rear daytime running lights* — your vehicle has broken down or you are
switch on automatically each time the vehicle is having an emergency
61
Lights and Vision
— your vehicle is being towed or if you are tow- Interior lighting

ing another vehicle
Front interior lighting
WEE Tel
If the Ea indicator light turns on, a bulb has

failed. The displayed message indicates the cause
and possible solutions. If one of the messages re-
mains on, drive immediately to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
By Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See own-

er's manual Fig. 55 Headliner: front interior lighting
Adaptive light* is not working. The headlights

Interior lighting buttons
still function. Drive immediately to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to axs* - Interior lighting on/off
4 - Door contact switch on/off. The interior light-
By Headlight range control: malfunction! See ing is controlled automatically.
owner's manual
Touch-sensitive reading lights
There is a malfunction in the headlight range
> To turn a reading light on or off, touch the sur-
control system, which may cause glare for other
face@ briefly.
drivers. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
> To activate the manual dimming function,
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
touch the surface @ when the light is switched
the malfunction corrected.
off and keep touching it until the desired
High beam assistant: malfunction! See own- brightness is reached.
er's manual
You can still switch the high beams on or off Rear interior lighting
manually. Drive immediately to an authorized 3
2
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to NI
|<q
High beam assistant: currently unavailable.

Camera view limited due to environmental con-
ditions
This message appears if the camera's visual field

is blocked. The system will switch itself off. Try
switching the systems on later.
Fig. 56 Headliner: rear reading lights
a Automatic headlights: malfunction! See
owner's manual Reading lights
The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. In the > To switch the reading lamp on or off, press the
AUTO light switch position, the low beams re- ~¥ button @.
main switched on at all times for safety reasons. > To activate the manual dimming function*,
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer touch the surface while the light is switched off
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the “~¥@ and keep touching it until the desired
malfunction repaired. brightness is reached.
62
Lights and Vision
Interior lighting Pitt aaa ce aria eda)

Applies to: vehicles with interior lighting
The ambient lighting turns on when the ignition

is switched on. The O light switch position deacti-
vates the interior lighting.
You can adjust the interior lighting individually.

>» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-

HICLE > Light & Visibility > Interior lighting.
Fig. 57 Light switch: instrument illumination
You can choose from various color profiles, such
as Maritime.
%, - You can adjust the background brightness of
Additional settings and profiles: the instruments and display illumination.
— Brightness: you can adjust the brightness for > Press the knob (@) to release it.
all of the interior lighting. > Turn the knob toward "-" or "+" to reduce or in-
— Individual: you can adjust the brightness and crease the brightness.
color of the interior lighting separately, divided > Press the knob again to return it to its original
into contour and surface lighting. Position.
— Audi drive select: the contour and surface
lighting color changes depending on the select- @) Tips
ed drive select* mode.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-
ment illumination (needles and gauges) may
@ Tips
turn on when the lights are off and the igni-
Depending on vehicle equipment, when the tion is switched on. The illumination for the
drive select function is activated, the color of gauges reduces automatically and eventually
the contour and surface lighting may briefly turns off as brightness outside increases. This
change to red or blue when the interior tem- function reminds the driver to turn the low
perature is manually increased or decreased. beams on at the appropriate time.
Display brightness Vision

You can adjust the instrument and display illumi- Adjusting exterior mirrors
nation separately. The settings depend on the ve-
hicle equipment.
RAZ-0150
> Applies to MMI: select on the home screen:

SETTINGS > Display & brightness.
Possible settings in the MMI:
— Cockpit dimming
— Head-up display
—MMI
© ©
— Audi virtual cockpit Fig. 58 Driver's door: knob for the exterior mirrors
8W7012721BB
> Turn the knob in the driver's door to the desired

position: >
63
Lights and Vision
0 - Deactivates all adjustment functions. way out. The mirrors will make a loud noise
when they latch into place. The mirror hous-
Q/ #- Selects the left or right exterior mirror.
ing must not be moved back into place by
To adjust the mirror glass in a mirror, press the
hand because this could impair the function
knob in the desired direction.
of the mirror mechanism.
GA - Heats the mirror glass depending on the — Applies to: vehicles without power folding
outside temperature. exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was
©) - Folds the exterior mirrors*. To fold the mir- moved by outside forces (such as an impact
rors out, turn the knob to one of the other posi- when maneuvering), you must move it back
tions. In the MMI, you can select if the mirrors in place by hand.
fold in automatically when you lock the vehicle — If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car
=> page 35. wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors.
Front passenger's exterior mirror tilt Never fold power folding exterior mirrors*
function* by hand. Only fold them in and out using
Requirement: the knob must be in the position the power controls.
for the front passenger’s exterior mirror.
@) Tips
The mirror surfaces tilt slightly when reverse
If the power adjusting function malfunctions,
gear is selected to provide a better view, for ex-
the glass in both mirrors can be adjusted by
ample of the edge of the curb.
pressing on the edge of it by hand.
You can adjust the mirror surface by turning the
knob in the desired direction.
Dimming the mirrors
The mirror moves from the reversing position
Manual dimming rearview mirror
back to the original position:
> Pull the lever on the bottom of the mirror back.
— When you switch the ignition off
— When you drive forward at speeds faster than 9 Automatic dimming rearview mirror
mph (15 km/h). Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
— When the knob is no longer in the position for > The interior and exterior mirrors dim automati-
the front passenger exterior mirror cally when light shines on them, for example
from headlights on a vehicle behind you.
Z\ WARNING
Curved mirror surfaces (for example convex) ZA WARNING
enlarge the field of vision. However, they Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
make objects in the mirror appear smaller and — Electrolyte fluid can leak out from broken
farther away. When using these mirrors to es- mirror glass. This liquid can irritate the skin,
timate your distance to vehicles behind you eyes and respiratory system. If there is con-
when changing lanes, you could estimate in- tact with the fluid, flush immediately with
correctly, which increases the risk of an acci- plenty of water. Consult a physician if neces-
dent. sary.
— Repeated or long-term exposure to electro-
@) Note lyte fluid can lead to irritation of the air-
— Applies to: vehicles with power folding exte- ways, especially in people with asthma or
rior mirrors: If the mirror housing was other respiratory conditions. Take deep
moved by outside forces (such as an impact breaths immediately after leaving the vehi-
when maneuvering), you must use the pow- cle or, if this is not possible, open all of the
er folding function to fold the mirror all the doors and windows as wide as possible.
64
Lights and Vision
— If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with Sun visor

the eyes, flush them thoroughly with plenty The sun visors can be moved out of their brackets
of clean water for at least 15 minutes and and turned toward the doors (@).
then seek medical attention.
They can also be moved back and forth length-
— If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with
wise in this position.
the skin, flush the affected area with clean
water for at least 15 minutes, and then Vanity mirror
clean with soap and water and seek medical
The mirror light switches on when the cover over
attention. Clean affected clothing and shoes
the vanity mirror @) opens.
thoroughly before wearing again.
— If the fluid was swallowed and the person is
conscious, flush the mouth with water for at Windshield wipers
least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting Switching the windshield wipers on
unless this is recommended by medical pro-
fessionals. Seek medical attention immedi-
ately.
@) Note
Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
Electrolyte fluid can leak out from broken mir-

ror glass. This liquid damages plastic surfaces
and paint. Clean this liquid as quickly as possi-
ble, for example with a wet sponge.
Fig. 60 Lever: windshield wipers
@ Tips
> Move the windshield wiper lever 7 to the cor-
Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
responding position:
— If the light reaching the rearview mirror is
obstructed, the automatic dimming mirror @ Windshield wipers off
will not function correctly, @ Rain sensor/intermittent mode. The wind-
— The automatic dimming mirrors do not dim shield wipers switch on once the vehicle speed
when the interior lighting is turned on or exceeds approximately 2 mph (4 km/h) and it is
the reverse gear is selected. raining. The higher the sensitivity of the rain sen-
sor that is set (switch © to the right), the earlier
the windshield wipers react to moisture on the
windshield. You can deactivate the rain sensor
mode, which switches the interval mode on. In
intermittent mode, you can adjust the interval
time using the switch ©.
VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Rain sensor.
@ Slow wiping
@ Fast wiping
Fig. 59 Roof headliner: sun visor

@ Single wipe. If you hold the lever in this posi-
8W7012721BB
tion longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping

to fast wiping. >
65
Lights and Vision
© Clean the windshield &. The number of wipes — Prior to using a car wash, the windshield
and afterwipes depends on how long the lever is wiper system must be switched off (lever in
held in position ©). position @). This prevents the wipers from
switching on unintentionally and causing
The wipers wipe one time after several seconds of
damage to the windshield wiper system.
driving to remove water droplets. You can switch
this function off by moving the lever to position
G) Tips
© within ten seconds of the afterwipe. The after-
wipe function is reactivated the next time you — The windshield wipers switch off when the
switch the ignition on. ignition is switched off. You can activate the
windshield wipers after the ignition is
If you hold the lever in position ©) for longer switched on again by moving the windshield
than half a second, the edge wiping feature will wiper lever to any position. The single wipe
be activated. This moves the windshield wipers function (lever in position @) also functions
closer to the edge of the windshield and per- when the ignition is switched off.
forms an afterwipe to clean the residue that re- — Worn or dirty windshield wiper blades result
sults from the wiping process from the edge of in streaking. This can affect the rain sensor
the windshield. The function is available when function. Check your windshield wiper
driving at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
blades regularly.
The headlight washer system* operates only — The washer fluid nozzles for the windshield
when the low beam headlights are on. If you washer system are heated when the ignition
move the lever into position ©, the headlights is on if the outside temperature is low.
will be cleaned at fixed intervals. — When stopping temporarily, such as at a
traffic light, the speed of the windshield
ZA WARNING wipers automatically reduces by one level.
— The rain sensor is only intended to assist the
driver. The driver may still be responsible for (eG ee a kes
PUT Xa Cel
manually switching the wipers on based on
B8V-0696]
visibility conditions.
— The windshield must not be treated with
water-repelling windshield coating agents.
Under unfavorable conditions, such as wet-
ness, darkness, and when the sun is low,
these coatings can cause increased glare,
which increases the risk of an accident. They
can also cause wiper blade chatter.
— Properly functioning windshield wiper
Fig. 61 Windshield wipers: changing the wiper blades
blades are required for a clear view and safe
driving > page 66, Cleaning/changing wip- Wiper blade replacement position
er blades.
> Switch off the ignition and hold the windshield
@) Note wiper lever in position @) > page 65, fig. 60 un-
til the windshield wiper moves into the wiper
— If there is frost, make sure the windshield
blade replacement position.
wiper blades are not frozen to the wind- > To bring the windshield wipers into the normal
shield. Switching on the windshield wipers position, switch the ignition on and hold the
when the blades are frozen to the wind-
windshield wiper lever in position @) until the
shield can damage the wiper blades. windshield wipers go back to the original posi-
tion, or drive faster than 8 mph (12 km/h). >
66
Lights and Vision
You can also turn the wiper blade replacement their original position and could damage the
position on or off in the MMI: hood and windshield.
> Switch the windshield wipers off (position @
=> page 65, fig. 60). G) Tips
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- — You can also use the wiper blade replace-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Wiper change po- ment position for other reasons, for exam-
sition. ple if you want to protect the windshield
from icing by using a cover.
Cleaning the wiper blades
— You cannot activate the wiper blade replace-
Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in ment position when the hood is open.
the wiper blade replacement position.
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the WET [4
windshield.
> For information on cleaning, see > table on If the & indicator light turns on, then there is a
page 268.
windshield wiper malfunction. The message that
is also displayed indicates the cause and possible
Replacing the wiper blades solutions. If one of the messages does not turn
Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in off, drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal-
the wiper blade replacement position. er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
malfunction repaired.
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield. a Automatic wipers: malfunction! See owner's
> Press the locking knob @ on the wiper blade. manual
Hold the wiper blade firmly. The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. You can
> Remove the wiper blade from the windshield still control all functions that are not controlled
wiper arm mount (2). by the rain sensor using the windshield wiper lev-
> Insert the new wiper blade into the mount on er. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal-
the wiper arm until it clicks into place. er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
> Place the wiper arm back on the windshield. malfunction repaired.
> Exit the wiper blade replacement position.
Digital compass
Z\ WARNING
Sialic meal Semele
— For safety reasons, the windshield wiper
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
blades should be replaced once or twice
each year.
BFV-0288
— Dirty windshield wiper blades can impair vi-

sion, which increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
— The windshield wipers must only be lifted
@
up when in the wiper blade replacement po-
sition. Otherwise, you risk damaging the
paint on the hood or the windshield wiper
motor. Fig. 62 Rearview mirror: digital compass is switched on
— You should not move your vehicle or press

8W7012721BB
> To turn the compass on or off, press the button

the windshield wiper lever when the wiper
© until the compass display in the mirror turns
arms are folded up from the windshield. The
on or off. >
windshield wipers would move back into
67
Lights and Vision
The digital compass only works when the ignition Om

is turned on. The directions are indicated with ab-
breviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east), To prevent inaccurate compass readings, do
SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W not bring any remote controls, electrical devi-
(west), NW (northwest). ces or metallic objects near the mirror.
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
B42-0405
Fig. 63 Magnetic zone map
The magnetic zone must be adjusted correctly for > Press and hold the button @ untilaC
the compass to read accurately. => page 67, fig. 62 appears in the rearview mir-
ror.
> Press and hold the button @ > page 67, fig. 62
> Drive in a circle at about 6 mph (10 km/h) until
until the number of the magnetic zone appears
a direction is displayed in the rearview mirror.
in the interior rearview mirror.
> Press the button () repeatedly to select the
correct magnetic zone. The selection mode
turns off after a few seconds. To reduce the risk to yourself and other driv-
ers, calibrate the compass in an area where
there is no traffic.
Applies t : vehicles with digital compass
If the display is incorrect or inaccurate, the com-

pass must be recalibrated.
68
Sitting correctly and safely
Sitting correctly and — Never kneel on the seats.

— Never tilt your backrest too far back.
safely
— Never lean against the instrument panel.
Correct passenger — Never lie down on the rear bench seat.
seating position — Never sit only on the front section of the seat.
— Never sit sideways on the seat.
General information
— Never lean against the window.
As the driver, you are responsible for making sure — Never place your feet out of the window.
every passenger is sitting correctly in their seat — Never place your feet on the instrument panel.
and maintaining this seating position while driv- — Never place your feet on the seat cushion.
ing. Make sure that: — Never ride in the footwell.
— Never sit on the armrests.
— Every passenger in the vehicle has adjusted his
— Never drive or ride in a seat without fastening
or her seat correctly > page 69
your safety belt.
— The steering wheel is adjusted correctly
— Never ride in the luggage compartment.
=> page 73
— The mirrors are adjusted so that there is a suffi-
ZA WARNING
cient view of the area around the vehicle
=> page 63 Incorrect seating positions, failure to wear a
— Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her safety belt, or being too close to an airbag in-
head restraint adjusted correctly > page 73 crease the risk of serious or fatal injury to ve-
hicle occupants, especially if the airbags de-
— Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her
ploy and come into contact with occupants
safety belt fastened correctly > page 75
who are not seated correctly. Note the impor-
— The activation status of the front passenger's
tant information and warnings in the chapters
airbag is suitable for the passenger in the front
for the topics given above.
passenger's seat > page 82
— Children are secured in suitable child safety
seats that are secured to appropriate vehicle
Gi) Tips
seats > page 84. Read and observe the impor- If you or other vehicle passengers have physi-
tant safety information pertaining to the use of cal limitations that prevent sitting in a correct
child safety seats on the front passenger's seat position, modifications to the vehicle may be
= A in General information on page 85. necessary. For more information, contact an
Examples of incorrect seating positions Service Facility, or call Audi customer support
Safety belts can only provide its optimal protec- at 1-800-822-2834.
tion when they are routed correctly. Incorrect
seating positions significantly reduce the protec- Front seats
tive functions of the safety belts and increase the
risk of injury due to incorrect belt routing. General information
The following list includes examples of seating Make sure that:

positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle — You can press the pedals down completely
occupants. This is not a complete list. The pur- while your legs are slightly bent
pose is to provide examples to increase your
— The distance between your upper body and the
awareness of the topic. The following points ap- steering wheel or instrument panel is at least
ply when the vehicle is in motion:
10 inches (25 cm)
8W7012721BB
— Never stand inside the vehicle. — The distance between your knees and the in-
— Never stand on the seats. strument panel is at least 4 inches (10 cm) >
69
— Your thighs are lightly supported by the front window, or on the seat surfaces. This also
surface of the seat applies to passengers in the rear seats.
— The backrest is in an upright position and your
back is resting against it (@) Note
— You have a sufficient view of the area around Applies to: vehicles with manually adjustable head re-
the vehicle straints
— You have a clear view of the instrument cluster, To reduce the risk of damage, be very careful
indicator lights, and the head-up display* when adjusting the seat to make sure the
head restraints do not come into contact with
Z\ WARNING the headliner or the sunroof*.
— If you are too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel, the airbag system cannot Power seat adjustme
provide the optimal protection, which in-
creases the risk of injury and death.
— To reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking maneuvers or accidents,
never drive with the backrest reclined very
far. The airbag system and seat belts can on-
ly provide optimal protection when the back-
rest is in an upright position and the driver
is wearing the seat belt correctly. If the
backrest is angled back too far, the safety
belt can shift to soft areas of the body, such
as the stomach, which increases the risk of
injury.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust
the seats when the vehicle is stationary.
— Be careful when adjusting the seat. Lack of
control or attention when adjusting can re-
sult in injuries due to pinching to vehicle oc-
cupants both in the front seats and rear
seats.
— Never place objects in the driver's footwell. Fig. 65 Front seat: adjusting the seat (version B)
Objects could shift and enter the area
around the pedals, which could prevent you The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
from using them. You would then be unable
to use the pedals if sudden driving or brak- Adjusting the backrests
ing maneuvers were needed, which increas- > To move the backrest forward or backward,
es the risk of an accident. press the button @) forward or backward.
— Make sure that the floor mats are always se-
Adjusting the seat position
curely attached.
— To reduce the risk of an accident, never place > To move the seat forward or backward, push
additional floor mats or other floor covers the button @) forward or backward.
over the installed floor mats, because this > To adjust the seat upward or downward, push
reduces the pedal's range of motion and can the rear section of the button @) upward or
impair pedal operation. downward.
—To reduce the risk of injury, never place your > To adjust the seat surface, press the front part
feet on the instrument panel, out of the of the button @) upward or downward.
70
Adjusting the lumbar support The settings and the number of menus and but-
tons depend on the vehicle equipment.
> To adjust the lumbar support, press the button
@) in the desired direction. Operating
Applies to: MMI
Adjusting the upper thigh support
> Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Seats.
> To increase or decrease the upper thigh sup-
> To access the various menus (4), swipe to the
port, lift the handle @) and move the upper
left or right.
thigh support.
> To display the various seats, press ) or ( @.
Massage function The red coloring in the symbol
@) indicates which
> To switch the massage function on or off, press seat is selected.
the button ©) > fig. 65.
Massage
Adjusting the side supports See > page 71
You can adjust the side bolsters using the multi-
Additional seat settings
function button @) > fig. 65.
See > page 71
ZA WARNING
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust aces cetera (ol)
the driver's seat when the vehicle is station- Applies to: vehicles with massage function
ary. Selecting the massage function

— The power front seats can also be adjusted
> To open the Massage menu, press the button
when the ignition is switched off. To reduce
the risk of injury, children should never be
® > page 70, fig. 65.
left unattended in the vehicle for this rea- Switching the massage function on or off
son. Applies to: MMI
— Exercise caution when adjusting the seat
> To switch the massage function on or off, press
height. Unsupervised or careless seat adjust-
the button ©) > page 70, fig. 65.
ment could cause parts of the body to get
> Press Start/Stop on the MMI.
pinched, which increases the risk of injury.
— The front seat backrests must not be re- Setting the massage type and intensity
clined too far back when driving, because Applies to: MMI
this impairs the effectiveness of the safety > To adjust the massage type, press the desired
belts and airbag system, which increases the button on the MMI, for example Wave.
risk of injury. > To adjust the intensity of the massage, press
Intensity on the MMI repeatedly until the de-
ON em amie MR sired level is reached.
Applies to: vehicles with seat settings in the MMI
G) Tips
RAZ-0873,
The massage function switches off automati-

cally after approximately 10 minutes.
OX CTT eerie Mg

8W7012721BB
Fig. 66 Center display: seat settings

VEHICLE > Seats.
> Swipe to the left if necessary.
71
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- > To move the seat all the way forward or to the
ing options may be available. original position, press the (2) button briefly.
You can stop the seat by pressing the button
Reset seat position
again.
You can adjust the position of the front passeng- > You can move the seat all the way forward even
er’s seat to match the driver's seat. when the backrest is upright. Press and hold
the button @) until the seat reaches your pre-
Driver seat entry assistance
ferred position.
Entry assistance makes it easier to enter or exit
Power entry assistance (version 2)
the vehicle.
Pull on the loop @ ©fig. 68 and fold the back-
Front passenger seat adjustment
rest forward (2).
You can adjust the front passenger's side with the
> To move the seat all the way forward or to the
driver's seat buttons.
original position, press the @) button briefly.
You can stop the seat by pressing the button
SSA stele (Fatt) again.
Applies to: vehicles with easy entry function
ZA WARNING
B8W-0269.
Always make sure the front seats are upright

and securely locked in place.
— Power entry assistance also works when the
ignition is switched off) or when the vehicle
key is removed, so that rear seat passengers
can still move to the front of the vehicle in
an emergency situation. To reduce the risk
of injury, children should never be left unat-
tended in the vehicle for this reason.
@) Tips
To prevent the head restraints from running
into the headliner, the power adjustable head
restraints* automatically move forward or up-
ward when the seat is adjusted.
eames Cera ti
Applies to: vehicles with a front center armrest
Fig. 68 Front seat: power entry assistance (version 2)
The front center armrest is located between the
Entry assistance makes it easier for the rear pas- front seats.
sengers to enter and leave the vehicle. Adjusting the center armrest
Power entry assistance (version 1) The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
> Lift the handle @ © fig. 67 and fold the seat > To adjust the armrest forward or backward,
backrest forward. move the armrest in the desired direction. >
2) Requirement: the vehicle battery must have a sufficient

charge level.
72
> To adjust the angle, raise the armrest in stages. Adjusting the steering wheel positi
> To move the armrest back into the original posi- Tarte L ig
tion, raise it slightly out of the top level and Applies to: vehicles with manual steering wheel adjustment
fold it downward.
The steering wheel position is adjustable up and
down and forward and back.
ZA WARNING
In certain positions, the front center armrest
can interfere with the driver’s arm movement,
which increases the risk of injury.
Steering wheel
(ee eile laced)
Make sure that:

Fig. 69 Steering column: lever for adjusting the steering
— The distance between your upper body and the
wheel position
steering wheel is at least 10 inches (25 cm)
— Your arms are bent slightly at the elbows > Press the lever in the direction of the arrow.
— You have a sufficient view of the area around > Bring the steering wheel into the desired posi-
the vehicle and you have a clear view of the in- tion.
strument cluster and head-up display*. > Push the Lever all the way up until it engages.
— You are always holding the steering wheel with
both hands on the outer edge at the sides (9:00 ZX WARNING
and 3:00 position) when driving
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust
Z\ WARNING the steering wheel before you start driving.
— Push the lever upward firmly so that the
— If you are too close to the steering wheel,
steering wheel position does not change un-
the driver's airbag cannot provide optimal
intentionally while driving, which would in-
protection, which increases the risk of injury
crease the risk of an accident.
or fatality.
— Never hold the steering wheel in the 12:00
position or in any other way, such as holding Head restraints
the center of the steering wheel. Otherwise,
General information
your arms, hands, and head could be injured Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
in the event that the driver's airbag deploys.
B4G-0454
Fig. 70 Correctly-adjusted head restraint

8W7012721BB
Make sure that:
73
— The upper edge of the head restraint is as even head restraint. Release the button and slide the
as possible with the top of your head head restraint farther until it locks into place.
— The head restraint is as close as possible to the
Power head restraint adjustment
back of the head
Applies to vehicles with power adjustable head restraints
— The head restraints in any occupied rear seats
are all the way up > To adjust the head restraint upward or down-
ward, press the button @ > page 70, fig. 64 or
Z\ WARNING => page 70, fig. 65 upward or downward.
> To adjust the head restraint forward or back-
— There is one head restraint for each seat. All
ward as needed, press the side button and slide
vehicle occupants must adjust the head re-
the head restraint in the desired direction until
straint correctly before every trip. Having
it locks into place.
head restraints that are not adjusted cor-
rectly or not installed in the vehicle increas-
es the risk of a neck injury during sudden or mae Mee ay
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
unexpected driving or braking maneuvers or
in a collision.
— Only remove the rear seat head restraints if
it is necessary to install a child safety seat
=> page 84. Stow the removed head re-
straints securely, for example in the luggage
compartment. Reinstall the head restraints
immediately once the child safety seat has
been removed. Driving without head re-
straints increases the risk of serious neck in-
juries.
Fig. 72 Rear seat: adjusting or removing the head restraint
rede mattle Mes Tiny Adjusting the head restraints

Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints > To adjust the head restraint upward, slide it un-
til it locks into place.
RAZ-0683
> To adjust the head restraint downward, press

the button @) and slide the head restraint. Re-
lease the button and slide the head restraint
farther until it locks into place.
Removing the headrests

Applies to: vehicles with removable head restraints
> Fold the backrest forward slightly > page 94.

> Move the head restraint upward all the way.
Fig. 71 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint
> Insert a suitable object, such as the extended
vehicle key or mechanical key, into the release
point @ on the inside or outside of the base.
Adjusting the head restraints > Press the button (2) and pull the head restraint
Applies to: vehicles with manually adjustable head restraints out of the backrest.
> To adjust the head restraint upward or forward, Installing the headrests
slide it until it locks into place.
> To adjust the head restraint downward or back- > Fold the backrest forward slightly > page 94.
ward, press the button on the side and slide the > Slide the posts on the head restraint down into
the guides until the posts click into place.
74
> Press the button (2) and slide the head restraint who do not wear safety belts not only en-
all the way down. It should not be possible to danger themselves, but also other people in
remove the head restraint from the backrest the vehicle.
without pressing the button. — Only one person may be fastened with a
safety belt at a time. Never secure more
Safety belts than one person, including children, with a
single safety belt.
— Never allow children or infants to ride on an-
Each seat is equipped with a three-point safety other person's lap and be belted into the
belt. Safety belts that are worn correctly are the safety belt with them.
most effective way to reduce the risk of serious or — Insert the belt buckle only in the belt latch
fatal injuries in a collision. Therefore, wear your belonging to the corresponding seat, so that
safety belt correctly and make sure that all vehi- the protective function is not impaired.
cle passengers are also wearing their safety belts — To ensure the maximum protective function
correctly when the vehicle is moving. of the safety belts, all vehicle passengers
must sit in the correct seating position
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an air-
=> page 69.
bag system, every vehicle passenger must still al-
— Check the condition of your vehicle’s safety
ways wear the appropriate safety belt. In addi-
belts regularly > page 268. If you find dam-
tion to their normal protective function, safety
age to the belt webbing, the belt connec-
belts also hold vehicle occupants in the correct
tions, the retractor, or the buckle, have the
seating position in the event of a collision so that
damaged safety belt replaced by an author-
the airbags can deploy correctly and provide addi-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
tional protection. Safety belts provide protection
Facility.
during collisions when the airbags do not deploy
— The safety belts must not be removed or
or if they have already deployed.
modified in any way. Do not attempt to re-
ZA WARNING pair the safety belts yourself.
— Safety belts that are strained during an acci-
The risk of serious or fatal injury increases if
dent must be replaced by an authorized
the safety belt is not fastened, if it is worn in-
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
correctly, or if it is damaged.
ty.
— All vehicle occupants, including the driver,
must fasten their safety belts correctly be-
fore every trip and must always keep their
safety belts fastened during the trip, regard-
less of whether the seat is equipped with an
airbag or not. This also applies to children
that are seated in a child safety seat that is
appropriate for their weight and age and
that is secured with a safety belt.
— In the event of a collision, vehicle occupants
that are not wearing safety belts could be
propelled through the vehicle interior and
collide with vehicle components, such as the
steering wheel, instrument panel, wind-
shield, or doors. In some situations, vehicle
8W7012721BB
occupants could also be ejected from the ve-

hicle. Vehicle occupants in the rear seats
75
Correct safety belt positioning AN WARNING

Incorrect safety belt positioning can cause se-
B4H-0751
rious injury in the event of an accident or dur-
ing sudden braking or driving maneuvers.
— Never drive with the backrest reclined ex-
tremely far. The more the backrest is tilted
back, the greater the risk of injury due to the
safety belt being routed incorrectly.
— The safety belt itself or a loose safety belt
can cause serious injuries if it shifts onto
soft areas of the body, such as the stomach.
— The shoulder portion of the safety belt must
RAZ-0696
lie over the center of the shoulder and
chest, and never under the arm, behind the
back, or across the neck or face.
— The lap portion of the safety belt must lie
across the lap and never over the stomach.
— The safety belt must lie flat and securely on
the upper part of the body and the lap.
— The belt webbing must not be pinched or
twisted, or rub against sharp edges.
Fig. 74 Safety belt positioning for pregnant women
— If the safety belt height is set incorrectly
Fastened safety belts only offer optimal protec- and/or the safety belt is routed incorrectly,
tion during an accident and reduce the risk of se- then the safety belt's protective function
rious injury or death when they are positioned will be impaired in the event of an accident.
correctly. Furthermore, the correct safety belt Make sure the safety belt is at the right
position holds the vehicle occupant in place so height and is routed correctly for the pas-
that a deployed airbag can provide maximum senger using it.
protection. Therefore, always fasten the safety — A safety belt that is too loose may lead to in-
belt and make sure it is positioned correctly juries during an accident, because your body
> fig. 73. will move farther forward due to kinetic en-
ergy and will be stopped abruptly by the
To ensure the safety belt is positioned correctly,
belt.
make sure of the following points:
— Heavily bulky, loose clothing (for example, a
—The lap portion of the safety belt must be locat- coat over a sports jacket) may prevent the
ed across the lap. seat and safety belts from functioning cor-
—The shoulder portion of the safety belt must rectly.
rest over the center of the shoulder. — Do not position the safety belt over hard or
— The safety belt must always rest flat and se- breakable objects (such as glasses, pens,
curely on the body. etc.).
— The lap belt portion of the safety belt must
For pregnant women, the safety belt must rest
sit as low as possible on the lap of pregnant
evenly across the chest and as low and flat as
women and lie flat under the belly.
possible on the lap, so that no pressure is applied
to the lower abdomen. This should be done
throughout the entire pregnancy > fig. 74.
() Note
Make sure that there are no hook-and-loop
fasteners or sharp objects such as zippers or >
76
2&
rivets on clothing in the area where the safety a
2
belt is worn. Otherwise, the safety belt could a
+
a
be damaged.
Belt po: tig

Applies to: vehicles with belt positioners
E
8g
g
=a
a
Fig. 77 Releasing the belt buckle from the belt latch
Fastening the safety belt

> Pull the safety belt by the belt buckle evenly
across your chest and lap.
Fig. 75 Driver’s seat: belt positioner > Insert the belt buckle in the belt latch belong-
ing to the seat until it audibly engages
Belt positioners make it easier to fasten the safe- > fig. 76.
ty belts on the front seats. > Pull on the belt to make sure that the belt is se-
The belt positioner extends automatically when curely locked in the latch.
you close the door and switch the ignition on.
Unfastening the safety belt
The belt positioner retracts automatically again > Press the red button on the belt latch > fig. 77.
when the belt tongue locks into the belt latch, if
The belt buckle will pop out.
the safety belt is not fastened, if you switch the > Guide the belt back by hand so that the safety
ignition off, or if you open the door. belt can roll up more easily.
Safety belt monitoring system

The belt positioners can cause injury or dam-
age if they pinch people or objects when ex- Ba - If the indicator light turns on or flashes, a
tending or retracting. safety belt is not fastened or it has been unbuck-
led while driving. Above certain speeds, addition-
em ee ale et Li1am Loe al warning tones will sound.
Adjusting the height of the safety belt

B4H-0462
B4G-0004
Fig. 76 Belt buckle and belt latch

8W7012721BB
Fig. 78 Belt height adjustment for the front seats - safety

belt relay >
77
> To move the belt higher, slide the safety belt re- you start driving. If the safety belt is too loose, it
lay @) upward. will be tightened so that the belt will rest closer
> To move the belt lower, press the release but- to the body.
ton @ and slide the safety belt relay2) down-
In some collisions, pyrotechnic belt tensioners
ward.
may secure the safety belts so that they cannot
> To check if the safety belt relay is securely
loosen. This reduces forward movement by the
locked in place, pull firmly on the belt.
vehicle passengers.
G) Tips ZA WARNING
You can also adjust the height of the front
The pyrotechnic system can only provide pro-
seats to change the position of the safety
tection during one collision. If the pyrotechnic
belts.
belt tensioners deploy, the pretensioning sys-
tem must be replaced by an authorized Audi
ON eal ime ad olay dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Belt retractor lock
@ Tips
The safety belts on the rear seats and on the
Smoke may be released when pyrotechnic belt
front passenger seat are equipped with a belt re-
tensioners deploy. This is not a sign of a vehi-
tractor lock.
cle fire.
> If you secure a child safety seat with a safety
belt, the belt retractor lock on the safety belt Memory function
may need to be activated. Follow the instruc-
tions from the child safety seat manufacturer. General information
> When a vehicle passenger has fastened a safety Applies to: vehicles with memory function
belt, the belt retractor lock should not be acti-

With the memory function, you can save and call
vated. If the belt retractor lock has been acti-
up seat profiles using the memory buttons in the
vated unexpectedly, deactivate it.
door trim panel.
Deactivating or activating the belt retractor lock
Depending on vehicle equipment, some settings
=> page 87.
such as the driver’s seat and exterior mirror posi-
Safety belt retractor tion can be stored.
The safety belts are equipped with an automatic

Storing and recalling a seat profile
belt retractor. This automatic retractor allows the
Applies to: vehicles with memory function
safety belt to be pulled all the way out when the
belt is pulled slowly. However, the automatic re- The memory function buttons are located in the
tractor locks during sudden braking maneuvers. door trim panel.
It also locks the belts when accelerating, driving
uphill, and driving around curves. Storing a seat profile
> Press the SEE button. If the LED in the button
Belt force limiter
turns on, a seat profile can be stored.
Safety belts with belt force limiters reduce the > Push one of the numbered memory buttons. A
force placed on the body by the safety belts dur- tone confirms that the settings were stored.
ing a collision.
Recalling a seat profile
Safety belt pretensioners
> When the a door is open and the ignition is
In certain driving situations, safety belts may be switched off, press the memory button once >
tightened with reversible belt tensioners when
78
briefly. The seat will be fully adjusted to the wheel, on the instrument panel, on the
settings in the seat profile. doors, on the windows, or in the footwell.
> If the door is closed or the ignition is switched — Never put stickers on the airbag system cov-
on, press and hold the memory button until the ers or cover them with any objects.
seat is fully adjusted to the settings in the seat — Only lightweight clothing should be hung
profile. from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do
not use clothes hangers to hang clothing.
ZX WARNING The pockets of the clothing must not con-
— To reduce the risk of an accident, the seat tain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged
setting can only be recalled when the vehicle objects. This could impair the effectiveness
is stationary. of the side curtain airbags.
— In an emergency, the recall process can be — You must not use seat or protective covers
canceled by pressing the seat adjustment that are not specifically approved for use on
button on that seat. Audi seats with side airbags. Since the side
airbags deploy from the seat backrest, such
covers could impair the protective function
Airbag system
of the side airbags.
— Damage to the original seat covers in the
side airbag deployment area must always be
ZA WARNING repaired by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
— If you have not fastened your safety belt, thorized Audi Service Facility.
you are in an incorrect seating position, or — Airbag system components are installed at
you are too close to the airbag system, the various locations in your vehicle. Incorrect
airbag system will not be able to protect work or repairs on the vehicle could damage
you. This increases the risk of serious or fa- the airbag system components or impair
their functionality. This may prevent the air-
tal injuries. Make sure that every vehicle
passenger has their safety belt correctly fas- bags from deploying or cause them to de-
tened and is sitting in a correct seating posi- ploy incorrectly in the event of an accident,
tion > page 69. This is necessary regardless which increases the risk of serious or fatal
of whether the seat is equipped with an air- injuries. Only have an authorized Audi dealer
bag or not. or authorized Audi Service Facility make re-
— Never place your feet on the instrument pairs or modifications to a vehicle.
panel, out of the window, or on the seat sur- — The airbag system can only provide protec-
faces. To help ensure that the airbag system tion during one collision. If there is another
can deploy correctly, never bend forward or collision, the airbag system will not deploy
lean on the door or the side window. Other- again. If the airbag system has deployed,
wise, serious and possibly fatal injuries can have it replaced immediately by an author-
occur if the airbags deploy. ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
— People, animals, or objects between the
Facility.
passengers and the airbag system can inter- — Fine dust may appear if the airbags deploy.
fere with the correct deployment of the air- This is completely normal and does not indi-
bag or can be thrown through the vehicle in- cate a fire in the vehicle. The fine dust can ir-
terior, increasing the risk of serious or fatal ritate the skin and mucous membranes in
injuries. Make sure that nothing is located the eyes and can cause difficulty breathing,
between the vehicle occupants and the air- particularly for individuals who have or have
8W7012721BB
bag system. Do not secure or transport any had asthma or other health issues that af-
objects within the deployment zone of the fect breathing. Exit the vehicle or open the
airbag systems, especially on the steering windows or doors to get access to fresh air.
79
If the indicator light does not turn on when the

@ Tips
ignition is switched on, does not turn off after
If you are transporting children in the vehicle, several seconds, or turns on or flashes while driv-
read the information and follow the safety ing, there may be a malfunction in one of the
precautions > page 84. safety systems. Drive to an authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately
Safety systems monitoring to have the malfunction corrected.
The ka indicator light in the instrument cluster ZA\ WARNING

monitors the safety systems such as the airbags
Have the malfunction in the safety systems in-
(including the control modules, sensor, and wir-
spected immediately. Otherwise, there is a
ing) and the belt tensioners. It turns on when you
risk that the systems may not activate during
switch the ignition on and turns off after several
an accident, which increases the risk of seri-
seconds.
ous or fatal injury.
80
Applies to: vehicles without power top:

Fig. 79 Airbag layout (enlarged section/deployed airbags)
g
8W7012721BB
Applies to: vehicles with power top:

Fig. 80 Airbag layout (enlarged section/deployed airbags) >
81
The locations of the airbags are labeled with Each deployed airbag is filled with gas. When this
“AIRBAG”. The following airbags are installed in occurs, the airbag covers open and the airbags
your vehicle: unfold with great force into the deployment zone
within milliseconds. Inflated airbags reduce the
Driver's airbag
movement of passengers wearing safety belts in
©80
Front passenger's airbag

the direction of the impact and thus help to re-
Side airbags in the front and possibly in the duce the risk of injury. They can help to protect
rear (on Sportback models) the head, upper body, and lap, for example. How-
Head curtain airbag with ejection mitigation ever, there is the possibility that airbag deploy-
©®
Knee airbags ment can cause injuries.
Airbags offer the best possible protection in your The airbag system only works when the ignition
vehicle during an accident when they are used to- is turned on.
gether with safety belts that are fastened cor-
If you or other vehicle passengers have physical
rectly, and when passengers are sitting in the cor-
limitations that prevent sitting in a correct posi-
rect seating position. Airbags are a supplementa-
tion, modifications to the vehicle may be neces-
ry restraint system and do not replace safety
sary. For more information, contact an author-
belts.
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
Applies to: vehicles without power top: Airbags ty, or call Audi customer support at
may deploy during head-on, side-impact, or roll- 1-800-822-2834.
over collisions.
Applies to: vehicles with power top: Airbags may

Gi) Tips
Applies to: vehicles without power top
deploy during head-on or side-impact collisions.
The side curtain airbags in your vehicle have
The deployment area for the airbag system can- ejection mitigation functions. This reduces
not be defined for every situation, since the cir- the risk of being ejected from the vehicle inte-
cumstances surrounding accidents can vary wide- rior during an accident, especially in the event
ly. Factors that play an important role include the of a vehicle rollover.
condition of the object that the vehicle hits (hard
or soft), the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.
Advanced airbag system
The deciding factor for the deployment of the air-
bag system is the deceleration that occurs during
an accident. Sensors in the vehicle are designed
to detect the severity of an accident in conjunc-
tion with the control module, and to provide a
targeted and timely deployment of the restraint
system. If the vehicle deceleration that is meas-
ured during an accident is below the specified
reference values in the control module, then the
airbags will not deploy, even though the vehicle
may be severely damaged from the accident. In Fig. 81 Headliner: indicator light to display the status of
these cases, the vehicle occupants will be pro- the front passenger's airbag
tected by the safety belts if they are fastened and
worn correctly. The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has
been certified to comply with the requirements
The deployment of the front passenger's airbag
of the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
will depend on the occupancy of the seat
Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor
=> page 82.
Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applica-
ble at the time your vehicle was manufactured. >
82
According to these requirements, the front Ad- — The electrical capacity is higher than the
vanced Airbag System on the passenger’s side threshold stored in the control module
has been certified for “suppression” for infants — The electrical capacity is the same as or greater
approximately 12 months old and younger, and than the electrical capacity of a typical adult
for “low risk deployment” for children aged 3 to
The passenger's airbag is deactivated if:
6 years old (as defined in the standard).
— The electrical capacity is lower than the thresh-
The advanced airbag system will activate or deac-
old stored in the control module
tivate the front passenger's airbag based on the
— The electrical capacity is the same as or less
occupancy of the seat. If a front airbag deploys
than the electrical capacity of a typical one-
during an accident, the deployment force will
year-old child in a child safety seat that has
adapt to the passenger.
been used for certification in accordance with
Components FMVSS 208
The advanced airbag system consists of the fol- If the front passenger's airbag is activated, the
lowing components: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ indicator light
will turn on. If the front passenger's airbag is de-
— Front airbags in the steering wheel and in the
activated, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #;
instrument panel on the front passenger's side:
indicator light will turn on.
these can protect the front passengers during
an accident The deployment force of the front airbags adapts
— Passenger occupant detection sensor in the based on whether or not the safety belt is used
front passenger's seat: this detects if the front and the distance between the seat and the steer-
passenger's seat is occupied (for example, by a ing wheel/instrument panel. For example, if a
person or a small child in a child safety seat) person is too close to the front airbag, the front
— Seat position sensors on the front seats: these airbag will deploy with less force to help reduce
determine the distance between the seat and the risk of injury.
the steering wheel or instrument panel
Meaning of PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #4, ON
— Sensors in the front seat belt latch: these de- ® indicator light
tect if the safety belts are fastened
— PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 8; ON ® indi- When the ignition is switched on, the system de-
cator light in the headliner:this indicates if the tects whether the front passenger's seat is occu-
front passenger's airbag is activated or deacti- pied. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; ON @
vated will turn on for several seconds during this proc-
- indicator light in the instrument cluster: ess. Then it will indicate whether the front pas-
this monitors the function of the Advanced Air- senger's airbag is activated or deactivated.
bag System components to ensure they are — PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 8%: the front
functioning correctly passenger's airbag is deactivated and will not
deploy in the event of an accident.
How the components function together
— PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ®: the front pas-
The passenger occupant detection sensor in the senger's airbag is activated and could deploy in
front passenger's seat detects if the front pas- the event of an accident.
senger's seat is occupied. The passenger occu-
If a change to the occupancy status of the front
pant detection sensor measures the electrical ca-
pacity on the front passenger’s seat. The pas- passenger's seat is detected
senger's airbag is activated or deactivated de-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; ON @ will
flash for several seconds and will then display the
pending on the electrical capacity that is meas-
8W7012721BB
ured.
status of the front passenger's airbag. >
The passenger's airbag is activated if:
83
Always make sure the indicator light corresponds front passenger's seat, always make sure
to the occupancy of the front passenger's seat. that PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; stays
— An adult or individual of similar size in the on while driving. If
front passenger's seat: the front passenger's PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF &¥; does not
airbag must be activated, therefore turn on, remove the child safety seat and in-
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ must remain stall it again according to the child safety
turned on. seat manufacturer instructions. If
— An individual of smaller size (for example, an PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF &%; still does
adolescent or small adult) in the front pas-
not turn on, the front passenger's seat must
senger's seat: the front passenger's airbag not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi
must be activated, so dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ must stay on. and have the airbag system inspected.
— Child in a child safety seat on the front pas- — Fluids, electronic devices, or mechanical
senger's seat: the front passenger's airbag
damage on the front passenger's seat may
must be deactivated, so cause the front passenger seat occupant de-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3%; must stay on. tection to malfunction. The system may
then incorrectly detect if the front passeng-
— Front passenger's seat not occupied: the front
er's seat is occupied. As a result, it could de-
passenger's airbag must be deactivated, so
ploy the front passenger’s airbag incorrectly
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; must stay on.
or fail to deploy it, which increases the risk
ZA WARNING of serious or fatal injury. Make sure that no
wet objects (such as a wet hand towel) and
— An adult or a person with a small stature
no fluids come into contact with the front
(such as a young person or small adult) seat-
passenger's seat cushion. If the front pas-
ed on the front passenger's seat will not be
senger's seat becomes wet, dry it immedi-
protected by the passenger's airbag in the
ately. Make sure no electronic devices (such
event of a collision if the passenger's airbag
as a laptop or a retrofitted seat heater) are
is deactivated. This increases the risk of in-
on the front passenger's seat. Do not trans-
jury and death. Always make sure that
port any objects on or under the front pas-
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ remains on
senger's seat.
while driving. If
— Seat covers or protective covers may prevent
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ does not
the advanced airbag system from correctly
turn on, make sure the front passenger is
detecting child safety seats or passengers in
sitting correctly in the seat > page 69 and
the front passenger's seat. You must not use
that there is nothing covering the front pas-
seat covers or protective covers on the front
senger's seat (such as blankets or pillows).
passenger's seat that are not specifically ap-
If PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ®@still does
proved for use on Audi seats with an ad-
not turn on, the front passenger's seat must
vanced airbag system.
not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
and have the airbag system inspected. Child safety seats
—Achild ina child safety seat on the front
General information
passenger's seat - especially in a rear-facing
child safety seat - can receive a severe im- When installing and using child safety seats, fol-
pact if the front passenger's airbag deploys, low the information in this Owner's Manual, the
which increases the risk of serious or fatal applicable state and federal regulations, and the
injury. Always secure child safety seats on manufacturer instructions for the child safety
the rear seats. If special circumstances re- seat.
quire the use of a child safety seat on the
84
You can also obtain useful and current informa- jury during a sudden braking maneuver or
tion from the following sources: accident. This especially applies to children
U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- in the front passenger's seat or children who
tration have their head near the side airbag deploy-
http://www.nhtsa.gov ment area, if the airbag system is deployed
http://www.safercar.gov during an accident. This incorrect seating
position can cause severe or even fatal inju-
National SAFE KIDS Campaign ries.
http://www.safekids.org Make sure there is enough space in front of
SafetyBeltSafe U.S.A. the child in the child safety seat. If necessa-
http://www.carseat.org ry, adjust the angle and position of the seat
in front of the child safety seat.
Transport Canada Information Centre
The rear side ofa forward-facing child safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
seat should be positioned as close as possi-
Audi Customer Experience Center ble to the backrest on the vehicle seat. If the
https://www.audiusa.com/help/contact-us head restraints make it difficult to install a
https://www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/models/layer/ child safety seat, adjust or remove them if
contact.html necessary > page 73. Reinstall the head re-
straints immediately once the child safety
Z\ WARNING seat has been removed.
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries, Always make sure that the backrest on the
children must always be secured in the vehicle seat where the child safety seat is installed
with a child safety seat that is appropriate for is securely locked in place and cannot move
their body size, weight, and age. forward. Otherwise, the backrest where the
— Children ages 12 and under must be trans- child safety seat is secured could move for-
ported using the appropriate child safety ward in the event of an accident or other
seat. Note differences in regulations be- emergency situation.
tween states and countries. NEVER use a rear-facing child safety seat on
— Child safety seats secured incorrectly in the a seat with an ACTIVATED FRONT AIRBAG;
vehicle may cause serious or fatal injuries in this could cause DEATH or SERIOUS INJU-
the event of an accident. Always secure the RIES to a CHILD.
child safety seat according to the manufac- — Always secure child safety seats on the
turer instructions. rear seats. If exceptional circumstances re-
— Children or babies must not under any cir- quire the child safety seat to be placed on
cumstances be held on the lap of the driver the front passenger's seat, then the front
or other passengers while driving. Passenger's airbag must be deactivated.
— Do not secure more than one child in a child Always make sure that
safety seat. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; stays on
— Never allow a child to sit in a child safety while driving. If
seat unsupervised. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #%; does not
— Never allow children to ride unsecured in the turn on, remove the child safety seat and
vehicle or to stand or kneel on the seats install it again according to the child safe-
while driving. In the event of an accident, a ty seat manufacturer instructions. If
child could be propelled through the vehicle. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %;; still
This can cause serious or fatal injuries for does not turn on, the front passenger's
8W7012721BB
the child and passengers. seat must not be used. Drive to an author-
— If children use an incorrect seating position ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
while driving, they have a higher risk of in-
8s
Facility and have the airbag system in- tion for this > page 82, Advanced airbag system.
spected. If you must secure a forward-facing child safety
— If you must use a forward-facing child safety seat, move the front passenger's seat as far back
seat on the front passenger's seat, move the as possible so that it is as far as possible from the
seat as far back as possible so that it is as front passenger's airbag. While doing this, make
far as possible from the front passenger's sure the seat can be adjusted all the way.
airbag. While doing this, make sure the seat
Only switch to a larger child safety seat when
can be adjusted all the way. A child in a child absolutely necessary
safety seat on the front passenger's seat can
Switch to a larger child safety seat only when ab-
receive a severe impact if the front passeng-
solutely necessary. Secure your child using a safe-
er's airbag deploys, which increases the risk
of serious or fatal injury. ty belt without a child safety seat only if all of the
following statements are true:
— Replace the child safety seat after an acci-
dent because there could be damage that is — The child is large enough to sit upright in the
not visible. seat
— Even if a child is not sitting in the child safe- — The child is able to sit with his or her back rest-
ty seat, the child safety seat must be se- ing completely on the seat backrest
cured. An unsecured child safety seat may —The child is able to sit with his or her knees
be thrown through the vehicle interior dur- bent over the edge of the seat surface
ing sudden braking maneuvers or an acci- —The child is able to sit with both of his or her
dent. feet completely touching the floor in the foot-
well
Correct positioning for children — The lap portion of the safety belt lies flat and
securely over the hip area and never over the
Always secure children in a child safety seat de- stomach
signed for the body size, weight, and age of the — The shoulder portion of the safety belt lies flat
child. and securely over the center of the shoulder
You can secure child safety seats in your vehicle and the chest, and never under the arm, behind
using the lower LATCH anchors or the safety the back, or over the neck or face.
belts. You can also secure child safety seats to —The child is able to maintain this seating posi-
the top tether anchor. Depending on the child tion throughout the entire trip
safety seat, it may also be necessary to secure it Read and follow the important information and
to the top tether anchor. In Canada, securing for- warnings regarding the correct use of safety belts
ward-facing child safety seats to the top tether => page 75.
anchors is required by law.
Always transport children in the rear seats G) Tips

— Child safety seats can also be secured to
Accident statistics show that children that are se-
seats with side airbags. In the event of an
cured correctly in the rear seats are safer than in
accident, children can also be protected by
front seats. Always transport children in suitable
the side airbags if the child is correctly se-
child safety seats secured on the rear seats.
cured in a suitable child safety seat that is
In exceptional circumstances: transporting attached correctly.
children in the front passenger's seat — The lower LATCH anchors as well as the
If exceptional circumstances require the child safety belt may be required to correctly in-
safety seat to be placed on the front passenger's stall some child safety seats. Using both at
seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be the same time is permitted, provided that >
deactivated. Please note the important informa-
86
the fastening systems or safety belts do not > Pull on the child safety seat to check if both
impair those in an adjacent seating position. sides are engaged correctly in the LATCH an-
— All child safety seats are constructed so that chors.
they can be secured using the lap safety belt > If possible, also secure the child safety seat to
in the vehicle. the respective top tether anchor in the vehicle
— Child safety seats with a load leg can only => page 89.
be secured to the outer rear seats and to the
front passenger's seat. ZA WARNING
The LATCH anchors in the vehicle are only de-
Yate ie Man Cm eA Lm RMCLICLe signed for child safety seats with the LATCH
LATCH anchors system. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injury, never secure other child restraint sys-
tems, belts, or objects to the anchors.
@® Tips
The LATCH anchors are designed for a total
weight (child and child safety seat combined)
up to 65 lbs (29 kg). If the total weight is
Lt Lg ce gpa lil greater than this, the child safety seat must
ATA aS
Fig. 82 Rear bench seat: lower LATCH anchors
be secured with the vehicle safety belt.
Securing child safety seats with a safety

Observe the safety precautions > page 84. Phy
In the United States and Canada, child safety Observe the safety precautions > page 84. The
seats can be secured without safety belts using front passenger’s seat is a dangerous location for
the LATCH system. LATCH stands for Lower An- a child, even with an advanced airbag system. If
chors and Tethers for Children. In Canada, similar exceptional circumstances require the child safe-
systems are called UCRA, LUAS, or UAS. ty seat to be placed on the front passenger's
seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be
The lower LATCH anchors in your vehicle are lo-
deactivated. Please note the important informa-
cated on the outer seats of the rear bench seat
tion for this > page 86, Correct positioning for
between the seat surface and the backrest. These
children and > page 82, Advanced airbag sys-
seating locations each have two lower LATCH an-
tem.
chors that can be used to secure a LATCH child
safety seat. Marking points with a > fig. 82 sym- Securing child safety seats
bol are located on the covers for the lower LATCH
> Activate the child safety lock > page 45.
anchors. You can locate the LATCH anchors using
> If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat,
the marking points.
secure any unused safety belts that are within
> Activate the child safety lock > page 45. reach of the child > A\, > page 90.
> Remove the cover* from both lower LATCH an- > If you secure a child safety seat to the front
chors. passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's
> If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat, seat to the highest position.
secure any unused safety belts that are within > Secure the child safety seat according to the
reach of the child > A\ in Securing child safety child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
seats with a safety belt on page 88.
8W7012721BB
> If necessary, activate the belt retractor lock

> Secure the child safety seat according to the => page 88.
child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
87
> If the child safety seat is secured on the front vated if the child safety seat manufacturer
passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's instructions require it.
seat backrest until it rests flat against the child — Due to the risk of fatal injury, never place a
safety seat. Also make sure that the upper safe- rear-facing child safety seat on the front
ty belt fixture is behind the child safety seat. passenger's seat when the front passenger's
> If you secure a child safety seat on the rear airbag is switched on.
seat, also secure it to the correct top tether an- — For the child safety seat to offer the maxi-
chor if possible > page 89. mum protection, it is especially important
Activating the belt retractor lock to route the vehicle safety belt correctly. Al-
ways follow the instructions from the child
If you secure a child safety seat using the vehicle safety seat manufacturer for routing the
safety belt, you must activate the belt retractor safety belt correctly. Incorrectly fastened
lock. Follow the child safety seat manufacturer safety belts can cause injuries, even during
instructions. minor accidents.
The belt retractor lock prevents the safety belt
from becoming loose while driving, which could
result in the child safety seat no longer being ad-
equately secured.
> Secure the child safety seat according to the

While doing so, pull out the safety belt. Insert
the safety belt into the belt latch that belongs
to that seat until it audibly locks.
> Pull the upper belt out completely and then al-
low it to retract. You will hear a clicking sound
while the belt is retracting. It will not be possi-
ble to pull the safety belt out any farther.
> Push the child safety seat into the seat and al-
low the belt to retract more.
> Make sure that the child safety seat cannot
move more than 1 inch (2.5 cm).
Deactivating the belt retractor lock

> Unbuckle the safety belt from the belt latch.
> Remove the child safety seat according to the
manufacturer instructions.
> Allow the safety belt to retract completely. The
belt retractor lock is deactivated.
Z\ WARNING
—A safety belt that is not locked by the belt
retractor lock or a locking device cannot se-
cure a child safety seat while driving or in
the event of an accident, which increases the
risk of fatal injury. Always make sure the
belt retractor lock on the safety belt is acti-
88
There is a top tether anchor behind every seat in

the rear bench seat to additionally secure a child
safety seat with an upper belt.
> Move the head restraint behind the child safety

seat upward.
>» Applies to: version 1: Fold the cover for the top
tether anchor upward.
> Applies to: vehicles with power top: Fold the
backrest behind the child safety seat forward
=> page 95.
> Guide the upper belt on the child safety seat
under the head restraint or along both sides of
it and toward the rear (depending on the child
safety seat model).
> Fasten the belt to the top tether anchor
=> fig. 84. While doing this, make sure the belt
is not twisted and is not running over any sharp
edges.
> Applies to: vehicles with power top Make sure
that the belt is not pinched between the seat
anchor on the backrest.
Fig. 83 Version @) rear shelf/ Version @) rear backrest: top > Applies to: vehicles with power top Fold the
tether anchors for securing a child safety seat with an up- backrest back until it locks into place.
per strap >» Secure the child safety seat according to the
RAZ-0093
> Pull the belt tightly so that the child safety seat
rests at the top of the seat backrest.
> If necessary, move the head restraint behind
the child safety seat downward.
The top tether anchors in the vehicle are only

designed for child safety seats equipped with
an upper strap. To reduce the risk of serious or
fatal injury, never secure other child restraint
systems, belts, or objects to the anchors.
Fig. 84 Version @ rear shelf/ Version @) rear backrest: se-

curing the upper strap on the top tether anchor
8W7012721BB
89
Securing unused safety belts o

bench seat
Ke ¥
N\A
wl me el SSOS*«sTS
Fig. 85
c= Ll!
Rear bench seat: securing unused safety belts
If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench

seat, the child must not be able to reach any
safety belts that are not being used. Secure safe-
ty belts that are within reach of the child.
> If you secure a child safety seat to the LATCH

anchors, fasten the safety belt on the seat
where the child safety seat is installed using
the seat's safety belt latch.
> Applies to: Sportback: If you secure a child
safety seat on one of the outer seats, fasten the
safety belt for the center seat in its latch.
> Activate the belt retractor lock on the fastened
safety belts. To do this, pull the upper belt out
completely and then allow it to retract. You will
hear a clicking sound while the belt is retract-
ing. It will not be possible to pull the safety
belt out any farther.
> Make sure the fastened safety belt does not
block access to the LATCH anchors. Otherwise,
it may not be possible to secure the child safety
seat to the LATCH anchors correctly.
A child in a child safety seat could play with

the unused safety belts and then become en-
tangled in them, which increases the risk of
fatal injury. Always secure unused safety belts
so that they are not within reach of children in
child safety seats.
90
Storage and convenience
Storage and convenience — Disconnect the connectors from the power

sources carefully to reduce the risk of dam-
Power sources aging them.
When the ignition is switched on, you may be

G) Tips
able to use multiple power sources for external
devices, depending on the vehicle equipment. Do not connect any other devices to the sock-
ets when using the compressor* provided by
12 volt sockets the factory > page 274. The power consump-
You can connect electrical accessories to the 12 tion in the sockets may be temporarily ex-
volt sockets. The power usage from the sockets ceeded when using the compressor*.
must not exceed a total of 120 watts. Do not
connect multiple devices to the sockets in the ve- Cup holders
hicle at the same time. Applies to: vehicles with cup holders
=
The 12 volt sockets are labeled with the 12V
e
symbol. They are located in the front center con- =s
8
sole, in the rear* and on the side trim panel in the
luggage compartment*.
USB ports
Applies to: vehicles with USB port
You can charge mobile devices using the USB

ports. The USB ports are labeled with the «<> or
[4 symbol or CHARGE ONLY. Fig. 86 Rear center armrest*: cup holders
ZA WARNING Depending on vehicle equipment, your vehicle

—To reduce the risk of fatal injury, store all may have cup holders in the front center console,
connected devices securely when driving so in the center of the rear bench seat, or in the rear
that they do not move around inside the ve- center armrest as well as on the right and left
hicle when braking or in the event of an acci- side in the rear.
dent.
Cup holders in the rear center armrest*
— Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries
or burns. To reduce the risk of injuries, never > Fold the center armrest* downward.
leave children unattended in the vehicle > To open the cup holders, pull the top cover on
with the vehicle key. the cup holders forward > fig. 86.
> To close the cup holder, fold the cover back un-
@) Note til it clicks into place.
— Read the operating manuals for the con-

nected devices.
ZA\ WARNING
—To reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle — Do not put any hot beverages in the cup
electrical system, never attempt to charge holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot bev-
the vehicle battery by connecting accesso- erages could spill, which increases the risk
ries that provide power to the power sour- of injury.
ces. — Do not use any breakable beverage contain-
— Do not connect any device whose network ers (for example, made out of glass or por-
celain). You could be injured by them in the
8W7012721BB
class (voltage) does not match the network

class designed for the socket. event of an accident. >
91
@) Note ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of

an accident. Store objects securely while
Beverage containers in the cup holders should
driving.
always have a lid. Otherwise, the liquid inside
— Only use the storage compartments in the
could spill and cause damage to vehicle
door trim panels to store small objects that
equipment.
will not stick out of the compartment and
impair the function of the side airbags.
Storage and — Due to strength reasons, only secure objects
compartments up to 11 lbs (5 kg) with the straps* in the
luggage compartment. Heavier objects are
Storage area behind the rear head
not adequately secured. There is risk of per-
eel)
Applies to: vehicles with storage area behind the rear head re-
sonal injury.
straints — Only lightweight clothing should be hung
from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do
The storage area can be used to carry light pieces
not use clothes hangers to hang clothing.
of clothing.
The pockets of the clothing must not con-
ZA WARNING tain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged

objects. This could impair the effectiveness
The storage compartment must not be used of the side curtain airbags.
to transport heavy objects, hard objects, or — Make sure your view toward the rear is not
animals. Such objects endanger vehicle occu- blocked, for example by hanging clothing or
pants and increase the risk of injury during objects in the vehicle.
sudden driving or braking maneuvers or in an
accident.
Luggage compartment
@) Note General information
Make sure that the heating grid strips for the
All pieces of luggage or objects must be securely
rear window defogger are not damaged by
fastened in the luggage compartment. Note the
abrasive objects.
following to maintain good vehicle handling:
@ Tips > Distribute the load evenly in the luggage com-
To ensure the ventilation functions correctly, partment.
the ventilation slots between the rear window > Stow heavy luggage as far forward in the lug-
and the storage area must not be covered. gage compartment as possible.
> Use non-elastic cords attached to the tie-downs
to secure objects.
Additional storage options
Depending on vehicle equipment, there are a va- ZA\ WARNING

riety of storage areas, compartments, and retain- — Applies to: vehicles with luggage compart-
ers, such as the glove compartment, for safely ment cover: The luggage compartment cov-
storing and securing objects. er is not a surface for storing objects. Ob-
jects placed on the cover increase the risk of
Z\ WARNING injury to all vehicle occupants during sudden
—To reduce the risk of injury, make sure all driving or braking maneuvers or in the event
storage compartments are always closed of an accident.
while driving.
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve-
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak-
92
— Applies to: vehicles with luggage compart- ing pinched, pay attention and check when
ment cover: The luggage compartment cov- folding backrests forward.
er must always be securely fastened when in — The backrest must be securely latched so
use to reduce the risk of an accident. objects cannot slide forward out of the lug-
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- gage compartment during sudden braking.
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- — The backrest must be latched securely to en-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of sure that the safety belt is protecting the
an accident. Always stow objects securely in center seating position.
the luggage compartment and secure them — Always pull forward on the backrest to make
at the tie-downs. Use straps suitable for sure it is check if it is correctly locked in
heavy objects. place.
— If pieces of luggage or objects are secured
to the tie-downs with unsuitable or dam- () Note
aged straps, this can increase the risk of in-
—To reduce the risk of damage, move the rear
jury during braking maneuvers or accidents.
head restraints down > page 74 before fold-
— When transporting heavy objects, the vehi- ing the rear backrests forward.
cle characteristics will change due to the
— When folding the backrest forward, make
shift in the center of gravity, which increases
sure the outer safety belts are in the belt
the risk of an accident. You may need to
guide recess so that they do not get pinched
adapt your driving style and speed to the in the backrest lock and damaged. Other ob-
current conditions. jects should be removed from the rear
— The cargo net* is only strong enough to se- bench seat to protect the backrest from
cure light objects. Heavy objects are not ade- damage.
quately secured. Attempting to secure heavy —To reduce the risk of damaging the front
objects increases the risk of injury.
seats, make sure there is enough space be-
— Never exceed the permitted axle and load
tween the front seat and the rear seat
and vehicle weight > page 300. equipment when folding the center backrest
— Never secure a child safety seat to the tie- forward.
downs. — If you move the front seat back when the
— Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe- rear seat backrest is folded forward, you
cially if the luggage compartment lid is could damage the head restraints on the
open. Children could enter the luggage com- rear seat.
partment and close the luggage compart- — Make sure that the heating grid strips for
ment lid from the inside. This creates the the rear window defogger are not damaged
risk of fatal injury, since the children would by abrasive objects.
be locked in and may not be able to escape
by themselves. @) Tips
— Do not allow children to play in or on the ve-
— The tire pressure must be adapted to the
hicle. Close and lock the luggage compart-
load > page 254.
ment lid as well as all other doors when you
— You can purchase straps at specialty stores.
leave the vehicle.
— Never transport passengers in the luggage
compartment. Every passenger must be cor-
rectly secured with the safety belts in the
vehicle > page 75.
8W7012721BB
— Be careful when releasing the backrest and

folding it forward. To reduce the risk of be-
93
Luggage compartment c
Applies to: vehicles with luggage compartment cover
B8W-0198
oO)
DR
4
0
oO
W\\ E= i!
Fig. 87 Luggage compartment: luggage compartment lid
cover Fig. 89 Outer backrest: release lever, securing knob, and
lock*
B8W-0118
Fig. 88 Luggage compartment: cover behind the rear
bench seat Fig. 90 Center backrest: folding in* the center backrest
Observe the safety precautions > page 92. Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be
possible to fold the backrests forward separately
Removing and installing the luggage
or together.
compartment lid cover
> To remove the cover, turn the knob to a hori-
zontal position. Folding the outer* rear backrests forward
> Pull the cover out of the retainers in the direc- and backward
tion of the arrow &fig. 87.
> Pull the release lever (
> To install the cover, slide it forward on the re-
arrow and fold the backrest forward.
tainers until they engage.
> Fold the backrest back up again until it locks in-
> Turn the knob to a vertical position.
to place and the red marking (@) is no longer
Removing and installing the cover behind visible.
the rear bench seat
Folding the center rear backrest forward and
> To remove the cover, pull it in the direction of backward
the arrow >fig. 88. Applies to: Sportback
> Pull the cover upward to release.
> Pull on the upper release lever( ) and fold the
> To install the cover, insert the left and right
backrest forward 2
sides of the cover into the mounts on the side
> Fold the backrest backward until it locks into
trim panel.
place.
> Slide the cover forward until it locks into place.
94
Applies to: vehicles with lockable backrests in the rear and a > To set up the backrest again, fold it back until it
lockable pass-through.
locks or the red marking (8) > page 94, fig. 89
To prevent access to the luggage compartment
is no longer visible.
from the vehicle interior, the backrest can be
locked with the mechanical key © when it is
latched in place and the pass-through can be
Applies to: vehicles with pass-through
locked = page 95. You can only enlarge the lug-
gage compartment if the backrest is not locked.
Increasing the size of the cargo area from

inside the luggage compar nt
Applies to: vehicles with release lever in the luggage compart-
ment
wSs
8
Ss
ao
Fig. 93 Center backrest: pass-through release
> To release the pass-through, turn the lock on

i a the backrest > fig. 93.
> Fold the center backrest forward > page 94.
Applies to: Coupe:
Fig. 91 Luggage compartment: release lever
G) Tips
BEW-0265|
The pass-through can be locked and unlocked

from within the luggage compartment. This
prevents any access to the luggage compart-
ment from the vehicle interior.
Applies to: Cabriolet:

Fig. 92 Luggage compartment: release lever
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be

possible to fold the backrests forward separately
or together.
> Applies to: Coupe:To fold the left/right backrest

forward, pull the left/right lever @/@)
=> fig. 91 in the direction of the arrow. To fold
the center backrest* forward, pull the smaller
release lever (3).
8W7012721BB
> Applies to: Cabriolet: To fold the backrest for-

ward, pull the release lever > fig. 92 in the di-
rection of the arrow.
95
downs and luggage com Roof rack

General information
Applies to: vehicles with roof rack mount
rr
+a
2
a
oO
Applies to: Coupe

Fig. 96 Roof: mounting points
B8Ww-0244
Fig. 95 Luggage compartment: luggage compartment net*
stretched out

Applies to: Sportback
Tie-downs Fig. 97 Roof: mounting points
There are tie-downs (@ in the luggage compart- If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof,
ment to secure pieces of luggage and objects. you must observe the following:
» Use the tie-downs to secure the cargo. — These roof racks are the basis for a complete
roof rack system. Only roof racks that are suita-
Cargo net
Applies to: vehicles with cargo net
ble for your vehicle may be used. Audi recom-
mends roof racks and attachments from the
Use the cargo net (2) to secure lighter objects in Audi Genuine Accessories program.
the luggage compartment
— Make sure the roof rack is mounted on the vehi-
> Fold the clip for the tie-downs upward. cle only at the specified locations.
> Attach the hooks for the cargo net to the tie- — Note the permitted axle load, permitted total
downs. weight, and permitted roof load of your vehicle
=> page 300. The roof load is the total of the
weight of the roof rack, the attachments and
the cargo you are carrying. However, you must
also note the permitted load of the carrier sys-
tem being used.
— Follow the installation instructions provided

with the roof rack system. If you do not
96
secure the roof rack system and objects on

the roof correctly, they could come loose
from the vehicle and cause an accident.
— The risk of an accident increases when using
a roof rack system, because it changes the
driving characteristics by shifting the center
of gravity and/or the increasing the surface
area exposed to wind. You may need to
adapt your driving style and speed to the
current conditions.
Make sure that the luggage compartment lid

and the panoramic glass roof* do not come in-
to contact with objects on the roof when they
are open.
Energy usage will increase because of the in-

creased wind resistance. Remove the roof rack
when you are no longer using it.
8W7012721BB
97
Warm and cold
Warm and cold using the seat heating* function. To reduce

the risk of injury, these individuals should
Climate control system not use seat heating”.
C) Note
Your vehicle has a deluxe automatic climate con-
To reduce the risk of damage to the seat heat-
trol system with 3 zones where the temperature,
ing* elements, do not kneel on the seats or
air distribution, and air supply can be set sepa-
place heavy pressure on one area of the seat.
rately on the left front side, the right front side,
and in the rear. @) For the sake of the environment
The climate control system warms, cools, dehu- Energy can be saved by switching off the A/C
midifies, and filters the air in the vehicle interior. mode.
It is the most effective when the windows and
Panoramic glass roof* or power top* are closed. Gi) Tips
If there is a build-up of heat inside the vehicle,
—To prevent interference with the heating or
ventilation can help to speed up the cooling proc- cooling output and to prevent the windows
ess. from fogging over, the air intake in front of
The automatic climate control system automati- the windshield must be free of ice, snow,
cally maintains a temperature once it has been and leaves.
set. In all heating mode functions except defrost, — Condensation from the cooling system can
the blower only switches to a higher speed once drip and form a puddle of water under the
the coolant has reached a certain temperature. vehicle. This is normal and does not mean
there is a leak.
Pollutant filter — The energy management system may tem-
The pollutant filter removes pollutants such as porarily switch off certain functions, such as
dust and pollen from the air. the seat heating” or rear window defogger.
These systems are available again as soon as
Z\ WARNING the energy supply has been restored.
— You should not use the recirculation mode — If the front passenger's seat heating* is
for an extended period of time, because no turned on, it will not turn on again automat-
fresh air is drawn in and the windows can ically if more than 10 minutes have passed
fog when cooling mode is switched off. This between switching the ignition off and on
increases the risk of an accident. again.
— Individuals with reduced sensitivity to pain
or temperature could develop burns when
98
Warm and cold
3-zone deluxe automatic climate control
Applies to: vehicles with 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control system
B8W-0137
Fig. 98 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control system: cockpit controls
B8W-0138
Fig. 99 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control system: rear controls
Press the knobs, buttons or rocker switches to Observe the safety precautions > A\ in Descrip-
turn the functions on or off. When the function is tion on page 98.
switched on, the LED in the respective button or
OFF] Climate control system
knob turns on.
The [OFF] button switches the climate control
Some rocker switches can be assigned with multi-
system on or off. It also switches on when you
ple functions. The various functions can be acti-
press another button or a knob. Airflow from out-
vated by pressing on the switch multiple times.
side is blocked when the climate control system
On right-hand drive vehicles*, the functions of
is switched off.
the rocker switches @) and ©) are reversed.
The driver and front passenger settings can be A/C / A/C MAX* Cooling mode
8W7012721BB
adjusted separately. You can adjust the settings You can switch the respective cooling mode on
for the rear of the vehicle using the controls in and off with the rocker switch @).
the rear > fig. 99.
99
Warm and cold
The cooling mode only functions with the blower sure a continuous exchange of air inside the vehi-
turned on. The air is not cooled and humidity is cle. To have the blower regulated automatically,
not reduced when cooling mode is switched off. press one of the knobs (@).
This can cause fog on the windows. The cooling
Air distribution
mode switches off automatically at low outside
temperatures. You can use the rocker switches (2) to adjust the
vents where the air will flow out of. Press the
If you activate A/C ON, the cooling mode will be
rocker switches (2) repeatedly until the desired
automatically regulated. A/C OFF switches cool-
air distribution setting is displayed in the climate
ing mode off.
control system controls. To have the air distribu-
If you activate A/C MAX*, the cooling mode will tion regulated automatically, press one of the
operate with maximum output. To reduce unnec- knobs @).
essary energy usage, only use this function brief-
ly. SYNC Synchronization
Use the rocker switch (5) to select the function.
<= Recirculation mode
When synchronization is switched on, the set-
In recirculation mode, the air inside the vehicle is tings for the driver's side are applied to the front
circulated and filtered. This prevents the unfil- passenger's side and the rear (except for seat
tered air outside the vehicle from entering the heating/ventilation*). If the settings on the front
vehicle interior > A\ in Description on page 98. passenger's side or in the rear are changed, the
synchronization will automatically switch off and
Pressing the <> button switches recirculation
3-ZONE will appear in the display.
mode on or off manually. You can also switch the
recirculation mode off by pressing the knob @ or SET REAR Function
the §% button.
Use the rocker switch G) to select the function.
AUTO Automatic mode When the function is switched on, you can adjust
all settings for the rear using the climate control
Automatic mode maintains a constant tempera-
system controls in the cockpit. The rear climate
ture inside the vehicle. Air temperature, airflow
control system controls cannot be operated at
and air distribution are controlled automatically.
the same time. This function switches off auto-
You can switch automatic mode on or off by
matically after a certain period of time or after
pressing the knob @).
leaving the menu.
Temperature
a Seat heating*
You can adjust the temperature between 60°F
The seat heating temperature can be set at mul-
(+16°C) and 84°F (+28°C) by turning the knob
tiple levels. Press the w button once to switch on
©. If outside of this range, LO or HI will appear
the highest level. Press the button again to de-
in the climate control system display. In both set-
crease the temperature one level at a time. The
tings, the climate control runs constantly at the
seat heating is off when all of the LEDs are off.
maximum cooling or heating level. The tempera-
ture is not regulated. #4 Seat ventilation*
The temperature can be adjusted in the rear us- The seat ventilation intensity can be set to multi-
ing the rear controls > fig. 99. ple levels. Press the £J button once to switch on
the highest level. Press the £4 button again to
$= Blower
decrease the intensity one level at a time. The
You can adjust the volume of air generated by the seat ventilation is off when all of the LEDs are off. >
blower to your preference using the rocker switch
@. The blower should always run at a low setting
to prevent the windows from fogging and to en-
100
Warm and cold
-} Neck heating* Vents

Applies to: vehicles with neck heating
You can open or close the center and rear vents in
The neck heating temperature can be set at mul- the cockpit and the vents in the rear center con-
tiple levels. Press the 2 button once to switch on sole using the ridged thumbwheels. The levers
the highest level. Press the J button again to de- adjust the direction of the airflow from the vents.
crease the temperature one level at a time. The
neck heating is off when all of the LEDs are off. Residual heat
You can activate the residual heat function when
a Seat heating and ventilation*
Applies to: vehicles with seat heating/ventilation
the ignition is switched off by pressing the knob
@ (left side). The residual heat from the coolant
If you press the # button, you can turn either the is used to heat the vehicle interior. The residual
seat ventilation or the seat heating on or off. heat function switches off automatically after
— If you turn the knob @ clockwise, you will turn about 15 minutes.
the seat heating down to the lowest level (1).
The red LED in the button will turn on. To in- Z\ WARNING
crease the temperature, keep turning clockwise — Individuals with reduced sensitivity to pain
to the highest level (3). or temperature could develop burns when
— If you turn the knob @ counterclockwise, you using the neck heating”. To reduce the risk
will turn the seat ventilation down to the low- of injury, these individuals should not use
est level (1). The blue LED in the button will neck heating*.
turn on. To increase the ventilation, keep turn- — If the air vents in the seats are covered by
ing counterclockwise to the highest level (3). clothing or similar objects when the neck
heating* is switched on, the output from the
® Defrosting neck heating may become very hot tempora-
The windshield and side windows are defrosted rily. This can cause burns on unprotected
or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible. skin exposed directly to the vents.
Align the outer air vents with the side windows.
The maximum amount of air flows mainly from G) Tips
the vents below the windshield. Recirculation
— When the power top* is closed, the neck
mode switches off. The temperature should be heating* will switch automatically from set-
set at 72 °F (+22 °C) or higher. The temperature
ting 3 to setting 2 after approximately six
is controlled automatically. minutes.
You can switch the defroster on or off using the — The heat output from the neck heating* is
® button. You can switch the function off by lower when the power top” is closed than
pressing a knob (). when it is open.
@ Rear window defogger

Additional settings
The rear window defogger only operates when Applies to: vehicles with 3-zone deluxe automatic climate
the engine is running. It switches off automati- control system
cally after 10 to 20 minutes, depending on the

You can adjust additional settings.
outside temperature.
To prevent the rear window defogger from
HICLE > Air conditioning.
switching off automatically, press and hold the
& button for more than three seconds. This is Auto recirculation
8W7012721BB
stored until the ignition is switched off.

When switched on, automatic recirculation con-
trols the recirculation mode automatically. You >
101
Warm and cold
must press the §& button if fog forms on the win- Symbol | Meaning
dows.
e The A/C system must only be serv-
iced by qualified technicians.
Steering wheel heating
& Flammable refrigerant
Scale Le mola
Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating Make sure all components are dis-
posed of correctly and never install
> Press the @ button on the multifunction steer-
oi components in the vehicle that have
ing wheel to switch the steering wheel heating
been removed from old vehicles or
on and off.
taken from recycling.
Messages Lubricant in the A/C system

Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
The sticker in the engine compartment provides
@ Steering wheel heating: on / Steering wheel information about the type and amount of refrig-
heating: off erant oil used in the vehicle’s A/C system. For the
refrigerant oil quantity, refer to the Technical Da-
This message appears if you switched the steer- ta > page 300.
ing wheel heating on or off by pressing the but-
ton on the multifunction steering wheel. ZA WARNING
Steering wheel heating: malfunction! See own- To ensure secure and safe operation, the A/C
er's manual system must only be serviced by qualified
technicians and certified technicians (SAE
If this message appears, there is a malfunction.
standard J2845).
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
@) Tips
— Never repair the A/C system evaporator with
Fluids in the A/C system components from old vehicles or from recy-
cling.
Refrigerant in the A/C system — New replacement evaporators for portable
The sticker in the engine compartment provides A/C systems must be certified and labeled
information about the type and amount of refrig- as such, so that they comply with the SAE
erant used in the vehicle’s A/C system. The stick- standard J2842 HFO-1234yf and R744.
er is located in the front section of the engine
compartment or at the front or back of the hood.
Symbol Meaning
A
Warning: the A/C system must only
be serviced by qualified technicians.
He Refrigerant type
at Lubricant type
Refer to the service information
&)
(only available for authorized Audi
dealers or authorized Audi Service
Facilities)
102
Driving
Driving Switching on and off

If you would like to switch the ignition on or off
Starting the vehicle without starting the engine, follow these steps:
(eta > Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button without
pressing the brake pedal.
Switching the ignition off automatically

To prevent the vehicle battery from draining, the
ignition and possibly the exterior lighting may
switch off automatically.
Requirements:
— The Start/Stop system must have stopped the
engine.
— You must have left the vehicle for longer than
Fig. 100 Center console: starting the engine
30 seconds.
— The ignition must be switched on.
Requirement: the key must be in the vehicle.
Among other indicators, the system detects that
Starting the engine
you have left the vehicle based on the following
> Press and hold the brake pedal. factors:
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. The
— The driver's door has been opened.
engine will start.
— The driver's safety belt has been unbuckled.
Equipment that uses a lot of electricity is switch- — The brake pedal is not being pressed.
ed off temporarily when you start the engine. If
The ignition will also be switched off after 30 mi-
the engine does not start immediately, the start-
nutes or if you lock the vehicle from the outside.
ing procedure stops automatically after a short
time. If this is the case, repeat the starting pro-
cedure after approximately 30 seconds.
Z\ WARNING
—To reduce the risk of asphyxiation, never al-
Stopping the engine low the engine to run in confined spaces.
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop. — Never turn off the engine before the vehicle
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. The has come to a complete stop. Switching it
engine will switch off. off before the vehicle has stopped may im-
pair the function of the brake booster and
Applies to: vehicles with steering lock: The steer-
power steering. You would then need to use
ing is locked when you turn off the engine and more force to steer and brake the vehicle.
open the driver's door. The steering lock helps
The fact that you cannot steer and brake as
prevent vehicle theft. “P” must be engaged on usual may increase the risk of accidents and
vehicles with an automatic transmission. serious injuries.
Stopping the engine in an emergency — Secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-
iting the vehicle > page 104.
If necessary in an emergency, the engine can also
be stopped while driving using the emergency off
CG) Note
function*.
— Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and
8W7012721BB
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button twice in heavy engine load if the engine has not
a row or press and hold it one time. reached operating temperature yet. You
could damage the engine.
103
Driving
— If the engine has been under heavy load for Service Facility to have the malfunction correct-
an extended period of time, heat builds up ed.
in the engine compartment after the engine
is switched off and there is a risk of damag- When driving
ing the engine. For this reason, let the en-
gine run at idle for approximately two mi- Starting to drive, stopping, and parking
nutes before shutting it off.
Starting from a stop
G) Tips > Press and hold the brake pedal.

> Start the engine.
— Brief noises are normal when starting and
> Select a gear.
stopping the vehicle and are no cause for
> Release the parking brake.
concern.
> Release the brake pedal. The vehicle may roll.
— For up to 10 minutes after stopping the en-
> Press the accelerator pedal to accelerate.
gine, the radiator fan may turn on again au-
tomatically or it may continue to run, even if Securing the vehicle against rolling
the ignition is switched off.
Secure your vehicle to prevent it from rolling be-
— It may not be possible to start the vehicle in
fore exiting the vehicle.
extremely low temperatures.
— Power will be fully available once the engine > Set the parking brake.
is at operating temperature. > Select the “P” selector lever position.
> If parking on a steep road, turn the steering
Messages wheel so that your vehicle will roll against the

curb in case it should start to move.
= Engine start system: malfunction! Please
If one of these measures is not possible, for ex-
contact Service
ample because there is no vehicle power, you
There is a malfunction in the engine start system. must secure your vehicle against rolling using ad-
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer ditional measures.
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the > Only park the vehicle on a level surface.
malfunction repaired. > Use suitable objects to block the front and rear
wheels.
B Remote control key: key not detected. Is the
key still in the vehicle? Set the parking brake before selecting the “P” se-
lector lever position. This prevents too much
The vehicle key was removed from the vehicle
stress from being placed on the locking mecha-
while the engine is running. If the vehicle key is
nism when parking on a steep surface.
no longer in the vehicle, you cannot switch the ig-
nition on or start the engine once you stop it. You
also cannot lock the vehicle from the outside. ZA WARNING
— Always set the parking brake when leaving
Remote control key: hold back of key
your vehicle, even if for a short period of
against the designated area. See owner's man-
time. If the parking brake is not set, the ve-
ual
hicle could roll away, increasing the risk of
The battery in the vehicle key may be drained or an accident.
there may be a malfunction. To start the vehicle, — Do not leave your vehicle unattended while
you must also hold the vehicle key against the lo- the engine is running, because this increases
cation shown P) > page 103, fig. 100. the risk of an accident.
If the malfunction remains, drive immediately to
— If the parking brake is set, it can release au-
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
tomatically when the accelerator pedal is
pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident, >
104
Driving
do not inadvertently press the accelerator — The hill hold assist cannot hold the vehicle
pedal and always shift into “P” when the ve- on inclines in every scenario (for example,
hicle is stopped. on slippery or icy ground).
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
off and take the key with you. This is espe- Gears and driving programs
cially important when leaving persons or an-
imals in the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle
RAZ-0410:
R (y—
could start unintentionally, the parking
brake could release, or electronic equipment
could activate, which increases the risk of an (2—*
accident. N
i
— No persons or animals should be left in a
locked vehicle. Locked doors make it more
difficult for emergency workers to enter the D/S
vehicle, which puts lives at risk. NEI
~~
— If you do not begin driving immediately af- Fig. 101 Center console: selector lever
ter releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle
may begin to roll backward. Press the brake The automatic transmission shifts automatically
pedal or set the parking brake immediately. depending on the selected gear and the current
driving style. When driving with a moderate driv-
@) Note ing style, upshifting early and downshifting late
will help to improve fuel economy. When driving
If you have to stop on an incline, always press
with a sporty driving style, the transmission per-
the brake pedal to hold the vehicle in place to
mits higher RPMs.
reduce the risk of the vehicle rolling back-
ward. Do not try to hold the vehicle in place The gears are displayed next to the selector lever.
by pressing and holding the accelerator pedal.
— P (Park)
The transmission can overheat, which increas-
—R (Reverse): driving in reverse
es the risk of damage.
—N (Neutral): idle
—D (Drive)
Hill hold assist
Selecting a gear
If you take your foot off of the brake pedal when
driving on hills, the braking force will be held for Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
several seconds. At that time, you can start driv- — Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the
ing without the vehicle rolling backward. brake pedal.
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed, — Press the release button (@ on the selector lev-
the engine must be on, and the vehicle must be er.
traveling uphill. —To select the nearest gear, move the selector
lever forward or back until you feel the first
> To activate hill hold assist, press and hold the pressure point.
brake pedal for several seconds while the vehi-
—To skip a gear (for example, move from “D” to
cle is stationary. “R”), move the selector lever past the pressure
point in the desired direction.
ZA WARNING —The label next to the selector lever for the se-
— If you do not begin driving immediately af- lected gear will light up.
8W7012721BB
ter releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle

may begin to roll backward. Press the brake
pedal or set the parking brake immediately.
105
Driving
“N” (Neutral) gear To switch between the current driving program

In the “N” gear, power is not transmitted to the and “S”, push the selector lever toward the rear.
driving wheels. Use the “N” gear in a car wash
(with conveyor belts), for example.
ZA WARNING
— Before you start driving, check if the label
If you unintentionally select “N” while driving
for the desired selector lever position next
(faster than 1 mph (2 km/h)), you can also shift
to the selector lever is lit up.
back to “D” without pressing the brake pedal.
— Secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-
For safety reasons, the vehicle cannot be locked iting the vehicle > page 104.
when the transmission is in the "N” gear. — Power is still transmitted to the wheels
when the engine is running at idle. To pre-
“Pp” (Park) gear
vent the vehicle from “creeping”, you must
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. keep your foot on the brake in all selector
lever positions (except "P" and "N") when
The vehicle is secured from rolling away by the
the engine is running.
parking lock when in the “P” gear.
— To reduce the risk of an accident, do not
— Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the press the accelerator pedal when changing
brake pedal. gears if the vehicle is stationary and the en-
— Press the “P” button @) on the selector lever. gine is running.
— The “P” next to the selector lever will light up. — Never select the “R" or "P” gears while driv-
“P” engages automatically if you switch the en- ing. Doing so could cause an accident.
gine off while the “D” or “R” gear is selected. If — The vehicle can roll even if the ignition is
you switch the engine off in “N”, “P” will engage switched off.
automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
@) Tips
If you want to switch from “P” to “D” or “R”, the
If you shift between “D” and “R” within one
engine must be running.
second, you do not need to press the brake
If you cannot shift out of “P”, for example be- pedal. This makes it possible to “rock” if it is
cause the vehicle has no power, you may need to stuck, for example.
use the emergency release for the parking lock
=> page 108.
Selecting a driving program

Various driving programs can be selected when in
the “D” gear. The programs influence when the
transmission shifts and how the accelerator ped-
al responds.
The selected driving program is displayed in the

instrument cluster.
—D (Drive): normal driving mode

— S (Sport): sporty driving mode
If you select the Dynamic mode in Audi drive se-

lect*, the “S” driving program will be activated.
When the ignition is switched off, the driving pro-
gram may be reset to “D”.
106
Driving
> To switch back to automatic mode, press and

hold the @) shift paddle or push the selector
lever toward the rear.
RAZ-0411
If you stop using the shift paddles temporarily,
the transmission will switch back to automatic
mode. To keep shifting manually, tilt the selector
lever toward the front passenger's side.
G) Tips
— The transmission only allows manual shift-
Fig. 102 Center console: shifting manually with the selec- ing when the engine speed is within the per-
tor lever mitted range.
— The transmission automatically shifts up or
RAZ-0003
down before critical engine speed is
reached.
— Applies to: RS models: When accelerating,
the transmission will not automatically shift
to the next gear shortly before the maxi-
mum permitted engine RPM is reached.
Shift to the next highest gear at the right
time.
—
Fig. 103 Steering wheel: shift paddles*
Accelerator pedal
You can shift the gears manually when in “D”
mode. The transmission must be in tiptronic You can accelerate the vehicle using the accelera-
mode. You can shift into manual shifting mode tor pedal.
while the vehicle is stationary or while driving. Maximum acceleration
Shifting with the selector lever If you press the accelerator pedal all the way
> To switch to manual shifting mode, tilt the se- down, the motor’s full power will be used and
lector lever toward the front passenger's side you will reach maximum acceleration, also called
=> fig. 102. “M” will be displayed in the instru- “kick-down’”.
ment cluster.
> Upshifting: push the selector lever forward G). Z\ WARNING
> Downshifting: push the selector lever toward The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle
the rear ©). could swerve on slick or slippery road surfaces
> To switch back to automatic mode, tilt the se- when using kick-down, which increases the
lector lever toward the driver's side. risk of an accident.
Shifting with the shift paddles

Applies to: vehicles with shift paddles ETT meen ace)
> Upshifting: press the () shift paddle > fig. 103.
> Downshifting: press the ©) shift paddle. Launch Control provides the best possible accel-
> Applies to: RS models: To engage the lowest eration when starting from a stop.
possible gear for maximum acceleration, press
8W7012721BB
Requirements
and hold the ©) shift paddle.
— The engine must be at operating temperature.
— The steering wheel must not be turned. >
107
Driving
— Start/Stop system* must be deactivated Manually releasing the parking lock

>page 111.
—ESC must be limited > page 121.
B8W-0047
— Driving program “S” > page 106 or the Dynam-
ic Audi drive select* mode must be selected
=> page 118.
Using Launch Control

— Press the brake pedal with your left foot and
hold it all the way down for at least one second.
— With the brake pedal pressed, press the accel-
erator pedal all the way down with your right
foot at the same time.
B8W-0162
— Once the engine reaches a constant speed, re-
move your foot from the brake pedal.
Once the vehicle has started moving, reactivate

the ESC so that it is fully functional.
ZX WARNING
Only use Launch Control when road and traffic
conditions allow it and other road users will
Fig. 105 Front cup holder: parking lock emergency release
not be endangered or impacted by your driv-
ing and the vehicle's acceleration. The driving
The emergency release is located in the front cup
wheels could spin and the vehicle could
holder under a cover.
swerve, especially on slick or slippery road
surfaces, which increases the risk of an acci- You will need the screwdriver and the socket
dent. wrench from the vehicle tool kit in order to re-
lease > page 274. Use the flat side of the reversi-
@) Note ble screwdriver blade.
When accelerating using Launch Control, all Releasing the parking lock using the
vehicle components are subject to heavy emergency release
loads. This can result in increased wear.
> Secure the vehicle against rolling > page 104.
> Remove the rubber mat.
@ Tips
> Pry the cover off the opening using the screw-
After accelerating using the Launch Control, driver inserted in the slot.
the temperature of some vehicle components > Insert the socket wrench from the vehicle tool
may increase greatly. If that happens, the kit into the opening.
function will not be available for a few mi- > Turn the socket wrench clockwise until it stops
nutes to reduce the risk of damage. After a @ and press it downward until it locks into
cool-down period, Launch Control will be place @).
available again. > Leave the socket wrench inserted.
Resetting the parking lock

> Press the brake pedal and start the engine.
> Keep the brake pedal pressed and engage the
following selector lever positions one after the
other: "N","D", and back to "N". >
108
Driving
> Turn the engine off again. thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
> Grasp the socket wrench with both hands and Facility soon to have the malfunction corrected.
carefully pull it upward to remove.
fl Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
> Reinsert the cover and rubber mat.
ue driving with limited function. Please contact
Service
ZX WARNING
There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
— Only use the parking lock emergency release
sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
if the vehicle is secured against rolling
mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or
= page 104. An unsecured vehicle may roll,
may no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
which increases the risk of an accident.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
— Only activate the emergency release while
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
on a level surface or a slight slope.
malfunction corrected.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, you must
not drive when the emergency release is ac- [@] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
tivated. ue driving with limited function. No reverse
gear
@) Note There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
Due to the risk of damage, carefully remove sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
the socket wrench when you reset the parking mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or
lock. may no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
You cannot engage the reverse gear. Drive to an
Messages authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
& Transmission: malfunction! Safely stop vehi- rected.
cle
[8] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle as soon ue driving in D until engine is off
as possible in a safe location and secure it so it
does not roll > page 104. See an authorized Audi There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
sistance. mode. If you turn the engine off, you will not be
able to select any other gears after restarting the
fi Transmission: too hot. Please stop vehicle engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Do not continue driving. Select "P" and contact an thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service the malfunction corrected.
Facility for assistance. i Danger of rolling away! P not possible.
[8] Transmission: too hot. Please adapt driving Please apply parking brake
style — The parking lock was released using the emer-
The transmission temperature has increased sig- gency release > page 108. Or
nificantly. Drive very cautiously or take a break — The parking lock can no longer be engaged.
from driving until the temperature returns to the Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
normal range and the indicator light turns off. ized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
the malfunction corrected. Secure the vehicle
[8] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin- against rolling before exiting the vehicle
ue driving. See owner's manual => page 104.
8W7012721BB
There is a system malfunction in the transmis- il Selector lever: malfunction! Gear change on-
sion. You may continue driving. Drive to an au- ly possible if using both shift paddles. >
109
Driving
There is a system malfunction in the selector lev- aire (alee Madey

neat iN ede (Tue A
er. You can continue driving with restricted func- driving
tion. The selector lever is not working. Gears can
only be selected by tapping both shift paddles at Your driving style greatly influences the amount
of fuel and energy consumed, the environmental
the same time when the vehicle is stationary. The
“P” gear is automatically engaged when you turn impact, and the wear on the engine, brakes, and
tires. Note the following information for efficient
off the engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer
and environmentally-conscious driving:
or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
have the malfunction corrected. — Turn off electrical equipment that is not need-
i Selector lever: malfunction! You can contin- ed, for example seat heating*.
ue driving. Please contact Service — Anticipate upcoming traffic situations while
driving to avoid unnecessary acceleration and
There is a system malfunction in the selector lev- braking.
er. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal- — Avoid driving at high speeds.
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the — Avoid adding extra weight to the vehicle if pos-
malfunction repaired. sible, for example by not leaving roof racks or
fs} P button: malfunction! Auto P when engine bike racks installed when they are not needed.
off. Please contact Service — Make sure the tire pressure is correct.
— Have maintenance performed regularly on the
There is a malfunction in the "P" button on the
vehicle.
selector lever. The “P” gear is automatically en-
— Do not let the engine run while the vehicle
gaged when you turn off the engine. Drive to an
parked.
— Do not drive with winter tires during the summ-
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
er.
rected.
— Use the Start/Stop system.
Move selector lever to automatic position — Utilize the engine braking effect.
There is a malfunction in the tiptronic mode. End — Avoid driving short distances when possible.
tiptronic mode by pushing the selector lever to
the left into the "D/S" position. (i) Tips
The amount of noise produced by the vehicle
Drive system can increase significantly when driving with a
sporty style. Show respect to others around
you and the environment with the way you op-
erate your vehicle, especially at night.
A new vehicle must be broken in within the first
1,000 miles (1,500 km) so that all moving parts
work smoothly together, which helps to increase Sees
the service life of the engine and other drive com-
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent ener-
ponents.
gy management system for distributing electrici-
Do not drive higher than two-thirds of the maxi- ty. This significantly improves the starting ability
mum permitted engine RPM during the first 600 and increases the vehicle battery life.
miles (1,000 km) and do not use full accelera-
tion. The engine can be increased RPM gradually @ Tips
during the next 300 miles (500 km). —If you drive short distances frequently, the
vehicle battery may not charge enough
while driving. As a result, convenience func-
tions for electrical equipment may be tem-
porarily unavailable.
110
Driving
— The vehicle battery will gradually drain if Switching the Start/Stop system off and on
the vehicle is not driven for long periods of The @)* button is located above the selector lev-
time, or if electrical equipment is used er in the center console. The LED in the button
when the engine is not running. To ensure turns on when the function is switched off.
that the vehicle can still be started, the
electrical equipment will be limited or > Press (A)>F to switch the system on or off.
switched off. If you switch the system off during a Stop phase,
the engine will start again automatically.
ICTe lt
Basic requirements
B Drive system: malfunction! Safely stop vehi-
— The driver’s door and the hood must be closed
cle
and the driver’s safety belt must be fastened.
There is a malfunction in the drive system. The —"P","N", or"D" must be engaged.
brake booster and the power steering may stop —The steering wheel must not be turned far in ei-
working. Stop the vehicle immediately or as soon ther direction.
as possible and do not continue driving. Secure — The vehicle must have driven faster than 2 mph
the vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehi- (3 km/h) since the last time it stopped.
cle > page 104. Have the problem corrected by — The vehicle is not in trailer mode.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility. @) Note
B Drive system: malfunction! Please contact Always switch the Start/Stop system off when
Service driving through water > page 111.
There is a malfunction in the drive system. Drive G) Tips

slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
— Depending on the driving situation, the en-
Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction cor-
gine may already stop when coasting before
rected.
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
—If you select the "D" position after shifting
Start/Stop system into reverse, the vehicle must be driven fast-
er than 6 mph (10 km/h) in order for the
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system Start/Stop system to become active again.
This makes it possible to maneuver without
The Start/Stop system can help increase fuel stopping the engine.
economy and reduce CO2 emissions.
In Start/Stop mode, the engine shuts off auto- Stopping and starting the engine
matically when stopped, for example at a traffic Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
light. If certain conditions are met, the engine
> Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle
may stop before the vehicle has come to a com-
has stopped. The @J indicator light appears in
plete stop. If you press the accelerator pedal
the instrument cluster once the engine stops
when this happens, the engine will start and driv-
automatically.
ing power will be transmitted.
> The engine starts again when you remove your
The ignition and important assist systems such foot from the brake pedal. The indicator light
as the brake booster will remain available during turns off.
the Stop phase. The engine will restart automati-
If the parking brake is set, the engine will only
8W7012721BB
cally when needed.

start again when the accelerator pedal is pressed. >
The Start/Stop system is automatically activated
once the ignition is switched on.
111
Driving
This message appears when specific conditions

@ Tips
are not met during a Stop phase. The Start/Stop
— Press the brake pedal during a Stop phase system will not be able to restart the engine. The
to keep the vehicle from rolling. engine must be started with the
— The ignition will turn off if you press the START ENGINE STOP] button.
START ENGINE STOP} button during a Stop
phase. Vehicle starting system: malfunction! Please
contact Service
— If you leave the vehicle briefly during a Stop
phase and then enter again, the driver's There is a malfunction in the Start/Stop system.
door must be closed and the safety belt Drive the vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or
must be fastened in order for the engine to authorized Service Facility as soon as possible to
be able to restart. have the malfunction corrected.
— You can control if the engine will stop or not
by reducing or increasing the amount of Brakes
force you use to press the brake pedal. For
example, if you only lightly press on the General information
brake pedal in stop-and-go traffic or when
You can apply the vehicle's brakes using the brake
turning, the engine will not switch off when
pedal.
the vehicle is stationary. If you press the
brake pedal harder, the engine will switch Operating noise
off.
Noises may occur when braking depending on the
speed, braking force, and outside conditions such
Starting and stopping the engine automat- as temperature and humidity.
ically
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system Braking effect
The system checks if certain conditions are met The response time from the brakes depends on
before and during the Stop phase, and deter- the weather and environmental conditions. To
mines if the engine stops and how long it re- ensure the optimal braking effect, the brake sys-
mains stopped. For example, if power usage is tem is cleaned at regular intervals. This is done
high, the engine will not be stopped. Along with by applying the brake pads to the brake rotors for
other conditions, the following factors influence a short period of time when driving at high
the automatic engine start or stop: speeds when the windshield wipers are switched
on.
— Environmental conditions (slopes, inclines, ele-
vation, temperature) If the brake system becomes damp, for example
— Battery (charge status, temperature, power us- after driving in heavy rain, the braking effect may
age) be delayed. Other factors that could temporarily
— Engine temperature increase the response time of the brakes include:
— Assist systems — Wet conditions
— Driving behavior — Low temperatures, ice, and snow
Depending on the engine, the indicator light — Roads covered in salt
may appear if the engine is not stopped. — Dirty brake pads
Corrosion
Corrosion may form on the brake rotors if there is
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
no heavy braking, if the vehicle is not driven for
Drive system: please start the vehicle manually long periods of time, or if the vehicle is not driv-
en frequently or for long distances. In this case, >
112
Driving
braking heavily several times while driving at

high speeds can clean the brake rotors > A\.
ZA\ WARNING
— Only apply the brakes for the purpose of
Brake pads cleaning the brake system when road and
New brake pads do not achieve their full braking traffic conditions permit. You must not en-
effect during the first 250 miles (400 km). They danger other road users and increase the
must be “broken in” first. However, you can com- risk of an accident.
pensate for the slightly reduced braking force by — Due to the risk of injury, only have an au-
pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
braking during the break-in period. Service Facility work on the brake system.
Incorrect repairs could impair the function.
Brake pad wear depends largely on the way the
— Never let the vehicle roll while the engine is
vehicle is driven and on operating conditions.
stopped because this increases the risk of an
Brake pad wear increases when driving frequently
accident.
in the city or short distances or when using a very
— During automatic braking maneuvers, the
sporty driving style.
brake pedal may move downward automati-
Ceramic brakes cally. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
Applies to: vehicles with ceramic brakes place your foot under the brake pedal.
Ceramic brakes provide excellent deceleration
@) Note
rates.
— Never let the brakes “rub” by pressing the
The break-in period for new ceramic brakes may
pedal lightly when braking is not actually
be significantly longer than for standard brake
necessary. This can cause the brakes to over-
rotors. Due to the properties of the material,
heat and increases braking distance and
they may cause noises at lower speeds. Ceramic
causes wear.
brakes also absorb more moisture in wet condi-
— Observe the important information for driv-
tions. Therefore, there will temporarily be less
ing downhill > page 116. This especially ap-
braking force than when the brakes are dry. You
plies when towing a trailer.
can compensate for this by pressing the brake
pedal harder.
(i) Tips
Automatic post-collision braking system — In vehicles with an electromechanical brake
The automatic post-collision braking system can booster, the resistance in the brake pedal
help to reduce the risk of sliding and of addition- may vary depending on the driving situation
al collisions after an accident. If the airbag con- (such asif driver assistance system are ac-
trol module detects a collision, the vehicle is tive).
braked by the ESC. — If you retrofit your vehicle with a front spoil-
er, wheel covers or similar items, make sure
The vehicle does not brake automatically if one of that the air flow to the brakes is not ob-
the following occurs: structed. Otherwise the brake system can
— The driver presses the accelerator pedal, or overheat.
— The braking force generated by the pressed — Also refer to the information about brake
brake pedal is greater than the braking force fluid > page 238.
that would be initiated by the system
— The ESC, the brake system, or the vehicle elec-
trical system is not functioning
8W7012721BB
GG / @® Brakes: malfunction! Stop vehicle

safely
113
Driving
There is a malfunction in the brake system. If lize the vehicle will no longer be available.
ES/@ana BAalso turn on, there is a malfunc- This could cause the vehicle to swerve, which
tion in the ABS, ESC, and braking distribution. If increases the risk that the vehicle will slide.
the brake booster is not working, you have to use Do not continue driving. See an authorized
much more force when braking the vehicle. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi for assistance.
sistance. Read and follow the other safety pre- Electromechanical
cautions > A\. parking brake
fie / @ Brake pads: wear limit reached. You
Operating the parking brake
can continue driving. Please contact Service
The electromechanical parking brake is used to
The brake pads are worn. Drive to an authorized
secure the vehicle from rolling away unintention-
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as
ally.
soon as possible to have the malfunction correct-
ed. The ©) switch is located under the selector lever
in the center console. It turns on when the park-
Brake booster: limited functionality. You can
ing brake is set. You can release the parking brake
continue driving. Please contact Service
manually or automatically when you start to
There is a brake booster malfunction. The brake drive.
booster is available, but its effectiveness is re-
duced. The braking performance may be different Setting and releasing the parking brake
compared to the usual performance. Drive to an > Setting: pull the ®) switch.
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service > fiin/ appears, the parking brake is hold-
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor- ing the vehicle. You can remove your foot from
rected. the brake pedal.
> Releasing: when the ignition is switched on,
Brake booster: deactivated. See owner's manual
press and hold the brake pedal and press the ©)
The brake booster remains active for a brief peri- button.
od of time after switching off the ignition. Secure
If the red indicator light flashes, the braking
the vehicle against rolling > page 104.
force has not built up enough or it has decreased.
Other indicator lights You can also secure the vehicle by selecting the
When you switch the ignition on, the BRRMa / @ “P” gear or pressing the brake pedal. Make sure
indicator light turns on briefly to check the func- the indicator light is off before you start driving.
tion. If the indicator light does not turn on, there Automatically releasing the parking brake
is a system malfunction. when starting to drive
If Be / @ stays on, there is a malfunction in Requirement: the driver's door must be closed
the brake system. and the driver’s safety belt must be fastened.
© - Ahigh load was placed on the brakes from > Press the accelerator pedal to start to drive.
driving downhill for a long period of time. Follow
the instructions in the message to utilize the en- ZA WARNING
gine braking effect and to relieve the brakes.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, always
ZA WARNING make sure the vehicle is situated
while stationary.
safely
If a malfunction occurs in the ABS, ESC, and

— If the parking brake is set, it can release au-
braking distribution, interventions that stabi-
tomatically when the accelerator pedal is
114
Driving
pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident, ZA\ WARNING

do not inadvertently press the accelerator
Heavy braking while driving through curves or
pedal and always shift into “P” when the ve-
in poor road or weather conditions can cause
hicle is stopped.
the vehicle to slide or the rear of the vehicle to
— If the power supply fails, you cannot set the
swerve, which increases the risk of an acci-
parking brake once it is released, or release
dent.
it if it is set. Secure the vehicle against roll-
ing before exiting the vehicle > page 104.
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Messages
Audi Service Facility for assistance.
ERG / ) Parking brake: malfunction! Safely
stop vehicle. See owner's manual
G) Tips
GG / @ Parking brake: malfunction! Please
— On steep inclines, especially when in trailer
release parking brake
mode, the vehicle may roll backwards unin-
tentionally when starting to drive. To reduce If one of the two messages appears, there is a
the risk of this happening, pull and hold the malfunction in the parking brake. If the message
switch while pressing the accelerator appears while stationary, check if the parking
pedal. If enough drive power has built up at brake is released and can be reset. If this is the
the wheels and the vehicle does not roll case, switch the ignition off and back on.
backwards, then release the switch to start
If the message stays on, if the parking brake can-
to drive.
not be released, or if the message appears while
— If you leave the vehicle when “D” or “R” are
driving, do not continue driving. Secure the vehi-
engaged, the parking brake will be set auto-
cle against rolling before exiting the vehicle
matically.
= page 104. See an authorized Audi dealer or au-
— Noises when the parking brake is set and re-
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
leased are normal and are not a cause for
concern. gw Parking brake: malfunction! Please contact
— The parking brake goes through a self-test Service
cycle at regular intervals when the vehicle is There is a malfunction in the parking brake. Drive
stopped. Any noises associated with this are to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
normal. Service Facility immediately to have the malfunc-
tion corrected. Do not park the vehicle on inclines
Emergency braking function and secure it against rolling before exiting the ve-
hicle > page 104.
Emergency braking should only be used in an
emergency, if the standard brake pedal is mal- / Parking brake: warning! Vehicle parked
functioning or obstructed. When the emergency too steep
braking function is activated, the braking effect is
The braking force may not be enough to secure
similar to a heavy braking maneuver.
the vehicle from rolling away. Park the vehicle in
> Pull and hold the © switch while driving. a place with less of an incline.
> An audio warning signal will sound and emer-
fa f Parking brake: applied
gency braking will begin.
> If you press the accelerator pedal, emergency The parking brake is set. Press and hold the brake
braking will be canceled. pedal to release the parking brake.
Take over!
8W7012721BB
115
Driving
The vehicle cannot be held in place automatically. down the hill and will attempt to maintain the
Press the brake pedal to secure the vehicle from speed at which the vehicle was traveling at the
rolling away unintentionally. time the brake pedal was pressed. Press the
brake pedal if necessary. The hill descent con-
Special driving situations trol will switch off once the hill levels out or
you press the accelerator pedal.
Sporty driving — Utilize the engine braking effect when driving
downhill by selecting the “S” driving program
When driving in a sporty style, the wear on all ve- => page 106. This especially applies when tow-
hicle components is greatly increased, especially ing a trailer. This reduces the load on the
on the engine, transmission, tires, brakes, and brakes.
suspension. This can result in increased wear. Al- — Apply the brakes in intervals and do not press
so note the following points: the brake pedal continuously.
— Make sure the vehicle is in good condition. ZA WARNING

Make sure to check the brake pads, tire tread,
— Only drive on inclines that your vehicle is de-
and tire pressure (when tires are warm).
signed to handle. Do not exceed the hill
— Beforehand, warm up the engine by driving no
climbing ability of your vehicle. Your vehicle
higher than two-thirds of the maximum permit-
could tip or slide.
ted engine RPM. The engine oil must be
— Do not drive at an angle on steep inclines
brought to a minimum temperature of 158 °F
and hills. If your vehicle is about to tip, you
(70°C).
must immediately start steering in the di-
— Before stopping the vehicle, allow the engine
rection of the downward slope to reduce the
and brakes to cool back down to a regular oper-
risk of an accident.
ating temperature by driving normally.
— Always be ready to brake when using the hill
If necessary, use the following functions: descent control function.
— Dynamic Audi drive select mode* > page 118
— Launch Control > page 107 PTTL Matic: RL -s
— Limit ESC > page 122
If you must drive through water, follow these in-
structions:
G) Tips
Wear caused by load does not constitute a ve- — Check the stability of the ground, the current,
hicle fault as defined by the terms of the war- and the water depth. If the ground is unstable,
ranty. there is a strong current, or there are waves,
the water must only reach up to the lower edge
of the body at the most.
Driving uphill and downhill
— Deactivate the Start/Stop system*.
When driving uphill, downhill, or at high alti- — Drive carefully and no faster than at walking
tudes, note the following information: speeds to prevent the front of the vehicle from
creating waves, because they could splash
— Drive slowly and carefully.
above the lower edge of the body. Oncoming
— Do not try to turn around if you cannot safely
vehicles could also create waves.
drive on an incline or hill. Instead, drive in re-
— Do not stop the vehicle while in the water.
verse.
— Drive in reverse.
— When driving down hills, you can activate the
— Do not turn the engine off.
hill descent control if you press the brake pedal
while driving in “D” gear. The automatic trans-
mission will select a gear suitable for driving
116
Driving
After driving through water, press the brake

pedal carefully to dry the brakes so that the
full braking effect will be restored.
Vehicle components such as the engine, drive

system, suspension, or electrical system can
be severely damaged by driving through wa-
ter.
If possible, avoid driving through salt water

because it increases the risk of corrosion. Use
fresh water to clean any vehicle components
that come into contact with salt water.
8W7012721BB
117
Driving dynamic
Driving dynamic G) Tips
Audi drive select When the ignition is being switched on, indi-
vidual systems, such as the drive system, will
Introduction be reset to a balanced setting. Select the cur-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
rent mode again to attain its full configura-
Drive select makes it possible to experience dif- tion.
ferent types of vehicle characteristics in one vehi-
cle. With different driving modes, the driver can Selecting RS mode
switch the setting, for example from sporty to Applies to: RS models
comfortable. This allows you to adjust the set-
In RS models, there are two individual adjustable
tings to your personal preferences. This makes it
RS modes instead of the individual mode.
possible to combine settings such as a sporty
drivetrain setting with comfortable steering. Selecting the mode
> Press the fase button on the multi-function
Selecting an Audi drive select mode steering wheel to switch between the RS modes
and the last selected Audi drive select mode.
The sie button is located above the selector lever Or:
in the center console. > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Audi drive select.
> Press the left or right arrow key until the de-
sired mode appears in the MMI. Or: Adjusting the mode
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Audi drive select. HICLE > Audi drive select.
You can change the driving mode when the vehi- > Press ¥ to configure the respective RS mode
=> page 118, Individual settings.
cle is stationary or while driving. If traffic per-
mits, briefly remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal after changing modes so that the mode Individual settings
you have selected will be activated for the drive Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
system.
The equipment in your vehicle will determine
The following modes may be available depending which settings you can adjust.
on the equipment:
Drive
Comfort - Provides a comfort-oriented vehicle
The drive system will react to accelerator pedal
setup and is suited for long drives on highways.
moves more quickly or in a more balanced man-
Auto - Provides an overall comfortable yet dy- ner. The shift points are located in higher or low-
namic driving feel and is suited for everyday use. er engine speed ranges on vehicles with automat-
ic transmissions.
Dynamic - Gives the driver a sporty driving feel
and is suited to a sporty driving style. The “S” Depending on the setting, the drive power at the
driving program is selected. rear axle will be distributed with the sport differ-
ential* to be more sporty or moderate
Individual - Provides the option for personalized
=> page 121.
vehicle settings. Press to configure the mode
= page 118, Individual settings. In RS models, the sport differential is adjusted
using a separate menu item.
118
Driving dynamic
Steering
CG) Note
The power steering will adapt. Light steering is
Always make sure there is enough clearance
suitable for long trips on highways or smooth
above and below the vehicle. This is especially
driving around curves, for example.
important for entrances with height restric-
Suspension tions, for example, before driving into under-
ground garages. You could also scrape the
The suspension adjusts to be tighter or more
ground when driving over the edges of curbs
comfort-oriented when it comes to compensat-
or on steep ramps, which could damage your
ing for uneven spots on the road.
vehicle.
Engine sound
The engine sound adapts and can be subtle to
sporty. In the automatic setting, the engine 1 o | Suspension: malfunction! You can continue
sound depends on the selected driving program. driving
quattro with sport differential There is a malfunction. See an authorized Audi
Depending on the setting, the drive power at the sistance.
rear axle will be distributed with the sport differ-
ential* to be more sporty or moderate Steering
> page 121.
Suspension Electromechanical steering supports the driver's

steering movements by electronically adapting
OXF ola Me Elia te}
the power steering depending on the vehicle
Applies to: vehicles with suspension control
speed. The settings depend on the selected Audi
The adaptive dampers are an electronically-con- drive select* mode.
trolled damping system. The firmness of the sus-
Dynamic steering
pension will adapt to the driving conditions and
Applies to: vehicles with dynamic steering
the driving situation. The settings depend on the
selected Audi drive select* mode. The driving dynamic and driving stability are in-
creased by the steering ratio based on the speed.
At reduced speeds, steering is direct in order to
Ground clearance
provide agile steering behavior and keep the
The vehicle height and clearance can be influ- steering effort as minimal as possible when the
enced by the following factors: driver is maneuvering the vehicle. This sets the
steering to be less sensitive at higher speeds in
— Change in temperature
order to provide improved vehicle control.
— Change in load
ZA\ WARNING Messages

To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no one a Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
gets pinched when the vehicle level is chang-
ing, for example when cleaning the under- The power steering may have failed. Adapt your
body or the wheel housings. driving style immediately to compensate for the
fact that it may be more difficult to turn the
8W7012721BB
steering wheel, and stop your vehicle in a safe lo-

cation as soon as possible. Secure the vehicle
against rolling before exiting the vehicle
119
Driving dynamic
= page 104. Do not continue driving. See an au- —Ifthe a or Ee indicator light only stays on
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service for a short time, you may continue driving.
Facility for assistance.
BS Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle All wheel drive (quattro)

There is a malfunction in the electronic steering
lock. You cannot turn the ignition on. Secure the Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive
vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehicle

The all-wheel drive system distributes the driving
= page 104. Do not tow your vehicle because it
power variably to the front and rear axle to im-
cannot be steered. See an authorized Audi dealer
prove the driving characteristics. It works togeth-
or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
er with selective wheel torque control, which can
& Steering: malfunction! You can continue activate when driving through curves
driving =>page 121.
There is a malfunction in the steering system. Applies to: vehicles with quattro ultra: If the driv-
Steering may be more difficult or more sensitive. ing situation does not require all wheel drive,
Adapt your driving style. Have the steering sys- then the rear section of the drivetrain will decou-
tem checked immediately by an authorized Audi ple to save fuel. The system constantly deter-
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Please mines and anticipates if all wheel drive is needed.
note that the red indicator light may turn on af- This allows the rear drivetrain to recouple shortly
ter restarting the engine. Do not continue driving before it is needed.
if it does.
The all-wheel drive system is designed for high
|@—<| Steering lock: malfunction! Please contact engine power. Your vehicle is exceptionally pow-
Service erful and has excellent driving characteristics
both under normal driving conditions and on
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering
snow and ice. Always read and follow safety pre-
lock. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi
cautions > A\.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have
the malfunction repaired.
ZA WARNING
Dynamic steering: correcting steering wheel — Even in vehicles with all wheel drive, you
position should adapt your driving style to the cur-
The steering is reinitializing. The steering wheel rent road and traffic conditions to reduce
will move easily after starting the vehicle. Reiniti- the risk of an accident.
alization might be necessary if the steering wheel — The braking ability of your vehicle is limited
was moved while the engine was switched off. to the traction of the wheels. In this way, it
The display turns off if the initialization was suc- is not different from a two wheel drive vehi-
cessful. cle. Do not drive too fast because this in-
creases the risk of an accident.
Z\ WARNING — Note that on wet streets, the front wheels
can “hydroplane’” if driving at speeds that
Do not tow your vehicle if there is a malfunc-
tion in the electronic steering lock because are too high. Unlike front wheel drive
vehicles, the engine RPM does not increase
this increases the risk of an accident.
suddenly when the vehicle begins hydro-
planing. Adapt your speed to the road condi-
@ Tips
tions to reduce the risk of an accident.
— If there is a malfunction, the steering wheel
may be crooked when driving straight.
120
Driving dynamic
Sport differential Electronic Stabilization

Applies to: vehicles with sport differential
Control
The sport differential distributes the drive power
to the rear axle based on the situation. The goal
is a high level of agility and ability to accelerate Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) supports
on curves. The vehicle is very responsive to steer- driver safety. It reduces the risk of slipping and
ing. The settings depend on the selected Audi improves driving stability. ESC detects critical sit-
drive select* mode. uations, such as if the vehicle is oversteering or
understeering, or if the wheels are spinning.
Messages The brakes are applied or the engine torque is re-
duced in order to stabilize the vehicle.
7-3] All-wheel drive: malfunction! You can con-
tinue driving. Please contact Service The following stabilization functions are integrat-
ed into the ESC, among others:
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when brak-
t-3] Sport differential: malfunction! Please con- ing. The vehicle can still be steered even during
tact Service hard braking. Apply steady pressure to the brake
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer pedal. Do not pump the pedal.
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the A pulsing in the brake pedal indicates that the
malfunction repaired. system is acting to stabilize the vehicle.
BH Att-wheel drive: too hot. Please adapt driv- Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)
ing style. See owner's manual
ASR reduces drive power when the wheels begin
The transmission temperature has increased sig- spinning and adapts the power to the road condi-
nificantly due to the sporty driving manner. Drive tions. This will increase the driving stability.
in a less sporty manner until the temperature re-
turns to the normal range and the indicator light Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
switches of. The EDL applies the brakes to wheels that are
iT-3| Sport differential: temperature too high. slipping and transfers the drive power to the oth-
Please adapt driving style er wheels. This function is not available at higher
speeds.
The transmission temperature has increased sig-
nificantly due to the sporty driving manner. Drive In extreme cases, EDL automatically switches off
in a less sporty manner until the temperature re- to keep the brake on the braked wheel from over-
turns to the normal range and the indicator light heating. The vehicle is still functioning correctly.
switches of. EDL will switch on again automatically when con-
ditions have returned to normal.
A WARNING
Selective wheel torque control
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
Selective wheel torque control is used when driv-
ized Audi Service Facility if the sport differen-
ing on curves. Braking is targeted toward the
tial is faulty or malfunctioning. The repair
wheels on the inside of the curve as needed. This
must be performed by trained personnel us-
allows more precise driving in curves. >
ing the correct oil in order to ensure safety.
8W7012721BB
121
Driving dynamic
Power steering chains. The ESC can also be limited to provide

more sporty driving characteristics with fewer
The ESC can also support vehicle stability
through steering. stabilizing corrective actions.
—To limit the ESC, press the S20 button briefly.

ZA WARNING The B indicator light will turn on.
— The ESC and its integrated systems cannot — To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization
overcome the limits imposed by natural function, press the button again. The indicator
physical laws. This is especially important on light turns off.
slippery or wet roads. If the systems begin
Switching off ESC
acting to stabilize your vehicle, you should
immediately alter your speed to match the For a more active control of the vehicle where the
road and traffic conditions. Do not let the in- stabilizing functions of the ESC cannot intervene,
creased safety provided tempt you into tak- the ESC can be switched off.
ing risks. This could increase your risk of a
—To switch off the ESC, press and hold the or
collision.
button for more than three seconds. The B
— Please note the risk of a collision increases and Ea indicator lights turn on.
when driving fast, especially through curves
— To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization
and on slippery or wet roads, and when driv-
function, press the button again. The indicator
ing too close to objects ahead. There is still
lights turn off.
a risk of accidents because the ESC and its
integrated systems cannot always prevent ZA\ WARNING
collisions.
— When the ESC is switched off or limited,
— Accelerate carefully when driving on
there will be no vehicle stabilization or it will
smooth, slippery surfaces such as ice and
be limited. The driving wheels could spin
snow. The drive wheels can spin even when
and the vehicle could swerve, especially on
these control systems are installed and this
slick or slippery road surfaces, which in-
can affect driving stability and increase the
creases the risk of an accident.
risk of a collision.
— Because of the increased risk of an accident,
only drive with the ESC switched off or Limit-
@) Tips
ed when it is necessary. Reactivate the ESC
The ABS and ASR only function correctly when as soon as possible.
all four wheels have a similar wear condition.
Different tire sizes can lead to a reduction in @) Tips
engine power.
— If the ESC is limited, switched off, or mal-
functioning, systems with an automatic
braking intervention function may not be
The So button (or 2, depending on the model) fully available.
for controlling the ESC is located in the center — If malfunctions occur in other systems or
console, in front of the selector lever. The ESC is certain driver assist systems are active, the
automatically switched on when the ignition is ESC must be switched on by the system. The
switched on. ESC may switch on automatically and can-
not be operated with the button.
Limiting ESC
In some situations, it may make sense to limit
the stabilizing function of the ESC so that the
wheels can spin, for example to rock a vehicle to B fs / B © Stabilization control (ESC/
free it when it is stuck or to drive with snow
ABS): malfunction! See owner's manual
122
Driving dynamic
There is a malfunction in the ABS or EDL. This al-

so causes the ESC to malfunction. The brakes still
function with their normal power, but ABS is not
active.

Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
malfunction corrected.
Other indicator lights
ita blinks while driving, the ESC is actively reg-

ulating. Operating noises may occur. If the indi-
cator light stays on, the ESC has been switched
off due to system needs. The indicator light turns
off when the system is fully functional.
8W7012721BB
123
Trailer towing
Trailer towing C@) Note

Driving with a trailer Longer inclines cannot be driven without a
suitable cooling system, especially if the out-
er else) side temperatures are high. Otherwise, this
Your vehicle is primarily intended for transport- increases the risk of engine damage.
ing people and luggage. However, if you drive
with a trailer, follow the technical requirements, Operating instructions
the operation and driving tips, and the legal reg-
Towing capacity
ulations.
Your vehicle can only be operated with class 1 or
Driving with a trailer affects the vehicle's energy
class 2 trailers.
usage, performance, and wear. It also requires
higher concentration from the driver. Load distribution
Poor cargo load and distribution can negatively
Z\ WARNING impact vehicle handling. Load the trailer based
Do not transport any people in a trailer due to on the following criteria as much as possible:
the risk of fatal injury.
— Store objects in the vehicle luggage compart-
ment, if possible. The vehicle should always
Technical requirements carry the heaviest possible load and the trailer
Trailer hitch should have the lightest possible load.
— Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
Only use a trailer hitch with a removable ball heavy objects are as close to the axle as possi-
hitch mount and ball hitch. The trailer hitch must
ble.
be permitted for the vehicle, the trailer and the
— Secure objects so that they do not slide.
permitted total weight of the trailer being
— Utilize the maximum permitted tongue weight
pulled. Above all, it must be securely and safely
if possible.
attached to the vehicle trailer.
Tires
Never mount a trailer hitch on the bumper. The
trailer hitch must be mounted in a way that does Set the tire pressure on your vehicle for a “full
not impair the function of the bumper. Do not load”; see the tire pressure sticker > page 254. If
make any changes to the exhaust system and the necessary, also adjust the tire pressure on the
brake system. trailer according to the manufacturer's specifica-
tions.
Check regularly if the trailer hitch is securely
mounted. Always follow the instructions given by The trailer and the vehicle should be equipped
the trailer hitch manufacturer. with winter tires when driving in winter tempera-
tures.
Trailer brakes
Outside mirrors
If the trailer has its own brake system, then fol-
low the manufacturer specifications. However, If you cannot see the traffic behind the trailer
the brake system on the trailer must never be with the standard exterior mirrors, then you
connected to the vehicle brake system. must attach additional exterior mirrors. Adjust
them so you have a sufficient visibility behind
Engine cooling system
you.
Driving with a trailer means a higher load on the
Exterior lighting
engine and the cooling system. The cooling sys-
tem must be designed for additional load and Follow the legal regulations for lighting on your
contain enough coolant > @. trailer that are applicable in the country where >
124
Trailer towing
you are operating the vehicle. Contact an author- Hill

ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- When you start driving uphill or downhill, trailers
ty for more information. may tilt or sway sooner than when driving ona
Before you start driving, check all lighting equip- level surface. If small swaying movements have
ment on the trailer while it is hitched to the vehi- already occurred, you can stabilize the trailer by
cle. firmly braking immediately. Never attempt to
“straighten out” the trailer by accelerating.
The headlight range control automatically ad-
justs the light range of the headlights. Downshift before driving on hills to utilize the en-
gine braking effect > A\.
Safety chains
Brakes
Make sure the safety chains are correctly applied
when pulling a trailer. The chains should hang When using a trailer with overrun brakes, first
enough so that the trailer can drive around brake gently then quickly. This reduces the risk of
curves. However, they must not touch the jerking while braking if the trailer wheels lock up.
ground.
Engine coolant temperature
@) Note Pay attention specifically to the coolant tempera-
Attachments retrofitted on the vehicle may ture display when there are high outside temper-
cause damage, especially on the trailer hitch atures, and when driving on long inclines
ball head. In cases of damage, have the func-
=> page 14. Shift to a higher gear in a timely man-
tion checked by an authorized Audi dealer or
ner.
authorized Audi Service Facility.
JN WARNING
@ Tips Constant braking causes the brakes to over-
— Block the wheels with chocks when parking heat and can substantially reduce braking per-
on inclines if the trailer is loaded. formance, increase braking distance, or cause
complete failure of the brake system.
— Audi recommends having the vehicle in-
spected between the inspection intervals if
you tow a trailer frequently.
— Avoid driving with a trailer during the vehi-
cle break-in period.
Driving with a trailer
Driving with a trailer requires extra caution.
Speed
Adhere to the legal speed limits. Follow the legal
regulations that are applicable in the country
where you are operating the vehicle.
As the speed increases, the driving stability of

the trailer decreases. Therefore you should not
exceed the maximum legal speed limit when
there are unfavorable road, weather, and/or wind
8W7012721BB
conditions. This especially applies when driving

downhill.
125
Assist systems
Assist systems System limitations
General information ZA\ WARNING

SP ae eel idol ay —The use of an assist system cannot over-
come the natural laws of physics. A collision
ZA WARNING cannot be prevented in certain circumstan-
— As the driver, you are always completely re- ces.
sponsible for all driving tasks. The assist — Warnings, messages, or indicator lights may
systems cannot replace the driver's atten- not be displayed or initiated on time or cor-
tion. Give your full attention to driving the rectly, for example, if vehicles are approach-
vehicle, and be ready to intervene in the ing very fast.
traffic situation at all times. — Corrective interventions by the assist sys-
— Activate the assist systems only if the sur- tems, such as steering or braking interven-
rounding conditions permit it. Always adapt tions, may not be sufficient or they may not
your driving style to the current visual, occur. Always be ready to intervene.
weather, road, and traffic conditions.
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- G) Tips
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- — Due to the system limitations when detect-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of ing the surrounding area, the systems may
an accident. Store objects securely while warn or intervene unexpectedly or too late
driving. in certain situations. The assist systems may
— For the assist systems to be able to react also interpret a driving maneuver incorrectly
correctly, the function of the sensors and and then warn the driver unexpectedly.
cameras must not be restricted. Note the in- — The systems may not function as expected
formation on sensors and cameras in unusual driving situations, such as driving
=> page 127. offroad, on unpaved roads, on loose ground,
on inclines, or on grooves in the road.
@ Tips — The systems may not function correctly in
— Pay attention to applicable local regulations unclear traffic situations, such as turning
relating to driving tasks, leaving space for lanes, exit ramps, construction zones, rises
emergency vehicles, vehicle distance, speed, or dips that obstruct visibility, intersections,
parking location, wheel placement, etc. The toll stations, or city traffic.
driver is always responsible for following — The detection of the surrounding area can
the laws that are applicable in the location be limited, for example by vehicles driving
where the vehicle is being operated. ahead or by rain, snow, heavy spray, or light
— You can cancel a steering or braking inter- shining into the camera.
vention by the system, by braking or accel- — The steering wheel touch recognition may
erating noticeably, steering, or deactivating be limited when you wear gloves. Steering
the respective assist system. intervention requests from the steering as-
— Always check the assist systems settings be- sist systems may occur more frequently.
fore driving. The settings could have been — If accessories have been mounted on the
changed, for example by other drivers. steering wheel, the steering assist systems
may be limited. The frequency of steering
intervention requests from the steering as-
sist systems may vary as well.
126
Assist systems
Surrounding area Radar sensors
detection Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area

surrounding the entire vehicle may be detected
SY d camera coverage areas
> fig. 106 ©.
The wheel sensors on the rear corners of the vehi-
cle are positioned so that the adjacent lanes to
the left and right are detected on roads with a
normal lane width.
Ultrasonic sensors
Depending on vehicle equipment, various areas

may be displayed in the MMI using the ultrasonic
sensors > fig. 106.
The range of the displays depends on the location

of the ultrasonic sensors:
@ Approximately 4 feet (1.20 m)
@® Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m)
@® Approximately 5.2 feet (1.60 m)
© Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m)
© Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m)
The side area © is detected and evaluated when
passing. There may have been changes to the sur-
rounding area after switching the ignition off and
on again, after opening the doors, or if the vehi-
B8V-0687
cle is left stationary for a period of time. In this

case, the area will appear black until the area has
been detected and evaluated.
Cameras
Use the camera image on the display to assist you
only if it shows a good, clear picture. Keep in
mind that the image in the display is enlarged
Fig. 107 Rearview camera coverage area and distorted. Under certain circumstances, ob-
jects may appear different and unclear on the dis-
The assist systems analyze the data from various
play.
sensors and cameras installed in the vehicle. Do
not use any assist systems if there is damage in The rearview camera can only detect the area
there area of the sensors and cameras or on the marked in red > fig. 107. Only this area is dis-
vehicle underbody. Damage can impair the func- played on the center display. > A\.
tion of the sensors and cameras or cause mal-
functions. Have an authorized Audi dealer or au- ZA WARNING
thorized Audi Service Facility check their func- Sensors and cameras have spots in which the
tion. surrounding area cannot be detected. Objects,
animals, and people may only be detected
8W7012721BB
with limitations may not be detected at all.

Always monitor the traffic and the vehicle's >
127
Assist systems
surroundings directly and do not become dis- — External ultrasonic sensors, such as those in
tracted. other vehicles, can interfere with the sen-
sors.
C) Note — The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 106
and cameras > fig. 107 are diagrams and do
— Obstacles may disappear from the measure-
not represent a true-to-scale image of the
ment range when approaching them, even if
sensor ranges.
they were already detected.
—Insome situations, the ability of the sen-
sors and cameras to detect and display cer-
=> page 297.
tain objects may be limited.
— Objects located above the coverage area,
Locations of the sensors and cameras
such as bumpers on parked cars, garage
doors that are partially open, or objects
that are hanging
— Low obstacles
— Narrow objects, such as barrier chains, fo-
liage, poles, or fences
— Projecting objects, such as trailer draw
bars
— Objects with certain surfaces and struc-
tures, such as fabric
Fig. 108 Front area: sensors and cameras
@) Tips
— The sensors and cameras and the areas
around them must not be obstructed be-
cause this can impair the function of the
systems that depend on them. Make sure
that the sensors and cameras are free of
snow, ice, and other deposits. Do not use
any accessories, stickers, or other objects
that extend into the range of the sensors
and cameras.
Fig. 109 Rear area: sensors and cameras
— On vehicles that have factory-installed li-
cense plate brackets on the front of the ve- Front area
hicle, the brackets may only be replaced
with ones that are the same size and made
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
of the same material. Do not install any li- ing sensors and cameras may be installed:
cense plate brackets on the front of vehicles — Camera behind the windshield
that do not have factory-installed brackets. — Peripheral cameras on the exterior mirrors
Otherwise, the function of the system could — Front peripheral camera in the radiator grille
be impaired. — Front and side ultrasonic sensors
— The function of the sensors and cameras — Front radar sensors at the corners of the bump-
may be limited when light and visibility con- er
ditions are poor, for example when driving
into a tunnel, when there is glare, or when
there are reflective objects.
128
Assist systems
Rear area

ing sensors and cameras may be installed:
— Rearview camera in the luggage compartment
lid
— Radar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle
— Rear and side ultrasonic sensors
G) Tips
— The locations of the sensors may differ
slightly depending on vehicle equipment.
— Some sensors are installed under vehicle
components and cannot be seen from the
outside.
8W7012721BB
129
Driving information
Driving information Camera-based traffic

Speed warning system sign recognition
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition

Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
The speed warning system helps the driver to

ia) meee et
stay below a specified maximum speed. A warn-
ing threshold can be set in the MMI for this pur-
pose.
Once the speed slightly exceeds the stored

threshold, the speed warning system will alert
the driver with an indicator in the instrument
cluster and a warning tone. Once the speed drops
below the stored maximum speed, the indicator Fig. 110 Instrument cluster: traffic sign recognition
will turn off.
The traffic sign recognition shows the traffic
Setting a threshold is recommended if you would
signs detected by the front camera in the instru-
like to be reminded when you reach a certain
ment cluster display and in the head-up display”.
maximum speed. Situations where you may want
Data from the navigation system is also included
to do so include driving in a country with a gener-
in the display. Up to three traffic signs can be dis-
al speed limit or if there is a specified maximum
played in the instrument cluster at once. The
speed for winter tires.
speed limit that is currently applicable is dis-
@ Tips played in the status line. If necessary, it will be
hidden if the system detects that turning right is
Regardless of the speed warning system, you
prohibited at a red light. The display in the head-
should always monitor your speed using the
up display* can be switched off > page 26.
speedometer and make sure you are adhering
to the legal speed limit. Within the limits of the system and depending
on the market, speed limit restrictions @ in
school zones, highways, construction zones, or at
Setting the warning threshold
night may be displayed.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Limitations

VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Speed warning. The traffic sign recognition is subject to certain
system limitations and may be unavailable or on-
Messages ly partially available in the following situations:
— When visibility is poor, such as in snow, rain,
cy ) Manually set speed limit XX mph fog, or heavy spray
(km/h) exceeded — When there is glare, for example from oncom-
ing traffic or the sun
The stored speed was exceeded.
— At high speeds
— If the camera's visual field > page 127 is cov-
ered, for example by dirt or stickers. For infor-
mation on cleaning, see > page 267.
— If the traffic signs are completely or partially
covered, for example by trees, snow, dirt, or
other vehicles
130
Driving information
— If traffic signs do not conform to the standard Messages

format Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
— If traffic signs are damaged or bent
Traffic sign recognition: currently unavaila-
— If traffic signs are displayed on sign holders
ble. Camera view limited due to environmental
with electronic signs
conditions
— If the traffic signs or the roadways have
changed, and the navigation data is no longer The camera’s visual field is covered. Clean the
up-to-date windshield.
Traffic sign recognition: currently limited.

ZA WARNING See owner's manual
This message appears if navigation system data
cameras > page 126. is not available, for example on newly-construct-
ed roads. The speed limit display will be tempo-
— Under some circumstances, traffic sign rec-
rarily limited, which increases the risk of an incor-
ognition may not detect traffic signs correct-
rect display. If this message continues to appear,
ly or detect them at all. As a result, the sys-
drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or
tem may not display the correct speed limit
authorized Audi Service Facility to have the mal-
or any speed limit.
function repaired.
@ Tips No traffic sign information available
— Traffic sign recognition does not adapt your Depending on the area, there is no valid naviga-
vehicle's speed to match the speed Limit. tion data and no speed limits were detected. This
— The display in the instrument cluster is may also appear if there is a recommended
based on the units of measurement used for speed, but no speed limit (for example when
speed in the country where the vehicle is be- driving on and off the expressway).
ing operated. As a result, a display of 50 in
Malfunction! See owner's manual
the instrument cluster can mean either mph
or km/h, depending on the country. The system may not function correctly so it has
been switched off. See an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
Function currently unavailable. See owner's
Accessing traffic sign recognition manual
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func- If this message appears on vehicles without cam-
tions tab > Traffic signs. era-based traffic sign recognition, then the traffic
light information function is currently unavaila-
Setting a traffic sign based speed warning ble. See > page 133.
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Speed warning.
You can select a warning threshold. If you exceed

this, then the current detected speed limit will be
shown in the display with an exclamation point
for the duration that it is exceeded and it will
blink for a short time.
8W7012721BB
131
Driving information
Traffic light information — If data transmission is deactivated in the priva-

cy settings
— If the subscription has expired
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
If this is the case, the menu item will be grayed-
out or it will not be possible to select it.
ZA\ WARNING
— When traffic light information is shown, al-
so always pay attention to the traffic situa-
tion, the distance to other vehicles, and the
area around the vehicle. The driver is always
responsible for assessing the traffic situa-
tion.
Fig. 111 Instrument cluster: traffic light information dis-
— Always adapt your speed to the current
play
weather, road and traffic conditions. The dis
The traffic light information gives you a speed played information must never cause you to
recommendation in order to reach the next traffic ignore legal traffic regulations and pose a
light when it is green @, or it informs you of the safety risk.
wait time at the next red light (2). Once traffic — Regardless of the traffic light information,
light data is received, the traffic light information you should always monitor your speed using
will be displayed in the instrument cluster and in the speedometer and make sure you are ad-
the head-up display*. If the vehicle is in an area hering to the legal speed limit.
with traffic light information but cannot receive a — The traffic light information does not adjust
traffic light signal, then a gray traffic light sym- your vehicle's speed to the speed recom-
bol will be displayed @). mendation shown in the display.
General information limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
The traffic light information is subject to system cameras > page 126.
limitations and may be unavailable or only parti-
ally available in the following situations: (i) Tips
— Ifthe permitted speed limit is exceeded — Traffic light information was only available
— If driving below a certain speed limit in select cities at the time this manual was
printed.
— If the next traffic light is less than approxi-
— Traffic light information is not available na-
mately 100 feet (30 m) away
tionwide.
— Ifthe estimated wait time at a red light is less
than four seconds
— The functions depend on the navigation da-
ta* being up-to-date and correct identifica-
—If there is no traffic light data available
tion by the traffic sign recognition*.
— If emergency response vehicles or public transit
— Incorrect values from the camera-based
systems are active
traffic sign recognition* or outdated naviga-
— If traffic lights are in construction zones or be-
tion system* map data can result in missing
ing serviced
or incorrect display images.
— If there are warnings from the camera-based
— Certain traffic lights can automatically ad-
traffic sign recognition*
just to the current traffic situation. If this
— If the camera-based traffic sign recognition* is
occurs, the display of traffic light informa-
malfunctioning or not available
tion can change suddenly.
— If the data connection has been interrupted
132
Driving information
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri- — The vehicle is not equipped with traffic sign rec-
ority over the display. The driver is always ognition.
responsible for adhering to the regulations — There is no valid license
applicable in the country where the vehicle — Traffic light information is not available in that
is being operated. area
— Units of measurement and language set-
tings are displayed based on how they were Lap timer
set in the MMI system settings > page 221.
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information You can record and evaluate lap times with the
Switching traffic light information on and lap timer. You can operate the lap timer using the
off multifunction steering wheel > page 13.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Opening the lap timer
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Traffic light in-
> Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle func-
formation.
tions tab > [| button > Lap times.
Accessing traffic light information An additional indicator appears in the head-up
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func- display*.
tions tab > Traffic signs.
/Z\ WARNING
G) Tips Your focus should always be on driving your
If another tab or another function is selected vehicle safely. As the driver, you have com-
in the instrument cluster, the traffic light in- plete responsibility for safety in traffic. To re-
formation will appear in the status bar on the duce the risk of an accident, only use the lap
instrument cluster. timer functions in such a way that you always
maintain complete control over your vehicle in
all traffic situations.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
(i) Tips
Malfunction! See owner's manual
You can retrieve information from the trip
The system could not be configured, for example computer while the lap timer stopwatch is
due to a network malfunction. Switch the igni- running.
tion off and shut down the vehicle to restart the
system. Wait several minutes until the vehicle ey eae |
has shut down completely and then switch the Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
ignition back on.
Requirement: the lap timer must be open
Function currently unavailable. See owner's => page 133.
manual
Timing laps
There is a temporary system malfunction. Check
if one or more of the following situations applies > To start timing manually, select Start lap 1 in
and correct the issue if necessary: the menu.
> To start timing automatically as soon as you be-
— Traffic light information is switched off gin to drive, select Start lap 1 by driving off or
8W7012721BB
— Data transmission is deactivated Start by driving off in the menu. >
133
Driving information
> To start timing a new lap after driving a lap, se- > Turn the thumbwheel down or up to display the
lect New lap in the menu. This starts timing individual lap times.
the next lap at the same time. > To return to the lap timing that was started, se-
lect the =] button > Lap times.
After completing a lap, the difference between
the last lap and the previous best lap time will be Resetting lap statistics
indicated witha won“~” or un“+”.
Requirement: the lap statistics menu must be
Pausing timing and displaying a split time displayed.
> To insert a pause @ select Pause in the menu. > To reset the lap statistics, press and hold the
> To resume timing, select Resume in the menu. left thumbwheel until the message No lap
> To display a split time, select Split time in the times have been recorded yet. appears.
menu. The split time appears for approxi-
mately ten seconds in the instrument cluster. G) Tips
The current lap timing will continue running.
The lap statistics list the lap times for the last
Canceling lap timing 30 laps. The fastest and slowest lap times out
of up to 99 measured laps are also displayed.
The timing of the current lap will stop. The lap
time will be erased and will not be included in the
statistics.
Acceleration
measurement”)
> Select Cancel lap in the menu.
Introduction
Resetting the time Applies to: vehicles with acceleration measurement
> Select Reset lap times in the menu.

With the acceleration measurement, you can
measure the time that you need to reach a specif-
G) Tips ic speed/distance. Keep in mind that the environ-
—A maximum of 99 lap times can be meas- mental conditions and tire properties can affect
ured. the results of the measurement.
— If timing is paused, you can continue it later
Opening the acceleration measurement
even if you switch the ignition off.
— Saved lap times cannot be individually de- > Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
leted from the total results. tions tab > =] button > Acceleration measure.
— The saved lap timer values will remain after
switching the ignition off. ZA\ WARNING
Your focus should always be on driving your
Eye e latte) vehicle safely. As the driver, you have com-
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer plete responsibility for safety in traffic. Only
use the acceleration measurement function
Displaying lap statistics
on closed courses to reduce the risk of acci-
You can display the number of laps driven dents.
the fastest lap “+”, the slowest lap “-”, and the
average time “®” in the instrument cluster.
Using the acceleration measurement
>» Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle func- Applies to: vehicles with acceleration measurement
tions tab > ] button > Lap statistics.
Requirement: the acceleration measurement
must be opened.
D_ Not available in all countries
134
Driving information
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop.

@) Tips
> Select and confirm the desired speed or dis-
tance. — The driver is responsible for specifying the
> Wait briefly until the FQ] symbol appears in the correct number of passengers and activat-
instrument cluster next to the time measure- ing or deactivating the ITM.
ment. — Malfunctions can occur when detecting tolls
> To start the acceleration measurement, acceler- if both the ITM and transponder are activat-
ate the vehicle. The measurement ends auto- ed. Deactivate the system not being used or
matically once you have reached the selected remove it as necessary.
speed or distance. —Ifa rearview mirror is replaced, you must
register the new ITM and remove the old
Integrated Toll Module ITM from the account.
Applies to: vehicles with Integrated Toll Module => page 297.
Depending on the region, you can pay toll fees in

certain countries using the Integrated Toll Mod- Display
ule (ITM). It replaces a separate transponder for Applies to: vehicles with Integrated Toll Module
detecting toll fees. The system electronics are in- The selected number of passengers is displayed
tegrated in the rearview mirror housing. in the MMI status bar > page 23.
To use the ITM in toll zones, you must register The i symbol in the status bar and a notifica-
and activate it. tion in the MMI will indicate if there is a faulty
Registration connection between the ITM and the MMI or if
the ITM is faulty. If the connection interference
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- continues or the ITM is faulty, drive immediately
HICLE > Settings & Service > Vehicle informa- to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
tion Toll module. Service Facility.
> Note the Integrated Toll Module ID.
> To register the ITM, go to the displayed web ad-
dress and follow the instructions.
Activation
> To activate the ITM, press CD in the MMI.
Entering the number of passengers

Depending on the number of passengers and the
region, a lower toll fee may be charged. You must
either enter the number of passengers or deacti-
vate the ITM based on the laws applicable in the
area where you are driving.
> To enter the number of passengers, select the

appropriate button in the MMI.
> To deactivate the ITM, press @ in the MMI.
8W7012721BB
135
Driver assistance
Driver assistance Switching the system on

Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
BFV-0220
The cruise control system assists the driver in

maintaining a constant speed above approxi-
mately 15 mph (20 km/h). The system maintains
the desired speed by braking and accelerating.
ZA\ WARNING
Fig. 112 Operating lever: switching the system on
— Always pay attention to the traffic around
your vehicle when the cruise control system
is in operation. As the driver, you are always
responsible for controlling your vehicle > To switch the system on, pull the lever toward
speed and the distance between your vehicle you to position (@).
and other vehicles.
The Ga or i$) indicator light and the corre-
— For safety reasons, cruise control should not sponding message will appear in the instrument
be used in the city, in stop-and-go traffic, on cluster.
winding roads, and when road conditions are
poor (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain,
A WARNING
and conditions that could lead to hydroplan-
ing), because this increases the risk of an ac- If the brakes are malfunctioning (for example,
cident. overheating) while the cruise control system
— Switch the cruise control off temporarily is switched on, the regulating functions may
shut off automatically.
when driving in turning lanes, highway exits,
or in construction zones.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, you should acyl (ladies Meme Laelia me Mem elaldace)|
only resume the stored speed if it is suitable speed
for the current traffic conditions. Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
When the vehicle is stationary, you can preselect

C) Note the cruise control speed or activate the speed
Before driving downhill a long distance ona while driving.
steep hill, decrease your speed and select a
Requirement: the system must be switched on.
lower gear. This makes use of the engine brak-
ing effect and reduces the load placed on the > To preselect a cruise control speed when the ve-
brakes. hicle is stationary, tap the lever toward @)/G)
> page 136, fig. 112.
@) Tips > To activate the cruise control speed, pull the
The brake lights turn on when the brakes are lever toward position (@ while driving.
applied automatically. > To set the current driving speed as the cruise
control speed, press the button @) on the lever.
The active cruise control speed is indicated with

the ICRUISE| or indicator light in the instrument
cluster.
136
Driver assistance
An additional indicator appears in the head-up

display*.
ZX WARNING
Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
could override the cruise control. This will pre-
Changing the cruise control speed
vent braking interventions by the system.
Requirement: the system must be switched on.

Seem NLU ai
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
in small increments, tap the lever up to the

When you switch the system off, the cruise con-
first level toward @)/C) > page 136, fig. 112.
trol speed will be erased.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed
in larger increments, tap the lever up to the Requirement: the system must be switched on.
second level toward ()/C). > To switch the system off, press the lever toward
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed @ (locked into place) > page 136, fig. 112, or
continuously, tap and hold the lever at the first >» Switch the ignition off.
or second level toward @)/G).
Overriding or deactivating the cruise Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
control speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system Gs / 3) Speed control system: currently un-
available. See owner's manual
You can override or deactivate the cruise control
system. When you deactivate the system, your If the indicator light turns on and this message
cruise control speed will be stored and you can appears, the cruise control system has been deac-
resume that speed. tivated. There is a temporary malfunction, for ex-
ample the brakes are overheating. Switch the
Requirement: the system must be switched on
cruise control system on again later.
and the regulated speed must be activated.
Overriding Efficiency assist

> To temporarily override the cruise control
speed, press the accelerator pedal. Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
> To resume the stored regulated speed, remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal. Efficiency assist can assist the driver with predic-
tive information in order to reduce fuel consump-
If you override the cruise control system for a tion. Depending on vehicle equipment, the sys-
long period of time, the cruise control system tem may access data from the navigation system,
will be deactivated. The (Usd or [RM indicator the camera behind the windshield, and the radar
light will be displayed and the cruise control sensors.
speed will be saved.
Adjusting the efficiency assist
Deactivating
You can adjust efficiency assist functions individ-
> To deactivate the cruise control speed, press ually. The settings depend on the vehicle equip-
the lever toward (2) (not locked into place) ment.
=> page 136, fig. 112, or
> Press the brake pedal. — Predictive messages > page 138.
— Predictive control > page 142.
8W7012721BB
137
Driver assistance
Situation symbols speed in the country where the vehicle is be-

Depending on vehicle equipment, the following ing operated. As a result, a display of 50 in
symbols may be shown. The symbols indicate the the instrument cluster can mean either
situation to which the efficiency assist is respond- km/h or mph, depending on the country.
ing. — Except for the road network, which is re-
corded in the navigation system’s map infor-
Some symbols only appear if Predictive messag- mation, certain functions may not be availa-
es are switched on, and some symbols only ap- ble.
pear if Predictive control is switched on and Audi — Certain settings are automatically stored
adaptive cruise control* is actively regulating the and assigned to the remote control key be-
vehicle. ing used.
Symbol |Description
Predictive messages
Slow down
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
(predictive messages only)
Adjustment to curves along route The symbol BS appears in the instrument cluster
(predictive control only) Additional display if efficiency assist recommends removing
symbols are shown in the Driver as- your foot from the accelerator pedal.
sistance display. Additional symbols that indicate the situation to
Speed limit which the efficiency assist is reacting are shown
Speed limit in the Driver assistance display > page 138, Sit-
uation symbols.
Exit ahead
Requirements
Intersection ahead — The cruise control system* or Audi adaptive
cruise control* must not be actively regulating.
— The vehicle speed must be at least 20 mph
Traffic circle ahead
(30 km/h).
(predictive control only) If the indica- —The remaining distance until the situation is
tor light turns on in green and red, it reached must be large enough to allow the sys-
is indicating that there is a difference tem to react to the situation.
between the speed limit and the set — The automatic transmission is not in the “S”
speed. driving program.
Switching messages on and off

Z\ WARNING
You can switch the system off or on. The adjust-
Observe the safety precautions and note the
ment options depend on the vehicle equipment.
cameras > page 126. Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > (Charging & Efficiency) > Efficiency as-
@) Tips sist > Predictive messages.
— The functions depend on the navigation da-
ta* being up-to-date and correct identifica- Z\ WARNING
tion by the traffic sign recognition*. — Observe the safety precautions and note the
— The system only detects traffic signs that limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
specify a speed limit. cameras > page 126.
— The display in the instrument cluster is — Pay attention to traffic and the area around
based on the units of measurement used for your vehicle when efficiency assist is >
138
Driver assistance
switched on. The driver is always responsible jam assist can assist the driver to stay within the
for assessing the traffic situation. lane detected by the system > page 147.
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist: Predic-

@ Tips tive control can adjust the set speed based on
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri- traffic and road conditions > page 142.
ority over the display. The driver is always
responsible for adhering to the regulations ZA WARNING
applicable in the country where the vehicle Observe the safety precautions and note the
is being operated. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
—When a route is planned using the naviga- cameras > page 126.
tion system*, then system displays messag-
es based on an assumed route. Without ) Tips
route guidance, the system displays mes-
The system complies with United States FCC
sages based on an assumed route.
regulations and ISED regulations > page 297.
— The wording of the message may vary de-
pending on the selected Audi drive select*
mode and the selected gear.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Audi adaptive cruise

control
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, Audi adaptive

cruise control may consist of the following func-
tions:
Within the limits of the system, the adaptive Fig. 113 Example: driving into a curve
speed and distance control assists the driver in
controlling the speed and the set distance to the In some situations, the adaptive cruise control
vehicle driving ahead. If the system detects a ve- function is limited and you must assume control
hicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise control of the vehicle when necessary, for example by ap-
can brake and accelerate your vehicle within the plying the brakes.
limits of the system. On open roads with no traf-
— When driving into a curve > fig. 113 and out of
fic, it functions like a cruise control system. The
a curve, the system may react to a vehicle in the
stored speed is maintained. When approaching a
neighboring lane and apply the brakes. You can
vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise control
override the system by pressing the accelerator
system automatically brakes to match that vehi-
pedal briefly.
cle's speed and then maintains the set distance
— The system works with the various sensors and
as much as possible. As soon as the system does
cameras in the vehicle. Vehicles can only be de-
not detect a vehicle driving ahead, adaptive
tected once they are within the area and range
cruise control accelerates up to the stored speed.
covered by the sensors > page 127, fig. 106.
In stop-and-go traffic, the vehicle may brake to a — When driving around tight curves, a vehicle
full stop and then may also start driving again driving ahead that was previously detected may
automatically under certain conditions. no longer be detected, and the system may ac-
8W7012721BB
Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist: In celerate unexpectedly. >
traffic jams or in stop-and-go traffic, the traffic
139
Driver assistance
— The system does not react to a stationary vehi- @-@, you can find more detailed information
cle in the same lane if it expects that you can about the system. The displays depend on the
easily drive around the stationary vehicle by country and equipment.
turning the steering wheel.
Display in the speedometer
— The system cannot react to stationary objects,
such as vehicles at the end of a traffic jam, es- @ Marking for the set speed
pecially when traveling at high speeds. @ Current vehicle speed
— The system has a limited ability to detect ® Available speed range for the adaptive cruise
vehicles that are a short distance ahead, off to control (example)
the side of your vehicle, or moving into your
lane. Image in the Driver assistance display
— Objects that are difficult to detect, such as mo- The display only appears when the Driver assis-
torcycles, vehicles with high ground clearance, tance display is open in the on-board computer
or vehicles with an overhanging load, may be => page 17.
detected late or not detected at all. Messages and settings
— The system does not respond to people, ani-
COL®
Detected vehicle driving ahead
mals, or objects that are crossing or approach-
Set target distance
ing from the opposite direction.
If you fall below the set distance, the dis-
ZA WARNING tance bars turn red from the bottom upward.
Your vehicle
©O©©OQ®
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and Availability of Audi active lane assist
cameras > page 126. Availability of traffic jam assist
Indicator lights
Display overview
A - The speed/distance control is active. No
vehicles were detected ahead. The stored speed
is maintained.
RAZ-0205.
Ba - The speed/distance control is active. A vehi-

cle was detected ahead. The system controls the
speed and distance from the vehicle driving
ahead, and accelerates and brakes automatically.
A - The speed/distance control is active but the

vehicle is not ready to drive. A vehicle was de-
tected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will
BI3 not start driving automatically.
iF
nN|
oc B - The speed/distance control is active but the
vehicle is not ready to drive. No vehicles were de-
tected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will
not start driving automatically.
B.- The automatic braking is not enough to

maintain a sufficient distance from a vehicle driv-
Fig. 115 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display ing ahead. You must intervene > page 146, Driv-
er intervention request.
Indicator lights and messages in the speedome-
ter @ -@) inform you about the driving situation
and the settings. In the Driver assistance display
140
Driver assistance
ZA WARNING You can set any speed between 15 mph

(20 km/h)» and the maximum possible speed
Observe the safety precautions and note the range @)?) > page 140, fig. 114.
cameras > page 126. Pausing cruise control
The control can be stopped at any time:
Operating Audi adaptive cruise control > While driving or when the vehicle is stationary:
Press the lever away from you in the directi on
of the arrow. Or
RAZ-0096
» While driving: Press the brake pedal.
The B indicator light turns off.
Resuming regulation
The previously set speed can be resumed at any
time after a pause.
> To resume cruise control while driving, pull the

Fig. 116 Operating lever: operating adaptive cruise control
lever toward you in the direction of the arrow.
2
> To resume cruise control when stationary, pull
the lever toward you in the direction of the ar-
B4M-0232
z
row while pressing the brake pedal.
Changing the speed
5©
> To increase or decrease the set speed in smaller
increments, briefly tap the lever toward () or
© to the first level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed in larger
increments, briefly tap the lever toward G@) or
Fig. 117 Operating lever: changing the speed © to the second level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed quickly,
Switching on hold the lever toward () or G) until the mark-
> To switch on the adaptive cruise control, pull ing in the speedometer (4) > page 140, fig. 114
the lever up to position @ until it engages. has reached the desired speed.
Storing the speed and activating regulation Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist: Predic-
tive control can automatically adjust the set
If you have switched the system on, you can set
speed based on traffic and road condi-
the current speed as the “regulated speed” and
tions > page 142.
activate regulation:
Preselecting a speed
> Press the SET button @). The set speed is indi-
cated with a marking in the speedometer (@) You can also preselect the speed when adaptive
=> page 140, fig. 114 and shown in the instru- cruise control is not active by moving the lever in
ment cluster > A\. the desired direction @)/(©). Activate the previ-
> To save the speed while the vehicle is station- ously selected speed by pulling the lever toward
ary, also hold the brake pedal down. you in the direction of the arrow. >
8W7012721BB
D Analog instrument cluster: 20 mph (30 km/h)

2) Depends on the country and engine
141
Driver assistance
Switching off — If you switch the ignition or the adaptive

If you do not want to use the adaptive cruise con- cruise control system off, the set speed is
trol for a Long period of time, you can switch it erased for safety reasons.
off. — When adaptive cruise control is switched
on, the ESC and ASR automatically switch
> Push the lever away from you into position © on.
until it clicks into place. — The system cannot be switched off or it may
The indicator light and the set speed will turn off. be interrupted if the road exceeds the maxi-
mum possible grade for safe operation.
ZA\ WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions and note the Predictive control
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control and effi-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and ciency assist
cameras > page 126.
— The activated adaptive cruise control is only With predictive control, efficiency assist adapts
an assist system, and the driver is still re- the set speed in adaptive cruise control @
sponsible for controlling the vehicle. The => page 140, fig. 114 based on detected speed
driver is especially responsible for braking, limits and the upcoming route. Once the system
steering, starting to drive, and controlling no longer detects any incidents ahead, adaptive
the speed and the distance from other cruise control will accelerate back up to the last
vehicles. speed that the driver set. After switching on the
— Turn on the adaptive cruise control only if ignition, the availability of predictive control is
the surrounding conditions permit it. Always indicated by a message when the adaptive cruise
adapt your driving style to the current visu- control is first activated.
al, weather, road, and traffic conditions. Incident symbols indicate the situation to which
— Switch adaptive cruise control off temporari- predictive control is reacting > page 138, Situa-
ly when driving in turning lanes, on express- tion symbols.
way exits or in construction zones. This pre-
vents the vehicle from accelerating to the Requirements
stored speed when in these situations. — Predictive control is switched on in the MMI
— If you press the [SET] button @) when driv- => page 146.
ing at speeds below 15 mph (20 km/h)», — Adaptive cruise control is actively regulating
the minimum possible speed that the sys- => page 141.
tem can maintain will be set. If no vehicle is — The system can only react to speed limits that
detected ahead of you, the vehicle will accel- are 15 mph (20 km/h)” or higher.
erate up to that speed.
Overriding control
@) Tips The driver can override the predictive control to
— Always keep your hands on the steering the route ahead at any time by pressing the ac-
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any celerator or brake pedal. If the system changes
time. The driver is always responsible for the vehicle speed to adapt to speed limits, you
adhering to the regulations applicable in can change the speed using the lever
the country where the vehicle is being oper- => page 141, fig. 117.
ated.
D_ Analog instrument cluster: 20 mph (30 km/h)
142
Driver assistance
Messages applicable in the country where the vehicle

If and a message with Predictive control is is being operated.
displayed when there is a malfunction, the effi- — Ifa speed limit is detected, the marking @
ciency assist functions are unavailable or limited. = page 140 of the set speed limit will be ad-
justed even if Audi adaptive cruise control is
A message that indicates the cause and possible not actively regulating.
solution may appear with some displays. The — Control by the system depends on which
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor adaptive cruise control driving program is
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the set or on the selected Audi drive select*
sensors > page 128 and try to turn on the sys- mode.
tems again later. — After switching on the ignition and first
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author- driving onto a freeway or similar road with-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- out a speed limit, the system will regulate
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct- the speed to 80 mph (130 km/h). Then
ed. the system adjusts to the last speed set by
the driver.
ZA WARNING — There is no adaptation to speed limits when
— Observe the safety precautions and note the driving through highway interchanges and
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and when driving on or off the expressway.
cameras > page 126. — The system can fail to provide control or the
— Pay attention to traffic and the area around control may be faulty if the values from the
your vehicle when predictive control is camera-based traffic sign recognition* are
switched on. The driver is always responsible incorrect or the navigation system map data
for assessing the traffic situation. is outdated.
— The system does not consider “right of way” — When route guidance is switched on, the
rules and does not respond to traffic lights, system adapts to the route provided by the
so lack of driver attention in these situations navigation system. Driving without route
can increase the risk of an accident. guidance or leaving a route can result in
— The speed when driving through curves may faulty control.
be different from what you as a driver would
do or may not be suitable for the weather Setting the distance
and road conditions. If necessary, apply the Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
brakes and reduce the selected speed to be B4M-0234
maintained in the Adjustment to curves

along route setting to reduce the risk of an
accident.
@) Tips
— Predictive control can exceed or drop below
the maximum permitted speed. The driver
is responsible for adhering to the permitted
speed limit. Fig. 118 Operating lever: setting the distance
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri-
ority over the display. The driver is always If you adjust the speed, you must also change the
responsible for adhering to the regulations time gap to the vehicle driving ahead. The higher >
8W7012721BB
D In certain countries
143
Driver assistance
the speed, the greater the distance that is need- Sym- |Meaning
ed. bol
> Tap the rocker switch to display the distance The time between is approximately 2.4
that is currently set. Z seconds. This setting corresponds toa
> To increase or decrease the distance in incre- = distance of approximately 219 feet
ments, tap the switch again toward @) or ©). lame (100 m) when traveling at 62 mph
(67 m/h).
The newly-set distance will be shown briefly, for
example with the [eg indicator light. In the Driv- The time between is approximately 3.6
er assistance display, a graphic display is shown seconds. This setting corresponds toa
instead of the indicator lights > page 140, Ea distance of approximately 328 feet
fig. 115. The display matches the functions of ieee (100 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100
the indicator lights. km/h).
When approaching a vehicle driving ahead, the Z\ WARNING

adaptive cruise control system brakes to match Observe the safety precautions and note the
that vehicle's speed and then adjusts to the set limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
distance. If the vehicle driving ahead accelerates, cameras > page 126.
then the adaptive cruise control will accelerate
up to the speed that you have set. G) Tips
The following distances can be set: — When setting the distance, the driver is re-
sponsible for adhering to any applicable le-
Sym- Meaning
gal regulations.
bol
— Depending on the selected driving program
The time between is approximately 1 and distance, driving behavior when acceler-
second. This setting corresponds to a ating may vary from moderate to sporty
distance of approximately 92 feet = page 146, Adjusting adaptive cruise con-
(100 m) when traveling at 62 mph
trol.
(28 m/h). — The distances provided are specified values.
The time between is approximately 1.3 Depending on the driving situation and how
seconds. This setting corresponds to a the vehicle ahead is driving, the actual dis-
distance of approximately 118 feet tance may be more or less than these target
(100 m) when traveling at 62 mph distances.
(36 m/h).
The time between is approximately 1.8 CON Tea sate Reena)!
seconds. This setting meets the general Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
recommendation of “half the speed
[RAZ-0096|
shown on the speedometer”. This cor-

responds to a distance of approximate-
ly 164 feet (SO m) when traveling at
62 mph (100 km/h).
Fig. 119 Operating lever: decreasing the distance
144
Driver assistance
Requirement: adaptive cruise control must be Driving in stop-and-go traffic

switched on. Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Overriding control
You can completely override the control, for ex-
ample when passing or if you would like to accel-
erate more quickly.
> To accelerate manually, pull the lever toward

you in the direction of the arrow and hold it
there, or press the accelerator pedal.
Applies to: vehicles with safe start monitor
> To resume the usual cruise control, release the
Fig. 120 Instrument cluster: safe start monitor
lever or remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. Stopping with adaptive cruise control
When you are in the Driver assistance display, The adaptive cruise control system also assists
the message Overridden will appear. you in stop-and-go traffic). Within the limits of
the system, your vehicle may brake and remain at
Decreasing the distance
a stop ifa vehicle driving ahead stops.
The function decreases the set distance and pro-
vides assistance, for example when merging Starting to drive with adaptive cruise control
when a lane is ending. As long as the message a ready to drive and aA
> To further reduce the distance to the vehicle is displayed, your vehicle will begin driving when
ahead temporarily, pull the lever toward your- the vehicle ahead starts to move > /\.
self in the direction of the arrow and hold it in If you are stopped for several seconds, your vehi-
that position. cle will no longer drive autonomously for safety
> To resume the system control, release the lever. reasons, and the message will turn off.
The adaptive cruise control reduces the distance > To extend B ready to drive mode for several
and, if necessary, accelerates the vehicle above seconds or reactivate, pull the lever briefly to-
the set speed. When you are in the Driver assis- wards you in the direction of the arrow
tance display, the message Overridden will ap- => page 144, fig. 119.
pear. > To resume manual control of the vehicle, tap
the accelerator pedal.
ZA WARNING
Safe start monitor
— Observe the safety precautions and note the Applies to: vehicles with safe start monitor
cameras > page 126. The vehicle can still start to drive even if certain
obstacles are detected when starting to drive
— Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
> /\. If the surrounding area detection detects
could override the cruise control. Braking in-
an obstacle, you will be alerted to the danger by
terventions and corrective actions by the
the | indicator light.
system may not occur.
If you are in the Driver assistance display, the
display @ © fig. 120 and the message Warning!
will also appear. An audio signal will also sound.
Your vehicle will drive more slowly when starting. >
8W7012721BB
) Depending on the engine
145
Driver assistance
This may also occur in some situations when The display @ only appears when the Driver as-
there is no apparent obstacle. sistance display is open in the on-board comput-
er > page 17.
> Press the brake pedal to slow your vehicle
down.
Z\ WARNING
ZA WARNING Observe the safety precautions and note the
— Observe the safety precautions and note the cameras > page 126.
cameras > page 126.
— If the message B& ready to drive!) appears, Adjusting adaptive cruise control
your vehicle will start driving even if there is
an obstacle between your vehicle and the ve- You can adjust the system individually. The set-
hicle ahead. To reduce the risk of an acci- tings depend on the vehicle equipment.
dent, always make sure there are no obsta-
cles between your vehicle and the vehicle
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Audi adaptive
driving ahead.
cruise control.
@) Tips Possible settings:
For safety reasons, the adaptive cruise control
Applies to: vehicles without Audi drive select
will only be active if
Driving program - Depending on the selected
— The driver's safety belt is fastened
driving program and distance, the vehicle han-
— All doors and the hood are closed dling will be adjusted from Sport to Moderate.
— Your vehicle is not stopped for a long period
of time
Vehicle handling will be adjusted based on the

Driver intervention request set distance and the selected Audi drive select
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control mode > page 118.
al3
S|ny
xcc Store last distance - The last distance that was
set will be stored after the ignition is switched
off. If the distance is not stored, distance
(time distance of approximately 1.8 seconds) is
automatically preset every time the ignition is
switched on.
Fig. 121 Instrument cluster: request for driver interven-

Predictive control > Set speed limit - adaptation
tion to speed limits can be switched On or Off. Regu-
lation With tolerance can also be selected, if de-
The request for driver intervention instructs you sired. In this scenario, you may fall below or ex-
to take over if the adaptive cruise control braking ceed the set speed in favor of increased efficien-
function is not able to maintain a sufficient dis- cy.
tance to the vehicle driving ahead. The system
Predictive control > Adjustment to curves along
will warn you of the hazard with the indicator
route - Adjustment based on the road ahead can
light and the message Distance!. An audio signal
be adjusted. The setting influences vehicle >
will also sound.
D_ This is not available in some countries.
146
Driver assistance
handling with predictive control, for example the Traffic jam assist supports the driver when driv-
speed for driving through curves. ing in traffic jams or in heavy traffic.
Gi) Tips In a speed range under 40 mph (65 km/h), the

system can help to keep the vehicle within a lane
Certain settings are automatically stored and calculated by the system. Within the limits of the
assigned to the remote control key being system, the system controls the steering auto-
used. matically when adaptive cruise control is switch-
ed on. Since traffic jam assist is only an assist
system, the driver must always keep his or her
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control hands on the steering wheel and be ready to
steer. The driver can override the control at any
If El or big is displayed when there is a mal-
time by actively steering.
function, the adaptive cruise control or traffic
jam assist functions may be unavailable or may The system is designed for driving on express-
be limited. ways and highways.
A message that indicates the cause and possible Requirements for using traffic jam assist:
solution may appear with some displays. The
> The traffic jam assist is preselected in the MMI
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
settings: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE >
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the
Driver assistance > Traffic jam assist.
sensors > page 128 and try to turn on the sys-
> Adaptive cruise control must be switched on
tems again later.
and active > page 141.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
If you open the Driver assist display in the on-
board computer > page 17, the indicator
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
light and the message Traffic jam assist will turn
ed.
on when a traffic jam is detected.
Please take over!
Activating or deactivating traffic jam assist
This message appears if the vehicle rolls back
> To activate or deactivate traffic jam assist,
when starting on a slight incline, even though the
press the > fig. 122 button.
systems are active. Press the brake pedal to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling or starting to move. Always switch off traffic jam assist in the
following situations:
Traffic jam assist — When increased attention is needed from the
driver
Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist —Inconstruction zones

— In city driving
— On stretches of road with curves
B8V-0692
—Inunclear traffic situations such as at intersec-

tions or toll stations
— The turn signal was activated.
Indicator lights
Traffic jam assist is available.
iB and a - Traffic jam assist is switched on.

8W7012721BB
Fig. 122 Turn signal lever: button for traffic jam assist and Vehicles driving ahead were detected. Your vehi-
Audi active lane assist cle adapts while driving. >
147
Driver assistance
7} - Traffic jam assist switches off if the driver responsible for following the laws that are
does not take over steering after multiple driver applicable in the location where the vehicle
intervention requests. The system brakes the ve- is being operated.
hicle until it is stationary. — If traffic jam assist was deactivated through
the MMI, you can continue operating the
Audi active lane assist using the > fig. 122
If no steering activity is detected or the steering button > page 150. The traffic jam assist
power from the system is not sufficient, the driv- functions are no longer available.
er steering intervention request will alert the — You are not necessarily guided to the center
driver using audio and visual signals, such as of your lane.
or EE. Take over the steering and keep your
hands on the steering wheel so that you will be Messages
ready to steer at any time. Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist
If the driver does not take over steering, adaptive If BS. or |i is displayed when there is a mal-
cruise control (with traffic jam assist) will be function, the traffic jam assist functions may be
switched off. The system brakes the vehicle until
unavailable or may be limited.
it is stationary.*
A message that indicates the cause and possible
ZA\ WARNING solution may appear with some displays. The
cameras > page 126.
tems again later.
— The activated traffic jam assist is only an as-
sist system, and the driver is still responsi- If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
ble for controlling the vehicle. The driver is ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
especially responsible for braking, steering, ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
starting to drive, and controlling the speed ed.
and the distance from other vehicles.
— Turn on the traffic jam assist only if the sur-
rounding conditions permit it. Always adapt
your driving style to the current visual,
weather, road, and traffic conditions.
— Switch the traffic jam assist off temporarily
when driving in turning lanes or highway ex-
its. This prevents the vehicle from accelerat-
ing to the stored speed when in these situa-
tions.
G) Tips
— Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel. The driver is always responsible for
adhering to the regulations applicable in
the country where the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
— Pay attention to applicable local regulations
relating to driving tasks, leaving space for
emergency vehicles, etc. The driver is always
148
Driver assistance
Distance warning @ The actual distance is smaller than the set

distance and you will be informed about the
danger.
Applies to: vehicles with distance warning
Adjusting the distance warning
S||
S|
|| The system can be switched off or on in the MMI
and you can customize the distance warning
threshold. The settings depend on the vehicle
equipment.
— Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Distance warn-
ing.
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise control:
Fig. 123 Instrument cluster: display of the current dis- Messages
tance
ir or is displayed when there is a malfunc-
RAZ-0400 tion, the distance warning functions may be un-
available or may be limited.

sensors > page 128 and try to turn the system on
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control again later.
Fig. 124 Instrument cluster: distance warning
General information ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
At speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
km/h), this function measures the distance to the ed.
vehicle ahead as time. If the distance falls below
the warning threshold and remains there, the
Z\ WARNING
system will warn you of the hazard with the | Observe the safety precautions and note the
indicator light. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 126.
Image in the Driver assistance display
G@) Tips
The display only appears if the Driver assistance
— The driver is always responsible for adhering
display is selected in the on-board computer
to the regulations applicable in the country
= page 17 and the adaptive cruise control is not
where the vehicle is being operated.
actively controlling the vehicle.
— You may fall below the warning threshold
@ Detected vehicle driving ahead briefly when passing or when quickly ap-
@ Use the markings to help you estimate the proaching a vehicle driving ahead. There is
distance to an obstacle. Each marking repre- no warning in this scenario. A warning is giv-
sents approximately one second. en only if you fall below the warning thresh-
@® Set warning threshold. Depending on the set- old for an extended period of time.
tings, the display will be colored in from the
8W7012721BB
bottom to the top.
149
Driver assistance
Audi active lane assist/ The system functions in the speed range of ap-
proximately 40 mph - 155 mph (65 km/h -
lane departure warning
250 km/h).
General information
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control and traf-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist fic jam assist
The Audi active lane assist/lane departure warn- If the conditions are met, traffic jam assist
ing (called only Audi active lane assist in the vehi- switches on at speeds under approximately
cle displays and in the information that follows in 40 mph (65 km/h) > page 147.
this Owner's Manual) can detect lane marker
lines within the limits of the system. If you are
Z\ WARNING
approaching a detected lane marker and it ap- Observe the safety precautions and note the
pears likely that you will leave the lane, the sys- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
tem can warn you with corrective steering anda cameras > page 126.
steering wheel vibration, if necessary.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
Display and warning

In
|G3
The availability, readiness to provide warnings,
and the warnings are indicated with indicator
lights. Audi active lane assist is ready to provide
warnings if an object is detected on at least one
side of the lane where your vehicle is traveling.
Fig. 125 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display
Driver assistance Indicator lights Meaning

display Audi virtual | Instrument
cockpit cluster (analog)
@ White a * oe Audi active lane assist is activated, but is not
lines ready to provide warnings.
@ Green ry rey Audi active lane assist is activated and ready to
line(s) provide warnings.
@ Red 7 7 \ Blinking Audi active lane assist will warn you with correc-
line tive steering before exiting the lane. If the system
must intervene for a long period of time, a mes-
sage will request the driver to drive in the center
of the lane. The steering wheel will also vibrate
lightly when exiting the lane.
If the system is switched on but is not ready to — The speed is below the activation speed
provide warnings, one of the following systems — The lane is too narrow or too wide
limits or situations could be the cause: — The curve is too narrow
— The necessary lane marker lines have not been — The driver's hands are not on the steering
detected (for example, in a construction zone wheel
or because the lines are obstructed by snow, — Visibility is obstructed by a rise or dip.
dirt, water, or lighting)
150
Driver assistance
Steering intervention request — The system does not provide any corrective
If Audi active lane assist intervenes multiple steering or steering wheel vibrations if it de-
times when no steering activity is detected, the tects that you are passing another vehicle.
steering intervention request will provide a warn- — The image in the Driver assistance display
ing using audio and visual signals, such asia only appears if it was opened in the on-
Take over the steering and keep your hands on board computer > page 17.
the steering wheel so that you will be ready to
steer at any time. The system may no longer be Sica Ree Roll
ready to provide warnings after a short time, and Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
it will only become active again later.
B8V-0692
If the driver does not take over steering, Audi ac-
tive lane assist will be switched off.
Behavior when a turn signal is active

Applies to: vehicles with side assist: The system
will not warn you if you activate a turn signal be-
fore crossing the lane marker line. In this case, it
assumes that you are changing lanes intentional-
ly. Fig. 126 Turn signal lever: button for Audi active lane as-
sist
Applies to: vehicles with side assist: If the turn
signal is activated,Audi active lane assist is ready, > To switch the system on or off, press the button
and a lane change has been classified as critical on the turn signal lever > fig. 126. The respec-
by lane assist due to vehicles traveling beside you tive indicator light in the instrument cluster
or due to approaching vehicles, then a noticeable will turn off or on.
corrective steering movement will occur briefly
before exiting the lane. This will attempt to keep
your vehicle in the lane.
ZA WARNING
ZA\ WARNING limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 126.
cameras > page 126. Adjusting Audi active lane assist
— The system warns the driver that the vehicle
is leaving the lane using corrective steering. You can adjust Audi active lane assist individually.
The driver is always responsible for keeping The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
the vehicle within the lane.
— Corrective steering may not occur at all in > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
certain situations, such as during heavy VEHICLE > Driver assistance. > Audi active
braking. Always be ready to intervene.
lane assist/Lane departure warning.
Possible settings:
@) Tips
— Steering correction - In the Late setting, the
— Always keep your hands on the steering
steering correction will only occur shortly be-
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any
fore a wheel crosses a detected lane marker
time. The driver is always responsible for
line. In the Early setting, steering correction
8W7012721BB
adhering to the regulations applicable in

occurs continuously in order to help the driver
the country where the vehicle is being oper-
keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. If the >
ated.
151
Driver assistance
steering correction cannot be set, the steering — Audi pre sense rear monitors the rear traffic
correction will function in the Late setting. behind your vehicle and can react to an impend-
— Vibration warning - You can select if you would ing rear impact.
also like to be warned using a vibration in the — The swerve assist can help you to steer the ve-
steering wheel. hicle around an obstacle during an evasive ma-
neuver that is detected as critical.
@) Tips — The turn assist can detect vehicles in the oppo-
Certain settings are automatically stored and site lane as critical during a turning maneuver
assigned to the remote control key being and react with braking maneuvers.
used.
Audi pre sense safety measures
Messages Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense

Depending on the vehicle speed and the vehicle
iff or is displayed when there is a malfunc- equipment, the following functions may be initi-
tion, the active lane assist functions may be un- ated in certain situations:
available or limited. — Visual and audio warnings
A message that indicates the cause and possible — Reversible tensioning of safety belts
solution may appear with some displays. The — Closing the windows and panoramic glass roof
weather conditions may be too poor or the cam- — Adjusting the seats
era may be covered. Clean the area in front of the — Other preemptive safety measures by individual
camera > page 128 and try to turn on the sys- systems
tems again later.

ZA\ WARNING
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- Observe the safety precautions and note the
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
ed. cameras > page 126.
G@) Tips
Audi pre sense
— Depending on the risk situation that is de-
Introduction tected and the selected Audi drive select*
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
mode, not all preemptive safety measures
Within the limits of the system, the Audi pre may be initiated under certain circumstan-
sense functions can initiate measures in certain ces. Certain functions can be adjusted or
driving situations to protect the vehicle occu- skipped if necessary.
pants and other road users. Depending on the ve- — Audi pre sense may also be limited or un-
hicle equipment, various Audi pre sense systems available under certain circumstances, for
may be installed: example if:
— There are passengers with unfastened
— Audi pre sense basic can react during emergen-
safety belts
cy and dangerous braking maneuvers and un-
— After turning on the ignition, as long as
stable driving situations (such as oversteering
the FJ or ndicator light is on.
or understeering).
— When driving in reverse.
— Audi pre sense city and Audi pre sense front
— The front passenger's airbag is switched
can detect an impending frontal impact and re-
off
act with warnings, braking interventions, and
— There is an airbag control module mal-
preemptive safety measures for the vehicle oc-
function
cupants.
152
Driver assistance
— System functions may not be available if Up to speeds of approximately 155 mph

the ESC is limited or switched off, or if (250 km/h), the system may react to the follow-
there is a malfunction. ing situations:
—Avehicle driving ahead clearly applies the
NUT ed brakes
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense basic — When approaching a vehicle ahead that is clear-
ly traveling more slowly
Audi pre sense basic is automatically active at
— When approaching a stationary vehicle
speeds of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and
higher. Audi pre sense basic can trigger preemp- Prewarning
tive safety measures during emergency braking
To warn about detected dangers, Audi pre
and dangerous braking maneuvers as well as in
sense © / {@) will appear in the instrument clus-
unstable driving situations, such as oversteering
ter and an audio signal will sound.
or understeering > page 152, Audi pre sense
safety measures. A brief application of the brakes
The message Audi pre sense © / wilt warn Ifa collision is imminent, there may be an acute
you about the danger. warning using a brief application of the brakes.
You will also be warned about the danger by an
Z\ WARNING indicator in the instrument cluster display. You
Observe the safety precautions and note the may only be able to avoid a collision by swerving
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and or braking strongly.
cameras > page 126.
Automatic braking force increase
If there is an impending collision and you are not
ONT eee La)
applying the brakes enough, the braking force
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense city
may be increased, depending on the situation.
Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense
Automatic braking
city can warn about an impending front end colli-
sion and brake the vehicle strongly, if necessary. If you do not react to the acute warning, the sys-
The system uses the camera behind the wind- tem may apply the brakes with strong braking
shield and is available at speeds above approxi- force within the limits of the system in order to
mately 6 mph (10 km/h). reduce the speed of impact in the event of a colli-
sion.
Driving situations
If the brakes are applied until the vehicle is sta-
The situations to which the system reacts de-
tionary, 1) i Please take over! will appear in
pends on the vehicle speed.
the instrument cluster and you must take over
Automatic braking interventions are available at control of the vehicle.
vehicle speeds up to approximately 50 mph
(85 km/h). Z\ WARNING
Up to speeds of approximately 50 mph — Observe the safety precautions and note the
(85 km/h), the system may react to the following limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
situations: cameras > page 126.
— Pedestrians are moving inside your lane — Audi pre sense cannot overcome natural
physical laws. It is a system designed to as-
sist and it cannot prevent a collision in every
8W7012721BB
circumstance. The driver must always inter-

vene. The driver is always responsible for
braking at the correct time. Do not let the >
153
Driver assistance
increased safety provided tempt you into Audi pre sense rear
taking risks. This could increase your risk of Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense rear
a collision.
Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense
— Audi pre sense city does not react to certain
rear uses data from radar sensors at the rear cor-
objects, such as animals, crossing or oncom-
ners of the vehicle and calculates the probability
ing vehicles, bars, railings, or railcars.
of a rear-end collision with the vehicle behind
— Audi pre sense may be limited or unavailable you.
in curves or when it is dark.
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures can
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- be initiated if the risk of a collision with the vehi-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of cle behind you is detected.
an accident. Store objects securely while
driving. Z\ WARNING
G) Tips limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 126.
Certain system functions may not be available
if the ESC is limited or switched off — Audi pre sense rear does not react to pedes-
trians, animals, crossing objects, and ob-
= page 122 or if there is a malfunction.
jects not detected as vehicles.
Audi pre sense front

G@) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense front
Audi pre sense rear functions may also switch
Audi pre sense front provides the same scope of off if there is a malfunction in the side assist
functions as Audi pre sense city, with a few ex- system.
ceptions > page 153. The system has an exten-
sive field of view due to additional sensors that
Swerve assist
are installed. Because of this, vehicles that are
Applies to: vehicles with swerve assist
braking or traveling significantly more slowly can
be detected earlier and more clearly, depending The swerve assist can help you to steer the vehi-
on the limits of the system. cle around an obstacle detected in a critical area.
If you avoid an obstacle after the acute warning,
The following features apply to Audi pre sense
then the swerve assist assists you by applying
front:
slight steering adjustment to correct your steer-
— Automatic braking interventions are available
ing wheel angle as long as you are actively steer-
at vehicle speeds up to approximately 155 mph
ing. Swerve assist is available at speeds between
(250 km/h) approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 90 mph
— The system does not detect pedestrians
(150 km/h).
Z\ WARNING Z\ WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions > A\ in Audi
pre sense city on page 153.
— Observe the safety precautions and note the cameras > page 126.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and — Swerve assist does not react to pedestrians,
cameras > page 126.
animals, crossing objects, and objects not
— Audi pre sense front does not react to cer- detected as vehicles. >
tain objects, such as pedestrians, animals,
crossing or oncoming vehicles, bars, railings,
or railcars.
154
Driver assistance
Setting the prewarning

@) Tips
You can adjust the warning time for the prewarn-
— System functions may not be available if the
ing”) individually (Early/Medium/Late) or switch
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a
the prewarning off.
malfunction.
— An indicator in the instrument cluster will Set the warning time for the early warning to
inform you when there is an intervention. Early at first. If you feel that the prewarnings ap-
pear too early, then set the warning time to Me-
Turn assist dium. The Late warning time should only be set
Applies to: vehicles with turn assist in special circumstances.
When turning left), turn assist can help to re- @) Tips

duce the risk ofa collision with an oncoming ve-
— If Audi pre sense is switched off, it switches
hicle by using braking action to keep your vehicle
on again automatically once the ignition is
in its lane. The function is only available when
switched on again”).
the turn signal is turned on and at speeds up to
— Switch Audi pre sense off when you are not
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
using public streets, when loading the vehi-
ZA\ WARNING cle onto a vehicle carrier, train, ship, or oth-
er type of transportation, or when towing
— Observe the safety precautions and note the the vehicle. This can help to prevent an un-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and desired intervention from the Audi pre
cameras > page 126.
sense system.
— The turn assist does not react to pedes-
— Certain settings are automatically stored
trians, animals, crossing objects, and ob- and assigned to the remote control key be-
jects not detected as vehicles. ing used.
@) Tips
— System functions may not be available if the Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
malfunction. rs or & is displayed when there is a malfunc-
— An indicator in the instrument cluster will tion, the Audi pre sense functions may be un-
inform you when there is an intervention. available or may be limited.

Adjusting Audi pre sense solution may appear with some displays. The
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
may be covered. Bring the vehicle to a full stop,
You can switch Audi pre sense and the associated
switch the ignition off, and clean the area in front
systems on or off, or adjust them individually.
of the sensors > page 128.
The adjustment options depend on the vehicle
equipment. If the message still appears after switching the
ignition on again, have an authorized repair facili-
ty correct the malfunction as soon as possible.
HICLE > Driver assistance > Audi pre sense.
8W7012721BB
2) When making a right turn in countries with left-hand drive

vehicles.
2) In certain countries
155
Driver assistance
Side assist is less than 9 mph (15 km/h), the display in

the exterior mirror will turn on.
Description
Applies to: vehicles with side assist Information stage
al3 If you do not activate a turn signal, the system
3
qe| will inform you about objects classified as critical
by turning on the display in the respective exteri-
or mirror. The display remains dim in the infor-
mation stage so that you are not distracted while
looking forward.
Warning stage
Once you activate a turn signal, the system will
inform you about objects classified as critical by
turning on the display in the respective exterior
mirror.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the display

may also provide a warning when the turn signal
is not activated: if driver assist systems detect
that your vehicle is about to leave a lane, the dis-
play will blink to warn you about objects classi-
fied as critical. You can also be warned with cor-
rective steering > page 150, Audi active lane as-
Fig. 127 Driving situations and exterior mirror display sist/lane departure warning.
General information System limitations

Side assist monitors the blind spot and traffic be- The system uses the data from the radar sensors
hind your vehicle and provides assistance when at the rear corners of the vehicle > page 128,
you are changing lanes. If the system detects an fig. 109. They are designed to detect the left and
object approaching and classifies it as critical, the right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are the
display @ in the exterior mirror on that side of normal width. In some situations, the system
the vehicle will turn on, may react to vehicles in your own lane or lanes
that are not directly adjacent to yours, or to ob-
Driving situations jects on the side of the road. In this case, the dis-
The side assist warning is active at speeds above play will turn on even though there is no vehicle
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) and can help in in the critical area. These situations may include:
situations such as the following:
— Driving on the edge of your own lane
@ Your vehicle is being passed. The faster an- — Narrow lanes
other vehicle approaches from behind, the
— Curves
sooner the display in the outside mirror will
— High barriers on the side of the road
turn on.
@® There are vehicles traveling in the same direc- Z\ WARNING
tion as you in a lane adjacent to yours. The
display in the exterior mirror will turn on
when the detected object is in the “blind
cameras > page 126. >
spot”, at the latest.
@ You are slowly passing another vehicle. If the
difference in speed between the two vehicles
156
Driver assistance
— The display may not appear on time when

vehicles are approaching or being passed Applies to: vehicles with side assist
very quickly.
fg or Eg is displayed when there is a malfunc-
tion, the side assist and exit warning system
functions may be unavailable or may be limited.
— If the window glass in the driver's door or
front passenger's door has been tinted, the
display in the exterior mirror may be incor-
rect
may be covered. Clean the sensor area at the rear
— The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 127
corners of the vehicle > page 128, fig. 109 and
are diagrams and do not represent a true-
try to turn the systems on again later.
to-scale image of the sensor ranges.
—The system complies with United States FCC If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
regulations and ISED regulations ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
=> page 297. ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
ed.
Adjusting side assist
Applies to: vehicles with side assist Exit warning
You can adjust the side assist to your preferences.
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment. Applies to: vehicles with exit warning system

VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Side assist.
Possible settings:
The system can be switched on and off. If the sys-

tem is switched on, the displays in the exterior
mirrors will turn on briefly each time the ignition
is switched on.
Brightness - Change the brightness only when

side assist is switched on, so that the selected
setting can be checked in the exterior mirror dis-
plays. Adjust the brightness to a level where the
display will not interfere with your view ahead.
Because the display brightness automatically
adapts to the ambient light, it may have already
been adjusted to the highest or lowest setting
during the automatic adaptation.
@ Tips
— If you switch side assist on or off, the exit Fig. 129 Front door: exit warning
warning will also switch on or off.
— Certain settings are automatically stored General information
and assigned to the remote control key be- Within system limits, the exit warning system
8W7012721BB
ing used. can detect traffic approaching from behind such

as vehicles, and provide assistance based on this
information when you are exiting the vehicle >
157
Driver assistance
=> fig. 128. The system uses the data from the ra- — The display brightness for the exit warning
dar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle. system cannot be adjusted.
—The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 128
Displays and warnings
If a door is opened while the vehicle is stationary, to-scale image of the sensor ranges.
the warning strip @ on that door and the display — The system complies with United States FCC
@ on that side of the vehicle will blink if another regulations and ISED regulations
road user is detected in a critical situation, If an- => page 297.
other road user that is classified as critical is ap-
proaching while a door is already open, the dis-
plays on that door will turn on.
The same messages apply for the exit warning

system and side assist > page 157.
ZA WARNING
cameras > page 126.
— Always pay attention to traffic and to the
area around your vehicle. The exit warning
system does not replace the attention of the
vehicle occupants. The vehicle occupants are
always responsible for opening the doors
and exiting the vehicle.
— The exit warning system does not respond
to people and cannot warn you about every
type of approaching objects, such as cyclists.
Always monitor the traffic as well as the ve-
hicle's surroundings with direct eye contact.
— The display may not appear in time when
vehicles are approaching very quickly.
— The exit warning system does not react to
stationary objects or pedestrians.
— The exit warning system will not provide
alerts if your vehicle is pulled too far into
the parking space so that it is hidden by ad-
jacent vehicles.
@) Tips
— The exit warning is switched on or off by the
side assist warning > page 157.
— The exit warning system can be available for
up to approximately three minutes after un-
locking the vehicle and opening the door as
well as after switching off the ignition. Then
the displays flash briefly and the system
switches off.
158
Parking and maneuvering
Parking and ZX, WARNING

maneuvering Observe the safety precautions and note the
Introduction
cameras > page 126.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, various
parking aids will help you when parking and ma- iG) Tips
neuvering. Audi recommends practicing parking in a traf-
Parking aid fic-free location or parking lot to become fa-
miliar with the systems. Practice parking in
The parking aid plus assists you while parking good light and weather conditions.
using audio and visual signals to warn you about
objects detected in front of, behind, and next to*
Parking aid plus
the vehicle > page 159.
The rearview camera shows the area behind the Activating and deactiva
Applies to: vehicles with parking aid plus
vehicle in the center display. The lines in the rear-
view camera image help you to park and maneu-
B8W-0164
ver > page 161.
The peripheral cameras are an addition to the

rearview camera and help you to see various
areas around the vehicle while parking and ma-
neuvering > page 161.
The rear cross-traffic assist can warn you of ap-

proaching cross traffic when driving in reverse or
exiting a parking space > page 165.
Fig. 130 Center console: parking aid button
Assisted parking
General information
Park assist helps you to locate suitable parking
The parking aid assists when parking and maneu-
spaces and to park in them and exit them. Park
vering by providing warnings about obstacles. If
assist controls the steering movements when
the ultrasonic sensors on the vehicle > page 128
parking in free parking spaces. The driver is still
detect an obstacle, the system will provide audio
responsible for accelerating, braking, and shift-
and visual warnings.
ing gears. The driver must always monitor the
area around the vehicle and supervise the parking Activating and deactivating
procedure > page 166.
Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under
Settings options approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
You can adjust parking aid functions individually. > Press the Pa button in the center console.
The adjustment options depend on the vehicle When activating, a brief tone will sound and
equipment. the LED in the button will turn on.
— Automatic activation > page 159
Automatic activation
— Front and rear volume > page 160
— Entertainment fader > page 160. > The system activates automatically when re-
— View > page 163 verse gear is engaged while the engine is run-
ning. A brief tone will sound.
8W7012721BB
— Rear cross-traffic assist > page 165

If Automatic activation is switched on in the
MMI and if the vehicle approaches an obstacle at >
159
speeds below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), If the sensors detect an obstacle, audible and vis-
the parking aid will switch on automatically. Au- ual signals will warn you.
dible signals will sound once the obstacle is with-
Visual warnings
in the sensor detection area.
» Applies to: MMI: To switch Automatic activa- The visual warnings in the center display help you
tion on or off, select on the home screen: VEHI- to detect the critical vehicle area and to estimate
CLE > Parking aid > Automatic activation. the distance to an obstacle.
Automatic deactivation Red segments (@) show detected obstacles that

are in your vehicle's path. The red lines (2) mark
The distance indicator for the parking aid plus
the expected direction of travel based on the
will deactivate automatically when driving for-
steering angle. A white segment (8) indicates a
ward faster than approximately 6 mph (10
detected obstacle that is outside of the vehicle's
km/h).
path. The closer your vehicle comes to the obsta-
cle, the closer the segments will move to the ve-
ZA WARNING hicle. The collision area has been reached when
Observe the safety precautions and note the the next to last segment is displayed. Obstacles
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and in the collision area, including those outside of
cameras > page 126. the vehicle's path, are shown in red. Do not con-
tinue driving farther.
©) Note
Audio signals
Keep enough distance from the curb to avoid
damage to the rims. The closer your vehicle gets to a detected obsta-
cle, the shorter the time between the audible sig-
@ Tips nals. A continuous tone sounds when an obstacle
is less than approximately 1 foot (0.30 m) away
— If the parking aid is switched off, it can only
from the front or rear of the vehicle. A continu-
be reactivated automatically when one of
ous tone sounds when an obstacle is less than
the following conditions is met:
approximately 0.7 feet (0.20 m) away from the
— The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h)
sides* of the vehicle. Do not continue driving for-
— The ignition was switched off and back on
ward or in reverse >).
again
— The parking brake was set and then released > To deactivate audio signals while parking, press
— The “P” gear was engaged and released ‘Jin the center display. The audio signals will
again be automatically activated again the next time
the parking aid is activated.
Adjusting the volume

Applies to: vehicles with parking aid plus
You can adjust the volume to your preferences.

HICLE > Parking aid. Or:
> Press |- ] in the center display when the parking
aid is active.
Possible settings:
Fig. 131 Center display: distance display Front volume - Volume for the front and side*
area.
Rear volume - Volume for the rear area.
160
Entertainment fader —- The volume of the audio/

@) Tips
video source is Lowered when the parking aid is
activated. — The segments in the side area* are detected
and analyzed when passing. If you switch
The new level is demonstrated briefly* when the the ignition off and on again or open the
volume is adjusted. door, or if the vehicle is stationary for a peri-
Error messages od of time, the surrounding area may have
changed in the meantime. In this scenario,
If P4 appears, the sensor in the respective area the side area* will appear black until the
or the speaker is faulty. Drive immediately to an area has been detected and evaluated.
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service — If the distance to an obstacle remains con-
Facility to have the malfunction repaired. stant, the volume of the distance warning
iffy or fa is displayed when there is a malfunc- gradually lowers after a few seconds until it
tion, the parking aid functions may be unavaila- is muted (this does not apply to the continu-
ble or may be limited. ous tone). If the obstacle comes closer than
it was before the sound was muted, the
tone will sound again. If the obstacle be-
comes farther away than it was before the
sound was muted, no tone will sound. Pay
attention to the vehicle's surroundings
when you start to drive.
tems again later.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author- Rearview camera and

peripheral cameras
ed. Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras
ZX WARNING
B8V-0629
cameras > page 126.
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which
the surrounding area cannot be detected.
Objects, animals, and people may only be
detected with limitations may not be detect-
ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not Fig. 132 Orientation line display when parking
become distracted.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a rearview
@) Note camera or multiple peripheral cameras may be
— Keep enough distance from the curb to available.
avoid damage to the rims. The rearview camera helps you to park or maneu-
— Applies to: vehicles with park assist: If you ver using the orientation lines.
park in short parking spaces using park as-
sist, a continuous tone sounds from the The peripheral cameras expand the vehicle over-
view to include various views around the vehicle
8W7012721BB
parking aid when the distance to an object is

less than approximately 0.7 ft (0.20 m). Do that can be selected.
not continue driving farther.
161
ZX WARNING Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras

cameras > page 126.
Activating and deactivating

Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras
=3
2
=&
a Fig. 134 Center display: aiming at a parking spot
When parking with the rearview camera or pe-

ripheral camera, the parking aid plus audio and
visual warnings* will also assist you > page 160.
Visual orientation lines

@ The orange orientation lines show the vehi-
Fig. 133 Center console: parking aid button
cle's direction of travel >@©. Turn the steer-
ing wheel until the orange orientation lines
Activating and deactivating
align with the parking space.
> Press the P button in the center console. @ You can use the horizontal blue markings to
When activating, a brief tone will sound and help you estimate the distance to an obsta-
the LED in the button will turn on. Or cle. Each marking represents approximately 3
> Press bin the center display if the visual dis- feet (1 meter). The blue area represents an
tance indicator is shown > page 160, fig. 131. extension of the vehicle's outline by approxi-
The system can be activated at low speeds, such mately 16 feet (5 meters) to the rear.
when maneuvering. @® You can recognize the rear bumper in the
lower display.
Automatic activation
@ You should stop driving in reverse when the
The system activates automatically when reverse red orientation line touches the edge of an
gear is engaged while the engine is running. A object, at the latest.
brief tone will sound.
Symbols
Automatic deactivation Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
The system will deactivate automatically once If $2/&8/< is displayed and the display area
the vehicle exceeds a certain speed while driving represented by that symbol is not available, then
forward. the camera on the that side is not available. The
power exterior mirrors may have been folded in
Z\ WARNING or a door or the luggage compartment lid may
have been opened.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and If # is displayed, there is a system malfunction
cameras > page 126. and the display area represented by that symbol
is not available. The camera is not working in this
area.
If one of the symbols continues to be displayed,
drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or >
162
authorized Audi Service Facility to have the mal- ing, based on the steering wheel angle. The
function repaired. front of the vehicle swings out more than
the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of
ZA WARNING distance so that an exterior mirror or a cor-
— Observe the safety precautions and note the ner of the vehicle does not collide with any
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and obstacles.
cameras > page 126. — Keep enough distance from the curb to
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which avoid damage to the rims.
the surrounding area cannot be detected. — Only use the images provided by the camera
Objects, animals, and people may only be on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage
detected with limitations may not be detect- compartment lid is completely closed. Make
ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the sure any objects you may have mounted on
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not the luggage compartment lid do not block
become distracted. the rearview camera.
@) Note
— The orange orientation lines @) show the di-
rection the rear of the vehicle will be travel-
ey eld iie ms ripheral cameras

Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
> To select a view, press (2) - ) in the center dis-

play or tap in an area to show the vehicle in the
side view )),
Selecting a view in the side area

The vehicle surroundings are shown in the side
area of the display. You can switch between a vis-
ual display (Graphic) and the vehicle surround-
Fig. 135 Center display: peripheral cameras.
ings (Camera).
On vehicles with peripheral cameras, you can se- > Select |- -| > View in the center display when the
lect among different views. parking aid is active.
Selecting the views

> To display the entire selection bar, tap the cur-
rent view (a) or swipe at the edge of the selec-
tion bar from left to right.
8W7012721BB
) Requirement: The vehicle surroundings (Camera) must be

selected in the View in the side area.
163
Symbol/Descrip-
Description
tion
Front corner This view makes it easier to drive out of tight parking spaces or areas and
or Display selection intersections with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view
© |O/} © |/O] ©
bar in front of the vehicle.

This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering in front of the
Front
G;/@}
vehicle.
This view helps you to maneuver and position the vehicle more precisely.
Surroundings The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera images. The vehi-
cle image is shown by the system > A\.
This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering behind the ve-
Rear
hicle. This is the rearview camera image.
This view can assist you when driving out of tight parking spaces or areas
Rear corner with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view behind the
vehicle.
This view helps you to see the distance between the front tires and the
Front tires
curb and the steering wheel angle when parking.
This view helps you to detect the distance between the rear wheels and
Rear tires
the curb when parking.
Steering wheel an- The red lines represent the estimated direction of travel based on the
gle steering wheel angle >@.
Z\ WARNING Gi) Tips

— Observe the safety precautions and note the — Depending on the selected gear, it will auto-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and matically switch between the Front and
cameras > page 126. Rear views. If you switch the view manually,
— The Surroundings view is created from the the automatic front/rear camera change will
individual camera images. The vehicle image be temporarily deactivated.
is shown by the system. Objects and obsta- — When first activated while a forward gear is
cles above the camera are not displayed. engaged, the Front corner is displayed.
@) Note
— Only use the images provided by the camera
on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage
compartment lid is completely closed. Make
sure any objects you may have mounted on
the luggage compartment lid do not block
the rearview camera.
— The front of the vehicle swings out more
than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty
of distance so that an exterior mirror or a
corner of the vehicle does not collide with
any obstacles.
164
Rear cross-traffic assist — Audible warnings: a continuous tone may

sound as an additional warning when driving in
reverse.
Applies to: vehicles with rear cross-traffic assist
— Automatic brake activation: if you do not react
3 to a warning, a brief braking by the system can
s
&
=st warn you of a potential collision with an ap-
a proaching object.
The audible warning signal and the automatic

brake activation occur only when driving in re-
verse.
Switching on and off

— Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Parking aid > Rear cross-traffic assist.
Or:
— Select |...] > Rear cross-traffic assist in the cen-
ter display when the parking system is active.
Messages
re or >% is displayed when there is a mal-
function, the rear cross traffic assist functions
may be unavailable or may be limited.
Fig. 137 Center display: rear cross-traffic assist display
General information solution may appear with some displays. The
The rear cross-traffic assist monitors the area be-
may be covered. Clean the sensor area in the ve-
hind and next to the vehicle using radar sensors
hicle rear and try to turn the systems on again
at the rear corners of the vehicle. The system can
later.
detect moving objects that are approaching, such
as vehicles > fig. 136. A display in the MMI and If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
various warnings provide assistance when exiting ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
a parking space. ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
Requirements
— The parking aid is switched on > page 159 or
reverse gear is selected. — Observe the safety precautions and note the
— The speed when driving in reverse must not be limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
higher than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). cameras > page 126.
— The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide
Displays, warnings, and braking
alerts about people and cannot warn you
— Display: the display @ appears only when the about every type of approaching objects,
parking aid is active. For vehicles with peripher- such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic
al cameras, this only happens in the Rear and as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di-
Rear corner camera views. Arrows show the direct eye contact.
rection from which the cross traffic is approach- — The system may not react if objects are ap-
8W7012721BB
ing. proaching very quickly.

— The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide
alerts if your vehicle is parallel or diagonally
165
parked or if your vehicle is pulled too far in-

to the parking space so that it is hidden by
adjacent vehicles.
— Once an automatic brake activation occurs,

the system cannot initiate another activa-
tion for several seconds.
— System functions may not be available if the
malfunction.
— If there is an audio warning signal from the
rear cross-traffic assist, then the parking aid
may not be able to provide audio warnings
about detected obstacles under certain cir-
cumstances.
=> page 297.
— The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 136
to-scale image of the sensor ranges. Fig. 138 Parking options overview
Parking options
Assisted parking
@ Backing into parallel parking spaces
(err Melero)
@ Backing into perpendicular parking spaces
Applies to: vehicles with park assist
@®) Driving forward into perpendicular parking
If your vehicle is equipped with park assist, this spaces that you have already driven past
system helps you find suitable parking spaces. @) Driving forward into perpendicular parking
Parking spaces are measured using ultrasonic spaces if you have already driven to the space
sensors on the sides of the vehicle. yourself and the front of the vehicle is al-
The system helps you to park while the driver ready in the space
monitors the vehicle's surroundings with the
Options for exiting parking spaces
parking aids, cameras*, and direct eye contact.
The vehicle moves the steering wheel autono- @ Exiting parallel parking spaces
mously.
You can also drive into a perpendicular park-

Observe the safety precautions and note the ing space yourself and then activate the sys-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and tem. If this is the case, the front of the vehi-
cameras > page 126. cle should already be in the space (@) so that
the sensors can measure the space.
166
Cela dlate) ce search be displayed. The system automatically suggests

Applies to: icles with park assist a parking option @.
a If the parking space allows different parking op-
&
g tions, they can be selected manually. Press one of
S3
% the suggested parking options (@ in the center
display.
Starting the parking process

As soon as the vehicle has reached the correct po-
sition, a P will appear in the center display above
the selected parking space @). The roof in the
Fig. 139 Center console: park assist button
parking aid display @) may show the required
braking or driving direction.
RAZ-0339
> Keep the vehicle as parallel as possible to the
parked vehicles or to the side of the road.
>» Make sure that the parking space is suitable for
a3 your vehicle >@).

> Start the assisted parking process > page 168.
Maneuvering area
Fig. 140 Center display: activated parking space search The vehicle can go off course during the parking
process > A\. If there are obstacles within the
Activating the parking space search maneuvering area that block or endanger the
> To activate the parking space search, press the parking process, for example on the opposite
Pe button in the center console, or side of the street, a message may appear. You
> To activate the parking space search when the may need to drive farther forward and stay closer
parking aid is switched on, press P@ in the cen- to the row of parking spaces.
ter display.
The LED in the button will turn on and the display

Z\ WARNING
for finding a parking space will appear in the cen- — Observe the safety precautions and note the
ter display > fig. 140. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 126.
Searching for parking spaces — The driver is always responsible when enter-
> Drive forward to the row of parking spaces at a ing or exiting a parking space and during
low speed. For the best parking results, the ve- similar maneuvers.
hicle should be approximately 3 feet (1 m) from — Sensors and cameras have spots in which
the row of parking spaces. the surrounding area cannot be detected.
> The parking space search is first done on the Objects, animals, and people may only be
side of your lane. To switch the side for the detected with limitations may not be detect-
parking space search, activate the turn signal ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
for that side. Depending on vehicle equipment, vehicle's surroundings directly and do not
you may also be able to press on the side next become distracted.
to your vehicle in the center display.
@) Note
Selecting the parking space
8W7012721BB
— Parking spaces classified as suitable by the

If the system finds a parking space that could be system may have been detected incorrectly. >
suitable for the vehicle length and width, it will
167
The driver must decide if the parking space

displayed is suitable for the vehicle.
ZA WARNING
— Certain conditions near the parking space — Observe the safety precautions and note the
may cause the parking process to fail, such
as if the parking space is near trees or posts, cameras > page 126.
or if the ground is covered, for example, — The driver is always responsible when enter-
with gravel, snow, or ice. ing or exiting a parking space and during
similar maneuvers.
@) Tips — Do not use this function if the vehicle cannot
move freely, for example when on a vehicle
— If you did not drive past a suitable parking
jack.
space too quickly, the parking space search
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which
can also be activated afterward by pressing
the surrounding area cannot be detected.
Pe.
Objects, animals, and people may only be
— The Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
detected with limitations may not be detect-
must not be switched off during the parking
ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
process. If the ESC intervenes, the parking
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not
process will be canceled.
become distracted.
— You can also drive into a perpendicular park-
ing space yourself and then activate the sys-
@) Note
tem. If this is the case, the front of the vehi-
cle should already be in the space (@) — Do not use the park assist systems when
=> page 166, fig. 138 so that the sensors transporting cargo that extends out of the
can measure the space. vehicle, when snow chains are mounted, or
— The system is not available when certain as- when the parking space is on a hill or in-
sist systems are switched on. cline.
— If there are suitable parking spaces on both — Park assist guides the vehicle either away
sides of the street, for example on a one- from curbs or onto them if other vehicles
way street, you can change the side where are parked on the curb. Make sure that your
the system is searching for parking spaces vehicle's tires and rims are not damaged.
by activating the turn signal for the other Resume control of the vehicle in time or
side or by pressing on that side in the center stop the parking process if needed to pre-
display. vent damage.
— The park systems do not provide support for
assisted parking on tight curves. G) Tips
Follow the legal regulations in the country
Park assist where you are located when using Park assist.
General information
Parking with the park assists
The park assist helps you when parking and exit-

Requirement: a suitable parking space must be
ing parking spaces after the parking space
found and selected > page 166. The vehicle must
search. The park assist takes over the steering of
initially be stationary.
the vehicle while the driver accelerates, brakes,
and monitors the vehicle's surroundings. Park as- In the center display, arrows and symbols on the
sist can be interrupted at any time. vehicle roof 2) > page 167, fig. 140 indicate
what action is needed, such as applying the >
168
brakes or changing the direction. Park assist automatically steers the vehicle out of the parking
tomatically steers the vehicle into the parking space while the driver presses the pedals.
space while the driver presses the pedals.
> Start the engine.
» After stopping the vehicle briefly, make sure > Press the Pe button in the center console.
the actual direction the vehicle is traveling > Wait until a message appears in the center dis-
matches the direction indicated by the park as- play that specifies the direction of travel re-
sist. quired to exit the parking space.
> Remove your hands from the steering wheel. > Activate the turn signal on the desired side or,
> Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. If the depending on vehicle equipment, press that
traffic situation permits, accelerate carefully side next to the vehicle in the center display.
> AX. The maximum parking speed is approxi- » Make sure the actual direction the vehicle is
mately4 mph (7 km/h). traveling matches the direction indicated by the
> Follow the visual instructions in the center dis- park assist.
play and the warning tones until the parking > Remove your hands from the steering wheel.
process has ended. > Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. If the
traffic situation permits, accelerate carefully
ZA WARNING > AX. The maximum speed for exiting a parking
space is 3 mph (5 km/h).
> Follow the visual instructions in the display and
the warning tones until the vehicle has finished
cameras > page 126.
exiting the parking space.
— The park assist is an assist system. The driv-
>» The process of exiting the parking space has
er is still responsible for monitoring the ve-
ended if additional corrective movements are
hicle's surroundings and preventing colli-
no longer necessary and the specified steering
sions when using the system.
wheel angle is sufficient to drive out of the
— When using park assist to drive into or out
parking space. Resume control of the steering
of a parking space, the steering wheel turns
wheel >@).
quickly on its own. Reaching into the steer-
ing wheel spokes while this is happening can
result in injury.
Z\ WARNING
G) Tips limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 126.
You can also cancel the driving direction set
— The park assist is an assist system. The driv-
by the system by shifting between a forward
er is still responsible for monitoring the ve-
gear and reverse gear. Based on the position
hicle's surroundings and preventing colli-
of the vehicle, the system then calculates the
additional steering and driving directions for sions when using the system.
maneuvering. — When using park assist to drive into or out
of a parking space, the steering wheel turns
quickly on its own. Reaching into the steer-
Exiting parking spaces with park assist
ing wheel spokes while this is happening can
result in injury.
If you parked the vehicle in a parallel parking
space, park assist can help you drive out of it. CG) Note
In the center display, arrows and symbols on the Resume steering immediately after the last
corrective movement and the takeover
8W7012721BB
vehicle roof @) > page 167, fig. 140 indicate

what action is needed, such as applying the prompt, so that the specified steering wheel
brakes or changing the direction. Park assist au- angle is not recentered.
169
Interrupting the park assists

Park assist will be canceled automatically in the

following scenarios:
— You switch the system off.
— You start steering.
— The speed is too high.
— The time limit is exceeded.
— An obstacle is detected.
— ESC intervenes.
Resume control of the vehicle, end the parking

Process manually, or:
— You can resume the parking process in some sit-
uations. Press the Pe button in the center con-
sole.
— To continue exiting the parking space, switch
the engine off and on. Press the Pe button.
Z\ WARNING
cameras > page 126.
Messages
If the BB oe" or Pa} indicator light turns on, the

park assist is not available or was interrupted.

tems again later.

ed.
170
Telephone
Telephone CG) Note

Introduction Read the information about Audi connect, and
Applies to: vehicles with telephone be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=> page 182.
You can operate various telephone functions easi-
ly through the MMI in your vehicle. G@) Tips
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip- — The Bluetooth connection range is limited
ment, the following options may be available: to inside the vehicle.
— Connecting a cell phone with Bluetooth —Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices
— Using two telephones can be found in the database for tested mo-
— Using the Audi phone box bile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth.
ZA WARNING Setup
— Medical experts warn that mobile devices
Connecting a mobile phone via Bluetooth
can interfere with the function of pacemak-
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
ers. Always maintain a minimum distance of
about 7.9 inches (20 cm) between the mo- Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
bile device antennas and the pacemaker. the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
— Do not carry the mobile device in a pocket settings must be open on your mobile device dur-
directly over the pacemaker when the ing the connection setup. The mobile device to be
phone is switched on. connected must not be actively connected to any
— Switch the mobile device off immediately other Bluetooth device. The MMI must only be
if you suspect it may be interfering with connected to one mobile device.
the pacemaker. > Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on
— Do not use the voice recognition system* the MMI = page 222 and the mobile phone.
= page 27 in emergencies because your > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
voice may change in stressful situations. The PHONE.
system may take longer to dial the number > Follow the system instructions. The available
or may not be able to dial it at all. Dial the Bluetooth devices will be displayed after sever-
emergency number manually. al seconds.
— Switch your mobile device off in areas where > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
there is a risk of an explosion. These loca- displayed Bluetooth devices.
tions are not always clearly marked. This > To update the list, press OQ.
may include gas stations, fuel and chemical
A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
storage facilities or transport vehicles, or lo-
cations where fuel vapors (such as propane
generated.
or gasoline vapor in vehicles or buildings), > Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
chemicals or large quantities of dust parti- > Follow the system instructions.
> Pay attention to any other system prompts on
cles (such as flour, sawdust or metal) may
be present in the air. This also applies to all the MMI and on your cell phone.
other locations where you would normally After connecting successfully
turn your vehicle engine off.
The cell phone contacts are automatically loaded
— The demands of traffic require your full at-
in the MMI. This process can take several mi-
tention. Always read the chapter > page 20,
nutes, depending on the number of contacts.
8W7012721BB
Traffic safety information.

Depending on your cell phone and the connection
type, you can use the following functions: >
171
Telephone
Handsfree Applies to: mobile devices with Bluetooth Mes-

Requirement: your cell phone must be connected sage Access Profile (MAP): You can send and re-
to the MMI via a Bluetooth Hands Free Profile
ceive messages with both mobile devices
=>page 179.
(Bluetooth HFP).
You can use the hands-free system. You can make Connecting another mobile device
calls using the antenna on your mobile device. Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
to the MMI. The vehicle must be stationary and
Sending and receiving messages
the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
See > page 179. settings must be open on your mobile device dur-
ing the connection setup. The mobile device to be
@) Tips connected must not be actively connected to any
— Pay attention to any system prompts dis- other Bluetooth device.
played on your mobile device or the MMI,
> Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on
for example if the system should connect
the MMI = page 222 and the mobile phone.
automatically in the future. Depending on
the mobile device, you may need to down-
PHONE > (°, or
load contacts and confirm access to your
messages separately.
SETTINGS > Connected devices > Telephone 1
— You can also search for the MMI on your mo-
or Telephone 2 > New connection.
bile device using the Bluetooth device
> Follow the system instructions. The available
search.
Bluetooth devices will be displayed after sever-
— You only have to pair your device one time. al seconds.
Bluetooth devices that are already paired
> Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
automatically connect to the MMI when the
displayed Bluetooth devices.
Bluetooth function is switched on, when > To update the list, press OQ.
they are within range, and when the ignition
is switched on. The last connected mobile A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
device is given first priority. generated.
— You can manage additional settings for con- > Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
nected mobile devices in the Connected de- > Follow the system instructions.
vices menu > page 223. > Pay attention to any other system prompts on
— When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth the MMI and on your cell phone.
connection to the mobile device will auto- After connecting successfully
matically disconnect. Depending on your
mobile device, phone calls in progress may See > page 171, After connecting successfully.
be automatically redirected from the MMI Switching between two mobile devices
to your mobile device so that you can con-
tinue the call on your phone. Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be con-
nected to the MMI.
Using two telephones > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Applies to: vehicles with telephone, and Audi phone box PHONE > <1.
You can connect two mobile phones to the MMI
@) Note
at the same time using the Bluetooth HFP, for ex-
ample a business phone and a private phone. You Read the information about Audi connect, and
can be reached in your vehicle through both mo- be sure to note the connectivity costs section
bile phones. => page 182.
172
Telephone
Disconnecting a mobile device maneuvers, which increases the risk of an ac-

Applies to: vehicles with telephone cident. Store objects securely while driving.
> To disconnect a Bluetooth device from the MMI,

CG) Note
use the Connected devices menu > page 223.
Applicable to U.S.A.
Operation of the Audi phone box is subject to

Using the Audi phone
the following requirements of the Federal
box Communications Commission:
General information — This is a CONSUMER device.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box — BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE-
VICE with your wireless provider and have
your provider’s consent. Most wireless pro-
viders consent to the use of signal boosters.
Some providers may not consent to the use
of this device on their network. If you are
unsure, contact your service provider.
— You MUST operate this device with approved
antennas and cables as specified by the
manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed
at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person.
Fig. 141 Front center console: Audi phone box with con-
— You MUST cease operating this device im-
nections
mediately if requested by the FCC or a li-
Depending on vehicle equipment, you may be censed wireless service provider.
able to use the following functions with the Audi — WARNING: E911 location information may
phone box: not be provided or may be inaccurate for
— Make phone calls using the vehicle’s exterior calls served by using this device.
antenna
— Charge a mobile device using the USB input ® Note
— Charge a mobile device wirelessly Applicable to Canada
— Reminder signal In Canada, operation of a Zone Enhancer,

such as an Audi phone box, is subject to the
Limitations following requirements of the Innovation,
In some situations, the functions of the Audi Science and Economic Development Canada
phone box may be limited or temporarily unavail- (ISED):
able. For example, this may happen if — This is a CONSUMER device.
— There is one more than mobile device in the — BEFORE USE, you MUST meet all require-
Audi phone box ments set out in CPC-2-1-05. At the time of
— The mobile device is located in a bag or a pro- printing this user manual, the CPC-2-1-05
tective case client procedures circular of ISED Canada
— There are objects between the Audi phone box was available at the following web page:
and the mobile device http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.
— The mobile device is not positioned in the cen- nsf/eng/sf08942.html.
ter of the Audi phone box — You MUST operate this device with approved
antennas and cables as specified by the
A WARNING manufacturer. Antennas MUST NOT be in-
8W7012721BB
stalled within 20 cm of any person.

Loose objects can be thrown around the vehi-
cle interior during sudden driving or braking
173
Telephone
— You MUST cease operating this device im- Charging a mobile device wirelessly
mediately if requested by ISED or a licensed Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
wireless service provider.
You can charge your mobile device wirelessly us-
— WARNING: £911 location information may
ing the Audi phone box.
not be provided or may be inaccurate for
calls served by using this device. Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
Your mobile device must meet the Qi standard.
@) Tips > Make sure that the wireless charging function is
The system complies with United States FCC switched on:
regulations and ISED regulations > page 297. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > General > Reminder signal and
Making phone calls using the exterior mobile device charging.
ental ar-) > Switch the Mobile device wireless charging
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box function on.
With the Audi phone box, you can make calls us- > To charge your mobile device wirelessly, lay it
ing the exterior antenna on the vehicle. Using the on the @ symbol@ © page 173, fig. 141 in the
external antenna helps when there is a low signal center of the Audi phone box with the display
and also provides better reception quality. facing up.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. ZA WARNING

> To make phone calls through the vehicle's exte- — The mobile device may become hot during
rior antenna using your mobile device, lay your wireless charging. Pay attention to the tem-
device on the phone symbol @) > page 173, perature of your mobile device and be care-
fig. 141 in the center of the Audi phone box ful when removing it from the Audi phone
with the display facing up. box.
— An alternating magnetic field is used for
eee laa mem MOM) mil ltig wireless charging. Maintain a minimum dis-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box tance of approximately 2.4 inches (6 cm) to
the Audi phone box charging plate. The
You can charge your mobile device using a special
thresholds for prolonged exposure at this
USB adapter with the Audi phone box
distance comply with ICNIRP1998. There-
=> page 211.
fore, interactions such as irritation of senso-
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. ry organs, malfunctions of active implants
(such as pacemakers, infusion pumps, or
> To charge your mobile device via USB, connect it
neurostimulators) or effects on passive im-
to the USB input
@ > page 173, fig. 141.
plants (such as prosthetic limbs) is highly
unlikely. If you have an implant, consult a
G) Tips medical specialist if you have any questions.
— You can purchase a USB adapter from an au- You can also switch the function for wireless
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi charging in the Audi phone box on and off.
Service Facility, or at specialty stores. You can continue to charge your mobile de-
— Audi recommends using Audi Genuine Ac- vice using a cable connection.
cessories. Audi has verified their reliability,
safety, and suitability. G@) Tips
— The maximum charging output is 5 W.
—The charging time and temperature will vary
depending on the mobile device being used.
174
Telephone
Mobile device reminder signal > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box PHONE.
When the device reminder signal is switched on, The following phone functions will be available:
you will be notified that your mobile device is still @ Search
in the Audi phone box when you leave the vehicle. OS) GAMUT ISE oc sesone 2 0 cweeme oe comes as 175
Requirement: your mobile device must be located @) Favorites eco: ss esses yeeeys vows 176
in the Audi phone box (if Qi-capable) or connect- @ Contacts .............0.0.000. 176
ed to the Audi music interface with a USB adapt- (BS) “Voicemail sie: «2 ceca 2 2 wiccovs 2 4 snsoa 177
er, and the Audi smartphone interface must be
© Dial phone number ............ 177
active or your iPhone must be connected to the
@ Switch telephones ............. 178
MMI via Bluetooth and charging using a USB
adapter connected to the Audi music interface.
call
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Applies to: icles with telephone
SETTINGS > General > Reminder signal and
mobile device charging.
[RAX-0145]
Pe DP | catttist
fo}
Te ny o—@
j
The following settings may be available, depend- Prec rer a
ing on vehicle equipment: Albert, Simon (3)
a) CremeZEY |
Albinson, Mary (2)
on
— Signal tone esCM Are 27)
(34 001718765432 (1)
— Off
U7
Spoken cue Fig. 143 Center display: call list
this setting is switched on at the factory. Opening call lists using the MMI
Mobile device notes: reminder, charge level > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > Call list.
When this function is switched on, the charge
status of your mobile device is displayed. You will Opening call lists using the multifunction
also be reminded not to forget your mobile de- steering wheel
vice when leaving the vehicle.
> Select in the instrument cluster: Telephone tab
> 2) button > Call list.
Using the telephone
Possible call list symbols:
Accessing the telephone functions
Missed calls
©OOOCOLO
Dialed numbers
Accepted calls
Editing a telephone number
Display business card ........... 177
Number of interactions with a con-
ee oo nn
ar @y tact
If more than one interaction with a contact or

Fig. 142 Center display: selection menu number has taken place, the last one is displayed
in the form of an arrow @), @), or @).
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
8W7012721BB
to the MMI. Press and hold a contact or a phone number in

the list until the Options menu appears.
175
Telephone
Depending on your mobile device, the following Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
options may be available: to the MMI.
— Store as favorite > page 176.
Opening the directory
— Send text message > page 179.
— Send e-mail > page 180. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > Contacts.
Edit number
The contacts will be displayed. You can change
Edit a phone number before dialing it. the sort order > page 179, Sort order.
Show history Deleting imported contacts
Requirement: you must have had more than one Requirement: you must have imported at least
interaction with a contact. one contact > page 179.
All interactions with a contact or a number are > Select: Contacts > Z > one or more text mes-
displayed. sages > Delete > (Done). The imported contacts
are deleted.
Managing favorites
Directory options
> Press and hold a contact in the directory until
You can store contacts for all connected mobile
the Options menu appears.
devices as shortcuts in the favorites list.
Depending on your mobile device, the following
Selecting favorites using the MMI
options may be available:
PHONE > Favorites. — Store as favorite > page 176.
— Send contact: you can select Text message or
Opening favorites using the multifunction E-mail > page 179.
steering wheel
— Send text message > page 179.
> Select in the instrument cluster: Telephone tab — Send e-mail > page 180.
> 2) button > Favorites.
i) Tips
Storing favorites
— Pay attention to any synchronization
> Press Y¥ > page 177 in the business card, or prompts on your mobile device when down-
> Press Store as favorite in the options loading contacts.
>page 175.
— The contacts from the mobile device may
Deleting favorites not be transferred in alphabetical order. If
there are too many entries, contacts with
> Press Ww © page 177 in the business card, or different first letters may be missing in the
> Select: Favorites > Z > one or multiple favor- MMI.
ites or Select all > Delete > (Done).
— Only the contacts from the active connected
mobile device are displayed.
G) Tips — The contacts in the local MMI memory are
The favorites can only be edited via the MMI. always visible and can be accessed by other
users.
Managing the directory — After switching off the ignition and exiting
Applies to: vehicles with telephone the vehicle, the mobile device directory will
be loaded when the MMI is started again if
You can manage up to four directories in the
the mobile device is within range and the >
MMI.
176
Telephone
Bluetooth function is switched on in the mo- — Using text input in the MMI = page 24.
bile device and the MMI. — Using voice operation > page 27.
— Only the contacts in the local MMI memory
can be deleted. Call options
Opening business cards

> To accept or end a call, press the @ button on
the multifunction steering wheel. Operating
The business card shows you details about a con- => page 13 and > page 30.
tact.
Depending on your mobile device, the following
> To open a business card, press on a contact in options may be available in the MMI when there
the directory, or is an incoming call:
> Press © in the call list©) > page 175, fig. 143.
— Answer
Possible options in the business card: — Decline
> Call: press on a phone number. — Message
> Storing a favorite: press YY.
> Deleting a favorite: press W. If you exit the vehicle during a phone call, the
> Sending a text message: press {. Bluetooth connection will be disconnected. De-
> Starting navigation: press on an address. pending on your mobile device, phone calls in
> Sending an e-mail: press on an e-mail address. progress may be automatically transferred from
> Send contact: you can select Text message or the MMI to your mobile device.
E-mail > page 179.
G) Tips
Listening to voicemail The radio or media playback is muted during a
Applies to: vehicles with telephone phone call.

During a phone call
PHONE > Voicemail.
Requirement: there must be no voicemail num-

Depending on your mobile device and the type of
ber stored.
connection, the following options may be availa-
» Entering the voicemail number: enter the de-
ble during a call:
sired number. Press OK.
— End call
Requirement: a voicemail number must be stor-
— Mute
ed.
> Dialing the voicemail number: press Voice- Sending a tone sequence
mail. The call begins immediately.
Press Numbers. You can enter tone sequences
(DTMF) and send them to the other party on the
G) Tips
call.
This service must be set up and activated by
the mobile phone service provider. Hold
Puts the current call on hold. To resume the call,
Dialing a telephone number press Resume. >
8W7012721BB
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may

have the following options for dialing a phone
number:
177
Telephone
Answering an incoming call Microph. input

One of these options will be available, depending You can adjust the input level of the microphone
on the mobile phone service provider: using the slider.
— Answer: the current phone call will be put on
hold. The incoming call will be answered. @ Tips
— Replace: the active call will be replaced with The call waiting function must be activated in
the incoming call. your mobile device to be alerted about an in-
coming call during an active call.
Declining an incoming call
If you select Decline, the incoming call will be de- Making an emergency call
clined. Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Conference Requirement: a mobile device must be connected

Requirement: two phone calls must be in prog- to the MMI.
ress. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Depending on your mobile phone service provid- PHONE > Dial number > the local emergency
er, you can add a call on hold and up to five active call number (for example, 911) > Dial.
callers to a conference call.
ZA\ WARNING
Swap call
— Because your phone works with radio sig-
Requirement: two phone calls must be in prog- nals, a connection cannot be guaranteed un-
ress. der all circumstances. Do not rely on only
You can alternate between two phone calls. your phone when it comes to essential com-
munication (such as during a medical emer-
Additional call options gency).
Press More. — Always follow the instructions given by the
emergency personnel during an emergency
Depending on the mobile device being used and call and only end the call when they instruct
the type of connection, the following options you to do so.
may be available:
Transfer call to mobile device Settings

Transfer the current call to your mobile device or Phone settings
Bluetooth headset*. Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Switch to hands-free > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Transfer the current call from your mobile device PHONE > ©}.
to the MMI.
The following options may be possible, depend-
Add call ing on your mobile device:
You can start a new call. The current call will be — Decline with text message
put on hold. — Edit voicemail number
Remove conference member Switching between two mobile devices

You can remove conference call members individ- Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be con-
ually when a conference call is active. nected to the MMI.
178
Telephone
Switch telephones: the device name of the avail- Importing contacts

able mobile device is displayed. You can switch Requirement: a USB storage device must be con-
the phone by pressing the button. nected to the Audi music interface > page 211.
Ringtone and volume settings The USB storage device contains contacts in the
vCard format (.vcf). They must not be located in
— Ringtone and message volume: you can adjust sub-folders.
the volume using the slider.
— Ringtone: select a ringtone from the list. Applies to MMI: Select: Import contacts > Search
— Microphone input level: you can adjust the infor import data > USB device 1/USB device 2 >
put level of the microphone using the slider. desired contacts or Select all contacts > Start
import.
Data module serial number (IMEI)
Applies to: vehicles with data module @ Tips
The serial number (IMEI) will be displayed. —The imported contacts are stored in the lo-
cal MMI memory.
Directory settings — There should be no other files or folders on
Applies to: vehicles with telephone the storage medium containing the contacts
to be imported.
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
— Apple devices and MTP devices (such as
PHONE > Contacts > ©.
smartphones) are not recognized as USB
Switching between two mobile devices storage devices.
Requirement: telephone 1 and telephone 2 must

be connected. Messages
Switch telephones: the device name of the avail- Text messages
able mobile device is displayed. You can switch Applies to: vehicles with telephone
the phone by pressing the button. Requirement: your mobile device must be con-
The directory for the selected phone will be dis- nected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access
played. Profile (Bluetooth MAP).
Hide grayed-out contacts > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
MESSAGES > (®) > e-mail (phone 1)/e-mail
When this function is switched on, contacts that
(phone 2)*.
have no phone numbers stored for them will be
hidden. The following functions are available:
Sort order — New text message*
You can sort the contacts by Last name or First — Inbox

name. — Sent
— Outbox*
Download contacts — Drafts*
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected — Deleted
to the MMI. User defined*
To update the contacts in the MMI, you can man- If necessary, user-defined folders will be copied
ually download your mobile device contacts. De- to your mobile device.
pending on the mobile device, you may need to
8W7012721BB
disconnect and reconnect the Bluetooth connec- Message options

tion to update the contacts. Press ona text message.
179
Telephone
Depending on the country, the following options If necessary, user-defined folders will be copied
may be available: to your mobile device.
— Read out
Message options
— Reply
— Forward Press on an e-mail.
— More Depending on the country, the following options
To switch between messages, press < or >. may be available:
— Read out
Press More. Depending on your mobile device
— Reply
and the selected mailbox, additional options may
— Reply all
be available:
— Forward
- Call
— More
— Forward
— Navigate To switch between messages, press < or >.
— Extract numbers Press More. Depending on your mobile device
— Send again and the selected mailbox, additional options may
be available:
Settings
— Call
Press ©}.
— Forward
New text message notification — Extract e-mail
— Navigate
When the function is switched on, an envelope
— Extract numbers
in the MMI status bar will indicate when there is
— Show all recipients
a new text message.
— Send again
G) Tips Settings
Only new received messages may be displayed
Press ©}.
depending on your mobile device.
New e-mail notification
When the function is switched on, an envelope M
Applies to: vehicles with telephone in the MMI status bar will indicate when there is
a new e-mail.
Requirement: your mobile device must be con-
nected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access
@) Note
Profile (Bluetooth MAP).
Read the information about Audi connect, and
MESSAGES > (©) > e-mail (phone 1)/e-mail => page 182.
(phone 2)*.
The following functions are available:
— New e-mail
— Inbox
— Sent
— Outbox
— Drafts*
— Deleted*
User defined*
180
Telephone
afety belt Cy date} The safety belt microphone activates when you
Applies to: vehicles with safety belt microphone buckle the safety belt. Make sure that the micro-
al8 phone is on the side of the safety belt that is fac-
8
|hy
ing outward.
q||
If you unbuckle the driver's safety belt, the sys-
tem switches from the safety belt microphone to
the roof microphone.
G) Tips
A dirty microphone opening can affect hands-
free call quality. If this happens, clean the
Fig. 144 Driver's seat: safety belt microphone safety belt microphone using a brush.
The safety belt microphone is positioned in the

ideal Location to provide the best hands-free call
quality regardless of body size and seat position.
Troubleshooting
The information that follows lists some trouble-

shooting options. They depend on the equip-
ment.
Problem Solution
Pairing the mobile device to the Make sure the requirements for connecting a mobile phone have
MMI failed. been met > page 171, or
make sure you did not accidentally decline the PIN for establishing
a connection on your mobile phone. If necessary, repeat the pair-
ing process > page 171.
After pairing, not all contacts or Avoid using special characters in names.
no contacts have been loaded in- Avoid using contact groups on your mobile device.
to the MMI. Check for prompts on your mobile device when connecting via
Bluetooth.
Certain telephone functions are The telephone functions depend on the mobile device service pro-
grayed out or not available. vider and the mobile device you are using.
Some telephone functions may Check if the Bluetooth settings on your cell phone are limited or
be switched off or not available, individual Bluetooth settings are deactivated. This may be the
even though the mobile device is case with business cell phones.
supported.
The MESSAGES menu is not avail- Make sure your mobile device has an option to show messages op-
able. tion and that it is enabled.
Wireless cell phone charging is Check if wireless charging with the Audi phone box is switched on.
not working or is interrupted. Check if your mobile device is Qi-capable.
Make sure your mobile device is positioned correctly in the Audi
8W7012721BB
phone box > page 173 and that there are no objects located be-
tween the phone box and the phone.
181
Audi connect
Audi connect rate data plan is strongly recommended. For

more information, contact your cell phone
General information service provider or refer to the owner's man-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect ual for your Wi-Fi device.
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip- — You are responsible for all precautions taken
for data protection, anti-virus protection,
ment, the following functions may be available:
and protection against loss of data on mo-
— Audi connect Infotainment bile devices that are used, for example, to
— Audi connect vehicle control access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hot-
spot.
ZA WARNING — In areas with poor GPS reception or outside
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only use the coverage range of the respective cell
Audi connect services and the Wi-Fi hotspot phone service provider, some functions
only if the traffic situation permits it. Read and/or services may not be available, it may
and follow the guidelines provided in not be possible to send or receive data, or
= page 20, Traffic safety information. functionality may be limited.
— It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile
devices and other similar devices when the @) Tips
vehicle is stationary because, like all loose — The availability of services depends on the
objects, they could be thrown around the in- subscription.
side of the vehicle in a crash and cause seri- — Audi merely provides access to third party
ous injuries. Store these types of devices se- services through the MMI and does not as-
curely while driving. Also read the warnings sume any responsibility for the content and
in the chapter > page 79. availability of these services.
— Use of the most up-to-date mobile network
@) Note standard is not available in every country.
—The connection costs of Audi connect Info- Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
tainment services are included in the price thorized Audi Service Facility or your cell
of Audi connect Infotainment during the phone service provider for additional infor-
subscription period with some exceptions. mation.
Please note that there may be additional — Availability, scope, providers, screen display,
charges when using some services. For ex- and costs of services may vary depending on
ample, this applies to online radio/ the country, model, model year, end device
podcasts, additional online data, or for In- and rates.
ternet connections and services that use the — All services can be modified, activated/deac-
Wi-Fi hotspot. Depending on the country, tivated, renamed, and enhanced without
data plans may need to be purchased for further notification.
these Internet connections and services
= page 186. For additional information, see Audi connect
my.audi.com.
Infotainment
— In certain situations, the Wi-Fi hotspot data
connection may be established as a replace-
ment for the SIM card on your Wi-Fi device. Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
This feature depends on the configuration

With Audi connect Infotainment services, online
of your Wi-Fi device and operating system.
information is transmitted directly to the vehicle.
This could result in fees depending on your
cell phone service provider, especially if you An Internet connection is required to use Audi
are using this feature while abroad. A flat connect Infotainment. Depending on the country >
182
Audi connect
and vehicle equipment, the Internet connection > Follow any additional system prompts on your
may be established using an embedded SIM card Wi-Fi device if necessary.
(eSIM).
Your device is successfully connected with the
ZA WARNING MMI's Wi-Fi hotspot.
Always follow the information found in > A\

ZA WARNING
in General information on page 182.
Always follow the information found in > A\
@) Note
Always follow the information found in >@ in C) Note
General information on page 182.
Always follow the information found in >@ in
Embedded SIM card
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and an
embedded SIM card
@) Tips
The system complies with United States FCC
The data connection for Audi connect Infotain-
regulations and ISED regulations > page 297.
ment services is made through an embedded SIM
card (eSIM card) that is installed in the vehicle.
You can use the Audi connect Infotainment serv-
Audi connect
ices immediately. Infotainment services
Configuration
@ Note
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
General information on page 182. Some Audi connect Infotainment services must
be configured through your personal myAudi ac-
count at my.audi.com before using them for the
Using a Wi-Fi hotspot
first time.
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
You can connect up to eight Wi-Fi devices (such @ Tips

as smartphones) with the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot. If —A myAudi user must be logged in for some
the MMI is connected to the Internet Audi connect Infotainment services.
=> page 182, the connected Wi-Fi devices can also — Some Audi connect Infotainment services
use the MMI’s Internet connection. must be activated at my.audi.com.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. A — Depending on the country, you may be able
data plan must be available > page 186. to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
— For detailed information on configuration,
visit my.audi.com.
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi
Switch on the Wi-Fi hotspot.
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi > Wi-
Fi hotspot settings. The access data for the Wi- Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
Fi hotspot is displayed. Switch on the visibility ment, the following services may be available:
of the Wi-Fi hotspot if necessary.
> Switch the Wi-Fi function on in your mobile de- Weather information
8W7012721BB
Applies to: MMI

vice and connect it to the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot
using the authentication data that is shown. > Press WEATHER on the home screen.
183
Audi connect
Editing settings: Select: WEATHER > Ga. Functions on demand

> To display the weather for a location, press ona
location in the list. Displaying purchased functions
> To display the weather for your current loca- Applies to: vehicles with functions on demand
tion, press on the location that is marked with Depending on the country and vehicle equip-
the crosshairs. ment, you can purchase functions on demand
Requirement: route guidance must be active. through a myAudi account in the myAudi app at
> To display the weather at your destination, any time.
press on the location that is marked with the The following options are available for displaying
flag FB. purchased functions in the vehicle.
Adding a location: select: WEATHER > G4 > Ina > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
new city > a location. PURCHASES.
Removing a location: select: WEATHER > 44 > Z
> one or more locations or Select all > Delete. Gi) Tips
— Equipment installed at the factory may be
Online news
displayed as purchased functions.
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — The availability of functions in the myAudi
NEwWs. app varies depending on the country. For
Access to the calendar additional information, visit my.audi.com.
— At the time this manual was printed, func-
Requirement: the myAudi app must be installed tions on demand was a planned function.
and open on your mobile device. Access to your Functions on demand is not available in your
calendar must be enabled on your mobile device. vehicle.
You must be logged into the myAudi app with
your myAudi login data and you must have select-
Messages
ed your vehicle. The Wi-Fi function on your mo-
Applies to: vehicles with functions on demand
bile device and the MMI must be enabled and
your mobile device must be paired to the MMI Ifa message about a function that requires a li-
Wi-Fi hotspot > page 185, Wi-Fi. cense is displayed, the function is no longer avail-
able. Check the MMI Purchases menu to see if
You can display the your mobile device calendar
you have a license for this function or if the li-
on the MMI.
cense has expired. Purchase the function if neces-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: sary using functions on demand.
CALENDAR.
Audi connect vehicle
ZA WARNING control services
Always follow the information found in > AV
in General information on page 182. Services
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
©) Note Using Audi connect vehicle control services, you

Always follow the information found in >@ in can perform tasks such as viewing data about
General information on page 182. your vehicle or control vehicle functions remote-
ly.
You can view and use services available for your

vehicle at my.audi.com or through the myAudi
app.
184
Audi connect
Information about the services and the corre- Settings

sponding app was accurate at the time this man-
ual was printed. The scope of services depends
on the country and equipment. There may be Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
changes over the service life of the vehicle. Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
ZA WARNING > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi
— Always follow the information found in > AA
in General information on page 182. Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
— Driver messages, text messages, and illumi- ment, the following functions may be available:
nated warning and indicator lights in the ve-
hicle always take priority over information Wi-Fi
from the Audi connect services. The infor- When the function is switched on, the MMI's Wi-
mation displayed by the Audi connect serv- Fi hotspot is active and Wi-Fi devices can be con-
ices should not cause you to take safety nected to the hotspot.
risks. This can result in the vehicle breaking
down in traffic and to serious injuries or ac- Wi-Fi hotspot settings
cidents. The Wi-Fi connection between the MMI and your
Wi-Fi device is encrypted. You can change the fol-
G) Tips lowing information if needed.
— Accessing specific data or controlling func- — Access point (SSID): name of the Wi-Fi hot-
tions remotely depends on the charge level spot.
of the vehicle battery. Therefore, these — Password: an initial password was set at the
functions only have limited availability after factory in the MMI. Audi recommends changing
switching off the ignition. the initial password. Only use secure passwords
— An eSIM card establishes the Internet con- that conform to the general guidelines for se-
nection for Audi connect vehicle control cure passwords. For more information, refer to
services. The costs for this are included in reputable and current sources on password se-
the price of Audi connect vehicle control curity.
services. The cell phone network, for exam-
ple, must be available to use these services. Allow data connection through Wi-Fi
When the function is switched on, mobile devices
can use the Internet connection through the Wi-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control Fi hotspot. A data plan is needed to do this.
Create a myAudi account by registering in the

myAudi app or at my.audi.com, depending on
Z\ WARNING
your country. Always follow the information found in > AV
>» Set the key user > page 31.
> Install the myAudi app on your mobile device @) Note
and log in with your access information.
@ Tips
Some services require you to enter a 4-digit
PIN that you set up during registration.
8W7012721BB
185
Audi connect
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect

Data plans must be purchased in order to use cer- to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
tain services >@) in General information on — Depending on the country, there may be re-
page 182. strictions on the use of data plans (such as
You can purchase data plans at my.audi.com. mobile phone service providers) when driv-
ing in other countries.
— If selling your vehicle, you should delete the
vehicle from the customer portal for the cell
Always follow the information found in > AV
phone service provider to avoid being charg-
ed for additional purchases.

Troubleshooting

ment.
Audi connect Infotainment serv- | Some Audi connect Infotainment services must be activated or
ices: individual Audi connect Info- | configured through your personal myAudi account before using
tainment services are grayed out or | them for the first time. You can find detailed information online
not available. at my.audi.com.
Wi-Fi hotspot: it is not possible to | Check if Wi-Fi is activated in the MMI > page 185.
connect through Wi-Fi. Delete all existing Wi-Fi connections on your mobile device and
restart it.
D_ Not available in every market.
186
Emergency call
Emergency call work coverage area for the mobile phone service
provider selected by Audi.
Overview
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
An emergency call is a combination of data trans- —The emergency call function cannot be deac-
mission and a phone call. The data transmission tivated in the Infotainment system settings.
from your vehicle forwards important informa- — The availability of the TPS emergency call is
tion, such as the vehicle and position data, to the limited to certain times.
emergency call center. —The costs for call and data connections for
TPS emergency calls is included in the price
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
of the services.
ment, the following functions may be available:
With the emergency call, you can call for help in

dangerous situations as quickly as possible. Use Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
this function when emergency help is needed
=> page 187. A TPS emergency call can be made manually or
automatically > page 187.
— Audi connect emergency call (TPS emergency
call). This eCall system uses emergency call
centers operated by third party providers. Making an emergency call
With online roadside assistance, you can request
assistance if there is a breakdown or a minor acci-
dent > page 188.
ZA\ WARNING
In areas with poor GPS reception or outside
the coverage range of the respective cell
phone service provider, some functions and/or
mi l
services may not be available, it may not be
possible to send or receive data, or functional-
ity may be limited. Fig. 145 Front headliner: cover for the emergency call but-
ton
@) Tips Manual emergency call

To see which data can be transmitted, visit
your Audi country or sales region website at
www.audi.com. > Tap the cover (@) to open it.
> Press and hold the emergency call button until
Emergency call the LED () blinks. The emergency call will be
made.
> If the emergency call button is pressed by mis-
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function take, then press it again immediately and hold
it until the LED stays on. The emergency call
The services are provided through a SIM card in-
will be canceled.
stalled in the vehicle. Services are provided as-
suming that the cell phone network required for Automatic emergency call
the installed SIM card is functioning and availa-
The vehicle electrical system initiates an auto-
8W7012721BB
ble for use. The services made availably by Audi

matic emergency call under certain circumstan-
are only available within the mobile phone net-
ces, for example if an airbag deploys. The LEDin >
187
Emergency call
the emergency call button () will blink. The Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
emergency call will be made. The emergency call malfunction corrected.
cannot be canceled.
LED status
Online roadside
assistance
— Green - The emergency call function is availa-
ble.
— Red - There is a malfunction in the emergency Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
call function. Contact an authorized Audi dealer

An online roadside assistance call )) is a combina-
or authorized Audi Service Facility. Note the
tion of data transmission and a phone call. The
messages about the availability of the emer-
data transmission from your vehicle forwards im-
gency function > page 188.
portant information to the Audi service center,
— Off - The emergency call function is not availa-
such as the vehicle and position data.
ble, perhaps because no network is available.
Warnings Calling online roadside assistance

Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
If there is a critical system failure in the emer-
gency call systems, the vehicle occupants will re-
RAZ-0443
ceive the following warning: see > page 188, LED
status and > page 188, Messages.
@) Tips
If the emergency call is canceled due toa
poor connection, then the system automati-
cally tries to connect again.
Messages Fig. 146 Front headliner: online roadside assistance but-

ton
508 Emergency call function: malfunction! Lim- Calling online roadside assistance
ited availability. Please contact Service
> Press the button @). The LED in the button
If this indicator light turns on and this message turns red. The online roadside assistance call
appears, the emergency call function is restrict- will be made.
ed. For example, you cannot call the emergency > If you press the button @) by mistake, then
call center, but data may still be transmitted un- press it again.
der certain circumstances. Drive to an authorized
Audi incident assistance
mediately to have the malfunction corrected. A minor accident may be detected by the vehicle
electrical system. You are able to select between
BS Emergency call function: malfunction! Func-
online roadside assistance and an emergency call
tion unavailable. Please contact Service
in the MMI.
If this indicator light turns on and this message
appears, you cannot make an emergency call.
) The availability of the services offered depends on the

country and may change in the future.
188
Emergency call
If the roadside assistance call is canceled due

to a poor connection, then the call must be
made again.
8W7012721BB
189
Navigation
Navigation the traffic regulations that are applicable in

the country where you are operating the ve-
Opening navigation hicle. In the event that the driving directions
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
contradict traffic regulations, always follow
the traffic regulations applicable in the
country where you are operating the vehicle
to reduce the risk of an accident.
() Note
Fig. 147 Route guidance not started =@ in General information on page 182.
The navigation system directs you to your desti- (i) Tips

nation, around traffic incidents, and on alterna-
— Snow and obstructions on the GPS antenna
tive routes, if desired.
or trees and large buildings can impair sat-
Opening navigation ellite reception and affect the system's abil-
ity to determine the vehicle position. Sever-
>» Applies to: MMI: Press NAVIGATION on the
al deactivated or malfunctioning satellites
home screen.
can also interrupt GPS reception and affect
After accessing the navigation for the first time, the system's ability to determine the vehicle
the map is displayed. position.
— Because street names sometimes change,
Opening navigation using the multifunction
steering wheel the names stored in the MMI may in rare
cases differ from the actual street name.
> Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select
— Applies to: multifunction steering wheel:
the Navigation tab in the instrument cluster. Depending on the selected function, opera-
> To display navigation when route guidance has tion through the center display may be re-
started, select in the instrument cluster: the quired.
button > Map.
— Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Info-
The following functions are available in the MMI: tainment: Depending on the country and ve-
hicle equipment, additional services may be
@ Open the Select destination menu
available.
=> page 192, fig. 148.
— An additional indicator will appear in the
@® Open the intelligent search > page 191.
head-up display.
@ Switch between the map and the menu:
press A repeatedly until the desired function
is displayed.
myAudi navigation
You can find additional information about the
MMI navigation works seamlessly with the myAu-
map update at > page 195, Map operation.
di app.
ZA\ WARNING Your destinations (favorites, last destinations)
— The demands of traffic require your full at- are synchronized through your myAudi account.
tention. Always read the chapter > page 20, All important destinations can be displayed in
Traffic safety information. the vehicle and in the myAudi app.
— The route calculated by the navigation sys-
tem is a driving recommendation. Follow
190
Navigation
To load destinations in the vehicle automatically, > To display all categories and search for a POI,
Audi recommends logging into the vehicle with a select: |---| > a category (such as restaurants) >
myAudi user > page 31. a POI.
myAudi navigation functions: Change search area
— You can send destinations and routes from the Requirement: route guidance must be active.
myAudi app to the vehicle > page 193. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
— Active route guidance in the myAudi app can be NAVIGATION > &.
continued in the MMI. > To change the search area, press (a) / 29 /Pre-
— Depending on the situation, it may be possible peatedly until the desired search area is select-
to continue active route guidance from the MMI ed.
in the myAudi app to continue navigating to the
destination after leaving the vehicle. Online search
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online search
Entering a destination You can use the results from a search engine pro-
vider to find a navigation destination.
Intelligent search for navigation
CS Ear Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Internet > page 182, Audi connect.
Using the intelligent search, you can enter the > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
data for a navigation destination in any order all NAVIGATION > © >G.
> Enter one or more search terms into the input
at once (for example, 5th Avenue New York).
Likewise, you can search for points of interest, field.
contacts, previous destinations, or favorites in or-
> The search engine provider shows suggestions
§ to narrow down the search.
der to navigate to the desired destination.
> Press on suggestions until the desired destina-
Opening a menu tion appears in the results list. If necessary, use
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: one finger to swipe upward or downward until
NAVIGATION > 2. the suggestions © or destinations 9 appear.
> Press on the desired destination 9. The Details
Intelligent search menu will be displayed.
> Enter one or more search terms into the input > Press Start.
field. See > page 24, Text input. Route guidance will be activated and the map will
>» Press on the desired destination in the results be displayed > page 194, fig. 150.
list. The Details menu will be displayed.
> Press Start. Route guidance will be activated
and the map will be displayed > page 194,
@ Tips
— The MMI input suggestions depend on the
fig. 150.
last navigated destinations.
Online Points of Interest — The navigation system always searches for
the fastest route. You can have alternative
> Searching for points of interest: enter the
routes displayed if necessary > page 196.
name of a POI.
>» Select: a symbol for a POI category (such as — If the destination cannot be found, it may
not be stored in the navigation database. >
Eb > «Pot, or
8W7012721BB
)) Audi provides access to services from third party provid-

ers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because
that depends on the third party provider.
191
Navigation
Check the spelling of the term that was Accessing previous destinations
searched or check the search area > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
> page 191.
NAVIGATION > (Ga) > Last destinations > select
— Distances to points of interest are displayed a destination > Start.
as a straight-line distance from your current > Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select
location. The actual distance from your cur- in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab > [=]
rent location to the point of interest is up- button > Last destinations > a destination.
dated automatically. The list of points of in-
terest that were found is not resorted when Deleting previous destinations
this happens. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > (88) > Last destinations > Z >
Select destinati select one or more entries or Select all > Delete
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system > (Done).
eer er RAX-0146
Gi) Tips
cr) m
& wv The last route will be automatically deleted
A
CeeLast need from the list if you start a new route guidance
a) after canceling the route.
Setting a favorite as the destination

Fig. 148 Menu: select destination Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Opening a menu You can access frequent destinations in the favor-

Applies to: MMI ites. You can quickly and easily start route guid-
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen. ance using the home address or business address
> If the map is displayed, press aa (2) > page 190, function.
fig. 147. Requirement: a favorite must be stored
=> page 196.
The following functions are available > fig. 148:
© Last destinations 192 > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
@® Favorites ...............000008 192 NAVIGATION > (G8) > Favorites > select a desti-
nation > Start.
@® Contacts ..................0., 192
@ Received destns. & routes ....... 193
in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab >
button > Favorites > a destination.
Loading previous destinations
Yaad deme aee eRe dir tliry
Your last destinations and routes can be loaded Applies to: vehicles with MMI and navigation system
directly as a navigation destination.

You can navigate directly to contacts.
As soon as you start route guidance, the destina-
Requirement: a contact must have an address
tion is automatically saved in the last destina-
stored.
tions. Your previous destinations are marked with
the © symbol. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > (8) > Contacts > a contact.
If you use myAudi navigation, your previous des-
> Press on the address for a contact.
tinations will be synchronized with your myAudi
> Press on a suggested address. The Details
account > page 190.
menu will be displayed.
> Press Start.
192
Navigation
@) Tips @ Map preview: to zoom in on the map pre-

; ; view, press on the map.
— Ifa contact is grayed out, there is no ad- @ Route criteria: see © page 201.
dress stored for that contact.
® More: additional functions.
— Navigation to geographic coordinates for a
Weather: Requirement: the MMI must be
contact is not possible. @
connected to the Internet > page 182, Audi
connect. Also see > page 183.
Loading received destinations and routes
Applies to: MMI and teleph:
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con- © PRES? STS EBON
nect Infotainment Call: Requirement: a mobile device must be
connected to the MMI > page 171. You will
You can search for destinations or routes in the
make a direct call to the phone number that
myAudi app and send to the vehicle.
is stored for the destination.
Requirement: the MMI and the mobile device © Start: starts navigation to the displayed des-
must be connected to the Internet > page 182, tination directly. The map will be displayed
Audi connect. You must have the myAudi app in- => page 195, Map operation.
stalled on your mobile device. @ Parking: press Parking to search for a park-
> Send a destination or route in the myAudi app ing space at the destination. You can use the
to the vehicle. parking space as the destination or stopover.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Details: Requirement: the MMI must be con-
NAVIGATION > (a5) > Received destns. & nected to the Internet > page 182, Audi con-
routes. nect.
» Make sure you are logged into the vehicle and © Display of distance/driving time to the des-
the myAudi app with the same myAudi account. tination
The received destination and routes will be Weather at the destination: Requirement:
loaded automatically. the MMI must be connected to the Internet
> Navigating to a destination: press on a desti- > page 182, Audi connect.
nation.
> Deleting destinations: select: Z > one or more 7 Eh
: RY a date Meld Le MLL]2)
entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system tion.
0|6:. Opening the map

om Applies to: MMI
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen

aa 7 > If necessary, press A to display the map.
Adjusting the scale

eases
er a A
> Select: ©/ > select a scale.
Fig. 149 Details
Marking the destination
After you have selected a destination, the details > Press and hold a point on the map until a mark-
will be displayed. Route guidance is will not be ing appears or the address for the selected des-
active yet. tination is shown. >
8W7012721BB
The functions depend on the vehicle equipment

and the selected destination.
193
Navigation
Selecting map content (such as POIs) as the Map

destination
Map functions
Requirement: map content must be displayed
= page 200.
> Press on map content on the map (for example,

ii).
Selecting the destination
> Select: F2 > Start.
Route guidance will be activated and the map will

be displayed > page 194, fig. 150.
yn >] 13:51 | E53 Dreshertown Rd

py pe Dee aay a ae LE
Stopovers and route plan
You can enter additional destinations during ac-

tive route guidance.
- oF
Entering a stopover ‘a € “epio
Fig. 151 Marked map object

Requirement: route guidance must be active.
> Enter a destination > page 191. Opening the map

Applies to: MMI
Displaying stopovers or the route plan
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen.
All destinations are listed in the route plan. > If necessary, press A to display the map.
> Press on fin the side menu on the map
The following list gives an overview of the infor-
=> page 194, fig. 150.
mation displayed on the map. Press on any func-
Editing stopovers tion (for example, alternative routes) to show ad-
ditional options.
> Press on Pin the side menu on the map
=> page 194, fig. 150. Select destination > page 192
OO
> Adding a stopover: Select: Add destination > Enter a destination using intelligent search
select a destination > Add to route. =>page 191
> Moving a stopover: press Z. Touch the > sym- Cancel route guidance > page 194
bol and move the entry to the desired position. Current route
COOH
Press Done.
Request spoken prompt
> Deleting a stopover: Select: Z > one or more
Alternative routes > page 196
entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Display active destinations, stopovers, or
route plan > page 194. The distance to the
Stopping route guidance
destination including the calculated arrival
time is displayed.
Requirement: route guidance must be active and Online traffic information > page 199
©®
the map must be displayed. Altitude

> Applies to: MMI: Press ( > page 194, fig. 150.
button > Cancel route guidance.
194
Navigation
@ Displays the maximum permitted speed): Symbol Description

within city limits, on expressways, and on se Favorites > page 196
highways. S eT :
. . Bi Previous destinations display
@) Current vehicle position
@ Route information > page 201 Traffic information
© Name of the street on which you are current- —__ Colored warning symbols: traffic incidents
ly driving ahead that are on your route.
@ Start route guidance for a marked destina- — Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents
tion > page 193, Selecting a destination that are not on your route.
from the map — All traffic incidents will display in color when
Display details for the destination route guidance is inactive.
©
=> page 193 — Warning symbols with arrow: traffic incident

Intelligent search nearby that you have been routed around, for example
OO
Adjust the map orientation. See also .

=> page 200
Navigation settings > page 200 Map operation
©@®
Adjust the scale. Press the magnifying glass Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
to switch automatic zoom > page 200 on or You can operate the map > page 194, fig. 150
off directly on the map. The © symbol ap- with the movements described in the following
pears when this function is switched on. information.
Marked destination. See > page 193, Select-
®
ing a destination from the map Moving the map

Map contents (points of interest, favorites). > Drag your finger across the map in the desired
®
When there are multiple map contents in the direction.

immediate vicinity, the symbols are shown
Moving the map quickly
stacked on the map. To display a list of indi-
vidual symbols, press a’: > fig. 151. Press on > Swipe your finger across the map in the desired
a POT in the list. direction and lift your finger off the map.
@ — the map to the current vehicle posi- Zooming in on the map
ion
>» Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin-
@3) Traffic incidents and display of estimated
gers apart, or
losses of time on the route.
> Double-tap on the map with one finger.
— Green: traffic is flowing freely.
— Orange: stop-and-go traffic Zooming out on the map
Red: traffic jaitior traffic obstructions. » Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin-
Additional possible symbols on the map gers together, or
> Double-tap on the map with two fingers.
Symbol Description
@ Home address > page 196, Favor- Rotating the map
ites > Rotate the map using two fingers.
Business address > page 196, Fa-
Tilting the map
vorites
> Drag upward or downward with two fingers. >
8W7012721BB
D_ Only applies to vehicles without camera-based speed limit

display.
195
Navigation
@) Tips Alternative routes

Certain gestures may not be available on all
touch displays or in every menu. 3|
SI
ny
<ec
Naviga ALL) te guidance

started
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and Audi virtual
cockpit
Fig. 153 Display of alternative routes in the overview map
Opening alternative routes

Requirement: route guidance must be started
= page 191 and the map must be displayed
=>page 195.
> Press on / in the side menu on the map

=> page 194, fig. 150.
Fig. 152 Instrument cluster: default view: turning maneu-
ver when route guidance has started @ Current route
The distance to the destination and the calculat-
Requirement: route guidance must be on
ed arrival time will be displayed for the current
=>page 191.
route.
The following information will be displayed in the
driver information system, if available:
@ Alternative route
The difference in travel time compared to the se-
@ Current vehicle position
lected route will be displayed.
@A bar graph appears when there is an upcom-
ing turn. The fewer the bars that are shown, the Displaying alternative routes in the
foreground
shorter the distance is until the turn. If there is
no upcoming turn immediately ahead, the dis- > Press @ in the corresponding information win-
tance to the destination or stopover, the calculat- dow, or
ed arrival time, and a direction arrow for the up- > Press and hold the information window for the
coming maneuver will be displayed in the right corresponding alternative route (for example,
speedometer. If there is no upcoming maneuver, @ ° fig. 153).
the distance to the next maneuver will be dis-
Select route
played.
> Press on the information window for the corre-
@® Lane recommendation
sponding route (for example @) 9 fig. 153).
Additional functions
You can access frequent destinations in the favor-

ites. You can quickly and easily start route guid-
ance using the home address or business address
function.
196
Navigation
Accessing favorites Requirement: the Parking notification must be

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: switched on > page 23, Notification center. The
MMI must be connected to the Internet
NAVIGATION > (8) > Favorites.
=> page 182, Audi connect. Route guidance must
If you use myAudi navigation, your favorites will be active, you must be close to your destination,
be synchronized with your myAudi account and a notification must be displayed or an item
=> page 190. on the map must be marked.
Storing favorites > Press on the notification. Or: press on §l on the

> Press YY in the Details menu > page 193, map.
fig. 149. > To navigate to a parking: space, press ona col-
ored marking on the map.
Storing a home address or business address > Select: P2 > Start.
> Press Home address or Business address. Depending on availability, colored markings on
When accessed for the first time, you will be the map indicate the probability of open parking
prompted to set the address. spaces.
> Select: Create now > enter a destination > OK.
Color Description
Editing a favorite
Green High probability
Requirement: the favorites list must be dis-
Orange |Medium probability
played.
Red Low probability
> Setting a favorite as a destination: press ona
favorite.
Satellite map
> Deleting favorites: in the Details menu, press
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and satellite map
*& © page 193, fig. 149, or select: Z > one or
more entries or Select all > Delete > (Done). You can display the navigation map with satellite
> Moving a favorite: press Z. Touch the $ sym- images.
bol and move the entry to the desired position. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Press Done.
G@) Tips > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > %} > Map settings > Satellite
— After deleting the home address or business
map).
address, only the address is deleted and the
entry will still be displayed in the favorites. The map view is based on data packets received
— Please note when moving favorites that from the Internet in the form of satellite images,
items 1 and 2 are reserved for the home ad- which are then combined with the roadways from
dress and business address. the > page 194, fig. 150 standard map view.
On-street parking G) Tips

Applies to: navigation system and on-street parking ~The satellite map!) is updated regularly
whenever the function is opened. The proc-
In supported areas, you can display parking along
ess may take several seconds.
the route.
— When the satellite map display is switched
on ) with the 3D position map type, the >
8W7012721BB

197
Navigation
display automatically switches to the 2D You can check the status of the download process
map type when driving through tunnels. and the installation in the notification center
— Depending on the Internet connection, the > page 23.
standard map may also be displayed when
the satellite map is switched on ). @) Note
Map update be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=@© in General information on page 182.

G) Tips
You can update the map data in the MMI witha Because of the high volume of data, Audi rec-
map update. The functions depend on the coun- ommends performing the map update using
try and vehicle equipment. the USB connection > page 199.
— Map update through online map update
=> page 198. Map update through the myAudi App
Applies to: vehicles with map update through the myAudi app
— Map update through the myAudi app.
— Import a map update from the USB connection With the map update through the myAudi app,
to your MMI > page 199. you can update the map material in your naviga-
— Map update at an authorized Audi dealer or au- tion system.
thorized Audi Service Facility. This can result in
additional costs. Downloading updates
Requirement: you must have a registered myAudi
Online map update account. Your vehicle must be registered in your
Applies to: vehicles with online map update myAudi account.
Using map update online, you can update the > Install the myAudi app on your mobile device
map material in your navigation system directly and log in with your login information. Use the
from your vehicle. same myAudi account that you use in the vehi-
cle for your myAudi user.
The MMI determines regions based on the vehicle
> Download the map material in the myAudi app.
position. Based on this, update data for these re-
gions are available for your MMI. Installing updates
Start map update > Log in as a myAudi user in the vehicle

Applies to: MMI => page 31.
> Connect your smartphone to the vehicle’s Wi-Fi
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
hotspot > page 183. The MMI detects the map
material on your smartphone. The map update
> To always allow automatic map updates, select will start automatically.
on the home screen: SETTINGS > System main-
You can check the status of the installation in the
tenance > Automatic online map update. The
notification center > page 23.
MMI starts the map update automatically in
the background when new map material is
available.

198
Navigation
Map update using the USB connection The following information can be displayed
Applies to: vehicle map updates using the USB connection > fig. 154:
With the map update, you can update the map @ Amessage will appear if the MMI calculates a
material in your navigation system. better route for the current route guidance.
The predicted delay takes into account future
Requirement: you must have created a myAudi
changes to the traffic situation on the route.
account at my.audi.com. Your vehicle must be
Press on an item ina list @ and select the
registered in your myAudi account.
better route. More information can be found
Downloading updates under > page 196.
@ Atraffic message is displayed. The distance
> Download the map update at my.audi.com and
to the hazardous area is calculated from the
store it on a USB flash drive. For additional in-
current vehicle position.
formation, visit my.audi.com.
@® The traffic messages are only shown when
Installing updates route guidance is active. Press ona line to
> Connect the USB flash drive to the Audi music display details about it.
interface > page 211.
> Open the notification in the notification center
@) Tips
on > page 23 and press on the notification. — Particularly critical traffic information, such
> Press Next. The status of the installation is as warnings about wrong-way drivers, is au-
shown in the display. tomatically displayed as a notification.
— Traffic information is not available in some
Traffic incidents countries.
Introduction
Traffic rerouting
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online traffic
information
By receiving traffic information, your MMI calcu-

[RAX-0180]
ica lates a better route if available and the possible

Fos
ees OR cha ee Onan

earch aaa time saved compared to the current route.
Abetter route is available. Time saved: 15 min
f Nea Traffic rerouting
rn
BS North
> Start route guidance.
(33 © North
The MMI uses a notification or a note in the traf-
Fig. 154 traffic information overview fic information @ > page 199, fig. 154 to indi-
cate a better route. You can decide which route
Open traffic information you would like to use.
Requirement: the map must be displayed
To select a better route, you have the following
=>page 195.
options:
> Press on the traffic jam symbol in the side > Notification: press F2. The better route will be
menu on the map > page 194, fig. 150. used for route guidance, or press on the notifi-
cation. Press on the information window for the
Display traffic report details
better route (for example @) > page 196,
> Press on the traffic report 2) > fig. 154. fig. 153).
> To display the previous or next traffic report, > Note in the traffic information: press on the
8W7012721BB
press < or. list entry @ > page 199, fig. 154. Press on the
information window for the better route (for
example (2) > page 196, fig. 153).
199
Navigation
Online traffic information Please note that a setting applied to the multi-
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online traffic function steering wheel is only valid for the in-
information strument cluster map.
The MMI can receive real-time online traffic infor- Map settings
mation about congestion, accidents, road con-
struction, and other incidents. Satellite map: see > page 197.
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Traffic: you can display current traffic informa-
Internet > page 182, Audi connect. Traffic infor- tion on the map.
mation must be switched on in the MMI — Free flowing traffic
=> page 200. — Traffic obstructions
— Traffic incidents
Traffic information will be displayed on the
standard map > page 194, fig. 150. Map colors
— Automatic: the map display adapts to the light-
Online traffic information is also displayed on the
ing conditions (for example, by changing from
standard map > page 197.
day to night when driving through a tunnel).
— Day or Night
G) Tips
— Having the online traffic information func- Map orientation
tion switched on provides the most accurate — 2D heading-up map/2D north-up map: the
reports of traffic situations and traffic fore- current vehicle position is displayed. The map is
casting. Your vehicle transmits and process- oriented in the direction of travel or to the
es its anonymous, encrypted position infor- north.
mation at regular intervals to the traffic da- — 3D heading-up map: the current vehicle posi-
ta provider. You can switch off data transfer tion is shown on a three-dimensional map and
at any time > page 291. is aligned to the direction of travel.
— The online traffic information network is — Overview: the entire route from the vehicle po-
not available in all countries, and the cover- sition to the destination or the next stopover is
age is not nationwide. displayed on the map. The map is oriented to
the north.
Settings Automatic zoom
— On: the map scale is adapted automatically de-
You can adjust the navigation system settings in pending on the type of road being traveled (ex-
the instrument cluster and in the MMI display pressway, highway, other roads) so that you al-
separately. The settings depend on the country ways have an optimal overview of the road
and vehicle equipment. ahead. When route guidance is active, the scale
is adjusted automatically for a better detailed
Accessing settings view when there are upcoming maneuvers.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — Intersection: when route guidance is active, the
NAVIGATION > ©}. scale is adjusted automatically for a better de-
tailed view when there are upcoming maneu-
Accessing settings using the multifunction vers.
steering wheel — Off
MMI map contents/Map content: you can switch
the display of additional information (such as
button.
POIs) on the map in the center display on or off. >
200
Navigation
Voice guidance
Voice guidance: you can adjust the navigation
prompts. With the Traffic setting, the MMI will
only give prompts if there are traffic incidents on
your route.
Voice guidance during phone call
Entertainment fader during navigation: the au-

dio playback volume is temporarily lowered when
navigation prompts are active.
Route criteria
You can adjust which route criteria should be al-
lowed or avoided for the route calculation.
HOV/carpool lanes
Highways
Toll roads
Ferries
Route information
When this function is switched on and route
guidance is active, route information
=> page 194, fig. 150 is displayed. The next ma-
neuver will be displayed at the bottom. POIs and
traffic information will also be displayed. Press
route information to display a preview of the next
maneuver on the map. You can switch the follow-
ing information on or off in route information.
— Points of interest along the route
— Traffic incidents
Presentation mode
In presentation mode, the system simulates driv-
ing on the display along the planned route with-
out the vehicle actually moving. You can use
Specify starting point when you would like to
calculate a route starting from a location other
than the current vehicle position, for example.
Simulating route guidance: start route guidance
and press presentation mode.
@) Tips
You can change the volume of navigation an-
8W7012721BB
nouncements while one is playing > page 30.
201
Radio
Radio be muted since they can no longer be re-

ceived.
General information Radio ID
Selecting the radio Your radio ID and contact data for your satel-
lite radio provider are displayed.
ey Channel number
ie) |
e®
See) os 2 ) ® No reception
\S ™
3 Pa): 4 The station cannot be received.
(ones
ro In addition to the symbols for the usual frequen-
* 106.7 ana a cy bands, the following information may also be
available depending on vehicle equipment:
Symbol | Description
mao
The station provides information in
RADIO —@
the background for an online station
Saray alternative. Online station tracking
22 Lim) must be switched on for this
i
4 Qi:
=> page 208.
aa
The station is received through the In-
Fig. 156 Center display: SiriusXM station list ternet.
The system attempts to receive the
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the radio
station/podcast through the Internet.
may support the FM, AM, and SiriusXM (satellite
radio) frequency bands. Using the HD Radio re-
G) Tips
ceiver* also allows you to receive radio stations
on the FM and AM bands in digital format. — Contact the SiriusXM* provider if you would
like to receive satellite programming.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the se- — Buildings, tunnels, bridges, open areas, oth-
lected station list, the following information will er vehicles or objects on the vehicle roof can
be displayed: affect reception.
@ Station list — Satellite radio* is not available in all re-
Shows the stations that are currently availa- gions.
ble. The station list updates automatically.
@ Stations Adjusting the radio using the MMI
For example, the station name may be dis-
> Applies to: MMI: To set a frequency band, select
played depending on availability.
on the home screen: RADIO > Source a catego-
HD Radio technology
ry.
FM/AM stations that can be received by digi- > Applies to: MMI: To set a station, select on the
tal radio are marked with the HD Radio tech- home screen: RADIO > Source > a category >a
nology symbol H). station/podcast*.
If reception quality declines, the radio auto- > To select a frequency, follow the instructions
matically switches to the analog FM/AM sta- under > page 204, Free text search.
tion depending on availability.
@ Additional audio programs Adjusting the radio using the multifunction
Digital HD Radio stations may contain multi- steering wheel
ple additional audio programs. If you lose re-
ception, the additional audio programs will Requirement: radio mode must be on. >
202
Radio
> Select the radio/media tab in the instrument > To select a station or a source, turn and press
cluster. the left thumbwheel.
> To switch between radio and media, select the
button > Switch to radio/Switch to media. @) Tips
> Turn the left thumbwheel to display the station Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: De-
list. : ‘ f
. . = pending on the selected function, operation
> fo switch to a different source, press the [=] through the MMI may be required.
utton.
Radio functions
Lea TN]
[RAX-0191
Fig. 157 Center display: left side: playback view of radio functions, right side: sources
Operating The following functions may be available depend-

> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view @, ing on the selected radio station/podcast* and
select on the home screen: RADIO > Source > a
the vehicle equipment:
category > a station/podcast*.
> Applies to: MMI: To open the sources (2), select
on the home screen: RADIO > Source.
Symbol/Description |Description
® ao Displaying categories in a frequency band.
@ Source Displays sources in the Radio menu.
© Frequency band Shows the current station frequency band.
Indicates that on demand content is playing. The MMI must be con-
© ON nected to the Internet and a data plan must be available for this
=> page 186.
@ wie See > page 205.
& Settings > page 208.
Depending on availability, you can switch between the image views:
8W7012721BB
press on the station logo. Use one finger to swipe to the right or left
Station logo
to switch between the Station logo and Cover art (album cover). Al-
©
so see > page 208, Online additional data.
203
Radio
Symbol/Description | Description
© a Go back one level.
@ Search See > page 204.
@ Last stations See > page 205.
® Presets See > page 205.
FM Displays stations from the FM frequency band.
® Online See > page 206.
Displays stations from the SiriusXM frequency band.
@ SiriusXM Combines SiriusXM Live channels and on demand content, depend-
ing on vehicle equipment.
@ AM Displays stations from the AM frequency band.
Start over Go to the beginning of the broadcast.
Related Channels, artists, and shows related to the content that is currently
playing.
® Subscribe Log in to be able to play the content.
Switch to WEB Switch manually to Internet reception.
Switch to SAT Switch manually to satellite reception.
@® More Access options for the current station > page 207.
Selecting the previous or next track: press /I< or >I.
@ aca Going to the beginning of the recording: press and hold Ni<.
Going to the live program: press and hold >I. The i symbol will
be displayed.
@ K/>I Select the previous/next station.
DAI Start or stop playback
® Msg Unmutes or mutes playback.
@ List The station list is displayed > page 202.
Depending on availability, the station name as well as program in-
@ Info section formation, for example, may be displayed. Also see > page 208,
Online additional data.
Opening free text search

RADIO > Source > Search.
=@ in General information on page 182. Entering search terms
@) Tips You can enter multiple search terms at once in

any order.
Not all functions are available in every source
and on every touch display. The following information may be available:
Symbol | Description
Free text search 2
Results from the list: Last stations
Using intelligent search, you can search for sta- vy Results from the list: Presets
tion names, frequencies, program types (such as
News), podcasts*, or online radio stations*.
204
Radio
Symbol | Description Editing a preset
(| Results from a Station list > Deleting presets: press Ww in the playback view,
For ex- or
ample, Station frequency band > In the presets list, select: Z > one or more sta-
tions or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Requirement: the presets list must be displayed.

LETSat tba (ey > Moving a preset: press A.
> Touch the $ symbol and move the entry to the
You can listen to the last stations that were desired position.
played in all frequency bands. > Press Done.
Accessing last stations
Live Sports
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM
RADIO > Source > Last stations.
Using the Live Sports category, you can find live
Listening to last stations
commentary about your favorite teams during a
> Press ona station. live sports broadcast. Depending on vehicle
equipment, you may be able to switch commen-
Deleting last stations
tary that favors a certain side on or off.
> Select: Z > select one or more stations or Se-
lect all > Delete > (Done). Accessing live games
RADIO > Source > SiriusXM > Sports > Live
Sports > a game.
You can store your favorite stations from every
frequency band in the presets List. The score, the status of the game, and if necessa-
ry the current possession of the ball are dis-
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM: Channels, played.
shows, and sports teams will be stored in the fa-
vorites as Smart Favorites. After switching the ig- Saving/deleting a favorite team
nition and the MMI on, the Smart Favorites store > Press W/W.
radio programs at a specific time.
Switching commentary on or off
Selecting presets using the MMI
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Internet. A data plan must be available
RADIO > Source > Presets > a preset. => page 186.
Storing presets > Press (<))/tc).

> Press on Y¥ (7) in the playback view > page 203,
fig: 157: eel (olay
Requirement: a list with radio stations must be Program information (for example, general text
displayed > page 202, fig. 155. messages, artist, composer, song) is displayed in
> Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op- the radio text.
tions menu appears.
Requirement: the selected radio station must
> Press Store as preset.
support the radio text function.
8W7012721BB
205
Radio
Opening radio text Previous selection

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: The station/podcast list for the last station or
RADIO > select a frequency band (such as FM) podcast that was playing will be displayed.
> select a station > More > Radio text.
Top stations
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
The favorite online radio stations are displayed.
functions may be available:
Filter list
Displaying previous radio text entries
> Select: 2 > (a category) > a station/podcast.
> Swipe downward with one finger. The last radio
text entries are displayed if they are available. The following categories are available:
Scrolling through radio text entries — Countries
> Swipe upward or downward with one finger. — Genres
— Languages
Showing Radio Text Plus information
— Editor's picks
If a radio text entry is displayed with a color, a — Themes
phone number or a navigation destination for the — Nearby
station is available as radio text plus information.
@) Note
You have the following options:
Selecting the destination be sure to note the connectivity costs section
> Select: a navigation destination marked in col- =@ in General information on page 182.
or > Set as destination.
G) Tips
Call
— Depending on the Internet connection and
> Select: a phone number marked in color > Call. network traffic, the connection may be lost
when online radio is playing.
G) Tips — Online radio reception may not be possible
A call to a phone number stored in the radio if Internet service is throttled.
text will start immediately. — Online media usage depends on the service
availability of the third party provider.
—The range and screen display of online me-
Online radio
dia services from third party providers in the
General information vehicle can vary.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and on- — Please note that it may not be possible to
line radio
play some online radio stations in certain
You can listen to various radio stations or pod- countries.
casts on the Internet using online radio. — Audi only provides access to online radio
and does not assume any responsibility for
the content of these services.
Internet. A data plan must be available
=> page 186.
Accessing online radio through the MMI

» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
RADIO > Source > Online.
206
Radio
Listening to podcast favorites

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and on- Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
line radio
displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
Opening podcasts using the MMI stored.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: > Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
RADIO > Source > Online > Podcasts.
Browsing through podcast favorites
Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
Listening to a podcast displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
stored.
> Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
> Press or >.
Search
> Press 2. Displaying all podcast favorites
The following functions are available in the pod- Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
cast playback view: displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
stored.
Displaying podcast episodes
> Press All.
> Press List.
Editing podcast favorites
Starting/stopping podcast playback
> Deleting podcast favorites: press W in the
> Press D /II. playback view, or
> In the podcast favorites list, select: All > Z >
Previous/next podcast
one or more podcasts, or Select All > Delete >
> PressKI/ DI. (Done).
Changing the playback position Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
> You can adjust the playback position using the displayed.
knob.
> Moving podcast favorites: Select: All > Z.
> Touch the $ symbol and move the entry to the
Displaying the online radio menu desired position.
> Press Done.
> Press Ba.
Switching to radio Options and settings

> Press Source. The sources in the Radio menu
are displayed.
Requirement: the playback view @) > page 203,
Podcast favorites
fig. 157 must be displayed.
You can store podcasts in the podcast favorites.
> Press More (9, or
Requirement: the playback view for a podcast
Requirement: a list with radio stations or pod-
must be displayed.
casts* must be displayed > page 202, fig. 155.
> Press YY @ © page 203, fig. 157. > Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
Requirement: a list with podcasts must be dis- tions menu appears. >
played.
8W7012721BB
> Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
tions menu appears.
> Press Save podcast.
207
Radio
Depending on the selected source and vehicle be loaded depending on the availability from the
equipment, the following functions may be avail- different providers.
able.
Online station tracking
— Store as preset > page 205. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
— Radio text > page 205. Internet. A data plan must be available
— Save podcast > page 207, Podcast favorites. => page 186. A station provides information in
Related content the background for its online station alternative
and is identified with the ™} symbol.
Channels, artists, and shows related to the con-
tent that is currently playing. During reception loss in the FM frequency band,
the radio tuner can establish a data connection
and switch to an online station alternative, if it is
available. If available, you can receive your local
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: radio stations in every region of your country on-
RADIO > ©}. line. This may result in additional costs >@®. The
symbol indicates a station that is currently be-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following received online.
ing settings may be available: — Automatic/Off: activates or deactivates auto-
HD Radio FM/HD Radio AM matic switching to online station alternatives.
— With request: switching to online station alter-
You can switch HD Radio reception on or off.
natives must be confirmed manually.
SiriusXM Tune Start
Preferred online radio data rate
If you play a Smart Favorite when this function is
Depending on the selected radio station, you may
switched on, the song currently playing on the
be able to adjust the data rate for Internet radio
channel will play from the beginning.
=> page 206 and for the Online station tracking.
SiriusXM subscription status For optimal sound playback, press High. To re-
This option is available when your subscription is duce data usage, press Low.
about to expire or has already expired. The expi-
ration date for your license is displayed. ©) Note
Call SiriusXM: the telephone number and radio Read the information about Audi connect, and
ID of your satellite radio provider are displayed.
=@ in General information on page 182.
To call your satellite radio provider using the
MMI, press Call SiriusXM.
G) Tips
Online additional data Delays may occur when switching automati-
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the cally between normal frequency bands and
Internet. A data plan must be available online radio.
=> page 186.
When the function is switched on, additional in-

formation (such as album cover, artist, track) will
Troubleshooting
ment.
208
Radio
A station is no longer displayed in the sta- | Store the station as a preset in advance. Access the pre-
tion list. sets using the presets list > page 205.
Online radio: no playback from online ra-_ | Check if a data plan has been purchased for the applicable
dio. country and it is available > page 186.
8W7012721BB
209
Media
Media C@) Note

General information Read the information about Audi connect, and
There may be different media sources and con- =@ in General information on page 182.
nections available depending on the vehicle
equipment. For example, you can play media files
Bluetooth audio player
using a connected USB drive or connect your mo-
bile devices to the Audi music interface and oper- With the Bluetooth audio player, you can play
ate them through the MMI. music wirelessly through the MMI from your
Bluetooth-capable mobile device (such as a cell
Media and format restrictions: the MMI (includ-
phone).
ing the USB storage device connection) was test-
ed with a variety of products and media on the Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
market. However, there may be cases where indi- the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
vidual devices or media and audio/video files may settings will open on your mobile device during
not be recognized, may play only with restric- the connection setup. The Bluetooth function and
tions, or may not play at all. visibility of the MMI = page 222 and mobile de-
vice must be switched on.
Restricted functionality: reset the MMI to the
factory default settings if functionality is restrict- Connecting a mobile device
ed > page 222.
Digital Rights Management: please note that MEDIA > Source > Connect external device >
the audio/video files are subject to copyright pro- New connection. The available Bluetooth devi-
tection. ces will be displayed after several seconds.
Files that are protected by DRM and are identi- > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
fied with the symbol f@ will not play. displayed Bluetooth devices.
> To update the list, press OQ.
Data security: never store important information
on mobile devices. Audi is not responsible for A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
damaged or lost files and media. generated.
> Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
Loading times: the more files/folders/playlists
there are on a storage medium, the longer it will After connecting successfully, the mobile device
take to load. To reduce the amount of time it will be displayed in the Connected devices menu
takes the audio/video files to load, use a storage as a Bluetooth audio player.
medium that only contains audio/video files, and Playing media > page 212.
create subfolders (for example, for each artist or
album). G) Tips
Additional information: when playing, audio — Check for any connection requests on your
files are automatically displayed with any addi- Bluetooth device.
tional information that is stored (such as the ar- — Multiple Bluetooth audio players can be
tist, track and album cover). If this information is paired with the MMI, but only one at a time
not available on the medium, the MMI will revert can be active as a Bluetooth audio player
to the local Gracenote metadata database or => page 223.
search online if necessary. See > page 216, On- — The supported media functions (such as
line additional data. However, in some cases, the shuffle, list view, categories, search, op-
additional information may not be displayed. tions) depend on the Bluetooth device being
used.
210
Media
— Note the volume setting on your Bluetooth @ USB adapter for devices with a mi-
device. Audi recommends setting your mo- cro USB connection
bile device to the maximum volume when @ USB adapter for Apple devices with
using it as a Bluetooth audio player. a Lightning connection
—Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices @ USB adapter for devices with USB
can be found in the database for tested mo- type C connection
bile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth.
() Note
Amazon Alexa Handle the USB adapter carefully. Do not al-
Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration low it to be pinched.
You can play various Amazon Alexa content using
@ Tips
the MMI. The voice recognition system is used to
operate it. Apple devices with a dock connector can only
be charged using a USB adapter designed for
Requirement: Amazon Alexa must be activated
devices with a dock connector. Data cannot be
> page 28.
transmitted.
> Start Amazon Alexa using the voice recognition
system. Audi music interface
MEDIA > Source > Amazon Alexa. Connect your mobile devices to the Audi music in-
terface in order to operate them through the
@) Note MMI and charge the batteries.
Read the information about Audi connect, and The Audi music interface USB ports are located in
be sure to note the connectivity costs section the center console in the front and in the rear*
=> page 182. and are labeled with the «> symbol. If multiple
USB devices are connected to the USB ports (for
Multimedia connections example, a smartphone and a USB flash drive),
all of these devices can be used as the playback
USB adapter cable source.
Connecting or charging mobile devices using

[RAH-9202
af
a USB adapter
> Connect the matching USB adapter to the Audi
music interface USB port and connect it to the
\
@/ sz mobile device, such as a smartphone.
The battery will charge automatically.
oe
Fig. 158 Audi Genuine Accessories: USB adapter
Mobile devices connected to the Audi music inter-
face can be started and operated using the MMI
=> page 212.
You can connect your mobile devices through the Disconnecting a mobile device from the Audi
Audi music interface to the MMI using the USB music interface
adapter and charge the battery at the same time. > Remove the USB adapter cable from the Audi
You can purchase the USB adapter cable from an music interface.
8W7012721BB
authorized Audi dealer or at specialty stores:
211
Media
ZA\ WARNING fer to your mobile device owner's manual

for more information.
Driving requires your complete and undivided — The USB adapter on the Audi music inter-
attention. As the driver, you have complete re- face will support iPod touch or iPhone devi-
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate ces from the 5th generation or newer with
mobile devices while driving, because this in- the lightning connector.
creases the risk of an accident. —Aselection of supported devices can be
found in the database for tested mobile de-
@) Note vices at www.audi.com/mp3.
— Pull the cable out of the Audi music inter-
face carefully so that the USB ports are not Playing media
damaged.
— Use a USB extension cable to connect devi-
ces that have an integrated USB connector
(such as a USB stick) to reduce the risk of The following sources can be selected depending
damage to your USB device and the Audi on the vehicle equipment:
music interface. — Amazon Alexa > page 211.
— Extremely high or low temperatures that — USB device > page 211.
can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile — External device: you can connect external devi-
devices and/or impair their performance. ces via Bluetooth and use the Bluetooth audio
Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in player > page 210, or you can connect an exter-
extremely high or low temperatures. nal device directly to the Audi music interface
=> page 211.
G) Tips
— Always follow the information found in Accessing media
=> page 91.
Playing media files using the MMI
— When you switch the ignition off, the USB
ports are still supplied with power until the > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
energy management intervenes. MEDIA > Source > a source. Depending on the
— Do not use an additional adapter cable or connected device, the symbol for a source may
USB extension cable to connect mobile devi- change. The device name may be displayed (for
ces to the Audi music interface that already example: myPhone).
have a cable or that must be connected with > Select a track from the categories in the media
a USB adapter cable (> page 211, fig. 158). center > page 213.
Using an additional adapter or US extension
Playing media files using the multifunction
cable may impair functionality. steering wheel
— Functionality is not guaranteed for mobile
devices that do not conform to the USB 2.0 Requirement: a media source must contain me-
specification. dia files > page 212.
— USB hubs are not supported. > Select the radio/media tab in the instrument
— Video playback through the Audi music in- cluster.
terface is not supported on Apple devices > Turn the left thumbwheel to display the play-
and MTP devices (such as smartphones). list.
— iPod touch or iPhone malfunctions also af- > To switch to a different source, press the
fect the operation of the MMI. Reset your button.
mobile device in these situations. > To select a media file or a source, turn and
— Audi recommends updating the iPod touch press the left thumbwheel.
or iPhone software to the latest version. Re-
212
Media
> To switch between radio and media, select in @) Categories

the instrument cluster: the =] button > Switch The media center will display categories depend-
to radio/Switch to media.
ing on the connected device, the selected source
content, and the connection type.
G) Tips
Last played tracks
— For safety reasons, the video image is only
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On- The last played media file will be played.
ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
Artists
ing.
— Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: All available artists are displayed.
Depending on the selected function, opera- > Select: an artist > an album > a song.
tion through the center display may be re-
quired. Playlists
All playlists and smart playlists in the source are
displayed.
> Select: a playlist > a song.

[RAX-0158]
Ieee susie
tO}
Smart playlists
Last played tracks: the tracks that were dis-
played last are displayed.
Most played tracks: the tracks that are played

most frequently are displayed.
Fig. 159 Center display: media center
Folders
There are various categories available in the me-
The folder structure or track/chapter list is dis-
dia center. You can also search for media files
played.
across sources. The current music track continues
playing while you search the MMI. > Select: a folder > a song.
Opening the media center Compilations

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: You can control your compilations through the
MEDIA > Source > a source > a category. MMI.
@ Source symbol > Select: a compilation > a song.
The symbol for the source that is currently in use Composers

is displayed. Depending on the connected device,
All available composers are displayed.
the symbol for the source may change. As an ex-
ample, a USB stick is shown connected to the > Select: gd composer > an album > a song.
Audi music interface.
iTunes Radio
@ Source device name > Press on a radio station.
The device name of the source that is currently in
Audio books
use is displayed.
You can control your audio books on the MMI.
8W7012721BB
> Press on an audio book.
213
Media
Podcasts — Read the information about Audi connect,
You can control your podcasts through the MMI. and be sure to note the connectivity costs
section >© in General information on
> Select: a podcast > a podcast episode. page 182.
Genres
G) Tips
All available genres are displayed.
— Only the categories supported by the medi-
>» Select: a genre > an artist > an album > a song. um are available.
— For safety reasons, the video image is only
Videos
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On-
All available video files are displayed. ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
ing.
> Press ona video.
-When synchronizing a portable device with
Tracks Cloud services, playlists may display incor-
rectly in the MMI. Use the media center in
All available tracks are displayed.
the device.
> Press ona track. — Applies to: iPod touch/iPhone: Note the in-
formation about the Audi music interface
Albums
and the supported devices > page 211.
All available albums are displayed.
> Select: an album > a track.
@ Note
— Cloud services and the iTunes radio category

always require an Internet connection.
tele mitaraatelary
[RAX-0037,
eo hic
Bina aeC a)
Hymn
The Rock Band
arcs)
or)
a
erase)
ni
@
Fig. 160 Center display: left side: playback view; right side: playlist
Operating source > a category (for example, Artists > Al-

> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view @), bum) > a track.
select on the home screen: MEDIA > Source > a
> To open the playlist @, select List in the play-
back view @..
214
Media
The following functions may be available depend-

ing on the selected media source and the vehicle
equipment:
Symbol/Description Description
The media center categories are displayed based on the active
® oo
oo
source > page 213.
@ Source Displays sources in the Media menu.

Applies to: playback view: Device name of the source that is current-
ly playing.
Source/device name
Applies to: media center view: Source that you are currently brows-
ing > page 213.
Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected
or the covers must be available online > page 216, Online addition-
Album cover in the play-
al data.
©
eae Displays the current album cover.

Display the playlist: press on the cover.
@ & Settings > page 216.
Current track informa- | Display of Track and Artist. Highlights the track that is currently
tion playing.
© List Browsing in the list: drag your finger upward or downward.
Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected
Album cover in the play- or the covers must be available online > page 216, Online addition-
© list al data.
Displays the current album cover.
@ More Opens options > page 216.
O Off Switching between off/playlist/track: press @.
@ y
O Playlist The tracks in the current play
playlist p continuously
will repeat y in a loop.P
© Track The current track will repeat continuously in a loop.
Selecting the previous/next track (or station/chapter): press Kl or
Di.
@ la/DI Fast forward/rewind: to fast forward or rewind within a track, press
and hold DI or K.
Jumping to the beginning of a track: press on K after the first
three seconds of play time.
@ DAI Start or stop playback
@ ai When this function is switched on, all files in the playlist will play in
random order.
@ List The playlist @) is displayed.
@ Playback position The bar shows the current playback position in the track.
Info section Display of Track, Artist, and Album.
G) Tips cma 4 att]

8W7012721BB
Not all functions are available in every source You can search across all active sources, for ex-
and on every touch display. ample for tracks and video files.
215
Media
Opening the search The following table gives an overview of the as-
Requirement: the selected source must support pect ratios. The possible aspect ratios depend on
the search function. the source or video file being played.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Aspect ra-
Description
MEDIA > Search. tio D
The MMI detects the picture for-
Entries that contain the entered search term are
Auto mat of the source and displays the
listed in the results list. Each result is marked
image in the optimal ratio.
with the symbol for a category in the media cen-
The image is fixed in the corre-
ter > page 213.
sponding ratio. Select one of these
4:3,
You can search for the following categories: options if the image is distorted or
16:9
— Artists a section of the image is cut off or
— Albums blurry when Auto is selected.
— Tracks The image is enlarged to fill the en-
— Genres alah tire display.
— Videos The image is displayed in the ratio
of the source format. Select this
Options and settings Original option if the image is distorted or a
section of the image is cut off or
blurry when Auto is selected.
Context-dependent functions and settings may
be available depending on the selected source, Sse
the connected mobile device, and the connection
type.
Accessing settings
Requirement: the playback view must be dis-
played @ > page 214, fig. 160.
MEDIA > ©.
> Press More @)).
ing settings may be available:
Play more like this
Online additional data
The track currently playing is quickly analyzed for
features such as artist, genre, mood, and beat,
Internet. A data plan must be available
and a smart playlist with similar tracks will be
=> page 186.
shown.
When the function is switched on, additional in-
Aspect ratio
formation (such as album cover, artist, track) will
Audi recommends the Auto setting for the pic- be loaded depending on the availability from the
ture format. If you press on an aspect ratio, you different providers.
will see a preview of the setting on the screen.
Press OK to apply the selected aspect ratio.
Supported media and file formats

CoN Taa an]
The USB storage device connection supports the

following media file properties:
216
Media
Audio/video files
Audi music interface: mobile devices > page 211 such as iPhones,
MTP players, and USB storage devices in “USB Device Subclass 1 and
Supported media
6” that conform to USB 2.0: USB sticks, USB MP3 players (Plug-and-
Play capable), external USB flash drives, and hard drives
USB storage devices: exFAT, FAT, FAT32, NTFS.
File system USB storage device partitions (primary/logical*): 2 per USB connec-
tion.
Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max. 800x800 px. The album cover
Metadata from the medium or from Gracenote®* is displayed, depending on
availability.
Playlists -M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX
USB mass storage device: max. 50,000 files per medium; max. 1,000
Number of files
files per playlist/folder
Audio files
Format File extension
MPEG 1/2 Layer 3 -mp3
Up to maximum 320 kbit/s
Windows Media Audio 9/10
wins 48 kHz sampling frequencies
MPEG 2/4 .m4a; .m4b; .aac
Opus .OpuUS; .0gg; .oga
FLAC flac
ALAC .m4a 48 kHz sampling frequency
Monkey's Audio -ape
Video files
Format File extension
MPEG 1/2 -Mpg; .mpeg
MPEG4 AVC (H.264) .mp4; .m4v; .mov; .avi
up to maximum 15 Mbit/s and
Windows Media Video 9 wmv;
wn 35.asf 1920x1080 px at maximum 30 fps
MPEG-H (H.265/HEVC) -mp4; .mov
VP8/VP9 .webm
Flash video flv; fav
not always display, depending on the sys-

@) Tips
tem language.
— The media sources do not support the Win- — The manufacturer of the storage device can
dows Media Audio 9 Voice format. provide information about its “USB Device
— For compressing MP3 files, Audi recom- Subclass”.
mends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The — Some MTP player functions are not support-
display showing the remaining play time ed, such as rating music tracks and video
may differ for audio files with variable bit playback.
rate.
8W7012721BB
— Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag

information) may display differently or may
217
Media
Troubleshooting
ment.
Problem Solution
Audi music interface/Bluetooth Read the instructions in the chapter > page 211, Multimedia
audio player: the mobile device is connections/> page 210, Bluetooth audio player.
not supported.
Audi music interface: the mobile For many mobile phones or mobile devices, playback is not possi-
device is not recognized asa ble when the battery level is too low (less than 5% charge level).
source. The mobile device will only be recognized as a media source in
the MMI after connecting if the battery charge level is sufficient.
Audi music interface: malfunc- The Bluetooth audio player function is switched on. Switch this
tions during audio playback function off > page 222 when you are not using the Bluetooth
through an iPod touch/iPhone. audio player.
Audi music interface: audio play- Make sure the USB mode MTP is selected in the settings on your
back through the connected mo- mobile device.
bile device is not possible.
Bluetooth audio player: interfer- Playback interference can occur when using the Bluetooth audio
ence with track display and audio player if a music player app from a third party provider is open.
playback. Audi recommends using the integrated media player on your
Bluetooth device (such as a smartphone).
218
Audi smartphone interface
Audi smartphone CG) Note

interface Read the information about Audi connect, and
Setup
=> page 182.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
You can connect your smartphone to the MMI G@) Tips

with a cable or wirelessly* using the Audi smart- — The functions that can be used depend on
phone interface. Certain content on your smart-
the following factors, among others:
phone is adapted in the MMI while driving and
— The brand of your smartphone
can be operated through the MMI.
— The version of the operating system in
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and your smartphone
the ignition must be switched on. iPhone genera- — The software version of the app used
tion 5 or higher with Lightning connector and iOS — The USB adapter cable and correct connec-
7.1.2 operating system or higher, or smartphone tion
with Android Auto app and Android 5.0 Lollipop — Your cell phone service provider
operating system or higher. — The customized settings on your smart-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: phone
SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smart- — One of the factors above or a combination
phone interface > New connection. of any of them could cause your smart-
> Connect your smartphone to the Audi music in- phone to be incompatible with the Audi
terface > page 211 using a USB adapter smartphone interface. Compatibility cannot
=> page 211, fig. 158, or be guaranteed for all types of smartphones.
> To connect your iPhone wireless*, switch on the For more information and assistance, refer
Bluetooth function and Wi-Fi on your iPhone. to the user guide and the manufacturer of
Open the Apple CarPlay settings in your iPhone. your smartphone.
In the MMI, press on your iPhone in the list of — Please note that you can only connect your
displayed devices. smartphone via the front Audi music inter-
> To update the list, press O. face in order to use the Audi smartphone in-
> Follow the system instructions. terface.
> Pay attention to any additional system prompts — Wireless Apple CarPlay* is not available in
on your smartphone, if applicable. all countries.
> Applies to: MMI: If you declined use of Apple — Wireless Apple CarPlay* was a planned func-
CarPlay or Android Auto the first time you con- tion at the time this manual was printed.
nected your smartphone, then select on the Wireless Apple CarPlay* is not available in
home screen: SETTINGS > Connected devices > your vehicle.
Audi smartphone interface > a smartphone. — Wireless Apple CarPlay* is only possible i n
> Follow the system instructions. vehicles without a navigation system or
without a detected vehicle position (GPS da-
Z\ WARNING ta) if the following requirement is met: the
Driving requires your complete and undivided embedded SIM card for the vehicle must be
attention. As the driver, you have complete re- logged into the mobile phone network
=> page 182.
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
mobile devices while driving, because this in- — If the connected smartphone has voice con-
creases the risk of an accident. trol, you can operate your smartphone using
8W7012721BB
the external voice recognition system

=> page 28.
219
Audi smartphone interface
— The menu language shown in the MMIis — Usage of the Audi smartphone interface de-
based on the settings in your smartphone. pends on the availability of services through
— Some MMI functions are not available when third party providers.
there is an active Audi smartphone interface — Audi merely provides access to third party
connection. services through the MMI and does not as-
— You cannot connect any mobile devices via sume any responsibility for the content of
Bluetooth when an Audi smartphone inter- these services.
face connection is active.
Troubleshooting

ment.
Problem Solution
Audi smartphone Check the battery charge level on your smartphone.
interface cannot be | Check the USB cable and use a different one if necessary.
opened. Check if Android Auto or Apple CarPlay is available in the country where the vehi-
cle is being operated.
Android Auto: check if the Android Auto app is installed on your smartphone.
Connecting the Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
smartphone to the | adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
MMI failed. => page 211.
Apple CarPlay: check if Apple CarPlay is activated on your iPhone.
Android Auto: check in the Android Auto app if Android Auto permits new
vehicles.
Wireless connection: open the settings for Bluetooth and Apple CarPlay on your
iPhone. Remove your vehicle. Open the connection manager in the MMI
= page 223. Delete your iPhone in the Telephone 1 and Audi smartphone inter-
face submenus. Repeat the connection process. Restart the MMI > page 20. Re-
start your iPhone.
The smartphone is | Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
not automatically adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
detected. => page 211.
Check if the requirements needed to connect a smartphone have been met.
220
Additional settings
Additional settings
System settings Keyboard
See > page 24.
Introduction
General settings are described in this chapter.

You can find specific settings in the chapters
about those settings. The available settings de- Requirement: an audio source must be active.
pend on the vehicle equipment. > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Sound.
Date and time
Possible settings:
— Treble
SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
— Bass
Possible settings: — Balance/fader
— Speed dependent volume control
— Automatically set date and time
— Subwoofer
— Surround Level
— Date format Focus

— Time format
You can optimize the sound distribution for vari-
— Automatic time zone
ous locations in the vehicle.
— Time zone
3D effect
Measurement units You can adjust the intensity of the 3D effect.
With the Medium setting, you will hear an opti-
mal 3D effect for all sources.
SETTINGS > General > Measurement units.
Possible settings: PUL eee ely
— Speed > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

— Distance SETTINGS > Announcements & tone.
— Temperature
Possible settings:
— Volume
— Pressure — Announcement volume
— Consumption (engine) — Welcome sound
Language and keyboard Z\ WARNING

Adjust the volume of the audio system so that
signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
SETTINGS > Language & keyboard.
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
Language times.
You can change the languages for the display,

@ Tips
navigation announcements, and the voice recog-
The volume is automatically adjusted to a pre-
8W7012721BB
nition system.
set level when the MMI is switched on.
221
Additional settings
Bluetooth — Map material update for the navigation system

=> page 198.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: — Have the software update performed by an au-
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Bluetooth thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Bluetooth Facility. This can result in additional costs.
You can select a setting for visibility of the MMI ZA\ WARNING
to other Bluetooth devices. To connect a new
— Perform the installation only when the vehi-
Bluetooth device, the Visible setting must be se-
cle is stationary. Otherwise, this increases
lected. If Invisible is selected, a Bluetooth con-
the risk of an accident
nection will only be possible with paired devices.
— If the installation fails, contact an author-
If Off is selected, no Bluetooth device can be con-
nected.
Facility immediately to have the malfunction
Bluetooth audio player corrected.
When this function is switched on, the profile

will load automatically when your Bluetooth au- Online system update
dio player is within range. Applies to: vehicles with online system update
Bluetooth name With the online system update, you can update
the software directly in the vehicle.
The MMI’s Bluetooth name is displayed and can
be changed. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Factory default settings Downloading updates

Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. Requirement: notification for an online system
update will appear in the center display.
SETTINGS > System maintenance > Restore >» Press on the notification, or
factory settings. > Open the notification in the notification center
> Follow the system instructions. on > page 23 and press on the notification.
The settings will be reset. The system will re-
start. This may take some time. You can also check manually if an update is avail-
able.
@ Tips > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > System maintenance > Software
Make sure that not only the settings were de-
update > Search for updates > desired update
leted but also the stored data, if necessary.
> Continue.
Software update
The MMI will start the download. You can check
Introduction the status of the download process in the notifi-
Applies to: vehicles with software update
cation center > page 23.
You can update your vehicle’s software.
Installing updates
The functions depend on the country and vehicle Requirement: an online system update must be
equipment: downloaded and a notification must be shown in
— Update through the online system update the center display.
=> page 222.
> Stop the vehicle safely.
222
Additional settings
> Press on the notification, or Possible menu items:

> Open the notification in the notification center
— Telephone 1
on > page 23 and press on the notification.
> Follow the system instructions. — Telephone 2
— Audio player
Depending on the scope of the update, the online — Wi-Fi hotspot
system update may only be started if you follow
— Headset
these instructions:
>» Switch the emergency flashers off, if necessary Audi smartphone interface
> Make sure that the starter battery is charged. You can connect your smartphone to the MMI
> To start the update, exit and lock the vehicle.
> page 219.
The MMI will start the installation. When the up-
myAudi app
date has ended, a notification will be displayed.
This function is available if the myAudi app is in-
ZA\ WARNING stalled on your mobile device and started, and if
the mobile device is connected with the vehicle’s
Depending on the scope of the installation,
Wi-Fi hotspot.
the ignition must not be switched on during
the installation to ensure the installation
() Note
completes successfully.
() Note be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=> page 182.
=@ in General information on page 182.
Managing connected devices
Requirement: the connected devices menu must

@ Tips be displayed > page 223.
The software update may take some time.
Connecting a device
WEE Tel Requirement: Bluetooth visibility must be acti-

Applies to: vehicles with online system update vated in the MMI & page 222 and mobile device.
Online system update: incomplete. Warning! > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
Vehicle functions limited > To search for and connect your mobile device,
press New connection = page 171.
If an error occurs when installing an online sys-
tem update, certain functions such as the emer- Selecting a connected device
gency call function may not be available. Drive to > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
Service Facility immediately to have the malfunc- displayed devices. The connection will be made.
tion corrected.
Disconnecting a connected device
Connected devices > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
> Press on the connected mobile device. The se-
Displayed connected devices
lected mobile device will be disconnected from
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the MMI.
8W7012721BB
the ignition must be switched on.

Deleting a device
> Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1. >
SETTINGS > Connected devices.
223
Additional settings
> Press and hold an element until the Options — About Audi connect
menu is displayed.
> Press Delete. ONT lad pela M nla
If a device is listed multiple times, it will be de-
leted from all menu items. Requirement: a smartphone must be connected
to the MMI > page 219.
Additional options
Depending on the selected function, additional SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smart-
options may be available. phone interface.
> Press and hold an element until the Options
Requirement: the connected devices menu must
menu is displayed.
be displayed > page 223.
> Press Legal notes.
> Press ona menu item, such as Telephone 1.
> Press and hold an element until the Options
menu is displayed.
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
Bluetooth profile the ignition must be switched on.
You can switch desired profiles on or off sepa- > Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
rately in the MMI. tions tab > page 13.
Favorite > Press and hold the [=] button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel until the display appears.
To set a paired mobile device as the default
phone, activate this function in the MMI. Possible options:
When the mobile device is in range and the Blue- — Engine code
tooth function on the mobile device and in the — Software information
MMI is switched on, the default phone will be — Version information
given priority over the other Bluetooth devices
and will be connected directly to the MMI.
Head-up display
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display
Legal information
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
erreur) the ignition must be switched on. The head-up
display is switched off.
Information on the software licenses can be
found online at www.audi.com/softwareinfo. > To display the license text in the head-up dis-
play, press and hold the S? button @
Item elem tarts) => page 26, fig. 19 until the display appears.

SETTINGS > General.
Subscriptions
Version information
Legal notes
Possible options:
— Software information
224
Additional information
Additional information
Brands and licenses
This manual does not contain any symbols, such
as ® or ™, to identify trademarks or registered
trademarks. However, the absence of these sym-
bols does not constitute a waiver of any rights as-
sociated with these names.
Apple, iPhone, iPod touch, Apple CarPlay, Light-

ning, and iTunes Radio are trademarks of Apple
Inc.
10S is a trademark or, in the USA and other coun-

tries, a registered trademark of Cisco and is used
under license.
Other product and manufacturer names may be

trademarks of their respective owners.
8W7012721BB
225
Checking and Filling
Checking and Filling @) Note

Fuel — Filling the tank just one time with leaded
fuel or other metallic additives will cause
Types of gasoline permanent deterioration to the catalytic
The correct gasoline grade is stated on the inside converter function.
of the fuel filler door. — When gasoline with an octane rating that is
too low is used, high speeds or heavy engine
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter load can lead to engine damage.
and must only be driven with unleaded gasoline.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas-

@® tips
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De- The vehicle may be filled with fuel that has a
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. higher octane rating than what is required by
the engine.
The individual gasoline grades are differentiated
by octane ratings. This value is given with (R
+M)/2 equating to AKI or in RON. Gasoline mixture
The headings below match the sticker in the fuel Gasoline with alcohol or MTBE (Methyl-Tert-
filler door (examples): Butyl-Ether)
You can use unleaded gasoline mixed with alco-
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY MIN. (R+M)/2 87
hol or MTBE (generally labeled as oxygenated
Regular/ MIN. RON 91 Regular
compounds) as long as the fuel meets the follow-
Use regular gasoline with minimum 87 AKI / ing conditions:
91 RON > ©.
Gasoline with methanol content (methyl alco-
Audi recommends using premium gasoline with hol or methanol)
minimum 91 AKI / 95 RON to achieve the rated — Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
horsepower and torque.
—No more than 3% methanol
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R — More than 2% solvent
+M)/2 91 / SUPER MIN. RON 95
Gasoline with ethanol content (ethyl alcohol or
Using premium gasoline with minimum 91 AKI / ethanol)
95 RON is recommended. — Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
If premium gasoline is not available, you can also —No more than 15% ethanol
use regular gasoline 87 AKI / 91 RON. However Gasoline with MTBE content
this does reduce the engine power slightly.
— Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R —No more than 15% MTBE
+M)/2 93 / SUPER PLUS MIN. RON 98
Gasoline adapted to the season
Using premium plus gasoline with at least 93
Many gasoline fuels are adapted to the seasons.
AKI / 98 RON is recommended.
When the season changes, refueling at high-traf-
If no premium plus gasoline is available, you can fic gas stations is recommended. It is more likely
also use premium gasoline with 91 AKI / 95 RON. that the gasoline will be suitable for the season
However this does reduce the engine power there.
slightly.
@) Note
— Gasoline with methanol content that does
not meet the specified conditions may cause >
226
corrosion damage and damage to plastic or Refueling

rubber components in the fuel system.
— Do not use gasoline that does not meet the
specifications. Messages
— If you are unable to find out if a specific gas-
oline mixture meets the specifications, ask A Tank system: malfunction! Please contact
the gas station operator or their fuel suppli- Service
er. There is a malfunction in the fuel tank system.
— Do not use any gasoline mixture whose Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
composition cannot be identified. Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
— Audi does not assume any responsibility for malfunction corrected.
damage to the fuel system or for perform-
ance problems caused by using gasoline Fueling procedure
mixtures different from those specified.
This type of damage also does not fall under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty or under
the emissions control system warranty.
— If you notice a higher fuel consumption or
poor handling or performance problems due
to such gasoline mixtures, Audi recom-
mends fueling with unblended gasoline.
Gasoline additives
Fig. 161 Right rear side of the vehicle: opening the fuel
An important issue for many automobile manu- filler door
facturers is combustion residue in the engine
that results from the use of certain fuels.
Although types of gasoline differ depending on

the manufacturer, there are similarities. Certain
substances in the gasoline may cause deposits in
the engine. Additives in the gasoline that should
keep the engine and fuel system clean do not all
function equally.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas-

Fig. 162 Fuel filler door with attached fuel cap
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De-
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
The fuel filler door is unlocked or locked by the
If you use incorrect fuels over a long period of central locking system.
time, the maximum engine performance may be
> Unlock the vehicle if necessary.
impaired by combustion residue.
> Press on the Left side of the fuel filler door to
open it > fig. 161.
@) Note
> Unscrew the tank cap counterclockwise.
— Damage or malfunctions caused by the use > Place the cap from above on the open fuel filler
of incorrect types of gasoline are not cov- door > fig. 162.
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. > Insert the fuel pump nozzle all the way into the
8W7012721BB
— Only gasoline additives that have been ap- fuel filler neck.
proved by Audi may be used. > Begin fueling. Once the fuel pump nozzle turns
off the first time, the fuel tank is full. Donot =>
227
continue fueling, or else the expansion space in

the tank will be filled with fuel.
ZA WARNING
>» After the fuel pump has switched off, wait five Audi does not recommend transporting fuel
seconds before removing the nozzle to allow containers inside the vehicle. Fuel could leak
the rest of the fuel to finish dripping into the out of the container and ignite, especially dur-
fuel tank. ing an accident. This can cause explosions,
> Turn the fuel cap clockwise until it clicks into fires, and injuries.
place. — If you must transport fuel in a fuel contain-
> Close the fuel filler door and then press on the er, note the following:
left side until it latches. — Always place the fuel container on the
ground before filling. Never fill the fuel
The correct fuel type for your vehicle can be container with fuel while it is inside or on
found ona label located on the inside of the fuel the vehicle. Electrostatic discharge can oc-
filler door. For additional information on fuel, see cur while refueling and the fuel vapors
=> page 226. could ignite.
For the tank capacity in your vehicle, refer to the — When using fuel containers made of met-
Technical Data > page 300. al, the fuel pump nozzle must always re-
main in contact with the container to re-
To reduce the risk of fuel leaking out or vapors
duce the risk of static charge.
escaping, make sure that the fuel tank is closed
— Insert the fuel pump nozzle as far as pos-
correctly. Otherwise the EY indicator light will
sible into the filler opening while refuel-
turn on.
ing.
ZA\ WARNING — Follow the applicable legal regulations in

the country where you are driving when
Improper fueling procedures and improper using, storing and transporting fuel con-
handling of fuel can lead to explosions, fires, tainers.
severe burns, and other injuries.
— Make sure that the fuel container meets
— Do not smoke. Keep away from open flames. the industry standards, for example ANSI
— The ignition must be switched off when re- or ASTM F852-86.
fueling.
— Mobile devices, radio devices, and other ra- () Note
dio equipment should always be switched
— Remove fuel that has overflowed onto any
off when refueling. Electromagnetic rays
vehicle components immediately to reduce
could cause sparks and start a fire.
the risk of damage to the vehicle.
— If you do not insert the fuel pump nozzle all
— Never drive until the fuel tank is completely
the way into the filler tube, then fuel can
empty. The irregular supply of fuel that re-
leak out. Spilled fuel can ignite and start a
sults from that can cause engine misfires.
fire.
Uncombusted fuel may enter the exhaust
— Never get into the vehicle when refueling. If
system and increase the risk of damage to
there is an exceptional situation where you
the catalytic converter.
must enter the vehicle, close the door and
touch a metal surface before touching the
@) For the sake of the environment
fuel pump nozzle again. This will reduce the
— Do not overfill the fuel tank, or fuel could
risk of electrostatic discharge that can cause
flying sparks. Sparks can start a fire when leak out when the vehicle is warming up.
refueling. — Fuel should never enter the sewer system or
come into contact with the ground.
)) Depending on the engine and country
228
pull, you could damage the emergency re-

@) Tips
lease mechanism.
The fuel filler door on your vehicle does not
lock if you lock the vehicle from the inside us-
Emissions control
ing the central locking switch.
system
Fuel filler door emergency release General information
Applies to: vehicles with manual fuel filler door release
If the central locking system malfunctions, the ZA\ WARNING

fuel filler door can be unlocked manually. The temperature of the exhaust system is
high, both when driving and after stopping
the engine.
— Never touch the exhaust tail pipes once they
have become hot. This could result in burns.
— Do not park your vehicle over flammable
materials such as grass or leaves because
the high temperature of the emissions sys-
tem could start a fire.
— Do not apply underbody protectant in the
exhaust system area, because this increases
Fig. 163 Right side trim panel in the luggage compart-
ment: opening the trim panel
the risk of fire.
Catalytic converter
Observe the safety precautions > page 229, Gen-

eral information.
The vehicle may only be driven with unleaded

gasoline, or the catalytic converter will be de-
stroyed.
Never drive until the tank is completely empty.

Fig. 164 Luggage compartment: fuel filler door emergency The irregular supply of fuel that results from that
release can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel
could enter the exhaust system, which could
The emergency opening mechanism is located
cause overheating and damage to the catalytic
behind the right side trim panel in the luggage converter.
compartment.
> Open the cover in the side panel >fig. 163. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
> To unlock the fuel filler door, loosen the red
loop from the retainer and then pull on the If the S indicator light blinks or turns on, there
loop carefully > fig. 164 >@. is a malfunction that is causing poor emissions
> Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to quality and that could damage the catalytic con-
open it > page 227, fig. 161. verter. Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
® Note malfunction corrected.
8W7012721BB
Only pull on the loop until you feel resistance.

You will not hear it release. If you continue to
229
The indicator light can also turn on if the fuel fill- suddenly, even when the ignition is switched
er cap is not closed correctly > page 227). off.
— Never open the hood when there is steam or
Engine compartment coolant escaping from the engine compart-
ment, because there is a risk that you could
General information
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is
Special care is required if you are working in the escaping.
engine compartment — The cap on the coolant expansion tank must
never be opened when the coolant is hot.
For work in the engine compartment, such as The cooling system is under pressure. There
checking and filling fluids, there is a risk of in- is a risk of burns
jury, scalding, accidents, and burns. For this
—To protect your face, hands, and arms from
reason, follow all the warnings and general
hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a
safety precautions provided in the following in-
thick cloth when opening.
formation. The engine compartment is a dan-
— Do not remove the engine cover under any
gerous area in the vehicle. > A.
circumstances. This increases the risk of
Explanation of warnings (sticker in the engine burns.
compartment): — Due to the risk of electric shock, never touch
Hot engine components! the ignition cable or other components in

@® Rotating parts!
the electronic high-voltage ignition system
when the engine is running or is starting.
The radiator fan can switch on at any
— If a gear is engaged while the vehicle is sta-
[2 time!
tionary and the engine is running, do not
High voltage! Switch off the engine be- press the accelerator pedal inadvertently.
5 fore coming into contact with any igni- Pressing the accelerator pedal will cause the
tion system components! vehicle to move, and this could result in an
The catalytic converter can be damaged accident.
"2731 if the oil level is too high! — If inspections or repairs must be performed
Always follow the instructions in the op- while the engine is running, moving compo-
cy erating manual. nents (such as the ribbed belt, generator,
and radiator fan) pose an additional risk.
ZA\ WARNING — Set the parking brake first and select the
— Turn the engine off. “p” (Park) selector lever position.
— Switch the ignition off. — Always make sure that no parts of the
— Set the parking brake. body, jewelry, ties, loose clothing, and
— Select the “P” (Park) selector lever position. long hair can be caught in moving engine
— Allow the engine to cool. components. Before any work, always re-
move any jewelry and/or ties, tie back long
— Keep children away from the engine com-
hair, and make sure all clothing fits close
partment.
to the body to reduce the risk of anything
— Never spill fluids on a hot engine. These flu-
becoming caught in engine components.
ids (such as the freeze protection contained
— Pay attention to the following warnings list-
in the coolant) can catch fire.
ed when work on the fuel system or on the
— Avoid short circuits in the electrical system.
electrical equipment is required.
— Never reach into the radiator fan. The fan is
temperature-controlled and can turn on — Do not smoke.
)) Depending on the engine and country
230
— Never work near open flames. Opening and closing the hood
— Always have a working fire extinguisher
The hood is released from inside the vehicle.
nearby.
— All work on the battery or electrical system
in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi-
cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of
this, all work must be performed only by an
Service Facility.
— Limit your exposure to exhaust and chemi-
cals to as short a time as possible.
ZX WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning:
— Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, certain flu-
ids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other ig. 166 Unlocked hood: lever
reproductive harm.
— Battery posts, terminals and related acces- Make sure the wiper arms are not raised up from
sories contain lead and lead compounds, the windshield. Otherwise the paint could be
chemicals known to the State of California damaged.
to cause cancer and reproductive harms.
Wash hands after handling. Opening the hood
> With the door open, pull the lever 2 below
0) Note the instrument panel in the direction of the ar-
When filling fluids, be sure not to add any flu- row > fig. 165.
ids to the wrong reservoirs. Otherwise severe > Raise the hood slightly > page 230.
malfunctions and engine damage will occur. » Press the lever > fig. 166 in the direction of the
arrow. This releases the hooks.
@ For the sake of the environment > Open the hood.
You should regularly check the ground under Closing the hood
your vehicle in order to detect leaks quickly. If
> Push the hood down until you override the
there are visible spots from oil or other fluids,
force of the struts.
bring your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
> Let the hood fall lightly into the latch. Do not
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to be
press it in. > /\.
checked.
Messages
B Warning! Hood is not locked. Stop vehicle
8W7012721BB
and check the lock
2) The &> symbol is not available in all countries.
231
The hood latch is not locked correctly. Stop im- this, always check the hood after closing it
mediately and close the hood. to make sure it is latched correctly. The hood
is latched if the front corners cannot be lift-
ZA\ WARNING ay
— Never open the hood when there is steam or — If you notice that the hood is not latched
coolant escaping from the engine compart- while you are driving, stop immediately and
ment, because there is a risk that you could close it, because driving when the hood is
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is not latched increases the risk of an accident.
escaping.
— For safety reasons, the hood must always be
latched securely while driving. Because of
Fig. 167 Typical location of the reservoir and the engine oil filler opening (example)
Observe the safety precautions > page 230. Coolant expansion tank (L) > page 237
a Brake fluid reservoir (OC) > page 238
Washer fluid reservoir (>) > page 242
Jump start points: (+) under the cover The coolant expansion tank and the engine oil
= page 241, Charging the 12 Volt vehicle filling opening may be located in different places
battery > page 280, Preparation within the engine compartment, depending on
Engine oil filler opening (%57) > page 234 the engine version.
() Sticker* for engine oil specifications
=> page 233
232
Engine oil Add the amount of oil shown immediately

=> page 234.
If the engine oil level is too low
If you need to add engine oil, use an oil that is =) Please reduce oil level
listed on the sticker. The sticker is located at the There is too much oil in the engine and there is a
front of the engine compartment > page 232, risk of damaging the catalytic converter or en-
fig. 167. When using the engine oil listed on the gine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
sticker, you can adjust the oil level as often as thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
needed. engine oil extracted if necessary. Avoid high en-
If engine oil that meets the recommended speci- gine speeds, full acceleration, and heavy engine
fication is not available, in an emergency you loads.
may add a maximum of 1 quart (1 liter) of Bs Oil level sensor: oil change necessary. Please
ACEA C3 or API SN engine oil one time until the contact Service
next oil change.
Fuel has entered the engine oil. This will cause
For more information on the correct engine oil the engine oil level to rise slowly and the engine
for your vehicle, contact an authorized Audi deal- oil quality to decrease. Do not extract engine oil
er or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have the oil to reduce the level, because this will increase the
changed by an authorized Audi dealer or author- risk of engine damage. Drive to an authorized
ized Service Facility. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
mediately to have engine oil extracted.
G) Tips
& Oil level system: malfunction! Please con-
Audi recommends using engine oils provided
tact Service
by Audi Genuine Parts.
The sensor that checks the engine oil level has
malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an author-
Messages
Biturn off engine. Oil pressure too low ty to have the malfunction repaired.
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the 2 Oil pressure sensor: malfunction! Please
engine oil level > page 234. contact Service
— If the engine oil level is too low, add engine oil The sensor that checks the engine oil pressure
=> page 234. Only continue driving once the in- has malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an au-
dicator light turns off. thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
— If the engine oil level is correct and the indica- Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
tor light still turns on, turn the engine off and
i Please drive to warm up engine
do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as- Fuel has entered the engine oil, either due to low
sistance. outside temperatures or frequent short drives.
Drive until the engine is warm so that the fuel in
Applies to: vehicles with oil level warning
the engine oil will evaporate. Avoid high engine
2 Please add oil immediately.
speeds, full accelerating, and heavy engine loads
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the when doing this.
engine oil level > page 234 and add engine oil
immediately > page 234. (i) Tips
8W7012721BB
3 Add max. x qt (x J) oil. You can continue The oil pressure warning B is not an oil level
driving indicator. Always check the oil level regularly.
233
Checking the engine oil level — Under normal conditions, oil consumption
depends on the quality and viscosity of the
The engine oil level can be checked in the MMI.
oil, the engine RPM, the climate conditions,
Observe the safety precautions > page 230, Gen- and the road conditions. The dilution of oil
eral information. from condensation or fuel residue as well as
the age of the oil also play a role. Because
>» Park the vehicle on a level surface. engine wear increases with mileage, oil con-
> Shut the engine off when it is warm. sumption will increase again over time until
> Switch only the ignition back on. it may be necessary to replace worn compo-
> Wait approximately two minutes. nents.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- — Because all these variables play a role, it is
HICLE > Settings & Service > Oil level. not possible to define an oil consumption
> Read the oil level in the display. Add engine oil standard. Therefore, the oil level must be
if the bar in the oil level indicator is just below checked regularly.
“min” > page 234.
— If you believe that your engine has in-
creased its oil consumption, contact an au-
@) Note thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
If the engine oil level is too low or too high, Service Facility to determine the cause.
there is a risk of engine damage. Please note that an exact oil consumption
measurement must be done with the neces-
@) Tips sary care and accuracy and may take time.
The oil level indicator in the display is only an An authorized Audi dealer or authorized
informational display. If the oil level is too Audi Service Facility is trained in accurately
low, a minimum oil warning appears in the in- measuring the oil consumption.
strument cluster. Add oil and close the hood. — You can find information on engine oil and
The current oil level will be displayed on the engine oil capacities for the USA at www.
MMI the next time the ignition is switched on. audiusa.com/help/maintenance, or for Can-
ada at www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/
@) Tips customer-area/care-and-maintenance/
audi-service-schedules.html, or call
The engine oil consumption may be up to
800-822-2834.
0.5 quart/600 miles (0.5 liter/1,000 km), de-
pending on driving style and operating condi-
tions. In RS models, the oil consumption may Adding engine
be up to 0.8 qt/600 mi (0.8 L/1,000 km).
B8K-2120
Consumption may be higher during the first

3,000 miles (5,000 km). The engine oil level
must be checked regularly. It is best to check
each time you refuel your vehicle and before
long drives.
— Because of the lubrication and cooling of
the engine, combustion engines consume
oil. The oil consumption varies depending
on the engine and may change during the
Fig. 168 Engine compartment: engine oil filler opening
service life of the engine. Engines generally
cover
consume more oil at the beginning during
the break-in period. Then oil consumption Observe the safety precautions > page 230, Gen-
stabilizes after the break-in period. eral information.
234
> Turn the engine off.

(@) For the sake of the environment
> Open the hood > page 231.
> Unscrew the cap 7 for the engine oil filler — Oil should never enter the sewer system or
opening > fig. 168. come into contact with the ground.
> Carefully add 0.5 quart (0.5 liter) of the correct — Follow the legal regulations in the country
oil > page 233. where you are located when disposing of
>» Close the engine oil filler opening cap. empty oil containers.
> Close the hood > page 231.
» Restart the ignition after two minutes and read Changing engine oil
the current oil level in the MMI > page 234,
Audi recommends having the oil changed at an
Checking the engine oil level.
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv-
> Applies to: using engine oil that meets the rec-
ice Facility.
ommended specification: Add some more en-
gine oil again if necessary. Observe the safety precautions > page 230, Gen-
eral information.
Z\ WARNING The engine oil must be changed at the intervals
— When adding oil, do not let oil drip onto hot specified in the Warranty & Maintenance Book-
engine components. This increases the risk let. This is very important because the lubrication
of a fire. function of the oil gradually declines during regu-
— You must close the cap on the oil filler open- lar vehicle operation.
ing correctly so that oil does not leak out on-
to the hot engine and exhaust system when The engine oil should be changed more frequent-
the engine is running, because this is a fire ly under certain circumstances. Have the oil
hazard. changed more frequently if you often drive short
distances, your vehicle is predominantly in stop-
— Always clean skin thoroughly if it comes into
and-go traffic situations, is in very dusty environ-
contact with engine oil.
ments, or is operated for long periods of time in
— Engine oil is poisonous and must be kept out
temperatures below zero.
of reach of children.
— Store the engine oil securely in the original Cleansing additives in the oil make fresh oil ap-
container. pear darker after the engine has run briefly. This
is normal and no reason to change the engine oil
@) Note more frequently than recommended.
— The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not Because correctly disposing of engine oil is diffi-
cover damage or malfunctions if the recom- cult and special tools and technical knowledge
mended intended use of the vehicle and are needed for an oil change, Audi recommends
maintenance measures listed in the Audi having your engine oil changed by an authorized
Owner's Manual and the Warranty & Main- Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
tenance Booklet were not followed.
If you change the engine oil yourself, please note
— Only use high-grade engine oil that explicit-
the following important information:
ly meets the Audi oil quality standard for
your vehicle. Using another oil may cause
severe vehicle damage.
Z\ WARNING
— Do not mix any additives with the engine oil. If you change the engine oil on the vehicle
Additives may cause engine damage that is yourself, the following precautions must be
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited followed:
8W7012721BB
Warranty. — Wear protective eyewear.

— Due to the risk of scalding, allow the engine
to cool down sufficiently. >
235
— Maintain enough distance when you are re- The coolant level is too low.
moving the oil drain plug. While doing this, Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the
keep your forearm parallel to the ground to coolant level > page 237.
reduce the risk of hot oil dripping down your
arm.
— If the coolant level is too low, add coolant
— Drain the oil into a container designed for => page 237. Only continue driving once the in-
this purpose that is large enough to hold the dicator light turns off.
full amount of oil in your engine. |_| Coolant temperature: too high. Please let
— Engine oil is poisonous. Always store out of engine run while vehicle is stationary
reach of children.
Let the engine run at idle for a few minutes to
— Prolonged contact of used engine oil with
cool off, until the indicator light turns off.
the skin may cause skin damage. Always
wash oil off immediately with soap and wa- — If the indicator light does not turn off, do not
ter to protect your skin. continue driving the vehicle. See an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
@) Note for assistance.
Do not mix any additives with the engine oil. || Coolant system: malfunction! Please turn
Additives may cause engine damage that is off engine
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-
Do not continue driving, shut the engine off, and
ranty.
switch the ignition off.
@ For the sake of the environment — See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
— Before changing the engine oil, make sure Audi Service Facility for assistance.
you can dispose of the used engine oil cor-
Coolant additive
rectly.
— Engine oil must always be disposed of cor- The coolant additive is made of anti-freezing and
rectly. Do not dump it in the yard, in the for- corrosion protection agents. Only add the follow-
est, or in open water, river channels, or sew- ing coolant additives mixed with distilled water.
ers.
Coolant additive Specification
— Have your used engine oil recycled by bring-
Gl12evo TL774L
ing it to a used oil collection site or contact
a gas station. The amount of coolant additive that needs to be
mixed with water depends on the climate where
Cooling system the vehicle will be operated. If the coolant addi-
tive percentage is too low, the coolant can freeze
and damage the engine.
The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture Coolant Freeze protec-
of purified water and coolant additive at the fac- additive tion
tory. This coolant must not be not changed.
Warm min. 40% min. -13 °F
The coolant level is monitored using the g indi- regions max. 45% (25°)
cator light. However, occasionally checking the Cold min. 50% max. -40 °F
coolant level is recommended. regions max. 55% (-40 °C)
Messages
@) Note
& Turn off engine and check coolant level. See
— Before the start of winter, have an author-
owner's manual
236
Facility check if the coolant additive in your The coolant expansion tank for some engines is
vehicle matches the percentage appropriate located in the water drip tray under a cover. If
for the climate. This is especially important necessary, remove the cover that is located under
when driving in colder climates. the windshield wiper on the front passenger's
— If the G12evo coolant additive is not availa- side.
ble in an emergency, do not add any other > Check the coolant level in the coolant expan-
additive. You could damage the engine. If sion tank > page 232, fig. 167 using the outer
this happens, only use distilled water and markings (2) > fig. 169. The coolant level must
restore the correct mixture ratio with the be between the markings (2) when the engine is
specified coolant additive as soon as possi- cold. When the engine is warm it can be slight-
ble. ly above the upper marking.
— Only refill with new coolant. > Applies to: vehicles with 6-cylinder engine:
— Radiator sealant must not be mixed with There is a float located in the coolant expansion
the coolant. tank. Read the coolant level using the coolant
— You can continue driving if the permitted level float. When the engine is cold, the float
G12evo coolant additive was not added. must be located between the MIN marking and
However, go to an authorized Audi dealer or the edge of the filler opening on the coolant ex-
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately pansion tank.
to have the coolant replaced to reduce the > When you add coolant to the expansion tank,
risk of engine damage. please refer to > page 236, Cooling system.
— Due to the risk of engine damage, the cool-
Adding coolant
ing system should only be refilled by an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Requirement: there must be a residual amount of
Service Facility. An authorized Audi dealer or coolant in the expansion tank >@).
authorized Audi Service Facility can also pro- If you must add coolant, use a mixture of water
vide you with important information about and coolant additive. Audi recommends mixing
the recommended coolant additive. the coolant additive with distilled water.
> Allow the engine to cool.

Checking coolant
> Place a large, thick towel on the coolant expan-
sion tank cap.
RAZ-0540,
> Push the release button @) > fig. 169 on the

cap and carefully turn it to the left until you
feel resistance > /\.
> Push the release button again and remove the
cap completely.
» Add coolant in the correct mixture ratio
=> page 236 up to the MAX marking. Or, in
MIN
vehicles with a 6-cylinder gasoline engine, the
Fig. 169 Engine compartment - Coolant expansion tank:
float must be located between the MIN mark-
@ cover with release button; @) markings ing and the edge of the filler opening on the
coolant expansion tank.
Observe the safety precautions > page 230, Gen- > Make sure that the fluid level remains stable.
eral information. Add more coolant if necessary.
> Vehicles with 6-cylinder engine: if necessary,
Checking the coolant level
press the float into the coolant expansion tank
8W7012721BB
> Park the vehicle on a level surface. using the cover.

> Switch the ignition off. > Turn the cap to the right to tighten it until you
> Open the hood > page 231. feel resistance a second time.
237
Coolant loss usually indicates that there is a leak. Brake fluid

Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized
BFV-0229]
and have the cooling system inspected. If the
cooling system is not leaking, coolant loss can re-
sult from the coolant boiling due overheating
and then being forced out of the cooling system.
ZA WARNING
— The engine compartment in any vehicle is a
potentially dangerous area. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off, and allow the engine Fig. 170 Engine compartment: cap on brake fluid reservoir
to cool before working in the engine com-

partment. Always follow the information Observe the safety precautions > page 230, Gen-
found in > page 230, General information. eral information.
— Never open the hood if you can see or hear Checking the brake fluid level
steam or coolant escaping from the engine
The brake fluid reservoir is located under a cover
compartment. This increases the risk of
on the driver’s side.
burns. The cooling system is under pressure.
When you no longer see or hear steam or > Lift the cover > page 232, fig. 167 at both
coolant escaping, you may open the engine openings and remove it.
compartment with caution. >» Read the brake fluid level on the brake fluid res-
— When working in the engine compartment, ervoir > page 232, fig. 167. The brake fluid lev-
remember that the radiator fan can switch el must be between the MIN and MAX markings
on even if the ignition is switched off, which oA.
increases the risk of injury.
The brake fluid level is monitored automatically.
— Coolant additive and coolant can be danger-
ous to your health. For this reason, store the Messages
coolant in the original container and away
EG i @ Brakes: stop vehicle and check brake
from children. There is a risk of poisoning.
fluid level
@) Note Stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid level.
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Do not continue driving if the coolant expan-
Service Facility for assistance.
sion tank is empty. Do not add any coolant,
because air could enter the cooling system Changing the brake fluid
and damage the engine. See an authorized
Brake fluid should be changed at regular inter-
vals. Have the brake fluid changed by an author-
for assistance.
ty. The authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility will inform you of the replace-
ment intervals.
ZA WARNING
— If the brake fluid level is below the MIN
marking, it can impair the braking effect and
driving safety, which increase the risk of an
238
accident. Do not continue driving. See an au- Switch off all electrical equipment that is not
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi needed. If necessary, some equipment will be
Service Facility for assistance. switched off automatically. Vehicle functions or
— If the brake fluid is old, bubbles may form in driving stability may be limited. Drive to an au-
the brake system during heavy braking. This thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
could impair braking performance and driv- Facility immediately.
ing safety, which increases the risk of an ac- = Electrical system: low battery charge. Bat-
cident. tery will be charged while driving
— The brake fluid in your vehicle must meet
the standard VW 501 14 and is available at The starting ability may be impaired.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized If this message turns off after a little while, the
Audi Service Facility. If this brake fluid is not vehicle battery has charged enough while driving.
available, another high-grade brake fluid of
If this message does not turn off, drive immedi-
equivalent quality may be used, and it must
ately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
meet the U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Stand-
Audi Service Facility.
ard (FMVSS) 116 DOT 4, Class 6.
@) Note
Z\ WARNING
When there is an electrical system malfunc-
— If the brake fluid level is above the MAX
tion, vehicle functions may not work and driv-
marking, brake fluid may leak out over the
ing stability may be limited, which increases
edge of the reservoir and result in damage
the risk of an accident. Do not continue driv-
to the vehicle.
ing and switch the ignition off. See an author-
— Do not allow any brake fluid to come into
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
contact with the vehicle paint, because it
cility for assistance.
will corrode the paint.
Battery
Electrical system
lala Memecd)
If the = f B or = indicator light turns on,
there is a malfunction in the power supply, the Because of the complex power supply, all work on
battery, or the vehicle electrical system. batteries such as disconnecting, replacing, etc.,
should only be performed by an authorized Audi
= f B Electrical system: malfunction! Safely
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility > A\.
stop vehicle
Multiple batteries with different technologies
Do not continue driving and switch the ignition
may be installed in your vehicle:
off > A\. See an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility for assistance. — Vehicle battery (for example, for starting the
engine, basic power supply) > page 240, 12
= Electrical system: malfunction! Restart not
Volt vehicle battery or > page 241, Other bat-
possible. Please contact Service
tery types
If you switch the ignition off, you will not be able — Auxiliary battery (for example, for recuperation
to restart the vehicle. Vehicle functions or driving or optional equipment) > page 241, Other bat-
stability may be limited. Drive to an authorized tery types
mediately. Not running the vehicle for long periods of
time
8W7012721BB
= Electrical system: malfunction! Please con-

The battery will gradually drain if the vehicle
tact Service
does not run for long periods of time. To ensure >
239
that the vehicle can still be started, the electrical so that it will not be destroyed by “freezing”
equipment will be limited or switched off. Some = page 241, Charging the 12 Volt vehicle
convenience functions, such as interior lighting battery.
or power seat adjustment, may not be available — There are electrical components under the
under certain circumstances. The convenience cargo floor behind a trim panel that warm
functions will be available again when you start up during operation. To reduce the risk of
the engine. the components overheating, do not store
objects such as blankets under the cargo
Even when electrical equipment is switched off,
floor. If the components overheat, they will
the equipment can still drain the battery if the
switch off temporarily. This will be indicated
vehicle is not driven for Long periods of time.
by a message that will be displayed in the
Deep draining results in a chemical reaction that
instrument cluster until the temperature re-
destroys the inside of the battery. The battery
turns to normal.
must be charged every month to prevent this
= page 241. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility for more infor- 12 Volt vehicle battery
mation.
Explanation of warnings:
Winter operation
Always wear eye protection.
Cold weather places an especially high load on
the 12 Volt vehicle battery. Have the battery Battery acid is highly corrosive. Always
checked by an authorized Audi dealer or author- wear protective gloves and eye protection.
ized Audi Service Facility before cold weather be-
® Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
gins.
forbidden.
ZX WARNING A highly explosive mixture of gases can

form when charging batteries.
— All work on the battery or electrical system
in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi- Always keep children away from battery
cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of acid and the battery.
this, all work must be performed only by an @/ | Always follow the instructions in the oper-
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi (Q | ating manual.
Service Facility.
— Never connect a charging cable or jump @) For the sake of the environment
start cable directly to the 12 Volt vehicle % Lead-acid batteries must be disposed of
battery. Only use the connections in the en- using methods that will not harm the environ-
gine compartment > page 241. ment. Do not dispose of them in household
trash. They contain harmful substances, such
Z\ WARNING as sulfuric acid and lead, and also recyclable
California Proposition 65 Warning: raw materials. Contact an authorized Audi
— Battery posts, terminals and related acces- dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for
sories contain lead and lead compounds, more information.
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harms.
Wash hands after handling.
@) Note
— If the vehicle will be parked for long periods
of time, protect the battery against the cold
240
Other battery types ing the 12 Volt vehicle battery
Explanation of warnings:
Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
& forbidden.
Always keep children away from battery
@) acid and the battery.
@/ | Always follow the instructions in the oper-
fQ | ating manual.
Z\ WARNING Fig. 171 Engine compartment: connectors for a charger or

jump start cables
All work on the batteries must only be per-
formed by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility.
eral information, > /\ in Battery general infor-
— Gases that escape from these different bat-
mation on page 240 and > /A\.
tery types can be poisonous or flammable.
— The contents of these battery types can be Requirement: only use chargers with a maximum
corrosive. If any battery contents come into charging current of 14.8 volts. The battery ca-
contact with the skin, flush the affected bles remain connected.
area for at least 15 minutes with clean wa- The charging cable connections are located in the
ter. Then wash the affected area with soap. motor compartment. The ground point ©) is al-
Have the affected area examined by a medi- ways located on the vehicle body.
cal professional.
>» Switch off the ignition and all electrical equip-
@) Note ment.
> Open the hood > page 231.
Components must not be connected to the
> Press the release lever on the positive terminal
battery terminals and wires on these battery
and fold the cover upward > fig. 171.
types because this increases the risk of dam-
> Clamp the charger terminal clamps to the jump
age, for example due to overvoltage.
start pins according to the instructions. (Hex
head bolt under a cover (), ground point on the
vehicle body ©).
“5 J These types of batteries must be dis- > Insert the power cable for the charging device
posed of using methods that will not harm into the socket and switch the device on.
the environment. Do not dispose of them in >» At the end of the charging process, switch the
household trash. They contain harmful sub- charger off and pull the power cable out of the
stances and recyclable raw materials. Contact socket.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi > Remove the charging device terminal clamps.
Service Facility for more information. > Close the cover on the positive terminal.
> Close the hood = page 231.
ZA WARNING
— Never connect a charging cable or jump
start cable directly to the 12 Volt vehicle
battery. Only use the connections in the en-
8W7012721BB
gine compartment > page 241. >
241
—A highly explosive mixture of gases can form Messages

when charging batteries. Only charge the gs Please add washer fluid
battery in well-ventilated areas.
Fill the washer fluid for the windshield washer
— A drained battery can freeze at tempera-
system and the headlight washer system* when
tures around 32 °F (0 °C). Do not charge or
the ignition is switched off.
use a frozen or thawed battery. If ice forms,
the battery housing can crack and battery
C) Note
electrolyte can leak out, which increases the
risk of an explosion and chemical burns. — The concentration of anti-freezing agent
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author- must be adjusted to the vehicle operating
ized Audi Service Facility for more informa- conditions and the climate. A concentration
tion. that is too high can lead to vehicle damage.
— Do not connect or disconnect the charging — Never add radiator anti-freeze or other addi-
cable while charging because this increases tives to the washer fluid.
the risk of an explosion. — Do not use a glass cleaner that contains
paint solvents, because this could damage
G) Tips the paint.
Read all of the manufacturer's instructions

for the charger before charging the battery. Service interval display
The service interval display detects when your ve-
Windshield washer hicle is due for service.
system The service interval display works in two stages:
— Inspection or oil change reminder: after driv-

B8W-0125
ing a certain distance, a message appears in the

instrument cluster display each time the igni-
tion is switched on or off. The remaining dis-
tance or time is displayed briefly.
— Inspection or oil change due: if your vehicle
has reached an inspection or oil change interval
or both intervals at the same time, the mes-
sage Inspection due! or Oil change due! or Oil
Fig. 172 Engine compartment: washer fluid reservoir cap change and inspection due! appears briefly af-
ter switching the ignition on or off.
eral information. Checking service intervals
The windshield washer reservoir © contains the You can check the remaining distance or time un-
cleaning solution for the windshield/rear win- til the next oil change or next inspection in the
dow* and the headlight washer system* Infotainment system.
> fig. 172, > page 232. The reservoir capacity Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
can be found in > page 300. HICLE > Settings & Service > Service intervals.
To reduce the risk of lime scale deposits on the
Resetting the indicator
spray nozzles, use clean water with low amounts
of calcium. Always add window cleaner to the wa- An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
ter. When the outside temperatures are cold, an Service Facility will reset the service interval dis-
anti-freezing agent should be added to the water play after performing service.
so that it does not freeze.
242
If you have changed the oil yourself, you must re-

set the oil change interval.
Applies to: MMI: To reset the display, select on

the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service
> Service intervals.
@) Note
— Only reset the oil change indicator if the oil
was changed.
— Following the service intervals is critical to
maintaining the service life and value of
your vehicle, especially the engine. Even if
the mileage on the vehicle is low, do not ex-
ceed the time for the next service.
8W7012721BB
243
Wheels
Wheels —Always adapt your driving to

Wheels and Tires the road and traffic condi-
General information tions. Drive carefully and re-
duce your speed on icy or slip-
> Check your tires regularly for pery roads. Even winter tires
damage, such as punctures,
can lose traction on black ice.
cuts, cracks, and bulges. Remove
foreign objects from the tire () Note
tread.
—Please note that summer and
>If driving over curbs or similar winter tires are designed for
obstacles, drive slowly and ap-
the conditions that are typical
proach the curb at an angle. in those seasons. Audi recom-
> Have faulty tires or rims re- mends winter tires during the
placed immediately. winter months. Low tempera-
>Protect your tires from oil,
tures significantly decrease
grease, and fuel.
the elasticity of summer tires,
>Mark tires before removing which affects traction and
them so that the same running
braking ability. If summer
direction can be maintained if
tires are used in very cold tem-
they are reinstalled. peratures, cracks can form on
>Lay tires flat when storing and the tread bars, resulting in
store them ina cool, dry location
permanent tire damage that
with as little exposure to light as can cause loud driving noise
possible.
and unbalanced tires.
—Burnished, polished or
J WARNING
chromed rims must not be
—Never drive faster than the used in winter driving condi-
maximum permitted speed for tions. The surface of the rims
your tires. This could cause the does not have sufficient corro-
tires to heat up too much. This sion protection for this and
increases the risk of an acci- could be permanently dam-
dent because it can cause the aged by road salt or similar
tire to burst. substances.
244
Wheels
Tire designations @ Tire construction

“R” indicates a radial tire.
B8K-2316
©) Rim diameter
Size of the rim diameter in inches.
© Load index and speed rating

The load index indicates the tire's
load-carrying capacity.
The speed rating indicates the
maximum permitted speed. Also
see > A in General information on
page 244.
“EXTRA LOAD”, “xl” or “RF” indi-

cates that the tire is reinforced or
Fig. 173 Tire designations on the side-
wall is an Extra Load tire.
Speed rat- /Maximum permitted speed
@ Tires for passenger vehicles ing
(if applicable) P up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
Q up to 99 mph (160 km/h)
“P” indicates a tire for a passen-
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
ger vehicle. “T” indicates a tire
S up to 110 mph (180 km/h)
designated for temporary use. T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
U up to 124 mph (200 km/h)
@ Nominal width
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Nominal width of the tire be- Vv up to 149 mph (240 km/h)?
tween the sidewalls in millime- Zz above 149 mph (240 km/h)?)
w up to 168 mph (270 km/h)?
ters. In general: the larger the
y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)?
number, the wider the tire.
a) For tires above 149 mph (240 km/h),
@) Aspect ratio tire manufacturers sometimes use the
code “ZR”.
Height/width ratio expressed as a
percentage.
8W7012721BB
245
Wheels
@ US DOT number (TIN) and must also specify the materials

manufacture date used in the tire. These include
The manufacture date is listed on steel, nylon, polyester and other
the tire sidewall (it may only ap- materials.
pear on the inner side of the tire): @) Maximum permitted load
DOT... 2220... This number indicates the maxi-
means, for example, that the tire mum load in kilograms and
was produced in the 22nd week of pounds that the tire can carry.
the year 2020. @ Uniform tire quality grade
@) Audi Original Tires standards for treadwear,
traction and temperature
Audi Original equipment tires
resistance
with the designation “AO” have
Treadwear, traction, and tempera-
been specially matched to your
ture ranges > page 261.
Audi. When used correctly, these
tires meet the highest standards @ Running direction
for safety and handling. An au- The arrows indicate the running
thorized Audi dealer or author- direction of unidirectional tires.
ized Audi Service Facility will be You must always follow the speci-
able to provide you with more in- fied running direction
formation. > page 279.
@) Mud and snow capability Maximum permitted
“M/S” or “M+S” indicates the tire inflation pressure
is suitable for driving on mud and This number indicates the maxi-
snow. /\ indicates a winter tire. mum pressure to which a tire can
Composition of the tire cord be inflated under normal operat-
and materials ing conditions.
The number of plies indicates the

number of rubberized fabric lay-
ers in the tire. In general: the
more layers, the more weight a
tire can carry. Tire manufacturers
246
Wheels
Glossary of tire and loading Cord

terminology means the strands forming the
Accessory weight plies in the tire.
means the combined weight (in Cold tire inflation pressure
excess of those standard items means the tire pressure recom-
which may be replaced) of auto- mended by the vehicle manufac-
matic transmission, power steer- turer for a tire of a designated
ing, power brakes, power win- size that has not been driven for
dows, power seats, radio, and more than a couple of miles (kilo-
heater, to the extent that these meters) at low speeds in the three
items are available as factory-in- hour period before the tire pres-
stalled equipment (whether in- sure is measured or adjusted.
stalled or not).
Curb weight
Aspect ratio
means the weight of a motor ve-
means the ratio of the height to hicle with standard equipment in-
the width of the tire in percent. cluding the maximum capacity of
Numbers of 55 or lower indicate a fuel, oil, and coolant, air condi-
low sidewall for improved steer- tioning and additional weight of
ing response and better overall optional equipment.
handling on dry pavement.
Extra load tire
Bead
means a tire designed to operate
means the part of the tire that is at higher loads and at higher in-
made of steel wires, wrapped or flation pressures than the corre-
reinforced by ply cords and that is sponding standard tire. Extra load
shaped to fit the rim. tires may be identified as “XL”,
Bead separation “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF” on
the sidewall.
means a breakdown of the bond
between components in the bead.
8W7012721BB
247
Wheels
Gross Axle Weight Rating Maximum (permissible)

inflation pressure
(“GAWR’”)
means the load-carrying capacity means the maximum cold infla-

of a single axle system, measured tion pressure to which a tire may
at the tire-ground interfaces. be inflated. Also called “maxi-
mum inflation pressure.”
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(“GVWR”)
Normal occupant weight
means the maximum total loaded means 150 lbs. (68 kilograms)
weight of the vehicle. times the number of occupants
Groove seated in the vehicle up to the to-
tal seating capacity of your vehi-
means the space between two ad-
cle.
jacent tread ribs.
Occupant distribution
Load rating (code)
means distribution of occupants
means the maximum load that a
in a vehicle.
tire is rated to carry for a given in-
flation pressure. You may not find Outer diameter
this information on all tires be- means the overall diameter of an
cause it is not required by law. inflated new tire.
Maximum load rating Overall width
means the load rating for a tire at means the linear distance be-
the maximum permissible infla- tween the exteriors of the side-
tion pressure for that tire. walls of an inflated tire, including
Maximum loaded vehicle elevations due to labeling, deco-
weight rations, or protective bands or
ribs.
means the sum of:
Ply
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight means a layer of rubber-coated
(c) Vehicle capacity weight, and parallel cords.
(d) Production options weight
248
Wheels
Production options weight Rim

means the combined weight of means a metal support for a tire
those installed regular production or a tire and tube assembly upon
options weighing over 5 lbs. which the tire beads are seated.
(2.3 kg) in excess of those stand-
Rim diameter
ard items which they replace, not
means nominal diameter of the
previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, in-
bead seat. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to pur-
cluding heavy duty brakes, ride
chase new tires to match the new
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
rim diameter.
battery, and special trim.
Radial ply tire Rim size designation

means rim diameter and width.
means a pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the Rim width
beads are laid at substantially means nominal distance between
90 degrees to the centerline of rim flanges.
the tread.
Sidewall
Recommended inflation
means that portion of a tire be-
pressure
tween the tread and bead.
see > page 247, Cold tire infla-
tion pressure. Speed rating (letter code)
means the speed at which a tire is
Reinforced tire
designed to be driven for extend-
means a tire designed to operate
ed periods of time. The ratings
at higher loads and at higher in-
range from 93 mph (150 km/h)
flation pressures than the corre-
to 186 mph (298 km/h) > table
sponding standard tire. Rein-
on page 245. You may not find
forced tires may be identified as
this information on all tires be-
“XL”, “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF”
cause it is not required by law.
on the sidewall.
The speed rating letter code,
8W7012721BB
where applicable, is molded on

the tire sidewall and indicates the >
249
Wheels
maximum permissible road parisons among tires. The UTQG is

speeds. See also > A in General not a safety rating and not a guar-
information on page 244. antee that a tire will last for a
prescribed number of miles (kilo-
Tire pressure monitoring
system meters) or perform ina certain
way. It simply gives tire buyers
means a system that detects
additional information to com-
when one or more of a vehicle's
bine with other considerations,
tires are underinflated and illumi-
such as price, brand loyalty and
nates a low tire pressure warning
dealer recommendations. Under
telltale.
UTQG, tires are graded by the tire
Tread manufacturers in three areas:
means that portion of a tire that treadwear, traction, and tempera-
comes into contact with the road. ture resistance. The UTQG infor-
mation on the tires, molded into
Tread separation
the sidewalls.
means pulling away of the tread
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
from the tire carcass.
Number (TIN)
Treadwear indicators (TWI) This is the tire’s “serial number”.
means the projections within the It begins with the letters “DOT”
principal grooves designed to give and indicates that the tire meets
a visual indication of the degrees all federal standards. The next
of wear of the tread. See two numbers or letters indicate
=> page 253, Treadwear indicator the plant where it was manufac-
for more information on measur- tured, and the last four numbers
ing tire wear. represent the week and year of
manufacture. For example,
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
is a tire information system devel- DOT... 2220...
oped by the United States Nation- means that the tire was produced
al Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- in the 22nd week of 2020. The
tration (NHTSA) that is designed other numbers are marketing co-
to help buyers make relative com- des that may or may not beused >
250
Wheels
by the tire manufacturer. This in- number of seating positions. Re-

formation is used to contact con- fer to the table > table on
sumers if a tire defect requires a page 256 for the number of peo-
recall. ple that correspond to the vehicle
normal load.
Vehicle capacity weight
means the rated cargo and lug- New tires or wheels
gage load plus 150 lbs. (68 kilo-
Audi recommends having all work
grams) times the vehicle's desig-
on tires or wheels performed by
nated seating capacity.
an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Vehicle maximum load on the thorized Audi Service Facility.
tire These facilities have the proper
means that load on an individual knowledge and are equipped with
tire that is determined by distrib- the required tools and replace-
uting to each axle its share of the ment parts.
maximum loaded vehicle weight
>New tires do not yet have the
and dividing by two.
optimal gripping properties.
Vehicle normal load on the tire Drive carefully and at moderate
means that load on an individual speeds for the first 350 miles
tire that is determined by distrib- (500 km) with new tires.
uting to each axle its share of the > Only use tires with the same de-
curb weight, accessory weight, sign, size (rolling circumfer-
and normal occupant weight (dis- ence), and as close to the same
tributed in accordance with > ta- tread pattern as possible on all
ble on page 256) and dividing by four wheels.
two. > Applies to: RS models: Only use
tires with the same design, size
Occupant loading and distri- (rolling circumference), and the
bution for vehicle normal load
same tread pattern on all four
for various designated seating
capacities wheels.
>Do not replace tires individually.
Refer to the tire inflation pressure
8W7012721BB
At least replace both tires on the

label > page 254, fig. 176 for the
same axle at the same time. >
251
Wheels
> Audi recommends using Audi

Genuine Tires. If you would like
Z\ WARNING
—Do not use steel rims that are
to use different tires, please
17 inches or larger. Otherwise,
note that the tires may perform
damage to the vehicle and an
differently even if they are the
accident could result.
same size > A.
—Only use tire/rim combina-
>If you would like to equip your
tions and suitable wheel bolts
vehicle with a tire and rim com-
that have been approved by
bination that is different from
Audi. Otherwise, damage to
what was installed at the facto-
the vehicle and an accident
ry, consult with an authorized
could result.
Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility before making a —For technical reasons, it is not
purchase > A. possible to use tires from oth-

er vehicles. In some cases, you
Because the spare tire® is differ- cannot even use tires from the
ent from the regular tires instal- same vehicle model.
led on the vehicle (such as winter —Make sure that the tires you
tires or wide tires), only use the select have enough clearance
spare tire* temporarily in case of to the vehicle. Replacement
emergency and drive carefully tires should not be chosen
while it is in use. It should be re- simply based on the nominal
placed with a regular tire as soon size, because tires with a dif-
as possible. ferent construction can differ
All four wheels must be equipped greatly even if they are the
with tires that are the same brand same size. If there is not
and have the same construction enough clearance, the tires or
and tread pattern so that the the vehicle can be damaged
drive system is not damaged by and this can reduce driving
different tire speeds. For this rea- safety and increase the risk of
son, in case of emergency, only an accident.
use a Spare tire* that is the same —Only use tires that are more
circumference as the regular tires. than six years old when
252
Wheels
absolutely necessary and drive —Driving quickly through curves,

carefully when doing so. rapid acceleration, and heavy
—Do not use run-flat tires on braking increase tire wear.
your vehicle. Using them when —Have an authorized Audi dealer
not permitted can lead to ve- or authorized Audi Service Facili-
hicle damage or accidents. ty check the wheel alignment if
—If you install wheel covers on there is unusual wear.
the vehicle, make sure they al- —Have the wheels rebalanced if an
low enough air circulation to imbalance is causing noticeable
cool the brake system. If they vibration in the steering wheel.
do not, this could increase the If you do not, the tires and other
risk of an accident. vehicle components could wear
more quickly.
Tire wear and damage Treadwear indicator
rr)
+
x
xz
Original equipment tires contain
+
a
treadwear indicators in the tread
pattern, which are bars that are
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) high and are
spaced evenly around the tire per-
pendicular to the running direc-
Fig. 174 Tire profile: treadwear indication > fig. 174. The letters “TWI”
tor or triangles on the tire sidewall
indicate the location of the tread-
Tire wear
wear indicators.
Check the tires regularly for wear.
The tires have reached the mini-
—Inflation pressure that is too low
mum tread depth !) when they
or high can increase tire wear
have worn down to the treadwear
considerably.
indicators. Replace the tires with
new ones > A.
8W7012721BB
D Obey any applicable regulations in the

country where the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
253
Wheels
Tire rotation This can increase the risk of an

Rotating the tires regularly is rec- accident because it has a nega-
ommended to ensure the tires tive effect on handling, driving
wear evenly. To rotate the tires, through curves, and braking,
install the tires from the rear axle and because it increases the
on the front axle and vice versa. risk of hydroplaning when driv-
This will allow the tires to have ing through deep puddles.
approximately the same length of
service life. Tire pressure
For unidirectional tires, make sure
B4H-0664
the tires are installed according to
the running direction indicated on
the tire sidewall > page 279.
Hidden damage
Damage to tires and rims can of-
ten occur in locations that are hid-
den. Unusual vibrations in the ve-
B8K-1151
hicle or pulling to one side may
indicate that there is tire damage.
Reduce your speed immediately. TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE
PNEU _| DIMENSIONS | _ PRESSION DES PNEUS A FROID
Check the tires for damage. If no FRONT
svanT | a KPA, BM PSI
REAR
damage is visible from the out- AnricRe |
‘SPARE
ve secours |
KPA, MM PSI
a KPA, Ml PSI
side, drive slowly and carefully to

the nearest authorized Audi deal- Fig. 176 Tire pressure label
er or authorized Audi Service Fa-
The correct tire pressure for tires
cility to have the vehicle inspect-
installed at the factory is listed on
ed.
a label. The label is located on the
B-pillar (driver's side) > fig. 175,
Z\ WARNING
> fig. 176. The location may vary
Tread that has worn too low or
depending on the model.
uneven tread depths on the
tires can reduce driving safety.
254
Wheels
Use the tire pressure specified for —Overloading can lead to loss of
a normal vehicle load when the vehicle control and increase
vehicle is partially loaded > table the risk of an accident. Read
on page 256. If driving the vehi- and follow the important safe-
cle when fully loaded, you must ty precautions in > page 257.
increase the tire pressure to the —The tire must flex more if the
maximum specified pressure > A. tire pressure is too low or if
Checking and correcting tire the vehicle speed or load are
pressure too high. This heats the tire up
too much. This increases the
> Check the tire pressure at least
risk of an accident because it
once per month and also check it
can cause the tire to burst and
before every long drive.
result in loss of vehicle con-
> Always check the tire pressure
trol.
when the tires are cold. Do not
—Incorrect tire pressure increas-
reduce the pressure if it increas-
es when the tires are warm. es tire wear and has a negative
>Refer to the sticker > fig. 176 effect on driving and braking
behavior, which increases the
for the correct tire pressure.
risk of an accident.
>Correct the tire pressure if nec-
essary.
@) Note
>Store the new tire pressure
> page 263 or » page 265. Replace lost valve caps to re-
> Check the pressure in the spare duce the risk of damage to the
tire (compact spare tire)*. Al- tire valves.
ways maintain the maximum
© For the sake of the envi-
temperature that is specified for ronment
the tire.
Tire pressure that is too low in-
creases fuel consumption.
/\ WARNING
Always adapt the tire pressure
to your driving style and the ve-
8W7012721BB
hicle load.
255
Wheels
Ncw dee em -])

Please note that the information Make sure that the tire designa-
contained in the following table tion on your tire matches the des-
was correct at the time of print- ignation on the tire pressure label
ing, and the information is sub- and the tire pressure table.
ject to change. If there are any The following table lists recom-
differences, you should always mended tire pressures in cold
follow the tire pressure sticker tires according to the load and
=> page 254, fig. 175.
the size of the tires installed.
Model/ Tire designation Tire pressure
Engine Normal load Maximum load
(up to 2/3* people)»
Front Rear Front Rear
PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA

AS5 Coupe: 225/50 R17 94Y 32. | 220 | 29 | 200 | 35 | 240 | 35 | 240
2.0L 245/40 R18 93Y 32 | 220 | 29 | 200 | 35 | 240 | 35 | 240
4-cylinder 255/35 R19 96Y 32 | 220 | 32 | 220) 35 | 240 | 35 | 240
245/40 R18 97H 35 | 240 | 35 | 240 | 38 | 260 | 38 | 260
265/30 R20 94Y 33. | 230 | 33 | 230 | 36 | 250 | 36 | 250
S5 Coupe: 245/40 R18 97H 35 | 240 | 32 | 220 | 39 | 270 | 39 | 270
3.0L 245/40 R18 97Y 36 | 250 | 33 | 230) 41 | 280 | 41 | 280
G-cytinder 255/35 R19 96Y 38 | 260 | 35 | 240 | 42 | 290 | 42 | 290
265/30 R20 94Y 41 | 280 | 38 | 260 | 44 | 300 | 44 | 300
RS 5 Coupe: 265/35 R19 98Y 35/ | 240/ | 32/ | 220/ | 38/ | 260/| 38/ | 260/
2.9L 385) | 2605) | 355) | 240») | 415) | 2805) | 415) | 280)
6-cylinder 275/30 R20 97Y 36/ | 250/ | 33/ | 230/ | 39/ | 270/| 39/ | 270/
395) | 2705) | 355) | 2405) | 425) | 2904)| 425) | 2905)
A5 Cabriolet: [225/50 R17 94Y 32 | 220 | 29 | 200 | 35 | 240 | 38 | 260
2.0L 245/40 R18 93Y 32 | 220 | 29 | 200 | 35 | 240 | 38 | 260
cylinder 255/35 R19 96Y 35 | 240 | 32 | 220) 35 | 240 | 38 | 260
225/50 R17 94H 35 | 240 | 32 | 220 | 38 | 260| 41 | 280
245/40 R18 97H 35 | 240 | 32 | 220 | 38 | 260| 41 | 280
265/30 R20 94Y 35 | 240 | 32 | 220 | 38 | 260| 41 | 280
S5 Cabriolet: / 245/40 R18 97Y 38 | 260 | 35 | 240 | 41 | 280 | 41 | 280
3.0L 245/40 R18 97H 38 | 260 | 35 | 240 | 41 | 280) 41 | 280
6-cylinder 255/35 R19 96Y 39 | 270 | 36 | 250 | 42 | 290 42 | 290
265/30 R20 94Y 42 | 290 | 39 | 270) 46 | 320 | 46 | 320
256
Wheels
Model/ Tire designation Tire pressure

Engine Normal load Maximum load
(up to 2/3* people)?
Front Rear Front Rear
PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA
A5 Sportback: |225/50 R17 94Y 32 | 220 | 29 | 200) 35 | 240) 35 | 240
2.0L 245/40 R18 93Y 32 | 220 | 29 | 200 | 35 | 240) 35 | 240
4-cylinder 255/35R1996Y | 32 | 220 | 32 | 220 | 38 | 260| 41 | 280
245/40 R18 97H 35 | 240 | 35 | 240 | 38 | 260) 41 | 280
265/30 R20 94Y 33. | 230 | 33 | 230) 38 | 260) 38 | 260
S5 Sportback: | 245/40 R18 97H 35 | 240 | 32 | 220] 39 | 270) 39 | 270
3.0L 245/40 R18 97Y 36 | 250 | 33 | 230] 41 | 280) 41 | 280
Greylinder 255/35R1996Y | 38 | 260 | 35 | 240 | 42 | 290| 42 | 290
265/30 R20 94Y 41 | 280 | 38 | 260 | 45 | 310 | 45 | 310
RS 5 Sportback: | 265/35 R19 98Y 36/ | 250/ | 32/ | 220/ | 39/ | 270/| 39/ | 270/
2.9L 39) | 270») | 36) | 250) | 425) | 290)| 425) | 290)
6-cylinder 275/30 R20 97Y 38/ | 260/ | 32/ | 220/ | 41/ | 280/| 41/ | 280/
415) | 280) | 365) | 250) ) 44>) | 3005) | 44») | 3005)
4) Vehicles with four seating positions: two people in the front, Vehicles with five seat-
ing positions: two people in the front, one person in the rear
5) The value before the forward slash applies to vehicles with a maximum speed up to
155 mph (250 km/h); the value after the slash is for up to 174 mph (280 km/h).
so damage important parts of the

Z\ WARNING
vehicle and can lead to sudden
Please note the important safe-
tire failure, including a blowout
ty precautions regarding tire
and sudden deflation that can
pressure > page 254 and load
cause the vehicle to crash.
limits > page 257.
Your safety and that of your pas-
Tires and vehicle load limits sengers also depends on making
sure that load limits are not ex-
There are limits to the amount of
ceeded. Vehicle load includes ev-
load or weight that any vehicle
erybody and everything in and on
and any tire can carry. A vehicle
the vehicle. These load limits are
that is overloaded will not handle
technically referred to as the vehi-
well and is more difficult to stop.
cle’s Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
8W7012721BB
Overloading can not only lead to

(“GVWR”). >
loss of vehicle control, but can al-
257
Wheels
The “GVWR” includes the weight that less weight can be carried as
of the basic vehicle, all factory in- luggage.
stalled accessories, a full tank of The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
fuel, oil, coolant and other fluids and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
plus maximum load. The maxi- are listed on the safety compli-
mum load includes the number of ance sticker on the front end of
passengers that the vehicle is in- the driver's door.
tended to carry (“seating capaci-
ty”) with an assumed weight of Z\ WARNING
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each passen- Overloading a vehicle can cause
ger at a designated seating posi- loss of vehicle control, a crash
tion and the total weight of any or other accident, serious per-
luggage in the vehicle. If you tow sonal injury, and even death.
a trailer, the weight of the trailer —Carrying more weight than
hitch and the tongue weight of your vehicle was designed to
the loaded trailer must be includ- carry will prevent the vehicle
ed as part of the vehicle load. from handling properly and in-
The Gross Axle Weight Rating crease the risk of the loss of
(“GAWR’”) is the maximum load vehicle control.
that can be applied at each of the —The brakes on a vehicle that
vehicle’s two axles. has been overloaded may not
The fact that there is an upper be able to stop the vehicle
limit to your vehicle’s Gross Vehi- within a safe distance.
cle Weight Rating means that the —Tires on a vehicle that has
total weight of whatever is being been overloaded can fail sud-
carried in the vehicle (including denly, including a blowout and
the weight of a trailer hitch and sudden deflation, causing loss
the tongue weight of the loaded of control and a crash.
trailer) is limited. The more pas- —Always make sure that the to-
sengers in the vehicle or passen- tal load being transported -
gers who are heavier than the including the weight of a trail-
standard weights assumed mean er hitch and the tongue
weight of a loaded trailer -
258
Wheels
does not make the vehicle 4. The resulting figure equals the
heavier than the vehicle’s available amount of cargo and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the “XXX” amount
Determining correct load equals 1400 lbs. and there will
Talis be five 150 lbs. passengers in
Use the example below to calcu- your vehicle, the amount of
late the total weight of the pas- available cargo and luggage
sengers and luggage or other load capacity is 650 lbs.
things that you plan to transport (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650
so that you can make sure that
lbs.)
your vehicle will not be overload- 5. Determine the combined
ed. weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct That weight may not safely ex-
Load Limit
ceed the available cargo and
1. Locate the statement “THE luggage load capacity calculat-
COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCU- ed in Step 4.
PANTS AND CARGO SHOULD 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX trailer, load from your trailer
LBS” on your vehicle’s placard will be transferred to your vehi-
(tire inflation pressure label) cle. Consult this manual to de-
=> page 254, fig. 176. termine how this reduces the
2. Determine the combined available cargo and luggage
weight of the driver and pas- load capacity of your vehicle.
sengers that will be riding in >Check the tire sidewall
your vehicle. (= page 245, fig. 173) to deter-
3. Subtract the combined weight mine the designated load rating
of the driver and passengers for a specific tire.
from “XXX” kilograms or “XXX”
pounds shown on the sticker Wheel bolts and rims
=> page 254, fig. 176. Wheel bolts

8W7012721BB
Wheel bolts must be clean and loosen/tighten

easily.
259
Wheels
Rims
@) For the sake of the environment
Rims with a bolted rim ring* or with bolted wheel
Reinstall summer tires at the appropriate
covers* consist of multiple pieces. These compo-
time, because they provide better handling
nents were bolted together using special bolts
when roads are free of snow and ice. Summer
and a special procedure. You must not repair or
tires cause less road noise, tire wear, and fuel
disassemble them > A\.
consumption.
Z\ WARNING Gi) Tips

Wheel bolts that are tightened or repaired in-
You can also use all season tires instead of
correctly can become loose and result in loss
winter tires. Please note that in some coun-
of vehicle control, which increases the risk of
tries where winter tires are required, only win-
an accident. For the correct tightening specifi-
ter tires with the 4&4 symbol may be permit-
cation, see > page 280, Finishing.
ted.
— Always keep the wheel bolts and the threads
in the wheel hub clean and free of grease.
— Only use wheel bolts that fit the rim.
— Always have damaged rims repaired by an Snow chains improve both driving and braking in
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi winter road conditions.
Service Facility. Never repair or disassemble
> Only install snow chains on the front wheels.
rims yourself, because this increases the risk
> Check and correct the seating of the snow
of an accident.
chains after driving a few feet, if necessary. Fol-
low the instructions from the manufacturer.
> Note the maximum speed of 30 mph
Winter tires significantly improve the vehicle's (50 km/h). Observe the local regulations.
handling when driving in winter conditions. Be- Use of snow chains is only permitted with certain
cause of their construction (width, compound, rim/tire combinations due to technical reasons.
tread pattern), summer tires provide less traction Check with an authorized Audi dealer or author-
on ice and snow. ized Audi Service Facility to see if you may use
> Use winter tires on all four wheels. snow chains.
> Only use winter tires that are approved for your Use fine-mesh snow chains. They must not add
vehicle. more than 0.53 in (13.5 mm) in height, including
> Please note that the maximum permitted the chain lock.
speed may be lower with winter tires > A\ in
General information on page 244. An author- You must remove the snow chains on roads with-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa- out snow. Otherwise, you could impair driving
cility can inform you about the maximum per- ability and damage the tires.
mitted speed for your tires.
> Check the tire pressure after installing wheels
ZA\ WARNING
=> page 254. Using incorrect snow chains or installing snow
chains incorrectly can result in loss of vehicle
The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced great- control, which increases the risk of an acci-
ly when the tread is worn down to a depth of dent.
0.16 in (4 mm). The characteristics of winter tires
also decrease greatly as the tire ages, regardless () Note
of the remaining tread.
Snow chains can damage the rims and wheel
covers* if the chains come into direct contact >
260
Wheels
with them. Remove the wheel covers* first. All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Use coated snow chains. Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
@) Tips Tread wear
When using snow chains, it may be advisable The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
to limit the ESC > page 122. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
Low-profile tires
Applies to: vehicles with low-profile tires For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the govern-
Compared to other tire/rim combinations, low-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
profile tires offer a wider tread surface and a
larger rim diameter with shorter tire sidewalls. The relative performance of tires depends upon
This results in an agile driving style. However, it the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may reduce the level of comfort and increase may depart significantly from the norm due to
road noise when driving on roads in poor condi- variations in driving habits, service practices and
tion. differences in road characteristics and climate.
Low-profile tires can become damaged more Traction

quickly than standard tires when driving over
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
large bumps, potholes, manhole covers, and
AA, A, Band C. Those grades represent the tire's
curbs. Therefore, it is particularly important to
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured un-
maintain the correct tire pressure > page 254.
der controlled conditions on specified govern-
To reduce the risk of damage to the tires and ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
rims, drive very carefully on poor roads. marked C may have poor traction performance
SA.
Check your wheels regularly every 2,000 mi
(3,000 km) for damage. For example, check for Temperature
bulges/cracks on the tires or deformations/cracks
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
on the rims.
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
After a heavy impact or damage, have the tires generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and rims inspected or replaced immediately by heat when tested under controlled conditions on
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Service Facility.
Sustained high temperature can cause the mate-
Low-profile tires can wear out faster than stand- rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
ard tires. and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure > A\.
Uniform tire quality grading The grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
— Tread wear ance which all passenger car tires must meet un-
— Traction AAABC der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
— Temperature A BC
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the minimum required by law.
the tire side wall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width > page 245, fig. 173. ZA\ WARNING
8W7012721BB
For example: Tread wear 200, Traction AA, Tem- The traction grade assigned to this tire is
perature A. based on straight-ahead braking traction >
261
Wheels
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- even if under-inflation has not reached the level
nering, hydroplaning or peak traction charac- to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
teristics. sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

ZX WARNING malfunction indicator to indicate when the sys-
The temperature grade for this tire is estab- tem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and function indicator is combined with the low tire
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- pressure telltale. When the system detects a
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
in combination, can cause heat buildup and mately one minute and then remain continuously
possible tire failure. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
ZX WARNING function exists.
Temperature grades apply to tires that are When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
properly inflated and not over or underinflat- the system may not be able to detect or signal
ed. low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the
Tire pressure monitoring installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
system
from functioning properly. Always check the
(1) General notes TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), that the replacement or alternate tires and
should be checked monthly when cold and inflat-
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
ed to the inflation pressure recommended by the properly.
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
If the tire pressure monitoring indicator
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
appears
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in-
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla- dicator
tion pressure for those tires).
The tire pressure indicator in the instrument
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been cluster informs you if the tire pressure is too low
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system or if there is a system malfunction.
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure tell-
tale when one or more of your tires is significant- Using the ABS sensors, the tire pressure monitor-
ly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire ing system compares the tire tread circumference
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and and vibration characteristics of the individual
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate tires. If the pressure changes in one or more
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- tires, this is indicated in the instrument cluster
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- display with an indicator light @ and a message.
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation If only one tire is affected, the location of that
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, tire will be indicated.
and may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- The tire pressures must be stored again each
ping ability. time you change the pressures (switching be-
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for tween partial and full load pressure) or after
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re- changing or replacing a tire on your vehicle
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, => page 263. The tire pressure monitoring system >
262
Wheels
only monitors the tire pressure you have stored. roads), the tire pressure monitoring system
Refer to the tire pressure label for the recom- indicator may be delayed.
mended tire pressure for your vehicle
=> page 254, fig. 176. (i) Tips
Tire tread circumference and vibration character- —The tire pressure monitoring system can al-
istics can change and cause a tire pressure warn- so stop working when there is an ESC mal-
ing if: function.
— The tire pressure in one or more tires is too low

— Using snow chains may result in a system
malfunction.
— The tires have structural damage
— The tire pressure monitoring system in your
— The tire was replaced or the tire pressure was
Audi was calibrated with “Audi Original
changed and it was not stored > page 263
Tires” > page 251. Audi recommends using
— Tires that are only partially used are replaced
these tires.
with new tires
Indicator lights Storing tire pressures

Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in-
If the @ indicator light turns on, there is a loss
dicator
of pressure in at least one tire .> A\ Check the
tires and replace or repair if necessary. Check and If the tire pressure changes or a tire is replaced,
correct the pressures of all four tires and store it must be confirmed in the system.
the pressure again > page 263.
> Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the
ia Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's tire pressures in all four tires meet the speci-
manual fied values and are adapted to the load
=> page 254.
If fs appears after switching the ignition on or
>» Switch the ignition on.
while driving and the @ indicator light in the in-
strument cluster blinks for approximately one
HICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure
minute and then stays on, there is system mal-
monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store
function. Try to store the correct tire pressures
now.
=> page 263. In some cases, you must drive for
several minutes after storing the pressures until
the indicator light turns off. If the indicator light @ Tips
does turn off or turns on again after a short peri- Do not store the tire pressures if snow chains
od of time, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or are installed.
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
have the malfunction corrected. Tire pressure monitoring
system
Z\ WARNING
— If the tire pressure indicator appears in the General notes
display, reduce your speed immediately and
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
avoid any hard steering or braking maneu-
should be checked monthly when cold and inflat-
vers. Stop as soon as possible and check the
ed to the inflation pressure recommended by the
tires and their pressure.
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
— The driver is responsible for maintaining the
tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
correct tire pressure. You must check the tires of a different size than the size indicated on
tire pressure regularly.
8W7012721BB
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-

— Under certain conditions (such as a sporty bel, you should determine the proper tire infla-
driving style, winter conditions, or unpaved tion pressure for those tires).
263
Wheels
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been General information

equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure tell-
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tale when one or more of your tires is significant-
the pressure in the four tires when driving.
ly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and The system uses sensors that measure the tem-
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate perature and pressure in the tires. The data is
them to the proper pressure. Driving ona signifi- sent from these sensors to the control module by
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- radio frequency.
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
The tire pressure monitoring system shows the
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
current pressures and temperatures of the tires
and may affect the vehicle's handling and stop-
in the MMI while driving > page 265. It also
ping ability.
compares the current tire pressures with the stor-
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for ed tire pressures and gives a warning in the driver
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re- information system if the tire pressure is differ-
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, ent from what is stored > page 265.
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
The system does not detect if the stored tire
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
pressures match the recommended tire pres-
sure telltale.
sures. You must store the tire pressures again in
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS each of the following situations > page 265:
malfunction indicator to indicate when the sys-
— Each time the tire pressures change, for exam-
tem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
ple when the load in the vehicle changes
function indicator is combined with the low tire
— After replacing a tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- — If wheels with new wheel sensors are used
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
ZA\ WARNING
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- — The tire pressure monitoring system assists
function exists. the driver in monitoring tire pressures. The
driver is responsible for having the tires in-
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
flated to the correct pressure.
the system may not be able to detect or signal
— Do not change the tire pressure when the
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
temperature of the tire is extremely high.
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the
This could result in serious damage to the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
tire and even cause the tire to burst, increas-
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
ing the risk of an accident.
from functioning properly. Always check the
— A tire with low pressure flexes more. This
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
heats the tire up too much. This could cause
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
the tread to separate and even cause the tire
that the replacement or alternate tires and
to burst, increasing the risk of an accident.
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
— The tire pressure monitoring system does
properly.
not warn about damage or defects in the
tire construction that could cause the tire to
burst, for example. Inspect your tires regu-
larly.
264
Wheels
adaptation mode. Dashes --.-- are shown in

@) Tips
place of the pressure and temperature.
—If tires are replaced, the sensors and valves
do not need to be removed or replaced. Only
(1) Tire pressure loss
replace the valve stem and, if necessary, the
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
valve and the wheel electronics. If you have
questions, see an authorized Audi dealer or If the @ indicator light turns on, the tire pres-
authorized Audi Service Facility. sure is too low compared to the specified pres-
— An incorrect display or a malfunction in the sure. Check and store the tire pressure(s) the
tire pressure monitoring system can occur next time it is possible > page 265.
after using the tire mobility kit*. Have the
@® Flat tire! Safely stop vehicle. Please check all
sensors replaced by an authorized Audi
tires and store pressures in MMI
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
— The system complies with United States FCC If the indicator light turns on and the message
regulations and ISED regulations appears, the tire pressure has reached a critical
=> page 297. level compared to the specified pressure. Avoid
unnecessary steering and braking maneuvers.
Adapt your driving style to the situation. Stop as
Disp Rte eee See ed
soon as possible and check the tire(s). If it is pos-
sible to continue driving, see an authorized Audi
Requirement: you must be driving the vehicle. dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immedi-
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- ately and have your tire(s) repaired or replaced.
HICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure
monitoring > Display tire pressure.
ZA WARNING
Read and follow the important information
The current tire pressures are shown in green, and notes > page 264.
yellow, or red numbers:
— Green: the current tire pressure and the speci- Storing new tire pressures
fied tire pressure are approximately the same. Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
— Yellow: the current tire pressure is lower than The tire pressure specifications must be stored
the specified tire pressure.
correctly for the tire pressure monitoring system
— Red: the current tire pressure is much lower to function reliably.
than the specified tire pressure.
It is always necessary to store the tire pressures
The specified tire pressure is the last tire pressure
when the tire pressures are modified, for exam-
that was stored > page 265.
ple due to a change in load or when new sensors
Note that the tire pressure also depends on the are installed.
temperature of the tire. The tire pressure increas-
> Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the
es as the engine becomes warmer while driving.
tire pressures of all four tires meet the speci-
Z\ WARNING fied values and are adapted to the load
=> page 254, fig. 176. Only correct and store
Read and follow the important information the pressure in tires whose temperature is ap-
and notes > page 264. proximately the same as the ambient tempera-
ture. If the temperature of the tire is higher
@ Tips than the ambient air temperature, the tire
8W7012721BB
The tire pressure or temperature is not dis- pressure must be increased approximately
played while the vehicle is stationary and in 3 PSI (0,2 bar) above the value on the sticker.
> Switch the ignition on.
265
Wheels
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- — Using snow chains can affect the function of
HICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure the system because of the shielding effect of
monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store the chains.
now. — The tire pressure monitoring system is not
> If the changed tire pressures are not displayed available due to a malfunction.
on the MMI, drive the vehicle for approximately — Transmitters with the same frequency, such as
10 minutes so that the sensor signal from the headphones or remote-controlled devices, may
wheels is received again. cause a temporary system malfunction due to
the strong electromagnetic field.
During this adaptation phase, --.-- is displayed
for the pressure and temperature and the tire The ia indicator light and the message turn off
pressure monitoring system is only partially once the tire pressure monitoring system is avail-
available. It only provides a warning if one or able again. If you cannot correct the malfunction
more tire pressures is below the minimum per- and the iis indicator light stays on, drive imme-
mitted specified pressure. diately to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction
@ Tire pressure: wheel change detected. Please
repaired.
check all tires and store pressures in MMI
If the indicator light turns on and the message

appears, the system has detected that the loca-
tion of the sensors has changed due to a wheel
replacement, or new sensors have been installed.
Store the new tire pressures.
ZA WARNING
Read and follow the important information
and notes > page 264.
Malfunctions
ia Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's

manual
If theia indicator light appears after switching

the ignition on or while driving and the @ indi-
cator light also blinks for approximately one mi-
nute and then stays on, then there is system mal-
function. The following are examples of situa-
tions that could cause a malfunction:
— If the message appears at the end of the adap-

tation phase, the system may not detect one or
several of the wheel sensors necessary for pres-
sure monitoring. This may result from one or
more wheels without wheel sensors or with in-
compatible wheel sensors being installed.
—Awheel sensor or another component has
failed.
266
Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning side windows, doors, the hood, the luggage com-
partment lid, or the panoramic glass roof* or at
General information tires, rubber hoses, insulating material, the pow-
er top*, sensors*, or camera lenses*. Keep a dis-
Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehi-
tance of at least 16 inches (40 cm).
cle's value. It can also be a requirement when
submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage Do not remove snow and ice with a pressure
and paint defects on the body. washer.
The required cleaning and care products can be Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
obtained from an authorized Audi dealer or au-
The water temperature must not be above 140 °F
thorized Service Facility. Read and follow the in-
(60 °C).
structions for use on the packaging.
Automatic car wash
ZA\ WARNING Spray off the vehicle before washing.
— Using cleaning and care products incorrectly
Make sure that the windows, the panoramic glass
can be dangerous to your health.
roof*, and the power top” are closed and the
— Always store cleaning and care products out
windshield wipers are off. Make sure that the ve-
of reach of children to reduce the risk of poi-
hicle is still able to roll during the washing proc-
soning.
ess in the car wash. Follow instructions from the
car wash operator, especially if there are accesso-
ries attached to your vehicle.
— Purchase environmentally-friendly cleaning
products if possible. If possible, use car washes that do not have
— Do not dispose of cleaning and care prod- brushes.
ucts with household trash. Washing by hand
Clean the vehicle starting from the top and work-
Car washes ing downward using a soft sponge or cleaning
The longer that deposits such as insects, bird brush. Use solvent-free cleaning products.
droppings, tree sap or road salt remain on the ve-
Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by
hicle, the more the surface can be damaged. High hand
temperatures such as those caused by sunlight
increase the damaging effect. To reduce the risk of damaging the paint when
washing, first remove dust and large particles
Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with from your vehicle. Insects, grease spots, and fin-
plenty of water. gerprints are best removed with a special cleaner
Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree for matte finish paint.
sap are best removed with plenty of water and a Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To re-
microfiber cloth. duce the risk of damaging the paint surface, do
Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once not use too much pressure.
road salt stops being used for the season. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. Then
clean using a neutral shampoo and a soft micro-
Pressure washers
fiber cloth.
When washing your vehicle with a pressure wash-
er, always follow the operating instructions pro- Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and let it air
8W7012721BB
vided with the pressure washer. This is especially dry. Remove any water residue using a chamois.
important in regard to the pressure and spraying
distance. Do not aim the spray directly at seals on
267
Care and cleaning
ZA\ WARNING —To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not

wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
—To reduce the risk of accidents, only wash —To reduce the risk of damage, do not wash
the vehicle when the ignition is off and fol- decorative decals* with a pressure washer.
low the instructions from the car wash oper- —To reduce the risk of damage, the power
ator.
top* and the trim molding with the high-
—To reduce the risk of cuts, protect yourself mounted brake lights must not be cleaned
from sharp metal components when wash- with a pressure washer
ing the underbody or the inside of the wheel
—To reduce the risk of damage to the surface,
housings. do not use insect removing sponges, kitchen
— After washing the vehicle, the braking effect sponges, or similar items.
may be delayed due to moisture on the — When washing matte finish painted vehicle
brake rotors or ice in the winter. This in-
components:
creases the risk of an accident. The brakes
— To reduce the risk of damage to the sur-
must be dried with a few careful brake appli-
face, do not use polishing agents or hard
cations.
wax.
@) Note — Never use protective wax. It can destroy

the matte finish effect.
— If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car — Do not place any stickers or magnetic
wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in signs on vehicle components painted with
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. matte finish paint. The paint could be
Power folding exterior mirrors* must only damaged when the stickers or magnets
be folded in and out using the power folding are removed.
function.
—To reduce the risk of damage to the rims @) For the sake of the environment
and tires, compare the width between the
Only wash the vehicle in facilities specially de-
wheels on your vehicle with the distance be-
signed for that purpose. This will reduce the
tween the guide rails in the car wash.
risk of dirty water contaminated with oil from
—To reduce the risk of damage, compare the
entering the sewer system.
height and width of your vehicle with the
height and width of the inside of the car
wash.
Cleaning and care information

When cleaning and caring for individual vehicle are not listed, consult an authorized Audi dealer
components, refer to the following tables. The or authorized Audi Service Facility. Also follow
information contained there is simply recommen- the information found in > A.
dations. For questions or for components that
Exterior cleaning
Component Situation Solution
Windshield wiper | Deposits Soft cloth with glass cleaner, > page 67
blades
Headlights/ Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution® >
tail lights
268
Care and cleaning

Sensors/ Deposits Sensors: soft cloth with a solvent-free cleaning product
camera lenses Camera lenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-free cleaning sol-
ution
Snow/ice Hand brush/solvent-free de-icing spray
Wheels Road salt Water
Brake dust Acid-free special cleaning solution
Exhaust tail pipes | Road salt Water, cleaning solution suitable for stainless steel, if nec-
essary
Power top Deposits Clean water, power top cleaning product, if necessary.
Clean with the grain of the fabric using a soft brush and al-
low to air dry.
Wind deflector Deposits Water, mild soap solution, if necessary®)
Decorative parts | Deposits Mild soap solution ®), a cleaning solution suitable for stain-
and less steel, if necessary
trim
Paint Paint damage Repair with touch-up paint
Spilled fuel Rinse with water immediately
Surface rust Rust remover, then treat with hard wax; for questions, con-
sult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility.
Corrosion Have it removed by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility.
Water no longer Treat with hard wax (at least twice per year)
beads on the surface
of clean paint
No shine even though Treat with suitable polish; then apply paint protectant if
paint has been pro- the polish that was used does not contain any protectant
tected/paint looks
poor
Deposits such as in- Dampen with water immediately and remove with a micro-
sects, bird droppings, fiber cloth
tree sap, and road
salt
Grease-based con- Remove immediately with a mild soap solution ®) and a
taminants such as soft cloth
cosmetics or sunblock
Carbon compo- Deposits clean the same way as painted parts > page 267
nents
Decorative decals | Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution?
a) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water
8W7012721BB
269
Care and cleaning
Interior cleaning
Window glass Deposits Glass cleaner, then wipe dry
Decorative parts {Deposits Mild soap solution®
and
trim
Plastic parts Deposits Damp cloth

Heavier deposits Mild soap solution ®), detergent-free plastic cleaning solu-
tion, if necessary
Displays/instru- | Deposits Soft cloth with LCD cleaner; dust in the lower area of the
ment cluster instrument cluster can be removed using a soft brush.
Controls Deposits Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a mild soap solution®
Safety belts Deposits Mild soap solution ®), allow to dry before letting them re-
tract
Textiles, Deposits adhering to | Vacuum cleaner
artificial leather, | the surface
Alcantara Water-based deposits Absorbent cloth and mild soap solution®
such as coffee, tea,
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Apply a mild soap solution ®), blot away the dissolved oil or
such as oil, make-up, dye, treat afterward with water, if necessary
etc.
Certain types of de- Special stain remover, blot with absorbent material, treat
posits such as ink, afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary»
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.
270
Care and cleaning

Natural leather Fresh stains Cotton cloth with a mild soap solution®
Water-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth
such as coffee, tea, dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable
such as oil, make-up, for leather
etc. dried stains: oil cleaning spray
Certain types of de- Spot remover suitable for leather
posits such as ink,
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.
Care Regularly apply conditioning cream that protects from
light and penetrates into the material. Use special colored
conditioning cream, if necessary.
Carbon compo- Deposits Clean the same way as plastic components
nents
a) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water
Z\ WARNING — Never use warm or hot water to remove

snow or ice from the camera lens. This
The windshield must not be treated with wa- could cause the lens to crack.
ter-repelling windshield coating agents. Un- — Never use abrasive cleaning materials or
der unfavorable conditions, such as wetness, alcohol to clean the camera lens. This
darkness, and when the sun is low, these coat- could cause scratches and cracks.
ings can cause increased glare, which increas-
— Power top
es the risk of an accident. They can also cause
— Remove bird droppings immediately.
wiper blade chatter.
— Never use gasoline, spot remover, ben-
() Note zene, paint thinner or other solvents to re-

move.
— Headlights and tail lights — Door windows
— Never clean the headlights or tail lights — Remove snow and ice on windows and ex-
with a dry cloth or sponge because the terior mirrors with a plastic scraper. To re-
lights could be damaged. duce the risk of scratches, move the scra-
— Do not use any cleaning products that con- per only in one direction and not back and
tain alcohol, because they could cause forth.
cracks to form. — Never remove snow or ice from door win-
— Wheels dows and mirrors using warm or hot water
— Never use any paint polish or other abra- because this could cause cracks to form.
sive materials. —To reduce the risk of damage to the rear
— Damage to the protective layer on the window defogger, do not apply any stick-
rims, such as stone chips or scratches, ers on the heating wires on the inside of
must be repaired immediately. the window.
8W7012721BB
— Camera lenses — Decorative parts and trim

— Never use chrome care or cleaning prod-
ucts.
271
Care and cleaning
— Paint — If there is damage to the webbing, the

—To reduce the risk of scratches, the vehicle connections, the retractors, or the buck-
must be free of dirt and dust before pol- les, have them replaced by an authorized
ishing or waxing. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
—To prevent paint damage, do not polish or cility.
wax the vehicle in direct sunlight. — Textiles, artificial leather, and Alcantara
—To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not — Never treat artificial leather or Alcantara
polish away rust spots. with leather care products, solvents, floor
— Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immedi- polish, shoe polish, spot remover, or simi-
ately because they could damage the lar products.
paint. — Have a cleaning specialist remove stub-
— Decorative decals born stains to reduce the risk of damage.
—To reduce the risk of damage, do not use — Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
any rough powder or abrasive cleaning sponges, etc. when cleaning.
products. — Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry
—To reduce the risk of damage, do not pol- the seat.
ish decorative decals that have a matte or — Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
printed finish. or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
— Due to the risk of damage, do not use an damage to the surface.
ice scraper to remove snow and ice on win- — Open hook and loop fasteners, for exam-
dows with decorative decals on them. ple on clothing, can damage seat covers.
— Displays and instrument cluster Make sure hook and loop fasteners are
— Make sure that the display and instrument closed.
cluster are switched off and have cooled — Natural leather
down before cleaning. To switch off the — Never treat leather with solvents, floor
center display, select on the MMI home polish, shoe polish, spot remover or simi-
screen: SETTINGS > Display & brightness lar products.
> MMI > Screen cleaning. — Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
— Displays, the instrument cluster, and the or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
trim surrounding it must not be cleaned damage to the surface.
with dry cleaning methods because they — Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
could become scratched. sponges, etc. when cleaning.
— Make sure no fluids enter the spaces be- — Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry
tween the instrument cluster and the the seat.
trim, because that could cause damage. —To help prevent the leather from fading,
— Controls do not leave the vehicle in direct sunlight
— Make sure that no fluids enter the con- for long periods of time. If leaving the ve-
trols, because this could cause damage. hicle parked for long periods of time, you
— Safety belts should cover the leather to protect it from
direct sunlight.
— Do not remove the safety belts to clean
them.
G) Tips
— Never clean safety belts or their compo-
nents with chemicals or with corrosive flu- — Insects are easier to remove from paint that
ids or solvents and never allow sharp ob- has been freshly waxed.
jects to come into contact with the safety — Regular waxing can prevent rust spots from
belts. This could cause damage to the belt forming.
webbing.
272
Care and cleaning
— Decorative decals can age due to environ-

mental conditions, which can result in dam-
age such as brittleness. The color may fade
if exposed to excessive sunlight.
Taking your vehicle out

of service
If you would like to take your vehicle out of serv-
ice for a Long period of time, contact an author-
ty. You can receive information about the meas-
ures to take depending on the conditions for tak-
ing the vehicle out of service (duration, location,
etc.).
8W7012721BB
273
Emergency assistance
Emergency assistance » Applies to: Coupe/Sportback: To remove the

cargo floor cover completely, pull it toward the
General information rear using the plastic handle @).
> Applies to: vehicles with spare tire: Turn the
> Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving
handle counter-clockwise and remove the spare
traffic in the event of a breakdown. In the event
tire.
of a flat tire, park the vehicle ona level surface.
» Applies to: Coupe/Cabriolet: Unhook the cargo
If you are ona steep hill, be especially careful.
floor cover again before closing the luggage
> Set the parking brake.
compartment lid.
> Switch the emergency flashers on.
> Have the passengers exit the vehicle. They Depending on vehicle equipment, the vehicle tool
should move to a safe place, for example be- kit, tire mobility kit, and compressor may be lo-
hind a guard rail. cated under another cover that is secured with a
handwheel.
Z\ WARNING Applies to: Cabriolet: The vehicle jack is located
Follow the steps given above. This is for your under the foam piece. To remove the foam piece,
protection and the for the safety of others on you must remove the wind deflector*, the com-
the road. pressor securing strap*, and the handwheel.
Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack in the stor-

Equipment age bag: The bag with the vehicle jack is secured
to the tie-downs in the luggage compartment
and must be secured to the tie-downs again after
Applies to: vehicles with the vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit, using it.
and vehicle jack
Z\ WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack in the storage bag
A vehicle jack that is unsecured, incorrectly se-

cured, or not secured in the luggage compart-
ment may slide out of place when braking,
turning, or in an accident, which increases the
risk of injuries to vehicle passengers. To re-
duce the risk of an accident, never transport
the vehicle jack without securing it.
Fig. 177 Luggage compartment: cargo floor cover
G) Tips
The vehicle tool kit, vehicle jack, tire mobility kit —Insome vehicles, the rear compartment
and compressor are stored in the luggage com- may not open.
partment under the cargo floor cover. — The vehicle jack in your vehicle is mainte-
» Applies to: Coupe/Sportback: To open the front nance-free.
compartment, lift the cargo floor cover by the
strap @. Tire mobility kit
> To open the rear compartment, lift the cargo
floor cover by the plastic handle @).
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Applies to: Coupe/Cabriolet: Hook the plastic
handle @) into the luggage compartment seal > Read and follow the important safety precau-
or above the power top storage compartment. tions > page 274.
» Set the parking brake.
274
> Select the “P” position. drink a lot of water. Do not induce vomiting.
> Check if a repair with the tire mobility kit is pos- Seek medical attention immediately.
sible > page 275. — Change your clothing immediately if it
comes into contact with tire sealant.
Using the tire ia —If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit attention immediately.
— Keep the tire sealant away from children.
B8K-1475
— In vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system*, using tire sealant can result in an
incorrect display or a system malfunction.
Drive carefully to the nearest authorized
ty.
@ Tips
Fig. 178 Tire: tire damage that cannot be repaired — If sealant leaks, allow it to dry in place. You
can then peel it off like a sticker.
The tire repair is only meant for temporary use. — Note the expiration date on the sealant bot-
Change the damaged tire as soon as possible tle. Replace the tire sealant at an authorized
>A. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility.
If the tire is pierced by an object such as a nail,
do not remove the object from the tire.
— Radio reception can be interrupted when
operating the compressor.
The tire mobility kit can be used at temperatures — Follow the legal regulations that are appli-
as low as -4 °F (-20 °C). cable in the country where you are operating
the vehicle.
The tire mobility kit must not be used:
—If the tire has cuts or punctures that are larger
than 0.16 in (4 mm) @ & fig. 178
— If the rim is damaged (@)
— If you have driven with very low tire pressure or
without air in the tire @)
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility for assistance in these situations.
ZA WARNING
— Please note that the tire mobility kit cannot
be used in all situations, and that it may on-
ly be used temporarily.
— The tire sealant must not come in contact
with skin, eyes, or clothing.
— If tire sealant comes into contact with your
eyes or your skin, thoroughly rinse the af-
fected area immediately with clean water.
8W7012721BB
— Do not inhale the fumes.

— If you swallow any of the tire sealant, thor-
oughly rinse your mouth immediately and
275
Repairing tires Inflating a tire

Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit > Move the switch (8) > fig. 180 on the compres-
sor into position I.
RAZ-0054]
> Inflate the tire to between 29 psi (200 kPA)
and 36 psi (250 kPA) and read the pressure on
the gauge.
> If this tire pressure is not reached, remove the
filler hose. Drive slowly approximately 33 feet
(10 m) forward or in reverse so that the sealant
can be distributed in the tire. Inflate the tire
again > A\.
ZA WARNING
— Read and follow the manufacturer's safety
precautions on the compressor and in the in-
structions on the bottle of sealant.
— Ifa tire pressure of 29 psi (200 kPA) cannot
reached after inflating for 6 minutes, then
the tire is too severely damaged. Do not con-
tinue driving.
— If the tire cannot be repaired with the tire
sealant, see an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Fig. 180 Tire mobility kit connection
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Requirement: the tire mobility kit must be laid
out and ready for use > page 274. (i) Tips
Do not operate the compressor for more than
Setting up the tire mobility kit
six minutes continuously, or it can overheat.
> Open the cover @) on the compressor) Once the compressor has cooled, you can con-
> fig. 179. tinue to use it.
> Remove the connector (4) and pressure hose (5)
from the housing. (eye) Clalare)
> Connect the compressor pressure hose (5) to Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
the flange © on the tire sealant bottle @.
> Insert the sealant bottle with the flange at the > Affix the sticker that says "max. 50 mph (max.
bottom into the opening @) on the compressor. 80 km/h)" that is provided with the tire mobili-
> Remove the valve cap from the faulty tire. ty kit within the driver's field of vision.
> Connect the filler hose (8) to the valve (7) > Stop the vehicle after driving for about 10 mi-
© fig. 180. nutes and check the tire pressure.
> Connect the plug @ ° fig. 179 to an outlet in > If the tire pressure is lower than 19 psi (130
the vehicle. kPA), then the tire is too severely damaged. Do
> Switch the ignition on. not continue driving.
2) The compressor may look different. However, the way it is

operated is generally the same.
276
ZA WARNING
NS
Pay attention to the following after repairing
B4L-1337
the tire:
3
— Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
— Avoid hard acceleration or braking and driv-
ing fast around curves.
~~
— The vehicle may become more difficult to
control.
— If the tire is too severely damaged, see an
Service Facility for assistance. Fig. 181 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps
@ For the sake of the environment > Slide the plastic clip from the vehicle tool kit
onto the cap until it engages > fig. 181.
You can give the used tire sealant bottle to an
>» Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
Service Facility for disposal.
Loosening the wheel bolts
@ Tips
&
=
Remember to obtain a new bottle of sealant x©
from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized a
Audi Service Facility after repairing a tire.
Changing a tire
You must complete the preparation before

changing a tire. Fig. 182 Wheel: loosening the wheel bolts
> Read and follow the important safety precau- > Slide the wheel wrench* from the vehicle tool
tions > page 274. kit all the way onto the wheel bolt.
>» Set the parking brake. > Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn to
> Select the “P” position. the left. To achieve the required torque, hold
>» When towing a trailer: disconnect the trailer the end of the wheel wrench*. If the wheel bolt
from your vehicle. will not loosen, press carefully on the wheel
> Lay out the vehicle tool kit > page 274 and the wrench* with your foot. Hold onto the vehicle
spare tire > page 280. securely while doing this and make sure your
> Switch the ignition off. footing is stable.
Z\ WARNING Z\ WARNING
The vehicle must also be secured to prevent it To reduce the risk of an accident, only loosen
from rolling when using the vehicle jack”. Use the wheel bolts gently one turn before raising
suitable objects to block the front and back of the vehicle with the vehicle jack*.
the wheel that is diagonal from the wheel
with the flat tire.
8W7012721BB
277
Raising the vehicle AN WARNING

Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack
—To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no
one is in the vehicle before raising it.
B8W-0193
— Make sure the vehicle jack is stable. The risk
of injury is increased when the ground is
slippery or soft, because the vehicle jack
could slide or sink.
— Only raise your vehicle with the vehicle jack
provided by the factory. If you use a vehicle
jack designed for another vehicle, your vehi-
cle could slip and cause injury.
— Position the vehicle jack only at the desig-
nated mounting points on the side sill and
align the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle jack
could slip and cause an injury if it does not
have sufficient hold on the vehicle.
—To reduce the risk of injury, do not raise any
other vehicles or other loads using the vehi-
cle jack provided by the factory.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, never start
the engine when the vehicle is raised.
Fig. 184 Sill: positioning the vehicle jack —To reduce the risk of injury, no work should
be performed under the vehicle while it is
> Place the vehicle jack from the vehicle tool kit raised.
ona firm surface. Use a flat, stable support if
necessary. On a slippery surface such as tile, () Note
you should use a non-slip pad such as a rubber Do not lift the vehicle by the sill. Position the
mat > /\. vehicle jack only at the designated mounting
> Find the marking on the sill that is closest to points on the side sill. Otherwise, your vehicle
the tire that will be changed > fig. 183. Behind could be damaged.
the marking, there is a lifting point on the side
sill for the vehicle jack.
> Turn the handwheel to raise the vehicle jack un-
der the lifting point on the side sill until the
bracket on the jack @) completely covers the
notch on the vehicle.
> Align the vehicle jack so the bracket (@) covers
the notch and the base (2) is flat on the ground.
The base (2) must be directly under the mount-
ing point @.
> Mount the crank on the vehicle jack: insert the
crank into the opening on the handwheel. Turn
the crank to the left or right to secure it.
> Continue raising the vehicle jack with the crank
until the wheel lifts off the ground slightly.
278
Removing and installing a wheel > Carefully lower the vehicle using the vehicle
jack*.
@Rg
Tt > Tighten the wheel bolts in a diagonal pattern
“ using the wheel wrench*.
0
oO
The wheel bolts must be clean and loosen and

tighten easily. Check the contact surfaces for the
wheel and hub. Contaminants on these surfaces
must be removed before installing the wheel.
ZX WARNING
— Read and follow the important information
and notes under > page 251.
B8K-1477
— Never use the hex socket in the screwdriver
handle or the hex socket wrench with the
ratchet to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.
This increases the risk of an accident, be-
cause you will not be able to achieve the cor-
rect tightening specification.
o Note
When removing or installing the wheel, the
rim could hit the brake rotor and damage the
Removing a wheel rotor. Work carefully and have a second per-
son help you.
> Remove the top wheel bolt completely using
the hex socket in the screwdriver handle from
the vehicle tool kit > fig. 185 and place it ona Unidirectional tires
clean surface.
A unidirectional tire profile is identified by arrows
> Then install the alignment pin from the vehicle
on the tire sidewall that point in the running di-
tool kit by hand in the empty wheel bolt hole
rection. You must always maintain the specified
> fig. 186”.
running direction. This is necessary to ensure the
> Remove the rest of the wheel bolts.
tire's optimal performance in regard to adhesion,
> Remove the wheel >(). The alignment pin re-
running noise, and friction, and to reduce the risk
mains in the hole while doing this.
of hydroplaning.
Installing a wheel To benefit fully from the advantages of the uni-
Read the directions on > page 279 when instal- directional tire design, you should replace faulty
ling unidirectional tires. tires as soon as possible and restore the correct
running direction on all of the tires.
> Slide the wheel on over the alignment pin >@.
> Install the wheel bolts and tighten them gently
using the hex socket.
> Remove the alignment pin and tighten the re-
maining wheel bolt.
8W7012721BB
D Applies to: vehicles with ceramic brake rotors*: Use a sec-

ond alignment pin* from the vehicle tool kit for the lowest
hole according to the steps described for the first align-
ment pin.
279
you removed, and install that in place of the

front tire that failed.
> Reinstall the caps on the wheel bolts if necessa-
ry. ZA\ WARNING
> Store the vehicle tool kit in its designated
— After installing a spare tire, the tire pressure
place.
must be checked as soon as possible.
> If the removed wheel does not fit in the spare
—Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)
wheel well, store it securely in the luggage
with a compact spare tire. Driving faster
compartment > page 92.
than that increases the risk of an accident.
> Check the tire pressure on the installed wheel
—To reduce the risk of an accident, avoid hard
as soon as possible.
acceleration or braking and driving fast
> Correct the tire pressure and store it in the MMI
around curves with the compact spare tire.
=> page 263 or > page 265.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, never drive
> The wheel bolt tightening specification must be
with more than one compact spare tire.
90 ft lbs (120 Nm). Have it checked as soon as
— Normal summer or winter tires must not be
possible with a torque wrench. Drive carefully
mounted on the compact spare wheel rim.
until then.
> Have the faulty wheel replaced as quickly as
@) Note
possible.
Secure the spare tire in the spare tire well us-
Space-saving spare tire ing the handwheel in order to reduce the risk
Applies to: vehicles with space-saving spare tire (compact of damage to other components.
spare tire)
The spare tire is intended for short-term use only. Jump starting
Have the damaged tire checked and replaced if
necessary by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible. You should only perform the steps that follow if
you have the necessary tools and technical ex-
There are some restrictions on the use of the pertise.
compact spare tire. The compact spare tire has
been designed specifically for your type of vehi- If the engine does not start because the vehicle
cle. Do not replace it with the spare tire from an- battery is drained, you can jump start your vehi-
other type of vehicle. cle using another vehicle. Jump start cables are
needed to do this.
The compact spare tire is located in the luggage
compartment under the cargo floor cover Both vehicle batteries must have 12 V nominal
=> page 274. voltage. The voltage capacity (Ah) of the vehicle
battery that is giving power must not be less
The tire pressure must be adjusted to a specified
than the capacity of the drained vehicle battery.
value listed on the tire pressure sticker
= page 254, fig. 176. Jump start cable
Snow chains Only use a jump start cable with a large enough
diameter. Note the manufacturer's specifica-
For technical reasons, the use of snow chains on
tions.
the compact spare tire is not permitted.
Only use a jump start cable with insulated termi-
If you have to drive with snow chains and a front
nal clamps.
tire fails, mount the spare tire in place of a rear
tire. Install the snow chains on the rear tire that Positive cable - usually red.
Negative cable - usually black.
280
ZA WARNING
— A drained battery can freeze at tempera-
tures around 32 °F (0 °C). If the vehicle bat-
tery is frozen, it must be thawed before con-
necting the jump start cables. If it is not,
the risk of an explosion and chemical burns
increases. After jump starting the vehicle,
drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility immediately to
Fig. 188 Engine compartment: connectors for jump start
have the vehicle battery checked. cables or a charger
— Read the warnings when working in the en-
gine compartment > page 230. The jump start cable connections are located in
— Handling the jump start cables incorrectly the engine compartment.
may cause the vehicle battery to explode
Follow the information about the vehicle battery
and lead to serious injuries.
=> page 239.
() Note Connecting the positive cable (red) to the

positive terminal
Jump start cables can cause considerable
damage to the vehicle electrical system if > Open the cover on the positive terminal
they are connected incorrectly. > fig. 187.
1. Attach one end of the positive cable (red) to
@ Tips the jump-start pin @ © fig. 188 on your vehi-
— There must be no contact between the cle.
vehicles, or else voltage could flow when 2. Attach the other end of the positive cable
connecting the positive terminal and drain (red) to the positive terminal @) on the pow-
the vehicle battery of the vehicle providing er source.
the jump start.
Connecting the negative cable (black) to the
— The drained vehicle battery must be con- negative terminal
nected correctly to the electrical system.
3. Attach one end of the negative cable (black)
— Switch off electrical equipment that is not
to the negative terminal @) on the power
needed.
source.
4. Attach the other end of the negative cable
(black) to the jump-start pin @ on the vehi-
Both jump start cables must be connected in the cle.
correct order.
Starting the engine
> Start the engine in the vehicle giving the charge
and let it run at idle.
> Now start the engine in your vehicle, which has
the drained battery.
> If the engine does not start, stop the starting
procedure after 10 seconds and then repeat it
after approximately 30 seconds.
> Turn on the rear window defogger in your vehi-
8W7012721BB
cle in order to reduce any voltage peaks that

Fig. 187 Engine compartment: connectors for jump start may occur when disconnecting the jump start
cables or a charger cables. The headlights must be switched off. = >
281
> With the engines running, remove the cables in cumstances. Inexperienced drivers should not
reverse order of the way they were installed. tow.
> Close the cover on the positive terminal.
Notes on towing
ZA WARNING When the engine is stopped, the transmission

will not be sufficiently lubricated if traveling at
— Never connect the jump start cable directly
high speeds and long distances:
to your vehicle battery. Only use the connec-
tions in the engine compartment. — The maximum permitted towing speed is 30
— Do not touch the non-insulated parts of the mph (50 km/h).
terminal clamps. The cable must also not —The maximum permitted towing distance is 30
come into contact with vehicle components miles (50 km).
that conduct electricity when it is connected
to the positive vehicle battery terminal. This Additional information on towing with a tow
truck
can cause a short circuit.
— The plugs on the battery cells must not be The vehicle may only be towed with the front axle
opened. raised. Do not wrap any chains or cables around
— Keep ignition sources (such as open flames, the brake lines.
burning cigarettes, etc.) away from the vehi-
Tow bar and towing cable
cle batteries to reduce the risk of an explo-
sion. The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or tow-
— Route the jump start cables so they cannot ing cable. Both drivers should be familiar with
get caught in the moving parts in the other the special considerations when towing, especial-
vehicle's engine compartment. ly when using a towing cable.
Always make sure the traction force does not ex-

@) Note ceed the permitted level and there are no shock
Please note that the connecting process previ- loading conditions. There is always the risk of the
ously described for the jump start cables is in- coupling becoming overloaded when driving off-
tended for when your vehicle is being jump road.
started.
For the most safety and security, drive with a tow
bar. You should use a towing cable only ifa tow
G) Tips bar is not available. Use a towing cable made of
Make sure that the connected jump start ca- synthetic elastic cable similar elastic material.
bles have sufficient contact with metal.
ZA WARNING
Towing — Towing highly increases the risk of an acci-
dent, for example from colliding with the
General information
towing vehicle.
You should only perform the steps that follow if — To reduce the risk of an accident, do not al-
you have the necessary tools and technical ex- low anyone to remain inside the vehicle
pertise. when it is being transported by a tow truck
or a special transporter.
Towing requires a certain amount of practice.
Audi recommends contacting a towing company
to have the vehicle transported.
() Note
—If normal towing is not possible, for exam-
You should only have your vehicle towed by an- ple if the transmission is faulty or if the
other vehicle when disabled in exceptional cir- towing distance is greater than 30 miles
282
(50 km), then transport the vehicle on a can use the turn signals, the horn, and the
special carrier. windshield wipers if needed > A\.
— If the vehicle is towed by a tow truck at the > Switching it off before the vehicle has stopped
axle that is not permitted, this can cause se- may impair the function of the brake booster
vere damage to the transmission. and power steering. You would then need to
— The vehicle must not be tow started for use more force to steer and brake the vehicle.
technical reasons. > Release the parking brake > page 114.
> Select the “N” selector lever position.
@® Tips > Make sure the towing cable is always taut.
— If the power supply is interrupted, then it
will not be possible to move the selector JN WARNING
lever out of the "P" position. The parking — Never tow a vehicle using a tow bar or tow-
lock must be released using the emergency ing cable if the vehicle does not have electri-
release before towing the vehicle cal power.
=> page 108. — If the vehicle runs out of power while it is
— Switch Audi pre sense* off > page 155 when being towed, stop towing the vehicle imme-
loading the vehicle onto a vehicle carrier, diately and consult an authorized Audi deal-
train, ship, or other type of transportation, er or qualified repair facility.
or when towing the vehicle. This can prevent
an undesired intervention from the pre
Rear towing loop
sense* system.
— Follow the local legal regulations for tow-
ing.
Read and follow the important information under

=> page 282.
Preparations
> Only secure the towing cable or tow bar at the
designated towing loop > page 283.
> Make sure the towing cable is not twisted. Oth-
erwise it could disconnect from the towing loop
while towing.
> Switch the emergency flashers on in both
vehicles > page 61. However, do not do this if it
prohibited by law.
Towing vehicle (front)

> Only start to drive when the towing cable is
taut. Applies to: RS models
Fig. 190 Rear bumper: installing the towing loop
> Press the brake pedal very carefully.
» Avoid sudden braking or driving maneuvers.
The threaded opening for the towing loop is lo-
Vehicle being towed (rear) cated on the right rear of the bumper.
8W7012721BB
> Make sure the ignition is switched on so that > Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool
the steering wheel is not locked and so that you kit > page 274. >
283
> Press the cap inward with brief, strong pressure

> fig. 189 or > fig. 190. The cap will loosen
from the bumper.
>» Tighten the towing eye as far as it will go into
the mount. Use a suitable object to tighten the
towing eye completely and securely in the
mount.
> After using, place the towing loop back in the
vehicle tool kit.
If the towing loop is not tightened until it

stops when installing, the threads may be
pulled out when towing the vehicle and result
in an accident.
Depending on the model, the shape of the cap

can vary.
284
Fuses and bulbs
A fuse that has blown will have metal strips that

have burned through.
The fuses are located in the footwell under the

foot rest (left-hand drive vehicle or behind
the cover (right-hand drive vehicle) (@). Additional
fuses are located on the front side of the cockpit
(driver's side) © and under the left cover in the
luggage compartment (6).
> Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment

off.
> Check the table that follows to see which fuse
belongs to the equipment.
> Remove the screwdriver and the reversible Torx
bit from the vehicle tool kit > page 274.
> Remove the footrest or the corresponding cov-
er.
> Remove the colored plastic clip from the fuse
panel, if necessary > page 286, fig. 193.
> Remove the clip from the rear side of the cover
» Remove the fuse using the clip.

> Replace the blown fuse only with a fuse that
has the same amp rating.
Fig. 191 > Reinstall the plastic bracket.
footrest ( >» Reattach the footrest or the cover.
Fuse color identification
la: Color Current rating

co in amps
es Black 1
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 723)
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent [25
Green 30
Orange 40
ZA WARNING
Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown
8W7012721BB
fuse with one that has a higher amp rating.

Fig. 192 Driver's side cockpit (left-hand drive/right-hand
This can cause damage to the electrical sys-
drive vehicles): cover ©, left side of luggage compartment:
cover (0) tem and increases the risk of fire.
285
Fuses and bulbs
a
@) Note Ss$
2
If a new fuse burns out again shortly after you 8
have installed it, have the electrical system

checked as soon as possible by an authorized
ty.
G@) Tips
— The following table does not list fuse loca-
tions that are not used.
— Some of the equipment listed in the follow-
ing tables applies only to certain model ver-
sions or certain optional equipment.
3
2
=& Fig. 194 Front passenger's footwell (right-hand drive vehi-
a
cle): fuse panel with plastic clip
Fuse panel
No. | Equipment
Catalytic converter heating
2 |Engine components
Exhaust doors, fuel injectors, radiator in-
let, crankcase housing heating
Vacuum pump, hot water pump, NOx sen-
4 |sor, particulate sensor, biodiesel sensor,
exhaust doors
Brake light sensor
6 | Engine valves, camshaft adjustment
Heated oxygen sensors, mass airflow sen-
sor, water pump
Fig. 193 Driver's footwell (left-hand drive vehicle): fuse Water pump, high pressure pump, high
panel with plastic clip 8 | pressure regulator valve, temperature
valve, engine mount
Hot water pump, motor relay, 48 V drive-
train generator, 48 V water pump
10 | Oil pressure sensor, oil temperature sensor
Clutch position sensor, 48 V drivetrain
11 | generator, water pump, 12 V drivetrain
generator
12 | Engine valves, engine mount
13 | Engine cooling
286
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse panel
(4) (brown) Fuse panel © (black)
14 | Fuel injectors, engine control module 1 Left rear door control module, left rear
15 |Ignition coils, heated oxygen sensors power window
16 | Fuel pump 12 | Parking heater
Fuse panel
@) (red) Fuse panel (0) (black)
No. | Equipment No. | Equipment
Anti-theft alarm system Front seat electronics, seat ventilation,
2. [Engine control module rearview mirror, rear climate ‘control sys-
1 |tem control panel, neck heating, front pas-
3 Left front seat electronics, lumbar sup- senger's airbag warning light, diagnostic
port, massaging seat connection
4_|Automatic transmission selector lever Diagnostic interface, vehicle electrical sys-

5 |Horn 2 tem control module
6 |Parking brake 3 /Sound generator
7 | Diagnostic interface 4 |Clutch position sensor
8 | Roof electronics control module 5 |Engine start, emergency shut-off
9 | Emergency call module 6 Diagnostic connection, traffic information

10 | Airbag control module antenna (TMC)
1 Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC), An- 7 |USB input
ti-Lock Braking System (ABS) 8 | Garage door opener
12 | Diagnostic connection, light/rain sensor 7 Audi adaptive cruise control, distance reg-
13 | Climate control system ulation
14 | Right front door control module 11 | Front camera
15 | Climate control system compressor 12 | Right headlight
16 Brake system pressure reservoir, left neck 13 | Left headlight
heating 14 |Transmission fluid cooling
Fuse panel
© (black) Fuse panel © (red)
No. | Equipment No. | Equipment
1 |Front seat heating 1 | Ignition coils
2 |Windshield wipers 2 |Climate control system compressor

3 | Left headlight electronics 5 | Left headlight
4 | Panoramic glass roof 6 |Automatic transmission
5 |Left front door control module 7 | Instrument panel
6 | Sockets 8 | Climate control system blower
7 Right rear door control module, right rear 9 |Right headlight
power window 10 | Dynamic steering
All wheel drive control module 11 | Engine start
9 | Right headlight electronics
10 Windshield washer system/headlight
8W7012721BB
washer system control module
287
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse assignment - Driver's side of the Fuse assignment - Left side of the luggage
(ole 4) g compartment
—
Fig. 195 Driver side cockpit: fuse panel with plastic bracket
Fuse panel
No. | Equipment
1 Convenience access and start authoriza-
tion control module
2. | Audi phone box, USB input
4 |Head-up display
5S |Audi music interface, USB input
6 | Front climate control system control panel cian othe luggage comparimen’: fuse pane!
7 |Steering column lock
8 | Center display Fuse panel (@) (black)
9 |Instrument cluster No. | Equipment
10 | Volume control 2 |Windshield defroster
11 | Light switch, switch module 3 | Windshield defroster
12 | Steering column electronics 5 |Suspension control
14 | Infotainment system 6 |Automatic transmission
16 Steering column electronics, steering 7 |Rear window defogger
wheel heating 8 |Rear seat heating
9 | Left tail lights
10 Airbag control module
Luggage compartment lid lock, fuel filler
a door lock, convenience system control
module
12 Luggage compartment lid
Fuse panel @) (red)

No. Equipment
Electric compressor
Fuse panel © (brown)

No. Equipment
Exterior antenna
288
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse panel
© (brown) Your vehicle is equipped with maintenance-free
headlights and tail lights. However, if a light bulb
2 | Audi phone box, safety belt microphone
needs to be replaced, please contact an author-
Right front seat electronics, lumbar sup-
3 port, massaging seat
ty.
4 |Side assist
6 Interior monitoring, anti-theft alarm sys- ZX WARNING
tem, tire pressure monitoring system If you still would like to try replacing the
7 Convenience access and start authoriza- bulbs in your vehicle yourself, read the warn-
tion control module ings regarding working in the engine compart-
8 | Auxiliary heating, tank module ment > A\ in General information on
page 230.
9 | Power top control module
TV tuner, data exchange and telematics
@) Note
a control module
Make sure the covers are fitted correctly on
11 | Auxiliary battery control module
the headlight and tail light so that no water
12 | Garage door opener will leak in from the outside and the light
13 | Rearview camera, peripheral cameras function will not be impaired.
14 | Right tail lights
16 | Airbag control module
Fuse panel
(£) (red)
No. | Equipment
Right neck heating
MW) R] W]e
WOlLOIN
Exhaust treatment
Power top control module
Right trailer hitch light
Trailer hitch
Left trailer hitch light
Trailer hitch socket
All wheel drive control module, sport dif-
10
ferential
11 | Exhaust treatment
Bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Audi recommends having a bulb replaced by an

Facility in cases of doubt. These facilities have
the correct tools and replacement parts as well
as the required technical knowledge.
8W7012721BB
LED lights*
289
Data privacy
Data privacy airbags. These vehicle control modules store data

while driving normally that is required by an au-
Privacy notice thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility for diagnosis and repair purposes. Only
You can find information about responsibility for
certain types of data are recorded for a very short
data protection in the MMI.
period of time ifa control module has detected a
Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SET- system event. No noises, conversations, or im-
TINGS > General > Legal notes > About Audi ages will be recorded in the vehicle.
connect.
The data may include information such as the ve-
hicle speed, the direction of travel, and informa-
Image recording tion about the brake system, or also the behavior
See aye Le MUL ea La) of the restraint system in the event of an acci-
Applies to: vehicles with surrounding area monitoring dent. The stored data can be exported and down-
loaded with special devices, which must be con-
Some vehicle functions require the vehicle’s path nected directly to the vehicle.
to be detected and evaluated. This is done by
cameras installed permanently on the vehicle On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
that detect objects in the vehicle's surroundings There is a diagnostic connector socket in the driv-
(such as obstacles or guard rails). The live images er's side footwell to read out the various control
from the cameras are transmitted to the applica- modules and the event data recorder. Data re-
ble control module. garding the function and condition of the elec-
The camera images are transmitted to the appli- tronic control modules is stored in the event
cable control module and stored for processing. memory. Only have an authorized Audi dealer or
The control module analyzes the current camera authorized Audi Service Facility read out and de-
image using image evaluation software. This im- lete the event memory.
age evaluation software detects anonymized
technical measurements, such as distances to ob-
ZA WARNING
jects. The control module evaluates these techni- — Incorrect use of the connection port for the
cal measurements and makes it possible for the On Board Diagnostic System can cause mal-
assist systems to control the vehicle, if necessary. functions, which can then result in accidents
and serious injuries.
Data memories — Only allow an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility to read out the
engine data.
~
1p
o
S|
=z rash data recorder
x
a.
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
Fig. 197 Driver's side footwell: connection port for the On ing how a vehicle's system performed. The EDR is
Board Diagnostic System (OBD) designed to record data related to vehicle dynam-
ics and safety systems for a short period of time,
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehi-
modules for various vehicle systems such as the cle is designed to record such data as:
290
Data privacy
— How various systems in your vehicle were oper- of Audi connect remote vehicle services, and
ating; adaptation to customer expectations. For exam-
— Whether or not the driver and passenger safety ple, various technical function data, environmen-
belts were buckled/fastened; tal data, driving data, and usage data will be col-
— How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the lected for a specific purpose and forwarded to
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, Audi. The data will be sent from the vehicle at
— How fast the vehicle was traveling. the time the data was collected.
These data can help provide a better understand- Applies to: MMI: You can find additional informa-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and in- tion about data collection in the MMI. Select on
juries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Legal
vehicle only ifa non-trivial crash situation occurs; notes > About Audi connect.
no data are recorded by the EDR under normal If you would like to deny data transmission to
driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. Audi, contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
name, gender, age, and crash location) are re- thorized Audi Service Facility for more informa-
corded. However, other parties, such as law en- tion. You also have the option to deactivate data
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the transmission within the privacy settings.
type of personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
Privacy settings
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
SETTINGS > Privacy settings.
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can read the in- When using Audi connect services or during data
formation if they have access to the vehicle or the collection, data will be transmitted from the ve-
EDR. hicle.
> To display additional information about the pri-
Data usage
vacy settings and the associated symbols in the
Audi can read out the information stored in the status bar, press @ in the MMI.
data memories or similar data, or give this infor-
mation to third parties, especially in the follow- Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
ing situations: Setting the maximum privacy settings
— If the vehicle owner or lessee agrees When the Activate privacy mode function is
— If there is an official request from the police switched on, the data connection is deactivated
— Ifa court or authorities request it or sending of data is restricted, but all safety-re-
If legally permitted, Audi can also use the data lated, legal, or contractually required Audi con-
for analysis of vehicle operation and safety per- nect services remain activated. The majority of
formance or provide this data to third parties for the Audi connect services are deactivated.
research purposes. When the function is switched off, the data con-
nection will be available in order to use Audi con-
Transmitted information nect services.
Data collection Adjusting individual privacy settings

Applies to: vehicles with data collection
In the MMI, you can adjust individually which da-
ta should be transmitted from the vehicle. If you
8W7012721BB
Depending on the country, Audi may collect data

for the following purposes, for example: offer switch on a data category, the data will be trans-
and product optimization, public safety, provision mitted. >
291
Data privacy
You can also deactivate individual services for vated by the key user, then they will re-
your vehicle at my.audi.com if you are logged into main available without restrictions and
the vehicle as the key user > page 31. These de- continue to transmit data.
activated services will not be available in the ve- — Stored destinations (favorites, last desti-
hicle. For additional information, visit my.audi. nations) are only stored in the vehicle. If
com.) you allow transmission of data again,
these destinations will be synchronized via
@) Note the myAudi account. To prevent synchroni-
You are responsible for all precautions taken zation of destinations, delete the destina-
for data protection, anti-virus protection, and tions before you allow data to be trans-
protection against loss of data on mobile de- mitted again.
vices that are used to access the Internet
through the Wi-Fi hotspot.
G) Tips
Audi collects, uses, stores and shares your per-
— The following interfaces are not affected by sonal information, such as contact data, vehicle
changes to the privacy settings: Bluetooth, data, usage data, driving data and precise geolo-
Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE), Wi-Fi, Audi cation, in order to provide you with the products
smartphone interface (ASI), Near Field
and services you have purchased or requested,
Communication (NFC), charging communi- and for a number of other purposes, for example,
cation (high-voltage system), Electronic Toll
to track quality issues, to performance and safe-
Collect (ETC), On-Board Diagnostic System ty, to meet our internal compliance or legal re-
(OBD) if equipped. quirements and to market to customers and po-
— If the maximum privacy settings are switch- tential customers. For a more complete list of
ed on, your vehicle may not receive security the data we collect, how we use it and with
updates and certificates for establishing an whom we share it, please visit your Audi nation-
encrypted connection, depending on vehicle al/sales region website at www.audi.com.
equipment. In order to receive security up-
dates and certificates, switch the maximum The collection, use and sharing may vary depend-
privacy settings off for at least ten minutes ing on your model and model year, your subscrip-
every six months. Make sure that your vehi- tion status, or the service offering. For example,
cle is connected to the Internet. A symbol in collection, use and sharing may vary between
the MMI status bar indicates if the required Audi connect services, if you have designated a
data connection is available > page 23. key user, or if you are driving a model equipped
— If the transmission of data is limited, it will with persistent data logging. Please review the
have the following effects on the exchange complete Privacy Statement to understand our
of data for Audi connect services and emer- data handling practices with respect to a particu-
gency calls, if equipped: lar service.
— The emergency call function will remain You can find additional information about our da-
available without restrictions and will con- ta privacy practices in your MMI.
tinue to transmit data.
> Applies to: MMI: On the home screen, select:
— If an online roadside assistance call is ini-
SETTINGS > General > Legal notes > About
tiated, no data will be transmitted, but a
Audi connect.
call will be made.
— If the Geofencing Alert, Speed Alert, Information about our privacy practices in con-
and/or Valet Alert services have been acti- junction with the mobile Audi connect
D_ In certain countries
292
Data privacy
application can be found in the Application’s Pri-

vacy Statement.
For additional information about the privacy

practices relating to Audi connect, myAudi, or
other websites, applications or online services as
well as your obligations with respect to using
these services, and for additional information re-
garding Audi connect terms and conditions,
please visit your Audi national/sales region web-
site at www.audi.com.
8W7012721BB
293
Accessories and technical changes
Accessories and — Replacement parts may not always be availa-

ble.
technical changes
— Navigation systems for vehicles built for the
Warranty U.S.A. and Canada will not necessarily work in
Europe, and may not work in other countries.
Your vehicle is covered by various warranties:
— New Vehicle Limited Warranty (1) Note

— Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle re-
— Emissions Control System Warranties: Federal sulting from these country-specific differen-
Emissions Control System Defect Warranty, ces.
Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
— Applies to: USA models: Kansas Safety Belt Maintenance, repairs,
Limited Warranty and technical modifi-
— Applies to: USA models: California Emissions
cations
Control Warranties: Short-term Emissions De-
fects Warranty, Long-term Emissions Defects Observe the safety precautions > page 230, Gen-
Warranty, TZEV models Emissions Defects eral information and > page 278, Raising the ve-
Warranty, California Emissions Performance hicle.
Warranty
General information
You can find detailed information in your Warran-
ty & Maintenance Booklet and in the California Due to the increasing complexity of technology in
Emissions Booklet*. these vehicles, as well as the safety and environ-
mental standards that apply, you can only per-
form a very limited amount of repairs and modifi-
Audi Literature Shop cations to the vehicle yourself.
Service information is made available as soon as Proof of maintenance work may be required to
possible after a model is introduced and can be submit a claim within the warranty period.
ordered in the Audi Literature Shop: http://
literature.audiusa.com We recommend that you have your vehicle serv-
iced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility and that Audi Genuine Parts
Driving in other
and Audi Genuine Accessories are used. This
countries helps to ensure that your vehicle's functionality,
Government regulations in the United States and performance, and safety are not impaired.
Canada require motor vehicles to comply with Maintenance and repairs
emissions regulations and safety standards.
Your vehicle was designed to help keep mainte-
Therefore, vehicles that were produced for the
nance requirements to a minimum. Some regular
U.S. and Canadian markets are different from
maintenance is required to help ensure that your
vehicles produced for other countries.
vehicle runs in a safe, economical, and reliable
If you plan to use your vehicle outside of the manner. Please refer to your Warranty & Mainte-
United States or Canada, it is possible that: nance Booklet for more detailed information
— Fuel may have a significantly lower octane rat- about vehicle maintenance.
ing. Unsuitable fuels can cause engine damage. When operating the vehicle under more extreme
— Proper maintenance and repair work may not operating conditions, for example when outside
be possible because special service equipment, temperatures are very low or in very dusty envi-
tools, or measuring devices needed for your ve- ronments, certain maintenance should be per-
hicle may not be available. formed between the specified intervals.
294
Usually maintenance and repair work requires — Never perform any work in the engine com-
special tools, measuring devices, and other partment unless you know exactly how to
equipment that is available to trained vehicle carry out the job and have the correct tech-
technicians in order to help ensure that your vehi- nical information and the correct tools.
cle and all of its systems operate correctly, relia- — If you are uncertain about what to do, have
bly, and safely. Performing work on the vehicle the work performed by an authorized Audi
incorrectly can impair the operation and reliabili- dealer, an authorized Audi Service Facility,
ty of your vehicle and may void one or more of or another qualified workshop. Serious per-
your vehicle's warranties. sonal injury may result from improperly per-
formed work.
Technical Modifications
Interference with electronic components, their @) Note
software, the wiring, and data transfer may cause
— Maintenance work, repairs, or technical
malfunctions. Because of the way electronic com-
modifications to the vehicle (such as instal-
ponents are interconnected, such malfunctions
ling additional equipment) that is not per-
can also impair systems that are not directly in-
formed correctly can cause vehicle damage.
volved. This means that you risk both a substan-
— If emergency repairs must be performed,
tial reduction in the operational safety of your ve-
take your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
hicle and increased wear of vehicle components.
er or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon
Some convenience functions, such as the conven- as possible.
ience turn signal function, individual door open- — Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle
ing function, and displays, can be reprogrammed resulting from failure to comply with these
using special workshop equipment. If functions guidelines.
are reprogrammed, the information and descrip-
tions about these functions in this Owner's Man- @) For the sake of the environment
ual may no longer apply to the changed func-
— Regular maintenance can help protect the
tions. Audi recommends that an authorized Audi
environment.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility perform
— Technical modifications to the vehicle can
and verify any reprogramming procedures.
have a negative impact on fuel consumption
ZA WARNING and vehicle emissions.
Maintenance work, repairs, or technical modi- @) For the sake of the environment
fications to the vehicle (such as installing ad-
Certain components in your vehicle such as
ditional equipment) that is not performed
undeployed airbag modules, pretensioners
correctly can cause serious injuries and in-
and remote control batteries may contain Per-
crease the risk of an accident.
chlorate Material - special handling may ap-
ply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
Z\ WARNING perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the
The engine compartment in any motor vehicle restraint system including airbag modules
is a potentially dangerous area and can cause and safety belts with pretensioners are scrap-
serious personal injury. ped, all applicable laws and regulations must
— Always use extreme caution when doing any be observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is
work in the engine compartment. Always familiar with these requirements and we rec-
follow commonly accepted safety practices ommend that you have your dealer perform
and use common sense. Never risk personal this service for you.
8W7012721BB
injury.
295
netic waves can cause malfunctions in the ve-

@) Tips
hicle. Observe the regulations in the country
Because of your vehicle's aluminum body de- where the vehicle is being operated and the
sign, all service and repair procedures affect- instructions from the radio equipment manu-
ing the body should be performed by an au- facturer.
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv-
ice Facility, who will perform the work accord-
Reporting Safety Defects
ing to Audi factory specifications. Only Audi
Genuine Parts are used when Audi experts Applicable to U.S.A.
perform repair or service procedures. Failure
to use Audi Genuine Parts or Audi Genuine Ac- If you believe that your vehicle
cessories or performing repairs incorrectly
may result in severe vehicle damage, such as
has a defect which could cause a
corrosion. crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately in-
Accessories and parts
form the National Highway Traffic
Consult with an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility before purchasing ac-
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
cessories or replacement parts. Audi recom- addition to notifying
mends having your vehicle serviced by an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- Audi of America, Inc.
ty and using Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genu-
2200 Ferdinand Porsche Drive
ine Accessories.
Herndon, VA 20171
Audi does not endorse the use of products and
accessories that it has not evaluated, even if the If NHTSA receives similar com-
product is approved by a certified testing agency
or government agency. plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
ZA WARNING
defect exists in a group of
— Installing unapproved accessories or incor-
rect replacement parts can cause vehicle vehicles, it may order a recall and
damage and can increase the risk of an acci- remedy campaign. However,
dent.
— On vehicles that have factory-installed li- NHTSA cannot become involved in
cense plate brackets on the front of the ve- individual problems between you,
hicle, the brackets may only be replaced
with ones that are the same size and made
your dealer, or Audi of America,
of the same material. Do not install any li- Inc.
cense plate brackets on the front of vehicles
that do not have factory-installed brackets. To contact NHTSA, you may call
Otherwise, the function of the system could
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-
be impaired.
free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-
@) Note 800-424-9153); go to http://
A correctly-installed exterior antenna is re-
www.safercar.gov;
quired for operating radio equipment in the
vehicle. Otherwise, the increased electromag-
296
or write to: Transport Canada

Administrator NHTSA Motor Vehicle Safety Investiga-
1200 New Jersey Ave., tions Laboratory
S.E. West Building 80 Noel Street
Washington, DC Gatineau, QC
20590. J8Z OA1
You can also obtain other infor- For additional road safety infor-
mation about motor vehicle safe- mation, please visit the Road
ty from http://www.safercar.gov. Safety website at:
English:
Applicable to Canada
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
If you live in Canada and you be- motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm
lieve that your vehicle has a de-
French:
fect that could cause a crash, in- http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/
jury or death, you should immedi- securiteautomobile/menu.htm
ately inform Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls. Declaration of
You should also notify Audi Cana- compliance for telecom-
munications equipment
da.
and electronic systems
Canadian customers who wish to Your vehicle may be equipped with various radio
report a safety-related defect to systems, depending on vehicle equipment. The
manufacturer is not liable for radio malfunctions
Transport Canada, Defect Investi-
that are caused by unauthorized changes to the
gations and Recalls, may either equipment.
call Transport Canada toll-free at: FCC Part 15.19
Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
Tel.: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawa re- conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
gion and from other countries) interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
TTY for hearing impaired: may cause undesired operation.
1-888-675-6863 FCC Part 15.21
or contact Transport Canada by Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
mail at:
8W7012721BB
void the user's authority to operate the equip-

ment.
297
RSS-Gen
G) Tips
This device contains licence-exempt transmit-
Additional information or supplements about
ter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation,
the radio systems based on the vehicle equip-
Science and Economic Development Canada’s li-
ment and country can be found on the follow-
cence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the
ing website: www.audi.com/generalinfo
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, in-

cluding interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
RSS 102
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radi-
ation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrol-
led environment. This equipment should be in-
stalled and operated with minimum distance of
20 cm (8 inches) between the radiator and your
body. This transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
Integrated Toll Module* - FCC (USA) and

ISED (Canada)
This device complies with FCC rules part 90 and
Innovation, Science, and Economic Development
Canada RSS-137. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference that may be re-
ceived including interference that may cause un-
desired operation. WARNING: The transmitter
has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED
rules. Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the de-
vice.
This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radi-

ation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrol-
led environment. End Users must follow the spe-
cific operating instructions for satisfying RF ex-
posure compliance. This transmitter must be at
least 20 cm (8 inches) from the user and must
not be cotocated or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
298
Technical data
Technical data The sticker contains the following vehicle data:
Identification data @ Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

@ Vehicle type, engine output, transmission
Vehicle data label ® Engine and transmission codes
@) Paint and interior codes
XXX X= HKNK WOK XX
RAZ-0668
© Optional equipment numbers
(Hae wrccnce XX XNKKKNKK
Frm XXX XX Vehicle identification number (VIN)
2 XX XXKKXKK XK KX XK The VIN is located in the following areas:
XXX KW XXX
3 }—— MOTORS / GET. 8
eco au cone XXX XXX WX — Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
CQ-ASRAINER YyNX XXX NOK HICLE > Settings & Service > Vehicle informa-
tion.
M. - AUSST.
/ OPTIONS
EOA 7D5 4UB 6XM 5SG SRW — On the vehicle identification label
2EH JOZ 1LB 1AS_ 1BA
3FC SMU 7X1 — At the front behind the windshield*
FOA 9G3 0G7 OYH OJF
SG TLE 3KA 8EH U1A X9B QZ7 — Inthe motor compartment on the right side
1XW 8Q3 9Q8 8Z4 D2D
716 CV7 7KO 4X3 2K2
34 4KC 3Y0 413 5D2 Notes about technical data
1SA 7GB QIA 4GQ
The values may vary based on special equipment
ee as well as market-specific equipment and meas-
uring methods.
Fig. 198 Vehicle identification label Please note that the specifications listed in the
vehicle documentation always take precedence.
The vehicle identification label > fig. 198 is locat-
ed in the luggage compartment under the cargo G) Tips
floor cover. Any technical data that is missing was not
available at the time of printing.
The vehicle identification label information can
also be found in the Warranty & Maintenance
booklet.
Vehicle data
Length (in (mm)) | Width (in (mm)) | Width across the | Height at curb
mirrors (in (mm)) | weight (in (mm))
AS Cabriolet 184.9 (4,697) 72.7 (1,846) 79.9 (2,029) 54.5 (1,384)
A5 Coupe 184.9 (4,697) 72.7 (1,846) 79.9 (2,029) 54.0 (1,371)
AS Sportback 187.3 (4,757) 72.6 (1,843) 79.9 (2,029) 54.6 (1,386)
S5 Cabriolet 184.9 (4,697) 72.7 (1,846) 79.9 (2,029) 54.5 (1,384)
S5 Coupe 184.9 (4,697) 72.7 (1,846) 79.9 (2,029) 54.0 (1,371)
8W7012721BB
S5 Sportback 187.3 (4,757) 72.6 (1,843) 79.9 (2,029) 54.6 (1,386)

RS 5 Coupe 185.9 (4,723) 72.7 (1,846) 79.9 (2,029) 53.5 (1,360)
RS 5 Sportback 188.3 (4,782) 72.7 (1,846) 79.9 (2,029) 54.6 (1,387)
299
Technical data
(er) Feb a(t)
Fuel tank 15.3 gal (58 L)

Windshield and headlight washer system* $5 qt (5.21)
A/C system refrigerant oil

The exact type and amount of refrigerant oil in
the A/C system is specified on the sticker on the
refrigerant compressor.
Refrigerant oil 100/110 g® +/-10g

@) The specifications depend on vehicle equipment.
~ Appliesto: Sportback: 198 tbs (80 kg

|
eC
|
|
|
|
FINDA EAU
Fig. 199 Safety certificate
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The maximum permitted total weight
@ of the
vehicle is listed on the safety certificate on the
side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The maximum permitted load on the front axle
@ or the rear axle @) is listed on the safety cer-
tificate on the side area of the door or on the
driver's door pillar.
Load
The maximum permitted load is listed on the tire
pressure label on the driver's door pillar.
Roof load
The maximum permitted roof load is:
— Applies to: Coupe: 165 lbs (75 kg)
300
Index
Numbers and
Symbols ASR
3-zone deluxe automatic climate control.... 99 refer to Anti-Slip Regulation........
Audi active lane assist..............
A Cleaning the camera area..........
Audi adaptive cruise control
AIC cooling MOde:. « « vesiare «sas © wrens 6 avers 99
Cleaning the sensors..............
A/C system refrigerant oil............005 300 Predictive control................
Acceleration measurement.............. 134 Traffic jam assist..........-..00-.
Accelerator pedal....... 0... cece eee eee ee 107 Audi adaptive light.................
also refer to Accelerator pedal.......... 107 Audi connect
AGCOSSONICS © iiss 2s weer «wai + wave «6 o5a08 296 FefEr LO CONNECE ss = « awe + e wane seas
Active lane assist Audi drive selects: 2 : ssa as xeaas
x een
refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 150 Audi music interface...............
Adaptive cruise control................. 139 Audio files...............002--000-
Adaptive dampers............000
ee eee 119
Adjusting air distribution (automatic climate
control system) ............-. ce eee eee 100
Adjusting the brightness................. 63
Adjusting the sound.................00- 221
Adjusting the temperature (automatic climate
control system) ........
cee eee eee 100
Adjusting the volume..............2.-005 30 Safety measures .......
0c. ee eens
Adjusting the volume (announcements).... 221 Audi side assist
Adjusting the welcome sound............ 221 refer to Side assist................
Aitbag’syStem « « sams s seen + wees os reese es 79 Audi smartphone interface..........
Alarm system Legalinformation................
refer to Anti-theft alarm system.......... 37 Audi virtual cockpit
Alignment pin (changing the wheel)....... 274 refer to Instrument cluster.........
All-weather lights...............-..20--- 58 AUTO
Allseason tires..........2.220202200005 260 Automatic climate control system...
Automatic headlights.............
All wheel drive
refer tOQUAtEOmms: 5 = yews « w eam eo ewe 120 Auto Lock (central locking) ..........
Amazon Alexa integration Automatic climate control system....
Media playback’. « oii. eons 6 6 cris 6 0 ow 211 Automatic luggage compartment lid....
Operating...............0..0 000.0000. 28 Automatic transmission............
AMI Automatic wipe/wash system........
refer to Audi music interface........... 211 Average consumption..............
Android Auto Average speed............0.-
0000
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 219
Anti-lock braking system............0005 121 B
Anti-Slip Regulation. ................405 121
Bag hooks............--6-
eee sees
Anti-theft alarm system ..............000. 37
8W7012721BB
Band
Apple CarPlay
refer to Frequency band...........
301
Index
Battery Catalytic converter..............-00000- 229

Charging (12 Volt vehicle battery)....... 241 Cell phone
Vehicle battery (12 Volt)............... 239 refer to Telephone...............-.00. 171
Winter operation (12 Volt vehicle battery) . 240 Cell phone compartment
Belt positioners sins oe seus vo new vs eww oe 77 refer to Audi phone box............... 173
BlOGk POURC sew: 2s wencu 2 o pee 2s eee F ee 196 Central locking.................520 eee ee 34
BlOWEr's » owes 2 = seme 2 2 saves 2 eee oe ree E 100 AUTO LOGK:: » cuoz = wees: = sem 4 s seu 2 mae 34
Bluetooth Conveniencerkey a ica 2 swoon wwe o 6 sao a 39
AUGiO player = secu ss mone oo wasn oo inane Wo 210 Convenience opening and closing......... 46
Connecting a device..............0000- 223 Luggage compartment lid............... 42
Connecting a mobile phone............ 171 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 37
Deleting a device ........ ces eee eeeeeee 224 Messages ...........
0.00. c eee eee ee 36
Device Overview « sicisce « « ssc «© cscceue a 6 aoeee 223 Remote control key...........eeeeeeeee 39
Disconnecting adevice................ 223 SOLUINGS « 2 sees & o cmnmres © 3 smreees w o omnes Bo seats 35
Displaying profiles..................0. 224 EMILE KY, wccssie wc » sienna us oneuane # % ansine 5 ens 39
Selecting adeviee « scsics 2 6 snscis © 6 arsnin + 6 « 223 Central locking switch..............20005 36
Specifying a favorite.................. 224 Ceramic Drakestiins oo scuns wo sueeme « omen ¥ 5 8 113
BoOSt ..... cece eee eee 16 GOrtiTiCati
Oia « sacs oo omens oo sam oo sm 297
Boost pressure indicator................. 16 Charging
Brake fluid refer to Power SOUrCES .....
eee ee ee eee 91.
Checking the brake fluid level........... 238 Charging the battery
Brakes... 2... eee 112 Mobile devices. ................000005 211
Brake fluid: « « seas s ¢ wows se eews oo eee 238 USB « = usu = ¢ nme © E ROU ¢ FoR § 2 ee 174
Emergency braking function............ L15 Wirelesst. xs seswes « 0 ansuosa sx aswsar oo amanere #0 6 174
(0) 116 Child safety lock
New brake pads................ 000 eee 113 Climate control system controls inthe rear. 45
Brands ..... 2... ee eee eee eee 225 Power WINdOWS........ 0. cece ee eee eee ee 45
Break-in security feature.............000. 37 Rear dOOrSisy: + « sexse & s saws 4 Scum s 2 oem ge 45
Breaking in Child safety seats..............--.000-05 84
New brake pads..........-..
eee eee ee 113 Securing to the top tether anchor........ 89
NQWHIFESS = 5 sccons 3 0 ascane © 0 wemwm ooo aa 9 251, Securing with a safety belt.............. 87
Browser Sectiring with LATCH « s « avs « ¢ zeus 5 x ewer 87
refer to Mediacenter................0- 213 Cleaning... 0.0... . cece eee eee eee eee 267
Business. addressins ¢ vss «+ mean a 3 man oo 196 Cleaning Alcantara............--.00000. 270
Cleaning artificial leather............... 270
Cc Cleaning carbon components........ 269, 271

Cleaning CONtrOIS:. « sie. 6 sree oo eevee 4 2 we 270
California Proposition 65 Warning........ 231
Cleaning decorative parts andtrim... 269,270
Battery specific.......... see eee eee eee 240
Cleaning exhaust tail pipes.............. 269
CAlElist,. scsnis x 2 ammnes + « creme & & mean = eee « 175
Cleaning plastic parts.................. 270
Cameras
Coverage areaS.. 1... eee eee eee 127 Cleaning textilee:s » vows se cena: 2eas a ¢ toe 270
LOGAtIONS <5 « = seem 5 2 Rom FE eR FE oe 128 Climate control system .............0000. 98
Capacities also refer to Automatic climate control sys-
Fuelitank’: » soos 3 2 mews 2 2 awe 2 4 came + ne 300 ROI = sscas © 6 woanere © wennane © 6 over © oo ammo 98
Washer fluid reservoir................. 300 Climate control system controls in the rear
Carwashiis s sxsw 2 «crue 6 o ance a 0 comics oo oem 267 Child safety lock.. 0.2.0... cee cece eee 45
302
Index
Closing Cooling system

Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 42 Adding coolant................220005 237
Convenience closing..........0...e5e0% 46 Checking the coolant level............. 237
HOO « sisson sa cnamee ov atteoe a como eo ae vo 2331, COOlANE esis oe cere x wma cw aneees w w oO 236
Luggage compartment lid............... 42 Gornering lights: + «seme 2 seem 2 o eee oo ee 58
Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 43 Cruise control system...............005 136
Panoramic glass:r00ficc:. «sien as nani we 6 cas 47 CUP HOIdErS ces ¢ « seen 3 2 heen se een ce eee = 91
Power top......... 00.0 e eee eee eee eee 51
Current consumption ..............0.0005 17
SUrishiade:((60f)': = ween 5 2 same 3 2 eae & te 47
WINdOWS « wsaics 2 ssomee x 2 voscu vo sane eo voce 45
Cockpit diMMiNG « = sess « ¢ ess + ¢ wees se ews 63 D
Cockpit (OVErview) « « eiea ss wewa s eawwa 2 newer 6 Data module
ColOricOdGlss « « waes so sae,p < Asem 2 3 eae EB 299 Serial’number(IMED) « ssw + 2 caer 2 ¢ sous 2 179
Compact spare tire................0-00. 280 Data plans sce « « sees x v eeeu oo are 2 e oes 186
Compartments............
00 cee eee eee 92 Data PriVaty’: s cas ¢ 5 seas 7 ¢ cees ts ees ee 292
Compass inthe mirror............-00
eee 67 1) 17
Sting’: weow « » wees so wees go ewe oo 22.1;
Compliance ..... 2.0.0...
eee 297
Conferenceicalbeains << wma «0 icra vw wmncs va a 177 Daytime running lights.................. 58
Configuration wizard.................04. 20 Declaration of compliance............... 297
CONNEC: ss saws s + eewe so eee so eee soe 182

DEF (instrument cluster)................. 12
Datta plamsrs s onesene « s sesusm « o vaeeove « seanous w = o 186 Demo mode
Data Privacy..............0-00
cee aee 292 refer to Presentation mode............. 200
EMme@rgenieyCalll swcsc « s sews 2 9 ewe + eee o 187 Destination onthe map................. 193
Infotainment: ss savsse 6 aacsun a 0 asso a nuns 182 Details... 6.0... ccc eee eee 193
Infotainment services...............-. 183 Determining correct load limit........... 259
Online roadside assistance............. 188 Digital compass.............0
eee ee eee ee 67
Vehicle control services.............005 184 DIMENSIONS! 3 & sncwne « sanizene » a sussnne » w sesoane w 299
Connected devices Dimming the exterior mirrors............. 64
Device overvieW............
0.0. e eee 223 Dimming the rearview mirror............. 64
Connections Difect@
lye: s : eaves = » seeps & 2 seeps x ees cE 176
refer to Media..............0000- 210, 212 Businessicardiescia so acevo & oceans 6 sranans «4 ie 177
Consumer information.................5 294 Settings............. 0.02.22 c eee 179
Consumption Display
Reducing...........eee eee eee eee ee 110 ClEQNiNG’s s = aan sy same xo ewe Fy ewe £ 270
Consumption (fuel) .................000. 17 Displaying tooltips.................000. 20
Contacts Disposal.........
0... c eee eee eee 294
TMPOrtitiGwas : « wees 5 » wee sy Sees Foe 179 Distance .... 0.6... eee eee 17
Updating inthe MMI...............068 79
Distance warning cxsces « « saves « + concen o + soar 149
also refer to Directory................. 176
Doors
Convenience key...........-00 eee eee 34
Child safety lock. .... 0.0... cee eee eee eee 45
Convenience closing................00 46
DOOF COMPACTSWITCH s z ayeay s a says 9 4 amar og 62
also refer to Vehicle key..............-. 38
Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 37
Convenience opening and closing
Driver information system................ 13
Windows or panoramic glass roof........ 46
Drives
8W7012721BB
Coolant temperature display.............. 14

refer to Media.............000005 210, 212
303
Index
Drive select EMErGy’CONSUMENS Hs 6 ceive e sieves ww neeewe wo x

refer to Audi drive select.............0. 118 Energy management... 006.
eeee ee eens
Drive system... ... 00.20. cee eee eee eee 110 Engine
Audi driveselect . cc.0i ices d ceca cain 118 Breakingin..............
cece eee eee
Drive system (message) ........00.
eee eee 112
Driving down hills............0.
00.0 eee 116 Emergency StOpies : « sews ss weea s eae gs
DrivING PFOGKAME. « « eserce «© sone 6 0 sons aw ane 146 JUMPISTAREIING » « canseis ws wssins 6 # oeenss a a une
Driving through water.................. 116 Start/Stop system...........--0000005
Starting/Stopping ws ss caw se ewes yams
DrIVING ELIMI 5 & cescinne 6 5 cose vo een & enawens a 17
Engine compartment
Driving tips
Driving through water...............0- 116 Opening and closing the hood..........
Overview ......-
2. eee cee eee eee
Efficient driving................00000- 110
Uphilland downhill................... 116
Safety precautions............-0.ee0ee
Engine data
DFIVING:-trACK es: « 2 sews & 2 seme xc owe oe 116
refer to Sport displays..................
Driving Up:hills. < 2 sees + » yews 5» ewes c 2 eee 116
Engine oil
Dust filter
AGING «scence ox cesses > 5 eons owes av ara
refer to Pollutant filter................. 98
Changing.......... eee eee eee eee
DY MAMIE StEEKING = wwe = 2 qewe a 2 anes = noR 119
Checking oillevel.............---000--
CONSUMPTION ess « & sivees 2 o onerees & o ewer @ 8 ov
E Indicator light..............02..0000-
E-itidilss < same « 2 sau: ¢ 5 sepa 2 s neem 2 5 pee 180 Replacement interval.................
SOCHINGSiccsain » sew © © wravens a & soomem w V soveTS 6 180 Temperature display.................-.
EDL Engine sound
refer to Electronic Differential Lock...... 121 Audi drive select............ 0.00000
EDR Engine Start/Stop mode
refer to Event Data Recorder (EDR)...... 290 refer to Start/Stop system.............
Efficiency assist.............0 02. eee ee 137 Engine startsSySte ny wcusooe » scaseas o « seas oo one
PREGietiVe CONTTOlacs ¢ = wax + xeme 2 2 pene 142 Engine stop
Electrical system. ...........0.0020000. 239 refer to Start/Stop system.............
Electromechanical parking brake......... 114 Entry/exit lighting. ............0
0...
Electronic Differential Lock.............. 121 Entry ASSISTANGE!S. 4 « scusnze » » sxnzece » o asnseue ow anes
Electronic immobilizer................00. 39 also refer to Exit assistance.............
GlSO refer to Seats ¢ seen % 3 aes sv awn % Ears
Electronic Stabilization Control........... 121,
Environment
Embedded SIM Card « seswiie ss sien os wiven oo 8 183
Unleaded gasoline..................0.
Emergency assistance ............00000e 274
ESG
Emergency braking function............. 115
refer to Electronic Stabilization Control...
Emergency call.........cceeeeveee 178, 187
ESCSpOlbnnsos 5 2 omners x x emmes oo nveoeee ao manne ©
Emergency flashers...............000005 61
eSIM
Emergency mode............020
eee eee 109
refer to Embedded SIM card............
Emergency operation
Event Data Recorder (EDR)..............
DOOGIS s seas 3 ¢ Sone 2b ROMA ca aK o ANeRE se 37
Exitassistamee « scccene a 0 sxesese = v vreuain 3 o anes © 5
Fuel tillerdoor ic = swiss a 2 saves wo wien «2 axe 229
EXHE WAP Gicnes 2 a caees vw cscs «Heaven «© enone
Luggage compartment lid............... 44
Panoramic glass roof...............2-0. 47 Exterionantenna s wise <2 wees 2 6 mec ss oes
Emissions control system..............- 229 Exterior lighting + « ¢ see: +» sees y sae ees
304
Index
Exterior MinrorSeecs «= cess oe cure +o coarene © o ove 63 Fueling

Folding settings...........
0. cece eee ee 35 Fuel filler door..... 0.0...
cece eee eee ee 227
External voice operation................. 28 Fuel filler door emergency release....... 229
Functions on demand.................. 184
F Functions that require a license.......... 184
also refer to Functions on demand....... 184
Factory default settings
Fuses
Multi Media Interface...............4. 222
ASSIQMIMIOMGE & asvies & weenie © ¥ sursers WF senses v 286
Fast route............ 0.00.00. . 0022 191
Replacing......... 0c cece cece eee 285
Favorites... 0... 0... eee eee eee ee 22
BIWetOOth ¢ « sses so eees co eG Hee ee Be 224
Navigation’s. © « cscs. 6 2 sma o 0 omens o 0 woman 192 G
Telephone ........... 0. e eee eee eee 176 Garage door opener............-.000
eee 48
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) . 297 Garment hooks ...... 2... 0c eee eee 92
File formats (media drives) .............. 216 GasOlime visio: x ceawnwe vo ancane ow ceewe mw aw Oo 226
Filling Additives... 0.0.0... cece cece 227
Tank capacities... 0.2.0...
eee eee eee 300 GaSOline MIXING veux ss meme 2» see so ee 226
For the sake of the environment GAWR
Disposing of engine oil................ 235 refer to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . 300
FUGLING(s = aes s « seme & ¢ seus = 7 ERS & oe 227 GOATS: x = ues © gate « ¢ aes « Rates F RaNEE & 105
LO AKS base ox estzane ew esecire o somneun ss & wrenene we ¥ rane 231 Glossary of tire and loading terminology... 247
Forward gear Glove compartment.............-.000005 92
refer to Gears... ... eee
eee eee 105 Valet parking’: s ¢ aes + eons ss wows es eeu 47
Free text search G meter
Media... ..... 0. eee
eee eee 215 refer to Sport displays.................. 16
RadiO:ss ss ssc « = nes 5 2 ceree Sees ee 204 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)........ 300
also refer to Intelligent search.......... 191, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)...... 300
Freeze protection GVWR
Coolant... ...... cee eee eee eee 236 refer to Gross Vehicle Weight
Windshield washer system............. 242 Rating (GVWR)... 1... . cee eee eee ee 300
Frequency band...............--0000-- 202
also refer to Frequency band........... 202
Fronit‘centerarmrest © esis s caes ae eee sve 72
H
Handsfree..................000000
00 172
Front passenger’s seat adjustment
ROAM cesses 6 & sonra 5 & anion & & seRON ow SMO we Be 71 HamdsiPree:Profiles. so sacs + 0 weowee 0 0 ctunene «2 172
Front wiper blades Head-up display
Changing.............see eee eee eee 66 Adjusting ..... 6.6.06. eee ee 26
Cleaning... .. cece eects 66 Adjusting the brightness................ 63
Operating’: « s ses « sews + cine oo corer o ¥ ave 26
Fuel... cece eee eee 226
AddItIVGS « ces z = seus ¢ s een 2 eee se os 227 Headlight range control.................. 58
CUPFENt: CONSUMPTION « esses6 cee we eee oe 17 Headlights’, » segs x + sees se pees se ees ee 58
Fueldisplay....... 0.0... cece eee eee ee 12 Cleanings « x visas x 6 aomene eo aevuee wo anarene w oe 268
Gasoline : wess + y ees ss ca6s to ews Fe ees 226 Headlight range control................ 58
Reducing fuel consumption............ 110 Washersystem:: « « gems « x nama x paemes 2 per 65
Tank capacity. ........... 0. cee eee eee 300 Washer system (filling washer fluid) ..... 242
8W7012721BB
Head restraints « icin s cian s wae a 2 cexsen wv 74

Heated rear Window ¢ sacs iw a eames
eee 101
305
Index
Heated steering wheel................-. 102 Intelligent search

Oat bases. 4s sxesaas @ 2 ieee 5 ees so ese oe a 98 Navigation ........
0... e eee e eee eee 191
HFP Interior lighting...............-.000- 62, 63
refer to Hands Free Profile............. 171 InterioriMonitorings. . + ween « 6 women << ence a © 37
High beams Intermittent mode (windshield wipers) ..... 65
High beam assistant................... 59 International travel..................-. 186
Highway lights...... 2.6.0...
e eee ee 58 Internet
Hill descemticomtrol. « secve + « canise «a mmo © & 116 refer toconnect..............0e
eee eee 182
Hill Holdsassist « cco es sense w eranene ve mee 2 105 Internet radio
Home refer to Online radio.............. 206, 207
refer to Home address.............04. 196 iPhone
Hommesaddnessi, = sieves + nmawos «+ wines x 2 eens 196 refer to Audi music interface........... 211
HomeLink
refer to Garage door opener.............
Home screen... ... ee eee eee ee eee
48
19
J
Jump starting .......
6c eee e eee eee eee 280
FHORM « « sonst 6 o arate © oi come © a ane © senor 6
Hotspot
refer to Wi-Fi...........0
0.0 c eee eee 185
K
Key... eee 34, 38
Convenience opening and closing......... 46
I Key:replacementiic. + vcs ee eeu es mee ee 38
Idle Mechanical key... .. 0... cece eee eee eee 38
refer to Gears..... 2... eee eee eee 105 PANIG Button » ses < = ses ¢ = seen ¢ = sees ge 39
Ignition Replacing the battery.................. 40
Switching Onvand Off : s owes + + news «cares 103 Unlocking and locking............-...-- 39
Imbalance (wheels) ..........-...2--055 253 VEHICLE COdG « secs s ¢ sews = 2 ees ye ee 5 38
Immobilizer Key user... ee eee 32
refer to Electronic immobilizer........... 38 Kick-down.. 0.2... cee eee eee eee 107
Indicator lights = sews = « segs o 7 wows « ReURS a ae 7
Inspection intervals : woes s x wows sp eee oo 242 L
Instrument cluster.............0--.00005 12
Lane assist
Adjusting the layout.................0. 13
refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 150
Cleaning........ 0... eee eee eee 270
Lane departure warning
Engine code... ... ec cece eee eee eee 224
refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 150
Failt@’ss s secs s een 2 s waren & ¥ wees 5 Few 12
Lap tMer's = = sans ¢ = sews x © Hawes ¢ o awe ee 133
Onzboardcomputen acesese ao vances 0 emesis #0 vrs LL?
Operating............... 0.020. e eee 13
Evaluating’: « 2 cccvaic < ences o sevens eo ences © ¥ 134
Service interval display................ 242 Starting........... 6.0. c cece eee eee 133
Software information..............005 224 Laser lighting....................00
008s 60
Switching tabs..........0..0......200. 13 LATCH (securing child safety seats)......... 87
Switching the view..........00.e eee e ee 13 Launch: Controle 2 2 ccesee v seseron 2 vsciens 3 = a0 107
Vehicle functions « eaien x 2 sees oo enesene xo orev 16 Leather care and cleaning............... 271
Version information................-. 224 Legal information
Instruments License subscriptions...............0. 224
Adjusting illumination.................. 63 Software information...............0- 224
Integrated Toll Module................. 135 Software licenses...........--000 ee eee 224
Version information................5. 224
306
License plate bracket................... 296 Operating ’s « = swe v wemeness v cues as wen a oo 194
Lifting points (vehicle jack).............. 278 Setting the destination................ 193
Light/rain sensor MAP
Automatic headlights .................. 58 refer to Message Access Profile......... 179
Intermittent mode (windshield wipers).... 65 Map preview.......
0. ce eee eee eee eee 193
Lighting Map update...........
0.0 eee eee eee 198
EXteriOn : wes x = sewn @ s emu s 2 tows v Fees 58 MYAUGL app = sos « x acer: sp ees ee eS ee 198
EMtOTOleece: 2 2 emems so ene ov een oo wR oF 62 ONUING & sess & & sore oo seamen a 8 ene oo OO 198
BIQGHES swsos wv cisswse xe ameses 3 a avewon: wo oan DO om 58 USB connection...........5-. see cena 199
Listening to music Massage function
Vefertoi Medias « « wssen + 6 seen a x sess 210,:212 Front... 2... ccc eects 71
LOAD sevecss ov soso © eames @ 2 mere 2 a me 2 Bam 300 Mechanical key............00
0: eee ee eee 38
Local Users: « s sea ss meen ss news wae 6 ows 31 Media... . 2... 2. cece eee
eee 210, 212
Locking and unlocking Supported formats............-.00005 216
By remote:controls. sescce es cress a 6 asec owes 39 Media center... 0... 0... eee eee eee eee 213
Using the lock cylinder................. 37 Memory function..........-....--00
eee 78
With the convenience key..............- 39 Menu language
Low beam headlights.................--. 58 refer to Setting the language........... 221
LTE Menu paths......... 2.0.00. cee eee eee ee 19
refer to Exterior antenna.............. 174 Message Access Profile..........--..005 179
Luggage compartments . ves. ss een ee eeu 92 MessageS.... 22.0...
eee eee eee 179
COVED: & & suesca ao mavens oo cmamne so annie wo eee 94 Minor COmpasss. « cos » « sume % @ omnes wa neo 6 67
Increasing the size................. 94,95 Mirrors
PasS-through < = sees 7 = sea% i evens: eee si 95 Adjusting exterior mirrors..............- 63
POWEPSOURGES aia 6 8 aswiios so anerans oo eatiw « oe 91 DINIMING ¢ 2 xem. = » eee su ees s eee Ss oe 64
Tie-downs .... 0... 2. cee 96 Vanty:mirrors esas so cece 6 ee 2 cries oo 65
Valet ParkitiG: + exes < 3 ame ts eee trae ee 47
MMI Navigation plus
also refer to Luggage compartment...... 92
refer to Multi Media Interface........... 20
Luggage compartment lid
MMI radio
Closing BUttONs. « 5: soos «2 seems aw atwnene «0 uno 42
Generalinformation.................-- 4l
MMI Radio plus
Mechanically unlocking...............-. 44
Opening and closing................04. 42
Mobile device
Opening and closing with foot motion..... 43
refer to Telephone ...........eseeeeee: 171
Power opening andclosing.............. 42
Mobile device reminder signal............ 175
Luggage compartment net..............- 96
Mountain passes: « ces se ese se eee seas 116
Lumbar support........
0... eee eee eee ee 70
Mountain roads...............-00-0005 116
Multifunction steering wheel
M BULtONS's ¢ eqns & o sees & = see & = SY Gs 13; 30
Maintenance..........--
2. eee eee ee eee 294 OPerating’s « = sense v scasenar ¥ snamene @ ¥ sueceas wo HE 13
Maintenance intervals..............0005 242 Programming buttons................-. 30
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)........ 229 Voice recognition system............... 27
Manualishifting’. « svessis ce eniosie 3 a aeavive 6 © arene 107 Multi Media Interface................... 20
Menus:and symbols « sess ss cses senses
ses 21
8W7012721BB
Map
Changing the scale................... 193 Operatiingé. « a ssc « mensaee « samen @ 6 sets « 18, 21
Display « ees ss oss ¢ Fae ss pews ss Feaes 195 Switching on or off.............--00008 20
307
MUTI Gis 5 x secvess © v comers ov cumaees @ a sanawes ow 8 omens 30 Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 43
MYAUGL 5 & swceis & o seesein 2 8 mime @ remenew © wee 31, 183 Panoramic glass roof.............00e ee 47
myAudi navigation................. 190, 193 POWEP tOPivess + manu 5 & mei x ¢ BOE & E emE 6 Ee 51
MYAUGI USERS « seus < & eee & = Hees ee Hew eee 31 Sunshade (nO) wor « « scsces ww wom x 8 swswace wa 47
Windows ...... 0.0.0 cece cece ee eee eee 45
Opening and closing
N refer to Unlocking and locking........ 34, 39
Natural leather care and cleaning......... 271 Operating
Navigation.....................0.000. 190 Head-up display..............-002eeeee 26
Betterroute cic: s nies se eeew s wae ss wen 199 ANStruMeNt CLUSTER « ssevers ¢ wcuscsin
aresnce a ¥ ae 13
Calling... 2... ee eee eee eee 193 Multifunction steering wheel............ 13
Changing the scale................... 193 Multi Media Interface « oy... ee se oe 18; 21
also referto Map : seas: ceea ss tees ee es 194 TOXIN PU Bis & 2 sscnaon & snawene ae veces ao peewee oo 24
Navigation database Touch display.........
0.0.0 eee eee eee 18
Version information................6.4 224 Voice recognition system............... 27
Navigation (instrument cluster) .......... 196 Optional equipment number............. 299
Neck heating =< =. gecs seve
s seve s bene 101 Options
NHTSA « seme: « 9 szae 2 2 see © 2 see 2 2 ee 296 Médidiwis = « ees se cow g s wawe & o Heme os eer 216
Notification center.............0ceeeeuee 23 RadiO wiswscs i 0 isivane wo aueuens a a woenire a 8 asmnoed oo 207
Overview (COCKpIt) ws: ss save ¥ 0 onesie oo wane ava 6
Oo
Octane rating (gasoline)................ 226
P
Odometer... ... ee cee eee eee eee ee 15 Paint COdGis < o wens so ners oe eee oe Hoe a 299
RESCUUING bac: « ewes & 2 EmeG Fy ReGE s x eeeH 8 15 Paint damage swe « = sews +s eee te eee ee ee 269
Office address PANIG@ BUttOMias s ¢ sure ae em zo ete eae 38, 39
refer to Business address.............. 196 PANIC function .............0.
0c eee eee 38
OFFADUttON)| + sy 5 < ame + 7 aauee & o wee 2 ge 99 Panoramic glass roof................200. 47
Oil Convenience opening and closing......... 46
refer tO EMgine Gib. 2. cwee 2 vse
s wean es 233: Emergency closing wr: «scien cman ae cere 47
On-board computer...........0...0000ee 17 Interior airflow................000 eee 47
On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)... 229, 290 QuICK OPENING wwe ss wows s i sews + bees oe: 47
Online map Park@SsiSt wan sx sane 5 ¢ HOINR s 3 eres oD eR 168
refer to Satellite map................. 197 Parking ..... 60. c cece eee eee ee 104
QALIMNG AIO « wrasse & & wees 5 & eeens « B Howe y oe 206 Parking aid... 1... eee eee 159
also refer to Online radio.......... 206, 207 Adjusting the volume..............0.. 160
Online roadside assistance.............. 188 Automatic activation.................. 159.
Online services Cleaning the sensors/camera........... 269
refertoconnect.......-....-.ee
ee eee 182 Park ASSiSt’: = x came: 5 2 wean 5 x eH ss eee GE 168
Parkingraid Plus: = « sss x 6 were 26 wens 3 0 159
Online system update.................. 222
Parking space search.................. 166
Online traffic information............... 199
Peripheral cameras...............004- 161
Openings « = wen ss asssna se eam ae een 2 wee 34
Rearview came sviies so osea es eee ee een 161
Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 42
Parking and maneuvering..............- 159
Convenience opening............-.0e00- 46
Parking brake
Fueltillerdoor's 2 = swiss a 2 sanew wo ance <2 ae 227
refer to Electromechanical parking brake. 114
FOO « «scones» m vssnce i oi sean ow somes «0: omexeite 231
Luggage compartment lid............... 42 Parking lightsiess 2 + aces sa aera se nee se eee 58
308
Index
Parking lock
Manually releasing.............000005 108
Q
quattro... 2... eee eee 120
also refer to Gears... 00...
cece cece e eee 105
Selective wheel torque control.......... 121
PaSs*throuGl scx = = casas ¢ s eatem 3 ¢ Hae ¢ coe 95
Pedals... 0... cc eee e cece eee eee eens 107
Perchlorate. ... 0.2.0...
eee eee eee ee eee 294 R
Performance/torque display Radio’: < » seme s sams : Rome « ¢ ome & seme ee 202
refer to Sport displays.................. 16 RagiOteXtecsas «sina x wana 6 2 imeem «2 emwew 205
Peripheral cameras............---00000s 161 Station list........ 0... 202
Phone Radio communications equipment........ 296
Connecting a second mobile device...... 172 Radioequipment wai. <2 cee ee cee eee es 296
Disconnecting a mobile device.......... 173 Radio Standards Specification (RSS)....... 297
Settings...........
00.02 eee eee eee 178 Rain/light sensor
Phonebook Automatic headlights .................- 58
refer to Directory....... 0.0.00 cece eae 176 Intermittent mode (windshield wipers).... 65
PIN Random
4-digit myAudi PIN..............-..0005 31 réfer to Shutfle:: < s sess = 2 mee %s seen ee xe 214
Protection esc os was < v owiie + ¥ wou 2 ¥ ecoxmn 32 Range (fuel level) ................000000- 17
Playbacki(media) si cscs 2s sos so secu s 2 acs 212 Reading lights..............
0.0.00 eae 62
Podcast Rear cross-traffic assist.............00.. 165
refer to Online radio.............. 206, 207 Rear lid
Polishing ices o csenwes xo onesies vv vein ¥ w anewwn oe 269 refer to Luggage compartment lid........ 42
Pollen filter Rear seatS......... cee eee 94,95
refer to Pollutant filter.............0005 98 Rear shelf
Pollutamtfilter’. cxscsns + somes 2 0 onesies + 6 ncooee © 98 refer to Storage area behind the rear head
Power SOUPCES's + wx a 8 inne oo creme @ 8 91,211 RESEPAINES sisi > rome os weve a 6 ase 6 ZNO & 92
POWEPtOP sien oo cen 3 2 enna oo ee vo ee 51 Rearview camerals «wea ss evens ¢ wom a yo 161
Cleaning. .... 2... cece eee eee eee 269 Rear window defogger............--+0. 101
POWePWINGOWS « scsvine i o ssvirs & arene & wanes ee a 45 Recirculation mode..............+..05- 100
Malfunction Recuperation..........
000 cece eee eee ee 17
Power windows malfunction.............. 45 Refrigerant oil... 2.2.2.2...
eee eee 300
Predictivercomtrols.. wise ss aves 0 aceon 0 0 some 142 Refueling. ........
0... cee eee eee eee 227
Predictive messageS..........00eeeeeeee 138 Remote access authorization (key user)..... 32
pre sense Remote control
refer to Audi presense................ 152 Garage door opener...........-0e
ee eee 48
Presentation modes. . « some « «smc = awamene = 201 Remote control key..............-.00005 38
Presets Convenience opening and closing......... 46
Radio... eee eee eee ee 205 Key replacement..............--0000-- 38
Presets list 1 40
Feferto Presets’. « «ccc. i aes de nas ses 205 PANIC function..............00 00 ee eee 38
Pressure Replacing the battery.................. 40
Tire pressure monitoring system.... 262, 263 Unlocking and locking................-- 39
AROS = vonsnas we wince 2 3 Hones 8 x cements oH ee 254 also refer to Vehicle key............00.. 38
Profile:picture « seca < s samo 2 wane 6% oem @ a oes 31 Removing the caps (wheel bolts)......... 277
8W7012721BB
Protecting’: =o cos vo ee oo een oo een oo 269 Repairs. ... 0.0.0.0...

eee 294
Pyrotechnic elements............--..-- 294 Replacement key.........-..0--00000005 38
Index
Replacement parts.............-.020005 296 Resetting the position.................. 71

Replacing bulbsescs. «6 voi 2 6 sree #0 were 2 289 Storing a seat profile...............000. 78
Reporting Safety Defects................ 296 Seat ventilation.................8. 100, 101
Reverse gear Securing the vehicle................000. 104
TEPEFLO.GOANS & secs ¥ waveere ¥ wave eo eee 105 Selecting a source (media).............. 212
RIMS! « aces oo smn oo corse oo Ree De BS 259 Selector lever + « wows oo awesome 2 cvtue oo sees 105
Cleaning....... 00... cece cece 269 Selector lever position
Rolling. ..... 0... cee eee ee eee eee 104 MOPEPEONGCANS :. iacans wo « enerame we % suena @ Heer 105
Rolling ability Sensors
Electromechanical parking brake........ 114 Coverage areaS.. 1. eee
eee eee 127
Transmission idlés « < seo x y ose 2 eee « 2 106 LOGatiONS aes = y seme + a serge « eee ce eS 128
Roof Service interval display................. 242
refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 47 SET REAR (button).............00000005 100
Roof load « « seas seee x ¢ peen sc Pee ex eS 300 Setting measurement units.............. 221
ROOPECK ose : sae « £ sexe es Heme ss meu eee 96 Settings... 20... cee eee eee eee eee 221
alsorreferito Roof taCkivrses «sce
a wow «oe 96 Announcements and tones............. 221
Route guidance BlUGtOOEN's ¢ sasns + & were = & sees © v cores & 222
SEOPPLING erie «© sures © & senmns © o sammeee wo cane 194 Dateramd timer: « x secmece = x carne © = sms = 5 221
also refer to Navigation............... 190 Language............ cece eee eee 221
Running direction (tires)................ 279, Measurement units................06- 221
Media... ... cee eee eee eee 216
S Navigation..............0..0.00 ee eee
RaGiO son x ¢ woe & o cme 2H Hee YB Ee
200
208
Safety belt microphone................. 181 SOUNG aiicssa x a isvars «+ cvenane 2 0 ncanews a 8 seauow oa 221
Safety belts... 0... 2... eeeeee 75 SysteM . 1... eee eee ee 221
Belt positioner... 0... 0... eee eee 77 TIMEZONE wis 2 = news a o eoeeR & & SOU GE PETE 221
Cleaning’: « ¢ saws ¢ ¢ sews oy cee ee ees eee 270 WisFihotspot. cscs 2 sec x 2 eens e 2 wns « 185
Locking... 0.6... cee eee eee eee eee 88 Setting the language................... 221
Securing child safety seats.............. 87 Setting the times: « + aes neen ee rea ee 221
Satellite map... ... eeeeee 197
Shift light indicator’: « escx « s wees se sors «ee 16
Saving fuel
Shit Pad dleSiacu « = misuse & = menue 2 § Hepes 2 Ese 107
Energy consumers..............-.--05- i?
5S) To)» 184
Recuperation « « eee ss ceww + ween & + wows ¢ 9 17
Shuffle... 0... eee ee 214
Screen
Side assist... 0... eee eee
eee 156
refer to Touch display..........00ees
eee 18
Cleaning the sensors...............0-. 269
SCrewahiver’s x + sxswive wo inane & o sama ow omncam a 274
SIM Card... 6... eee ee eee eee 183
Search function
Sliding/tilting sunroof
refer to Free text search............... 215
refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 47
Seat: heating secs so cane eo esawere 2 eases 100, 101
Smart Favorites
Seats
referto Presets sais so sews v een av were as 205
Adjusting. .......... 0. cee eee eee eee 70
Smartphone
ClGANING:: ¢ « saas ss Hess 2 o ReeS eo eRe eA: 270
refer to Telephone ..........ceeeeenees 171
Easy entry function................200. 72
Folding the rearseats............... 94,95
SNOW CHAINS is: os weeiies os eee 6 wow a 6 awa 260
Head restraints....................05. 73 Socket
Memory FUNCHON ¢ wie & 2 mas a ¢ ween » 2 ese 78 refer to Power sourceS..........--.00--- 91
310
Software information SUSPENSION « sous sw eaves ¥ seam @ Se oS EET LL
Legalinformation.................005 224 Audi drive select. ...........00000
eee 119
Software version (MMI) Swapping calls.............-.00
0-2 -a ee 177
Version information.................. 224 SWERVElASSISE 5 sccce «x menor oo mimes ow anes os 154
Sound Symbols
refer to Adjusting the sound............ 221 Navigation ........... 0.0 cece ee ee eens 194
Space-saving spare tire (compact spare tire) . 280 TrattiCewss < «mops s seen & = Baume ox ce et Ne 199
Spare tits: : caus 4 5 eeu io OSS FB eS oa 280 also refer to Indicator lights.............. 7
Speed limit information SYNG (BUERON) is so comin: oo cine oo cto oo seen 100
refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 130 SYStEINISELEINGS « wees ¢ x een s names ¢ Hew § 22:1,
Speed limits
T
refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 130
Speedometer « secs s voce ss wees ss ewes s ee 12
TACHGH@ter cia « x sscue 2 wepeew s woe x ¥ He 12,14
Speed warning system..........-..2-05. 130
Tail lights
Sport differentiales: ¢ sees ss wees se ees = 121
GlOANING’s =o same 2 o owe oe eee 2s ee Yo 268
Sport displays.............-.
0c eee eee eee 16
Technical-data:: « « seoe : same 2 nae a 2 cee 299
Sporty driving..........-..
ee eee eee eee 116
Technical modifications................. 294
Start/Stop system. ...........0--00 eee 111
Telephone: ¢ « scaa cs ieee ts dees te eae ea: 171
Switching: Off and Of : wows sz wees xo owes ¢ 111
Accepting/ending acall................ 177
Starting to drive..........
2... eee ee eee 104 Audi phone box............0. 0.0 eee ee 173
Starting (engine)...................... 111 Charging the battery (USB)............. 174
Steering............ 0.02 eee eee eee eee 119 Charging the battery (wireless) ......... 174
Audi drivé Sel@ct occ: s & nes 5 ¢ news so cas 119 Connecting a mobile phone............ 171
also refer to Steering...............-. 119 Dialing anumber.................200- 177
Steering locks « « sees ss eeee + yeast
eens 103 Exterior antenna): . «ses s+ sees sv oes s 174
Steering wheel Mobile device reminder signal.......... 175
AdjUStINGera 2 2 wae 2 5 stereo enews vv ener 73 Options during aphonecall............ 177
Adjusting manually.............0ee eee 73 Playing CHUSIC sues 2 ¢ veure = ¢ omeee x e eee 210
Shift:paddleés secs ¢ s eee ¢ x ween = y eee es 107 Temperature displays
Steering wheel heating « sis is oases 6 a sone 102 refer to Sport displays...............66. 16
also refer to Multifunction steering wheel. . 13 Temperature display (outside temperature)... 15
Steps for determining correct load limit... 259 Temperature gauge
Stopover (navigation) «wesc os cen 6 x cer » 194 COOLANE sscsus x + cmuncs a ancenes vw oomione i m asoeome wo 12
Stopping’ + & sees vs ovens ¥ o sees oo ores = we 104 TORII PUL, scones 3 & sowwans & & sommes & @ seameN TH saTRER 24
Stopping thevehicle:s; <5 ses s ences
s een 104 TOXUMESSAGES wen o « woes os nome oe eerEe a ee L739
Stopping (Engine): < «esas ss sews + ¢ Hess 11,1. SOEUINGS: secu <a meses @ wae © eenens mo Wenem 3 179
StOrage:s + ¢ eas ¢ oes & eee be ees Fe es 92 also refer to Text messages............ 179
Storage area behind the rear head restraints. 92 Tie-downs ... 2... 0. eee eee 96
Storage areaS..... 2... eee 92 Tightening specification
Stored stations Wheel DOltSiss « 5 sas 2s nea «2 eee 3 ae 280
FEE EO PIOSCtS:s « s sews ss ween x eee aos 205 Tightening specification (wheel bolts) ..... 280
Straps... eee eeeeee 92 TIMG eet eee 17
Sunshade tiptronic
8W7012721BB
ROOT: scves « ¢ yeews 5 o qa § camer gy GE eee 47 refer to Manual shifting............... 107

also refer to Sunshade............-.... 47 Tire Mobility System (tire repair set)....... 274
SUIT'VISOMS coves. 2 5 cova os eesan 2 3 wenn 2 3 eee 65
311
TAPES scvere wo suewes ao caeues © w aneeees ww crmvaue ww one 244 Unlocking and locking.................-- 34
Changing. .......... cece eee eee eee ee 277 By remote control. ... 2... eee eee eee 39
Low-profile‘tires « ssa< 2 wasws 2 xewn sy ran 261 Using the lock cylinder................. 37
Repaitisets + wexcs: ss maven & x ance v6 anes oY 274 With Audi connect vehicle control........ 40
Service life... 2.2.2... 0.0... e eee eee 253 With the central locking switch.......... 36
Tite PressStfese< : ese © : nowy & 2 seuee bp xe 254 With the convenience key..............- 39
Tire pressure monitoring system.... 262, 263 Update (software)...................-. 222
Tire pressure table.................0.. 256 USB
Tire pressure (trailer mode)............ 124 ACAptGr as + xavsu sx semis s = que so See a 174
Treadwear indicators.................. 253 USB charging POtt: = = scm : seams s naam ct xe 91
Unidirectional...............0.0. 246, 279
USB drive
Uniform tire quality grading............ 261
Supported types/formats.............. 216
Tires and wheels USB stick
Glossary of tire and loading terminology .. 247
refer to Audi music interface........... 211
Tires and vehicle load limits............ 257
Users
Toll Module Localusers...... ee eee eee eee eee 31
refer to Integrated Toll Module......... 135
MyAudi USErS... 6... ee eee eee eens 31
TO OMSiasore = ceases o = ssctses a amen so casio so oe 274
Using residual heat.................00. 101
Top tether anchor (securing the child safety
S@at) 0. eee 89
Touch display
V
Adjusting the brightness.............005 20 Valet parking...................
cece eee 47
Operating’. « ssi w x aareve wv sawses 6 o aroma so aes 18 Vanity Mirror... 2.2... eee eee eee eee 65
TOWINGies ¢ 2 weg s eeeys ¢ peeeu ¢ 2 eeree s x Be 282 Vehicle
TOWING'LOOD = seas ¢ seems 2 y eee e 2 ween ge ee 283 Care/cleaning...............25
eee ee 267
Towing protection monitoring............. 37 DIMENSIONS « cows ss eee s ees § nae a a 299
Identification data................00. 299
TPMS
Out of service... 6... eee eee eee 273
Indicator light . cess is ewes s esse eens 266
Raising’: + < sees + ¢ snes + + eae ss ees + oe 278
Tire pressure monitoring system.... 262, 263
SEAN Geiss 6 v svvine 6 o saieinn wo ounces © a mUTEDS 0 103
Traffic incidents
Unlocking and locking............-...-- 39
refer to Online traffic information....... 199
Vehicle care... 2. eee eeeeee 267
Trafficdn formation . vss os sso 0 series ave 200
Vehicle control services..............--- 184
Online traffic information.............. 199
Vehicle data label.................0000- 299
Traffic jam assist... 2.0.0.2...
0... e eee 147
Vehicle identification number............ 299
Traffic light information................ 132
Traffic sign recognition................- 130
Vehicle jacki: « ¢ sews 5 = sae 5 2 ewes 5 2 ows 3 274
Lifting points..................00000. 278
TrATRSIQMS wiccsre xo csesoss oo cumnsie oo ccetorn 6 & ana 133
Weliicle- key: « 2 snes = 2 ameee 2 aeseme » eevee 34, 38
Trailer tOWinG? cess wsrewa s waren 3 6 esarem 6 + vanw 124
Tongue weight...............002-000. 124 Vehicle starting system................. 112
Trailehlodd s + saa ¢ 2 wees : hea eRe aR 124 Vehicle tool kit. s ¢ sacs se eaen yc iwew sv eee 274
Turn assist... . 02... cece eeeee eee 155 Ventilationtss + ¢ weve « a wees ¢ s eee oo eee 7 98
Turn signals ..... 2.0...
e cece e eee 59 VIEW BUCtOM axis ¢ s wan.e = sted 2 See Ge Ree 13
Voicemail. ... 2... eee
eee eee 177
Voice recognition system..............0-5 27
U External scx « x soi « ¥ ater & p Rees oe eee 28
Uniform tire quality grading............. 261 Operating’: « = ssn <6 wwwn oo sows +o ome ve 27
312
Ww Winter tite cress so ccwsso vo comune ¥ 0 oxocons + & aoe 260
Wireless Apple CarPlay
Warning lights
refer to Indicator lights................5. 7
Wireless charging...............--.05. 174
Washing matte finish paint.............. 267
Wave band
refer to Frequency band............... 202
Weights 300
Wheel bolts . . 259
Changing atire swsrc ss eews se meee = a ere 277
Wheels accu : scxee ¢ 2 sem « x ues g 2 meee eo 244
GLEAMING » 5. sesssas so awioans a 0 oneuaes we o aumians me nee 269
Glossary of tire and loading terminology .. 247
REPLACING cows v « qa & x qewa so aaa s Hoam 277
Tire pressure monitoring system.... 262, 263
Tires and vehicle load limits............ 257
Wheelwrench....................000. 274
Wi-Fi
Hotspot settings .............-.00000. 185
Using a hotspot «2.5: . eee s sees eens 183
Winid'deflectors +» msex + wan a meme oy mom g 54
Cleaning « « cesses 5 = sso 2 v some wo amvane @ o see 269
Windows
Child safety lock........ 2.0.00 eee eee 45
Cleaning and removing ice............. 270
Convenience opening and closing......... 46
Defrosting........ 2.0.0. e eee eee eee 101
Opening and closing.................-. 45
PoWer WIndOWS:: « = sss: = y sees 5 ¢ Rew & oo 45
Windshield
Cleaning « « seve: a ix cmos a amas vo anew ov 2 wc 65
Defrosting........ 0... eee eee eee eee 101
also refer to Windshield................ 65
Windshield washer system........... 65, 242
Windshield wipers...............-.00-0- 65
Winter operation
Gar WaSHeS saws: 2 x wenn ¢ ¢ aeme x eee gs 267
Gooling'systeM « ace «+ ease oem 6 ome 236
Defrosting the windows..............- 101
Neck heating ............seeeeeeeneee 101
Rear window defogger................ 101
Removing ice from windows............ 270
Seat heating...............-.05. 100, 101
SNOWICNAINS ese ss news ae woes 3 pee os HO 260
Steering wheel heating................ 102
8W7012721BB
Tir€S cee 260

Vehicle battery (12 Volt)............... 240
Windshield washer system............. 242
313
These instructions may not be reproduced or @ Forthe sake of the environment
translated in whole or in part without written
consent of AUDI AG. All rights reserved by AUDI Printed on eco-friendly paper (bleached with-
AG. out chlorine, recyclable).
Owner's Manual
English North America 07.2020
8W7012721BB
8W7012721BB www.audi.com

2021 Audi A5 14

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Audi A5 14

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Audi A5 14

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner's Manual

Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us.

About this Owner's Manual...... Valetiparking = s ssse «x cscs ov crue a ¥ oe 47

Driving information.............. 130 Emergency call................... 187

Setup... 2.2... cee eee

Audi smartphone interface...... 219 Fuses and bulbs.................. 285

Additional settings.............. 221 Customer information........... 290

Care and cleaning................ 267

DO Tt VOUrSEUF ics « sce g + pass ss pews 274

This owner's manual describes the equipment

Some sections in this manual do not apply to all

The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

* — Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equip-

@ Door handle ® Lockable glove compartment with:

@ Vent Knee airbag 79

— Horn he (ESC) 122

Reset trip odometer ............ 15 Cup holder ...............0000.

G@) Tips Drive system

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster

Brake system Engine speed limitation

Electronic Stabilization Control Engine oil level (MIN)

> page 229

Efficiency assist High beam assistant

Efficiency assist Convenience key

Efficiency assist Transmission

Efficiency assist Start/Stop system

Adaptive cruise control Electromechanical parking brake

Adaptive cruise control Electromechanical parking brake

Adaptive cruise control Hold assist

Adaptive cruise control Steering

Adaptive cruise control Speed warning system

Traffic jam assist Speed warning system

Traffic jam assist Camera-based traffic sign recog-

Adaptive cruise control

Instrument cluster overview

Fig. 3 Instrument cluster overview (analog)

Display If there is a severe ECD in the instru-

vehicle safely. See an authorized Audi dealer Selecting a tab

G) Tips Returning to functions at higher levels

First tab Vehicle functions > page 16

Adjusting the display

Fig. 5 Left side of multifunction steering wheel

Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit

> Press the VIEW button to switch between the

the instrument cluster. This will protect the en-

Engine oil temperature

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the engine

> Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:

ature may be higher if there is heavy engine load

On-board computer The Energy consumers view lists other equip-

—Time and date > page 221

Short-term memory and long-term memory

Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term

The current consumption can be shown using a

Applies to: touch display

The center display is a touchscreen. Operation is

Fig. 10 Touch display: pressing and pulling